Home

DL1720/DL1740 Digital Oscilloscope User`s Manual

Contents

1. Action 0 Image Save 0 Send Mail Mail Count Settings for the following items can be input directly using a USB keyboard fa GO NO GO fel Range1 5 000di PN dit Menu Setup ST Rangez 5 000d i aa 27 Press SELECT to select CH1 through CH4 MATH1 or MATH2 or CH1 CH2 and Math1 for the DL1720 Condition prr __ON__ put __1N_ LPF __ON__ puTy __IN_ LPE __ON__ purty N LpFF 0N I put MN Pe __ON__ po NU zone1 zonez zone3 zone4 zone5 zone6 Logic Sequence ACQ Count Action Buzzer 0 Image Save 0 Send Mail Mail Count Save to File c Hard Copy 28 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Mode under Zone1 29 Press SELECT to select On or Off 30 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Condition under Zonet 31 Press SELECT to select In or Out 32 Set Zone2 Zone or Zone2 Zones for the DL1720 as necessary Setting the Logic 33 Move the cursor to Logic with the jog shuttle 34 Press SELECT to select AND or OR Setting the Sequence 35 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Sequence 36 Press SELECT to select Single or Continue 9 57 SISAJEUY WAOJOARM 9 13 GO NO GO Determination Using Zones Explanation 9 58 Setting the ACQ Count 37 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to ACQ Cou
2. sseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 1 21 Horizontal COrSOMr arie E 9 1 9 6 FOnZzontal AXxGS dentea ra A ceeds 1 3 HORIZON TWALSGIOUD crre tt etait oe anes 2 3 How to Calculate the Area of a Waveform essees App 8 Hysteresis ccccceesseeeeeeees 6 10 6 16 6 19 6 22 6 28 6 31 I Image Save Action ccccccecsseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 39 9 54 9 59 IMAGE SAVE KEY than E hath alot teeta ccet 2 4 NAME AU ZATION aee chara eed dere saatn sce aetoltunces ia taper eetdaals 1 31 NAZO S N 4 6 INPUT COUDING enai a T 1 3 5 4 INPUT SSCHON ana a E 16 1 IU TEEN ANS vestes a Gdedvembech aa aS 3 7 IM 701710 01E Installation Conditions seve sossdivadsses wecbe teddies uch test bess eens d 3 3 Installation Position ccccccsseeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeaaanseees 3 4 Instrument NUMDEM neriesi rL E ii mtegration inroad ease a Pesce ches 1 24 9 42 Interleave Mode is fie ceed tie aie eee ered ate eevee xcs 1 14 7 8 Aterpe sendoera enna en a a 8 3 Interpolation Method ssssseeesesnennnnneeeeeeesrennrnrrrereresrene nnn 8 3 Meral setanna A n TA 13 17 Inverted Display sareren enen a A ences 1 24 HVEN seniri E GE 9 39 IFAQOro SS ninan a E 13 5 J Jog and Shuttle Dials ccccccccecceececceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeaes 2 5 JOG SMUE seiseutrat tain arniseuccantelenn tn eiceateetdniaa mnie squunuee 2 3 K Key OSE aa Se vee sent eats chara tea cae eas cater enna caters eoreesneees 15 9 Keyboard and Printer Int
3. Type Select Trace f Pos to Z1 to 22 Marker Mz M3 M CH1 3 100di Type Trace fq Cursori 1 to Z1 C1 to 22 C2 to Zi C2 to 22 4 660d i Degree CH1 6 Cursor2 4 000di 2 000di Pressing the Jump Exec soft key moves the cursor to the jump destination 9 5 SISAJEUY WIOoJ neM o 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using For H Horizontal Cursors When Displaying the X Y Waveform Selecting the waveform to be measured Refer to steps 1 3 to set the Type to Horizontal 4 Press the Trace soft key to select the desired waveform XY2 is not available on the DL1720 so there is no Trace setting CURSOR Trace i Cursori wy 66d iv orizontal KYI xY2 Be aare Moving the Cursor 5 Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Cursor1 6 Turn the jog shuttle to move Cursor1 7 Move Cursor2 in a similar fashion 2000 12 13 18 05 08 i Norma Stopped 30422 1MS S_ 1MsAiv CHI 10 1 50 0 U div DC Full Cursor1 Edge CH1 F Auto i 150 000V 150 000V irae Vertical XYZ 5 Cursorz If the jog shuttle control is set to both Cursor1 and Cursor2 both cursors are moved Cursor2 9 6 IM 701710 01E 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using For V Vertical Cursors When Displaying the X Y Waveform Selecting the Waveform to be Measured Refer to steps 1 3 to set the Type to Horizontal CURSOR OFF orizontal Vertical Marker Poff E __ 4 Pres
4. Changing the File Attributes 3 Pressing the Function soft key displays the file function menu Function Ja a edia Info Format Format 4 Press the Delete soft key Utility_ FILE Delete Copy Renane Make Dir Format Po 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file qe rire Note 11 10 Changing the File Attributes Deleting Files By selecting a screen image data file files with the tif omp or ps extensions in the File List window and pressing SELECT the selected screen image file s compressed image appears in the upper right portion of the file list Stopped 2001 07 03 09 51 47 a 31 E 1 lt lt Mainz 10k gt gt File List Path ZPO Space 74844160 byte File Name Size Date lt SNAP gt 2601 05 28 17 6 lt WAVEFORM gt 2601 05 17 19 3 lt THEF IN 1 gt 2601 05 15 16 46 R W lt OTHERS gt 2661 04 27 10 47 RU 008 TIF 38574 2001 07 03 09 39 RW P 007 TIF 38574 2001 06 22 13 31 R U 004 TIF 38574 2001 06 22 13 31 R U 006 TIF 38574 2001 06 22 13 29 RW P 605 TIF 38574 2001 06 22 13 29 R U 963 TIF 38574 2001 06 22 13 2 R U 962 TIF 38574 2001 06 20 14 44 RW fi ft Edge CH1 001 TIF 38574 2001 06 20 14 44 R U Auto 000 TIF 2601 06 20 14 43 0 000 lf compressed image thumbnail data does not exist for the selected file an error message appears Pressing ESC clears the error message The following procedure clears the compressed
5. 3 000di ie Cycle Setup Result fST Range2 tatistics 3 000di 12 Press the Show Results soft key to display a list of the automatic measurement results Use the arrow keys to scroll the list horizontally and the jog shuttle to scroll vertically Press the Max Min Item1 Max Min Item4 soft keys to move the cursor to the maximum and minimum values From the left of the displayed parameters are Item1 Item2 Item3 and Item4 You can change the order to ascending FWD or descending REV with the Sort soft key 2600716731 11 57 52 10k Normal S Measure Parameter List 19 1 P P C1 Max C1 Min C1 Aug C1 pO Urdiy 00001 2 18756U 1 68333V 1 16417 T 6 76176nY Full 00002 2 18750 1 68333V 1 106417 1 7 06883mM Sdu 0 0000Y 2 Ont MaxMin MaxMin Itemz Iten3 5dy 0 9e00U Utility Cnt 2 MEASURE Sort Max Min Item4 REV H MaxMin Item1 i 9 20 IM 701710 01E 9 3 Statistical Processing Statistical Processing with History Data 1 Press MEASURE 2 Press the Mode soft key to display the automatic measurement mode selection menu MEASURE Mode a a Cycle Mod l T Range1 Item Delay 3 000di Next OFF Setup Setup ON f6T Range2 1 2 3 600di 3 Press the History Statistics soft key to select the statistical processing with history data MEASURE tatistics Cycle History T Rangei tatistics Btatistics 3 000di Next T Rangez 1 2 3 600di 4 Press t
6. Aejdsig pue uonisinboy 7 4 Box Average Mode lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 15 gt Relevant Keys NAP SNOr HELP ear SETUP AY a IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT A TRIGGER 2 SEARCH O TRIG D a o SIMPLE ENHANCED TIME DIV ACTION DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press ACQ 2 Press the Mode soft key to display the acquisition mode menu ACQ ecor ode nter leave Repetitive Time Base R d Mod Inter1 petiti Ti B Length 10k Norma 1 ON ON Ext 3 Press the Box Avg soft key to select it Record Norma 1 Length 10k 7 6 IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 7 4 Box Average Mode Under most conditions the instrument samples the input signal at a true internal sampling rate of 400 MS s 1GS s or 800 MS s during interleave mode extracts values from this sample stream at the effective sample rate required by the T div setting and writes the extracted values into the acquisition memory When you use box average mode however the operation is different Instead of pulling values from the sample stream the instrument computes average values for adjacent groups of true sampling data and writes the resulting averages into acquisition memory The following drawing illustrates the process e e e0e0 36 Input Signal 20 MS s a Interleave Mode 5 is OFF 3
7. See Recall below Switches between insert and overwrite modes Deletes the character before the cursor Toggles uper case and lower case character Moves down the cursor Moves up the cursor e Operation to Temporarily Store Character Strings The strings that are previously confirmed are sequentially sent to the subsequent memories When the number of confirmed strings exceeds eight the strings are deleted in order starting from the oldest string The 9 0 7 symbols are not displayed on the screen 1 memory storing the string When string AA is confirmed first Stores AA When string BB is confirmed next Stores BB Moves and stores AA When string CC is Stores CC Moves and stores BB Moves and stores AA confirmed next When string HH is confirmed next Stores HH Stores JJ Moves and stores GG Moves and Moves and stores FF Moves and Moves and stores AA Moves and Deletes AA When string JJ is stores HH stores GG stores BB confirmed next IM 701710 01E 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings e Recall Note that the string that is displayed in the entry box of the keyboard is overwritten when a string is recalled using the procedure in step 1 below 1 When you press the soft key repeatedly the eight most recently confirmed and stored strings are displayed one at a time from newest to oldest in the keyboard
8. lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 14 gt Relevant Keys FA X Y MENU __MENU PHAS Gerur pise Corr mace save o Csuier No SEARCH O TRIG D oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY TIME DIV Cee The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press ACQ 2 Press the Interleave soft key to select ON or OFF ACY Record Mode Inter leave Repetitive f Time Base p Length 10k Norma 1 ON ON Ext Explanation This mode doubles the amount of memory per channel while cutting the number of channels in half In particular this mode doubles the maximum settings for history memory sequential store and record length and allows you to set the realtime sampling rate to 1 GS s Setting interleave ON however disables CH2 and CH4 or CH2 for the DL1720 For details about restrictions on the sampling rate and record length while interleave is ON see appendix 1 7 8 IM 701710 01E 7 6 Setting Repetitive Sampling Mode ON OFF Relevant Keys lt For a description of this function refer to pages 1 7 and 1 16 gt NAP SNAP HELP OO RESET SELECT MENU __ Mi X Y ENU Corr mince sAvE o SH C wna Y C HORIZONTAL fv Ay EARCH O TRIG D oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Explanation IM 701710 01E 1 Press ACQ
9. 15 8 IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 15 3 Self Diagnostic Test Self Test Memory Test This test checks the internal ROM The ROM is functioning correctly if Pass is displayed If Failed is displayed contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual Key Test Tests whether or not the front panel keys are operating correctly If the name of the key that is pressed is highlighted then it is operation correctly If it does not contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual Floppy Disk Drive Zip Drive Test This test checks the floppy disk drive or the Zip drive If Failed is displayed contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual SCSI Test This test checks SCSI If Failed is displayed contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual Printer Test This test checks the optional built in printer The printer is functioning correctly if gray shading is printed properly If it is not contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual Accuracy Test This test checks A D accuracy If Failed is displayed contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual 15 9 a uoi 2 dsuj pue sueuazuenN HunooysajqnoIL 15 4 Checking the System Condition Relevant Keys NAP SNOr HELP Pae 400 ACQ SETUP PET SPLAN Cory MAGE S
10. 3 4 5 Press GO NO GO Press the MODE soft key then select Zone or Parameter MISC a alibrationRemote Cnti SCSI ID Network Bysten Cnfgj Overview Next 1 2 GO NO GO OFF zone Paraneter Press the Setup soft key to display the GO NO GO setting menu Condition Zonet CH1 FF ___ON UT IN zome C_z pn Zone3 Zone4 CH4 FF __ON UT __IN zones Ca p zones Logic AND OR Sequence Action Buzzer c Save to File c Image Save ACQ Count Settings for the following items can be input directly using a USB keyboard a Hard Copy s Send Mail Mail Count i it rel 13 19 uodo ddej19 U JOUIBYI 3 13 7 Using the Mail Function Action Mail Function Explanation 13 20 6 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Action and select Send Mail 7 Select Mail Count to set a limit for the number of mails that are sent 8 Press the Exec soft key to start GO NO GO Note e The email destination is the Mail Address set in MISC Network Mail Setup e For mail sent by this instrument the sender s address will be the same as the specified recipient address e This function can be used in conjunction with 13 6 Using the Mail Function Fixed Interval Turn the Interval OFF only when using the action mail function e Before uisng this function refer to section 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP
11. IM 701710 01E 9 7 inverting the Waveform Display lt For a discription of this function refer to page 1 24 gt Relevant Keys MENU__ MENU X Y i setup pisPLaY Copy IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT SEARCH O TRIG D SIMPLE ENHANCED TIME DIV ACTION _ DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Turning ON OFF the Display 1 Press MATH 2 Press the M1 Display soft key and select ON to display Mathi and OFF to not display Math1 Mm Mi DisplayaMi Setup Mi Label Z Display a MZ Setup M2 Label ON C1 C2 Math ON C3 C4 MathZ o lees Setting the Operator 3 Press the M1 Setup soft key to display the computation dialog box 4 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Operation Math2 is not available on the DL1720 so these soft keys are not displayed M1 Setup Source1 Operation Source2 CH Scale Upper 4 0000E 00 Lower Unit Smoothing DFF ___ON__ Tt E cH i MMH Mi Displaya Mi Setup M1 Label Z Display Janz Setup M2 Label etare jell 5 Pressing SELECT displays the operator setting menu 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select Invert and press SELECT Mi Setup Source1 CHI ese lect Operation Source2 Scale Upper Bin Lower Invert Unit Diff Smoothing Integ PS Pass Thru MATH Mi Displayati Setup M1 Label Z Display ja MZ Setup M2 Label ON C1 C2 Math ON C3 C4 Mathz I
12. Move the release arm to the FREE position and Straighten out the roll sheet Then move the release arm to the HOLD position The printing will fail with an error message if the release arm is in the FREE or MAN FEED position during operation Pull the printer cover back to its original position and close the cover Make sure that the edge of the roll sheet is showing from the opening of the printer cover Push the printer cover down firmly until it clicks into place After loading the rool paper the paper feed may be unstable Print out 2 or 3 screen images before using the printer in your work IM 701710 01E 10 2 Outputting to the Built in Printer Option Relevant Keys NAP SNAP HELP 0 Oo aca stanrisror HORIZONTA ay SEARCH O TRIG D sme ENHANCED TIME DIV ACTION DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure IM 701710 01E Selecting the Printer 1 Press SHIFT to activate shift mode Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 2 Press COPY 3 Pressing the Copy to soft key displays the output medium menu COPY Copy to Format informatiora Comment Built in Long ON 4 Press the Built in soft key Net Print is displayed only when the Ethernet interface option is installed __cOPY___ pare in Net Print Comment Setting the Output Format 5 Press the Format soft key to select Normal or L
13. ee o y GO NO GO judgment output lt Waveform d aveform data a ppo i output CENTU Set up data GP IB Interface rigger outpu 5 Sereendata 5 939 Interface option USB Interface Ethernet Interface option Object to be Screen data measured Signal input Ol a Flo disk Zip disk PEY j Personal Computer ae Block Diagram oe pone Aann VGA video VGA video output i memor memor Multiplex y d Cs olor ATT Pre Amp circuit LCD PN T i g pag processing ss Builtin Printer_ option Display Keyboard Printer Display s T ke B gt 3 5 ne E 5 t ta a o 77 processing circuit processing circuit Data processing SCSI option memory Serial Ta RS 232 option circuit External clock input o 7 FDD External trigger input Pee Gate trigger input E o Trigger output The DL1720 is not equipped with channels 3 and 4 Instead an external trigger external clock trigger gate multi purpose terminal is installed in place of the CH4 terminal IM 701710 01E 1 1 Block Diagram Signal Flow The signals to be measured enter at the input terminals and pass first to the attenuator ATT and preamplifier Adjusted vertical axis characteristics voltage and amplitude in accordance with the settings for input coupling probe attenuation V div and offset value are passed to the multiplexer The multiplexer outputs each signal to the corresponding A
14. lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 17 gt Relevant Keys CLEAR SNAP HELP OC I Newco MENU MENU PHASE ACQ Ceruse corr mace Save a SHET SEARCH O TRIG D oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED V DIV TIME DIV ACTION DELAY Se The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press DISPLAY 2 Press the Scale Value soft key to select ON or OFF 2000711701 69 53 53 J fick Normal Stopped 5393 T 506kS S 2ZMms div 3 a int x gt CH1 10 1 6 566 Vzdi y DC Full Edge CH1 F Auto ee ey 0 010 U DISPLAY Scale Trace Accumulate Value Label Next ON ON OFF 1 2 2606 11 61 69 54 07 J fiok Normal Stopped S98 E 500kS s 2NSAliv Main CH1 16 1 6 506 V diy DC Full Axis H lt lt 310k gt gt Scale Value of Vertica Edge CH1 F Auto 0 010 V Scale Value of Time Axis Explanation You can display the upper and lower limits of the vertical axis or the axis horizontal of each channel IM 701710 01E 8 5 Setting the Waveform Labels lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 18 gt Relevant Keys NAP SNAP HELP Se ddeiclelelee ax ca mse owned DEN men e SVERTICI CHORZONTAL v am O TRIG D sme ENHANCED a The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating
15. 10 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Scale 11 Press SELECT to select Auto or Manual 12 Ifyou selected Manual turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Upper 13 Pressing SELECT displays a menu used to set the upper limit of the waveform 14 Turn the jog shuttle to set the upper limit and press SELECT 15 Set Lower in a similar fashion Setting the Unit 16 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Unit 17 Using the keyboard that appears when SELECT is pressed enter the unit using four characters or less Smoothing 18 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Smoothing 19 Press SELECT to select ON or OFF Setting the Start Point When Integ is Selected 20 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Start Point 21 Press SELECT set the start point using the jog shuttle then press SELECT again Note For details regarding smoothing see section 9 10 Smoothing IM 701710 01E 9 43 SISAJEUY WIOJ neM o 9 8 Differentiating and Integration Waveforms Entering Labels 22 Press the M1 Label soft key to display the keyboard See section 8 5 Setting the Waveform Labels for information about displaying labels Set Math2 in a similar manner as necessary Math2 is not available on the DL1720 2000 10 31 13 50 43 Jo Normal 621 qi 5 Stopped OOKS S ZMSAdiv 10k gt gt CH1 16 1 0 500 U diy DC Full Math1 Diff C1 Edge CH1 F Auto 0 000 Y MATH Mi DisplayjaMi Setup M1 Labe
16. 2 Press the Repetitive soft key to select ON or OFF ACQ Record Mode Interleave Repetitive Time Base p Length 10k Norma 1 ON PFF ON Ext You can select whether or not to use repetitive sampling If the repetitive sampling mode is ON the sampling rate for certain T div settings is set to 1 GS s or above 2 GS s or above when the interleave mode is ON If repetitive sampling mode is OFF the maximum available sampling rate is 500 MS s or 1 GS s with interleave ON and the instrument will add interpolation to the displayed waveform if the number of display points is less than 500 However even if the repetitive sampling is turned OFF the mode is set to repetitive sampling depending on the time axis setting T div for Repetitive Sampling If repetitive mode is ON the sampling mode is switched to repetitive sampling for T div settings as follows Available T div setting varies according to the record length Aejdsig pue uoinisinboy Record Length T div 1 kwords 1 ns div to 100 ns div 1 ns div to 50 ns div 10 kwords 1 ns div to 1 ms div 1 ns div to 500 ns div 50 kwords 1 ns div to 5 ms div 1 ns div to 2 ms div 100 kwords 1 ns div to 10 ms div 1 ns div to 5 ms div 250 kwords 1 ns div to 20 ms div 1 ns div to 10 ms div 500 kwords 1 ns div to 50 ms div 1 ns div to 20 ms div 1 Mwords 1 ns div to 50 ms div You cannot use repetitive sampling if the record length is set 500 kwords or above Values in parentheses
17. 2001 07 25 01 45 00 1 02 10020 Appendix 3 ASCII Header File Format MATH2 1002 1 2207031E 00 2 0000000E 04 IS2 V 32768 32769 32769 32767 32768 5 0000000E 09 2 5000000E 06 S 2001 07 25 01 45 00 10020 10020 10020 1 1 1 0 0 0 e The same header file format is used by all YOKOGAWA measuring instruments so it may contain some data which is not necessary for the instrument e The DL1720 is not equipped with channels 3 4 or Math2 App 11 Ea xipueddy Appendix 3 ASCII Header File Format App 12 FormatVersion Model Endian DataFormat GroupNumber Trace TotalNumber DataOffset e Publicinfo Common Information Version No of header file format Model name Endian mode Big Ltl Storage format Trace Block of binary file waveform data Number of the Group Total number of selected waveforms Start position of binary file waveform data Group1 Group Information TraceNumber BlockNumber TraceName BlockSize VResolution V Offset VDataType VUnit VPlusOverData VMinusOverData VMaxData VMinData HResolution HOffset HUnit Date Time Number of waveforms in the group Number of blocks in the group Name of each waveform Data size of each block of waveform Resolution coefficient of Y axis conversion equation for each waveform Offset coefficient of Y axis conversion equation for each waveform Type of binary file waveform data
18. Cannot be executed while data acquisition is in progress This data cannot be backed up There is no data to be recalled Cannot start during data outout Cannot access file while hard copying Cannot compress this screen image Turn off the compression switch Calibration failure Disconnect the input and execute again If it fails again servicing is required Cannot start when loading waveform data that has been saved in history All mode Insufficient output data Increase Mag or widen the Time Range interval Hard copying Abort or wait until it is complete Cannot perform calibration while waveform data is loaded Pattern is not specified Cannot start when waveform data that has been acquired in the linear average mode is loaded Cannot be executed while computation is in progress Failed to measure statistics The target waveform data exists or the measured waveform data may not exist If Cycle Statistic is specified the instrument may be configured in a way that fails to detect the cycle Cannot store because the data is locked Release the lock through Store Detail The File item is inappropriate Select Waveform Snap or Measure Executing file Load Save or Format Abort or wait until it is complete Hard copying or saving image Abort or wait until it is complete Cannot connect to the server Not yet connected to the ftp server This ftp function in not supported FTP Error R
19. Go to step 12 11 27 U pe lt Q Q Q rr O pe 2 m Q UO pe mp pe O Q Q _ O 3 gt D U a O Q D D 2 c 3 11 10 Changing the File Attributes Deleting Files Explanation 11 28 Selecting All Files to be Deleted 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file a directory or a medium 10 Pressing the All Set soft key places an asterisk to the left of every file in the directory containing the selected file or directory These files will be deleted The name of the All Set soft key changes to All Reset 11 Pressing the All Set soft key removes the asterisk to the left of every file in the directory containing the selected file or directory These files will not be deleted The name of the All Reset soft key changes to All Set Deleting the Files 12 Press the Delete Exec soft key All files with the asterisks are deleted Function a Filter et Reset A11 Set f Property Delete Delete SET Exec Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box Viewing the Properties The procedures are the same as steps 30 to 33 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Selecting the Medium and Directory The storage medium that can be used to save and load waveform data are displayed in the File List dialog box e Display Example of Storage Medium FDO Floppy disk ZPO Zip disk SC5 SCSI device with an ID number of 5 SC5 1
20. Quad or Dual for the DL1720 Sin Grid Auto OFF OFF OFF OFF Main 50 0S OFF Edge x2 0 div OFF OFF OFF OFF Infinite OFF 100 IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E Appendix 5 Assignment of Keys on the USB Keyboard 104 Keyboard US When Pressed with the Control Key When the Soft Keyboard Is Displayed OOo Other OS Key le ee Shift Operation a Shift Operation Shift Operation ACQ menu Same as left MATH menu COPY DISPLAY menu ENHANCED menu FILE menu GO NOGO menu HISTORY menu IMAGE SAVE menu PRESET menu Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left L Same as left POSITION menu CLEAR TRACE RESET SHIFT condition TRIGMODE menu CURSOR menu Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left SIMPLE menu Same as left Same as left CH1 menu CH2 menu CH3 menu CH4 menu V y o A 7 Return Enter Back Space Same as left Return Enter Select Same as left Same as left Back Space Tab Space Bar Space Bar fee SETUP Same as left a a a ee A MISC menu HELP Caps Lock oO D 5 an r a So tr x App 15 Ea xipueddy Appendix 5 Assignment of Keys on the USB Keyboard App 16 aaa eres E E e ee _stantistoP_ Same asiett Same as left ed u Same as lef Escape ae fa ie START STOP Same as left eS e Sam
21. Unit Dist Prox Selectable Range of Proximal 0 to 100 1 steps or voltage corresponding to 8 divisions 1 100 of V div steps Selectable Range of Mesial 0 to 100 1 steps or voltage corresponding to 8 divisions 1 100 of V div steps Selectable Range of Distal O to 100 1 steps or voltage corresponding to 8 divisions 1 100 of V div steps IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 9 4 Performing Automated Measurements of Waveform Parameters on Dual Areas Precautions to be Taken when Performing Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters akk KI The measurement value displays if the measurement is not possible For waveforms of small amplitude correct measurements may not be possible If there are two or more periods of waveform in the measurement range the measurement is performed on the first period 9 31 SISAJEUY WAOJOARM 9 5 Adding Subtracting and Multiplying Waveforms lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 24 gt Relevant Keys O TRIG D oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Turn ON OFF the display 1 Press MATH 2 Press the M1 Display soft key and select ON to display Math1 and OFF to not display M1 MATH M1 Displaya M1 Setup M1 Label 2 Display ja Mz Setup M2 Label Math2 is not available on ON C1i C2 Mathi ON C3 C4 Math2 the DL1 720 so these soft J E ___ ke
22. V DIV TIME DIV ED ee o e2 sme ENHANCED oO S m i The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Explanation IM 701710 01E Setting the Trigger Mode 1 Press MODE 2 Press the Single N soft key to set the trigger mode to Single N MODE Auto uto Level Normal Single Single N 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the Single N Count MODE par Auto uto Level f Normal Single a coke By setting the trigger mode to Single N the sequential store function can be used Acquisition Count Available numerical settings are as follows The setting range varies according to the record length Record Length Normal Mode Box Average Mode 1 kwords 1 to 256 512 1 to 128 256 10 kwords 1 to 32 64 1 to 16 32 50 kwords 1 to 8 16 1 to 4 8 100 kwords 1 to 4 8 1 to 2 4 250 kwords 1 to 2 4 1 to 1 2 500 kwords 1 2 1 1 Mwords 1 This setting available only when interleave mode is ON Waveform Display Method You can recall waveforms from memory in the same way as you do when working with the history function For details refer to section 7 7 Using the History Memory Restrictions and Precautions e You can not use this mode together with repetitive sampling or roll mode e f you stop waveform acquisition by pressing START STOP sequential storage also Stops It then restarts again from the beginning when acquisition resumes
23. gt Time Axis Box Averaging Data a O S gt gt Time Axis Data Samples Used for Averages Interleave OFF Interleave ON 500 MS s 2 points every 2 points of 1 GS s 200 MS s 2 points every 2 points of 400 MS s 4 points every 4 points of 800 MS s 100 MS s 4 points every 4 points of 400 MS s 8 points every 8 points of 800 MS s 50 MS s 8 points every 8 points of 400 MS s 16 points every 20 points of 800 MS s 20 MS s 16 points every 20 points of 400 MS s 32 points every 40 points of 800 MS s 10 MS s 32 points every 40 points of 400 MS s 64 points every 80 points of 800 MS s 5 MS s 64 points every 80 points of 400 MS s 128 points every 200 points of 800 MS s 2 MS s 128 points every 200 points of 400 MS s 256 points every 400 points of 800 MS s 1 MS s 256 points every 400 points of 400 MS s_ 256 points every 800 points of 800 MS s 500 kS s or less 256 points every 800 points of 400 MS s 256 points every 1600 points of 800 MS s Re sampling interval is shifted by the sample rate The maximum number of data points to perform BoxAverage process is 256 Record Length Setting Limit Not above 500 kWord 1 MWord with interleave ON Sampling Rate Setting Limit Not above 200 MS s or 500 MS s with interleave ON If the sample rate exceeds 200 MS s 500 MS s when interleave is ON the mode is set to normal mode even if box average is specified 7 7 Aejdsig pue uonisinboy 7 5 Using Interleave Mode
24. suoljeiadC 198410 z Chpater 15 Troubleshooting Maintenance and Inspection 15 1 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting For corrective actions when a message appears on the screen read the following pages If servicing is required or if the instrument does not operate properly after taking the following corrective actions contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Problem Possible Cause The power cannot be turned ON The source voltage is outside the rated range The main power switch on the rear panel is not turned ON The backlight is turned OFF The screen colors are not appropriate Nothing is displayed The display is abnormal The system is not operating correctly Loaded waveform data from an external storage medium The waveform display is not updated The instrument is in the remote mode Other causes Keys do not work Triggering does not occur The trigger gate is enabled The trigger settings are not appropriate The measured values are odd Did not allow adequate warm up time The instrument has not been calibrated The probe s phase has not been corrected The probe attenuation is not correct An offset voltage is added Other causes Cannot output to the internal printer The printer head is damaged or worn out Cannot save to the medium The medium has not been formatted The medium is write protected Insufficient space on the medium The instrument cannot
25. 11 Press the Color soft key to select ON or OFF Setting Comments 12 Press the Comment soft key A keyboard appears on the screen 13 Enter the comment string according to the procedure given in section 4 1 Setting the Resolution When Format is Set to BJ 14 Press the Resolution soft key to display the resolution menu COPY Copy to Format Color fa Resolution fa Comment Select USB BJ ON 180dpi 15 Press one of the soft keys corresponding to 180 dpi 300 dpi and 360 dpi to set the resolution Copy to Format Color a 180dpi 300dpi 360dpi Comment USB BJ ON Executing Hard Copy 16 Press COPY to output a hard copy of the screen Press COPY again to stop the output 10 7 e eq Ud919NS JO INd1nNO 10 3 Outputting Screen Images to an USB Printer Explanation 10 8 On the DL1720 DL1740 you can print the screen image data to a USB printer via the USB interface You can also print the screen image to a network printer via the Ethernet network when the Ethernet interface option is installed For details see section 13 5 Printing the Screen Image to a Network Printer PRN KBD Terminal When connecting a USB printer to the DL1720 DL1740 connect a USB cable to the PRN KBD terminal There are two PRN KBD terminals 12 3 4 Port 1 Port 2 Pin No Signal Name 1 Veus 5 V 2 D Data 3 D Data 4 GND Ground Printers that can be Used USB printers conforming to USB Printer Class Ver 1 0 that supp
26. 3 1 Precautions During Use Safety Precautions When you are using this instrument read Safety Precautions on page v thoroughly as well as the following points Do not Remove the Cover from the Instrument Some parts of the instrument use high voltages which are extremely dangerous When the instrument needs internal inspection or adjustment contact your dealer or nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual In Case of Irregularity If you notice smoke or unusual odors coming from the instrument immediately turn OFF the power and unplug the power cord If such an irregularity occurs contact your dealer or the nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual Power Cord Nothing should be placed on the power cord Also it should be kept away from any heat sources When unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet never pull the cord itself Always hold the plug and pull it If the power cord is damaged contact your dealer Refer to page ii for the part number to use when placing an order General Handling Precautions IM 701710 01E Observe the following precautions when handling the instrument Never Place Anything on Top of the Instrument Never place other equipment or objects containing water on top of the instrument otherwise a breakdown may occur Do not Cause Shock to the Input Connectors or Probes Shock to the input connectors or probes may turn into electr
27. A Red 28 or more 896 or more Pink 24 to 27 Pink 768 to 895 Orange 20 to 23 Yellow 16 to 19 Orange 640 to 767 512 to 639 White 12 to 15 384 to 511 Cyan 8to11 256 to 383 Green 4to7 128 to 255 Blue 1 to3 1 to 127 Black 0 0 When Grade Width 4 When Grade Width 128 For example a dot which has appeared on the screen 100 times is displayed in red if the grade width is 4 or in blue if the grade width is 128 Points for Attention e Automatic measurement of waveform parameters and GO NO GO judgment are performed on the latest waveform e When displaying all waveforms in the history memory during accumulation the historical waveforms are displayed using the specified accumulation mode However the waveform display becomes slow e When printing accumulated waveforms using the optional built in printer they are printed using two tones e Only the latest waveform can be output to an external printer e Ifthe waveform acquisition is forcibly stopped by pressing START STOP the accumulation is temporarily suspended When the acquisition is restarted the display is cleared and accumulation continues Clearing Accumulated Waveforms You can clear accumulated waveforms by pressing CLEAR TRACE IM 701710 01E 8 7 Turning Translucent Mode ON OFF Relevant Keys NAP SNOr HELP oC TILT TL Tse ase hea aca srant sror a msc sone SEARCH am 9 D sme ENHANCED V DIV TIM
28. CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mathi Math2 p Menu IM 701710 01E 9 55 SISAJEUY LUIOJOAPM 9 13 GO NO GO Determination Using Zones Editing All Zones 7 When Edit is set to something other than Whole press the Edit and select Whole GO NO GO Edit Unter fe Left Store as div 0 0 div Store Quit amp Whole Part D Lower Right zone1 Exec TopMenu 6 60di v 60di v 8 Press the Upper Lower or Left Right soft keys to select the zone setting direction 9 Turn the jog shuttle to create a zone 10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 to edit the zones 11 Press the Store as soft key to open the store as setting menu for the edited zone 12 Press the soft key corresponding to a storage location Zone Zone6 or Zone1 Zone3 for the DL1720 to select it Quit amp TopMenu 13 Press the Store Exec soft key to save the zone Proceed to step 14 to edit a partial zone or skip to step 22 to quit GO NO GO Edit cure Left Store as 66d iv Pa 66d iv Store Quit amp Whole Part a Lower Right zone Exec TopNenu 6 66di 6 60di Editing a Partial Zone 14 Press the Edit soft key to select Part GO NO GO Edit wz Upper i Store as div ee ES amp hole Part Part Lower peg zonei Ea Exec ES 15 Press the T Range1 T Range2 soft key to select the right or left cursor 16 Turn the jog shuttle to set the right and left edges of the partial zone 17 Press the Upper Lower soft key to select the direction for setting the zone
29. Data Size Data size Number of item x 15 x number of history waveform File Extension The file extension is CSV The selection of the medium and directory file name comments auto naming function specification of the files to be displayed in the File List dialog box and properties are the same as those for saving loading normal waveform data For explanation and procedures see section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Note e Ifa key other than the Abort key is pressed during saving an error occurs e This function can not be used in conjunction with FTP server function or LPR client function 11 25 WINIPs Helos y Wold pue o e eq Hulpeo7 pue Bulnes 2 11 10 Changing the File Attributes Deleting Files A N CAUTION Never remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or the floppy disk or the Zip disk icon is blinking This can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Relevant Keys PHASE O TRIG D oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press FILE 2 Pressing the Utility soft key displays the utility setting menu and the file list dialog box FILE File Item a a a Save Load Utility Setup Selecting the Destination Medium Directory The procedures are the same as steps 13 to 17 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data
30. Dual Area Iten 5 600di 5 000di Setup feT Rangez 6T Range4 OFF DN 5 006di 5 600di Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Mode of User1 and press SELECT to turn it ON Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Trace of Areai of User1 and press SELECT to select the trace from CH1 through CH4 Math1 Math2 None and Const1 through Const4 or CH1 to CH2 Math1 None and Const1 to Const4 for the DL1720 If you select None or Const1 through Const4 waveform parameters are not measured in Area 5e lect Select Consti Const2 Const3 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Item of Areal of User1 and press SELECT to select the measurement parameter from P P through Int2XY Select a a Burst2 AvgFreq Pulse AvgPer iod Delay IntiTY AvgFreq Int2TY AvgPer iod Intixy tity v Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Ope of User1 and press SELECT to select the computation from and Select Set Trace Item and Unit for Area2 in a similar fashion To set constants turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Const1 through Const4 Press SELECT and set the constant using the jog shuttle You can set up to four constants IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 9 4 Performing Automated Measurements of Waveform Parameters on Dual Areas 14 To set User2 through User4 repeat steps 7 through 13 as necessary Areal Areaz Mode Trace Item Ope Trace Item Unit User1 PF
31. Press CURSOR 2 Pressing the Type soft key displays the cursor type menu CURSOR Type OFF 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired cursor type to select the cursor When not Displaying the X Y Waveform CURSOR OFF orizontal Vertical Marker Degree When Displaying the X Y Waveform CURSOR OFF orizontal Vertical Marker For H Horizontal Cursors When Not Displaying the X Y Waveform Selecting the Waveform to be Measured Refer to steps 1 3 to set the Type to Horizontal CURSOR OFF orizontal Vertical Marker Degree 4 Pressing the Trace soft key displays the waveform menu CURSOR Trace rn OOd iy orizontal a ae 3 00di 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired waveform The CH3 CH4 and Math2 soft keys are not displayed on the DL1720 Type CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Math1 Math2 or izontal 3 00div_J o o o T oO IM 701710 01E 9 1 s s jeuy WIOJ neM o 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using Moving the Cursor 6 Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Cursor 1 7 Turn the jog shuttle to move Cursor1 2000 10 31 10 58 57 2 E E 10k Normal Stopped 40 p 506kS S 2Zms div CH1 10 1 0 500 VUrdiy DC Full Edge CH1 F Auto 2 25000V Type Trace f Cursori 1 56diyv jor izontal CH1 e Cursor2 3 60di v 8 Move Cursor2 in a similar fashion If the jog shuttle
32. Record Length Mode Count Repetitive Interleave Time Base SIMPLE Source Level Slope Coupling HF Rejection Histeresis Hold Off TRIGGER HISTORY Select Record Display Mode Start Record End Record Show Map No Search Mode FILE File Item File Name Auto Naming COPY MENU Copy to Format Information IMAGE SAVE MENU Format Color File Name Auto Naming App 14 List of Defaults Default Setting Menu Key MEASURE ON 0 div DC 1 MQ 10 1 OV Full 50 V OFF CH1 CH4 50 V 1 ms div All TTL CURSOR 10 1 MATH 10 k Normal Infinite OFF OFF Int CH1 DISPLAY oV Rise DC OFF Af 0 08 us 0 One 0 ZOOM latest 1 OFF POSITON DELAY Set up ON GO NO GO Built in SEARCH Normal OFF TIFF ACTION OFF ON Soft Key Mode Item Setup Source Item Dual Area Delay Setup Source Mode 1 cycle mode Time Range 1 Time Range 2 Trace Distal Mesial Proximal High Low Mode Type Default Setting OFF CH1 OFF OFF CH1 OFF OFF 5 div 5 div CH1 90 50 10 AUTO OFF The DL1720 is not equipped with M2 Math2 M1 Display M1 Setup M1 Label M2 Display M2 Setup M2 Label Format Interpolation Graticule Mapping Translucent Scale Value Trace Label Accumulate Mode Position Delay Mode Type Z1 Mag Z position Buzzer Save to File Hard Copy Image Save ACQ Count Send Mail Mail Count OFF C1 C2 Math1 OFF C3 C4 Math2
33. Rms idth Intixy Sdev Width Int2xy High Duty Low Burst1i 0 0Shot _ Burst2 a OShot Pulse All Clear_ Copy To All Trace_ MEASURE Dual Area CH1 Using the jog shuttle move the cursor to the item that you wish to set to ON If you select All Clear all items are turned OFF If you select Copy to All Trace you can copy the current settings to all the traces Press SELECT to turn ON an item Repeat steps 5 7 as many times as necessary Press ESC to return to the automatic measurement mode selection menu Press the Cycle Trace soft key to display the period waveform selection menu Mode a ycle Tracga Item Show Measure Cycle Setup CH1 Result Exec tatistics MEASURE f l Range1 5 000diu Next ST Rangez 1 2 5 000di 9 19 SISAJEUY WWAOJOARM 9 3 Statistical Processing 10 Press the soft key corresponding to the source channel for the period If Own is selected each waveform s own period is used for its statistical processing The CH3 CH4 and Math2 soft keys are not displayed on the DL1720 Dun CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mathi Math2 tat istics 5 000di The other settings are the same as for normal automatic measurement please see section 9 2 11 Press the Measure Exec soft key to perform the statistical processing Press the key again to stop statistical processing MEASURE Mode a ycle Tracga le T Range1 Item Show
34. SIMPLE Relevant Keys NAP SNOr HELP SETUP PEET zioei A T O SHIFT SEA ar V DIV TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Setting the Trigger Source 1 Press SIMPLE 2 Pressing the Source soft key to display the trigger source menu SIMPLE Source fg Level Slope Coupling HF Reject Pysteresis Hold Off us CH1 0 0 U Ft AC OFF PA T 0 08 3 Press the Ext soft key CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1720 SIMPLE CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Ext Line Hold Off us 0 08 Setting the Trigger Level 4 Ifthe jog shuttle control is not set to Level press the Level soft key SIMPLE Source feaHold Off Cus Ext 0 08 On the DL1720 the Range soft key is displayed in this box 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the trigger level You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits In addition pressing RESET sets the trigger level to 0 V Setting the Trigger Slope 6 Press the Edge soft key to select f 4 or f Setting the probe attenuation 7 Press the Probe soft key to select 1 1 or 10 1 Setting the Range DL1720 only 8 Press the Range soft key then select the range 1 V or 10 V When Probe is set to 1 1 10 V or 100 V When Probe is set to 10 1 IM 701710 01E 6 11 Bbunebbi yp gt 6 6 Setting the External Trigger SIMPLE Explanation Setting the Hold Off 9 Set the hold off time acc
35. Select from the following list of choices AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from the trigger source signal as the trigger signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as the trigger signal Turning ON OFF the HF Rejection Select 15 KHz or 20 MHz when you wish to use a signal source that is obtained by removing the high frequency components frequency components greater than or equal to approximately 15 kHz or 20 MHz from the trigger signal as the trigger source Setting the Hold Off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time IM 701710 01E 6 12 Setting the OR Trigger lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 10 gt Relevant Keys w0 TRACE oa HELP edha a C wm A ER G gt O TRIG D o o2 V DIV TIME DIV o m The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Setting the Trigger Type 1 Press ENHANCED 2 Pressing the Type soft key displays the trigger type menu ENHANCED Type a a fe Count gHold Off et Pattern Levels us A gt BCN Coupling 1 0 08 3 Press the OR soft key NHANCED A gt B N J A Delay B Pattern Width OR TV Hold Off us 0 08 Setting the Edge Trigger of Each Channel 4 Press the Set Pattern soft key to display the trigger setting menu On the DL1720 settings for CH3 and CH4 are not displayed ENHANCED eHold OFF us 0 08 Window DFF O
36. TDK ZCAT2035 0930A YOKOGAWA A1190MN to the end of the cable on the instrument side Trigger Output Terminal Same as the above external trigger input terminal RGB VIDEO OUT Terminal Use a D Sub 15 pin VGA shielded cable Serial RS 232 Interface Connector Use an RS 232 shielded cable and attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT2035 0930A YOKOGAWA A1190MN to the end of the cable on the instrument side SCSI Connector Use a SCSI shielded cable and attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT2035 0930A YOKOGAWA A1190MN to the end of the cable on the instrument side PRN KBD Connector Use a USB cable Attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT1325 0530A YOKOGAWA A1181MN to the end of the cable on the instrument side USB Interface Connector Use a USB cable Attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT1325 0530A YOKOGAWA A1181MN to the end of the cable on the instrument side GO NO GO Output Terminal Use a GO NOGO cable YOKOGAWA model 366973 sold separately Attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT1325 0530A YOKOGAWA A1181MN to the end of the cable on the instrument side Ethernet Connector Use a Ethernet cable Attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT1325 0530A YOKOGAWA A1181MN to the end of the cable on the instrument side Power Connectors for the Probes Attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT1325 0530A YOKOGAWA A1181MN to the end of the cable on the instrument side Influence in the Immunity Environment Noise Increase lt 80 mV when using 700988 lt 400
37. Type a a Count eH Set Pattern Level A gt BCN Coupling 1 11 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel on which the level is to be set 12 Press SELECT to display the level setting menu 13 Turn the jog shuttle to set the level You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits In addition pressing RESET sets the trigger level to 0 V Hys Coupling HF Rej The Level setting for each channel can be input directly using a USB keyboard i Setting the Hysteresis 14 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel on which hysteresis is to be set 15 Press SELECT to select AZ or 7 Setting the Trigger Coupling 16 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel on which the coupling is to be set 17 Press SELECT to select DC or AC Setting the HF Rejection 18 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel on which the HF rejection HF Rej is to be set 19 Press SELECT to select OFF 20 MHz or 15 kHz Setting the Number of Times Condition B is to be Met 20 If the jog shuttle control is not set to Count press the Count soft key ENHANCED a a i Count eHold Off et Pattern Levely uS Coupling 1 0 08 Type A gt BCN 21 Turn the jog shuttle to set the count You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the value to 1 Setting the Hold Off 22 Set the hold off time according to the procedures give
38. When auto set up is executed waveform acquisition starts automatically SETUP a Initialize Auto Store Undo Setup Recall Canceling Auto Setup 3 Press the Undo soft key to restore the settings that existed immediately before auto setup Explanation The key settings such as V div T div and trigger levels are automatically set to optimum values for the input signal 2600 10 31 19 46 51 jiok Normal 2000 10 31 19 47 26 Stopped 105 i Stopped 140 iv y iv CH1 10 1 10k gt gt CH1 10 1 2 00 U div 6 500 Vzdi DC Full ii DC Full Edge CH1 F T Eage CHL F 0 00 Y A ER U SETUP Gaal do EA Before Auto Setup After Auto Setup Center Position The center position after auto setup is set to 0 V Target Channels Auto setup is performed on all channels 4 8 IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 4 3 Performing Auto Setup Canceling Auto Setup By pressing the Undo soft key the settings can be set back to the values that existed immediately before auto setup was performed However settings which existed before auto setup are erased when the power is turned OFF In this case the Undo operation will have no effect The setting parameters that existed immediately before auto setup are cleared if you execute initialization after auto setup Waveforms that can be Automatically Setup Frequency Approx 50 Hz or more Maximum Absolute Input Value Approx 20 mV or more a
39. e For purposes of this manual the TM and symbols do not accompany their respective trademark names or registered trademark names e Other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders 1st Edition January 2001 2nd Edition July 2001 supports firmware version 1 30 or later All Rights Reserved Copyright 2001 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 701710 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the instrument If the wrong instrument or accessories have been delivered if some accessories are missing or if they appear abnormal contact the dealer from which you purchased them DL1720 DL1740 Main Body Check that the model name and suffix code given on the name plate of the side panel match those on your order Whenever you contact the dealer from which you purchased the instrument tell the dealer your unit s serial number MODEL SUFFIX SUFFIX 8 8 rt tsti sr Pe NO C YOKOGAWA Made in Japan SPECIFICATIONS 701705 DL1720 701710 DL1740 Power Cord 2 channels 4 channels UL CSA standard power cord A1006WD Maximum rated voltage 125 V maximum rated current 7 A VDE standard power cord A1009WD Maximum rated voltage 250 V maximum rated current 10A BS standard power cord A1054WD Maximum rated voltage 250 V maximum rated current 10A SAA standard power cord A1024WD Maxim
40. et Pattern Levely uS A Delay B Coupling 0 00 0 08 12 Turn the jog shuttle to set the delay time You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the value to 0 003 us Setting the Hold Off 13 Set the hold off time according to the procedures given in 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Note e The status setting of condition A and B applies to all trigger types e The trigger level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection settings apply to simple trigger and enhanced trigger 6 18 IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 6 9 Setting the A Delay B Trigger ENHANCED This function activates a trigger the first time condition B becomes true after condition A becomes true and the specified time elapses Setting Conditions A and B e Channel Status Select the status of the channel from the following three choices H Above the specified trigger level L Below the specified trigger level X Don t care e Condition Enter Trigger is activated when all channels meet the specified status Exit Trigger is activated when at least one channel no longer meets the specified Status Delay Time 3 ns to 5 s resolution 1 ns Setting the Trigger Level Range 8 div within the screen Resolution 0 01 div For example the resolution is 0 02 mV when the V DIV setting is 2 mV div Setting the Hysteresis Sets a width to the trigger level so that the trigger is not activated on small change
41. press the T Range1 T Range2 soft key to set the display T Range 2 Selecting the X Axis Mode DL1740 only Single Set the X axis trace of XY1 and XY2 common Dual Set the X axis trace individually for XY1 and XY2 Assigning X Horizontal and Y Vertical Axes The channels that can be assigned to the X axis and Y axis depending on the X axis mode as follows DL1740 X Axis Mode X Y X Axis Y Axis Single XY1 CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2 CH1 CH2 Math 1 XY2 CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2 CH3 CH4 Math 2 Dual XY1 CH1 CH2 Math1 CH1 CH2 Math 1 XY2 CH3 CH4 Math2 CH3 CH4 Math 2 DL1720 X Axis Mode X Y X Axis Y Axis XxXY1 CH1 CH2 Math1 CH1 CH2 Math1 Number of X Y Waveforms that can be Displayed The number of X Y waveforms that can be displayed is two XY1 XY2 or one for the DL1720 XY1 The display of each X Y waveform can be turned ON OFF Selecting the Display Format Mode You can choose from the following three display formats T Y amp X Y The top window displays normal T Y waveforms The bottom window displays X Y waveforms X Y Displays only X Y waveforms T Y Displays only T Y waveforms 8 13 8 8 X Y Waveform Display Selecting the X Y Waveform Display Range T Range1 T Range2 The X Y display shows the range selected on the T Y waveform You can set the start fine dashed line and end coarse dashed line positions in the range 5 to 5 div from the center of the waveform display frame The start and en
42. waveforms or data are displayed In this case the maximum and minimum values may exist outside the displayed list In such cases the maximum T and minimum J values outside the range are not displayed In the list of statistical processing of historical data you can select a waveform using the jog shuttle and press SELECT to display the selected historical waveform For the statistical processing per period statistical processing is performed only on the data that can be listed Notes when Performing Statistical Processing All soft keys except the Measure Abort soft key are disabled while the statistical processing is in progress IM 701710 01E 9 4 Performing Automated Measurements of Waveform Parameters on Dual Areas lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 23 gt Relevant Keys CLEAR TRACE Gale OON Z4 START STOP NAP NAP HELP MENU MENU PHASE ACQ E X Y setup pispLaY Copy IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT SEARCH O TRIG D SIMPLE ENHANCED TIME DIV ACTION DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press MEASURE 2 Press the Mode soft key to display the automated measurement mode menu MEASURE Mode a a Cycle Mod f T Rangei Item Delay 5 000di Next OFF Setup Setup ON f6T Rangez d 5 000di Press the ON soft key to set the automated measurement mode MEASURE tatistics Cycle History T Range1 tatistics Btatistics
43. 00 28 0015 11 02 01 111 0040 11 02 00 69 0065 11 02 00 27 0016 11 02 01 09 0041 11 02 00 67 0066 11 02 00 25 0017 11 02 01 007 0042 11 02 00 65 0067 11 02 00 23 0018 11 02 01 06 0043 11 02 00 64 0068 11 02 00 22 0019 11 02 01 004 0044 11 02 00 62 0069 11 02 00 20 0020 11 02 01 02 0045 11 02 00 60 0070 11 02 00 18 0021 11 02 01 01 0046 11 02 00 59 0071 11 02 00 17 0022 11 02 00 99 0047 11 02 00 57 0072 11 02 00 15 0023 11 02 00 97 0048 11 02 00 55 0073 11 02 00 13 H 0049 11 02 00 54 0074 11 02 00 12 CH1 10 1 50 0 Vzdi v DC Full CH2 10 1 50 0 Vzdi DC Full CH3 10 1 50 0 Vzdi v DC Full CH4 10 1 50 0 Vdi v DC Full 24 Turn the jog shuttle to select the waveform to be displayed and press SELECT Resetting the Search Results 25 Ifyou set the Search Mode to OFF in the HISTORY menu or if you perform a search with all of the parameters Param1 Param4 set to OFF the search results will be reset Search for waveforms from the history memory function and display only the waveforms that fulfill specified conditions of particular parameters Search Criterion You can store various kinds of search criteria in Param1 Param4 Within those four search criteria you can specify the channel to be searched the search conditions and the searching range Condition IN Search for a waveform entering the specified range of the specified parameter OUT Search
44. 1457664 byte FDO Used Space 358912 byte Vacant Space 1098752 byte Partition Size m Function Ja a edia Info Format Format Formatting a Floppy Disk When using a new floppy disk you must format it first Select the appropriate format for the floppy disk from the following choices 2DD 720 K Formats the 2DD floppy disk to 720 KB 9 sectors 2HD 1 44 M Formats the 2HD floppy disk to 1 44 MB 18 sectors Formatting a Zip Disk If you are using a new Zip disk you need to format it The format for 250 MB and 100 MB disks is as follows FDISK 1 partition hard disk format 11 7 wnIip n Helos y4 woz pue o e eq Hulpeo7 pue Bulnes 2 11 4 Formatting the Storage Medium Formatting a the SCSI Device The formats of media connected via SCSI option are as follows e MO PD Semi IBM format Handled as removable disk e Zip JAZ Hard disk format Handled as fixed disk e Hard Disk IBM compatible format Selecting the Format Mode When formatting a medium in a Zip disk or an external SCSI device the following format modes are available e Norm Executes physical format and logical format Formatting 100 MB Zip disks using this method is not supported e Quick Executes only the logical format Selecting the Number of Partitions You can set partitions on the external SCSI device option except for removable disk 1 to 5 partitions can be selected Information about the Medium The following information is lis
45. 1k 1k 1k k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 500 200 1k 1k 1k 1k IM 701710 01E App 1 ES x pu ddy Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 10 kwords Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active When Envelope Mode is Active Interleave mode OFF Interleave mode ON Interleave mode Interleave mode Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON OFF S S S ON rate record lenj rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word 1G iok DA eee ee oe 1 For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active 2 Roll mode display is available in shaded sections App 2 IM 701710 01E Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 50 kwords Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active When Envelope Mode is Active Interleave mode OFF Interleave mode ON Interleave mode Interleave mode Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON OFF ON cor eo Displayed i Displayed Displayed Sample Displayed rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth
46. 2 and 2 respectively Thr Lower Setting the Unit 10 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Unit 11 Using the keyboard that appears when SELECT is pressed enter the unit using four characters or less Smoothing 12 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Smoothing 13 Press SELECT to select ON or OFF Note For details regarding smoothing see section 9 10 Smoothing Entering Labels 14 Paess the M1 Label soft key to display the keyboard then enter a label See section 8 5 Setting the Waveform Labels for in formation on displaying Labels 9 37 SISAJEUY WWAOJOARM 9 6 Binary Computation Explanation 9 38 Setting the Threshold Level 15 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Thr Upper 16 Pressing SELECT displays the threshold level setting menu 17 Turn the jog shuttle to set the threshold level and press SELECT 18 Set Thr Lower in a similar fashion Set Math2 in a similar manner as necessary 2000 10 31 13 43 47 Eek _ Normal 9 T Stopped 10 500kS s ZMS div DC Full Math1 BintC1 Edge CH1 4 A This function converts CH1 to CH4 or Math1 waveform or CH1 to CH2 waveform for the DL1720 to a digital signal 1 s and 0 s according to the specified threshold level Unit Unit can be set arbitrarily using up to four characters The specified characters are reflected in the scale values Smoothing See section 9 10 Smoothing
47. 25 ns or less Minimum Pulse Width 10 ns or more for both High and Low levels Input Terminal lt DL1740 gt lt DL1720 gt Eoee 1MQ 20pF lt 40Vpk cat yA On the DL1740 it is located on the rear panel lt 40Vpk 1MO or on the DL1720 it is located on the front panel CAUTION If a clock signal exceeding the above maximum permissible input voltage is input to the EXT TRIG IN EXT CLOCK IN TRIG GATE IN terminal or the EXT terminal for the DL1720 damage to the internal circuits of the instrument may result Points to Note when Sampling Using an External Clock e The clock signal must be continuous No burst signal is allowed e Only real time sampling mode is available e Envelope mode and Box Average mode cannot be set e Display of waveforms is not possible in roll mode e No function to divide the clock signal is available e Since the time axis setting cannot be changed expand the time axis if you want to change the display range For a description of expanding waveforms refer to section 8 9 e Trigger delay cannot be set e Deskew function cannot be used e The time measured by the cursor measurement or automated measurement function is expressed in the number of pulses of the clock signal No unit is displayed IM 701710 01E 5 11 Setting T div Relevant Keys lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 5 gt NAP Ks CARRERA OO SETUP PET S IMAGE ae O SHIFT Cm A CORON
48. 3 press the Test Item soft key to display the test item menu 8 Press the Key Board soft key to be test Menory FDD SCSI Printer Accuracy 9 Pressing the Test Exec soft key executes the key test Self Test Test Item Soft Key St Exec Key Board COPYTEST 10 Press all the keys To terminate the key test press ESC twice self Test MISC Testing the Soft Keys 11 Pressing the Soft Key soft key displays a keyboard 12 Using the jog shuttle and SELECT check that the characters on the keyboard can be entered correctly Pressing ESC twice clears the keyboard Executing the Printer Test 13 After step 3 press the Test Item soft key to display the test item menu 14 Press the Printer soft key to be test c Board Memory C SCSI Ea Accuracy 15 Pressing the Test Exec soft key executes the printer test Self Test Test Item st Exec Printer Testing the FDD Zip Drive SCSI Option or Accuracy 16 After step 3 press the Test Item soft key to display the test item menu 17 Press the soft key corresponding to the FDD ZIP SCSI or Accuracy to be test 18 Pressing the Test Exec soft key executes the floppy disk drive test SCSI test or Accuracy test ie set Test Item st Exec Accuracy Note e Insert a floppy disk or a Zip disk befor executing FDD or Zip test e Please note the following when performing the SCSI self test e Only test unpartitioned SCSI devices e Set the SCSI ID to 5
49. 3 standards Ethernet 100BASE TX 10BASE T Max 100 Mbps TCP IP FTP server FTP client network drive LPR client network printer SMTP client mail transmission DHCP DNS RJ 45 connector 16 9 3 suol eoioeds 16 11 General Item Standard Operating Conditions Ambient Temperature Warm up Time Storage Conditions Operating Conditions Storage Altitude Operating Altitude Rated supply Voltage Permissible Supply Voltage Range Rated Supply Voltage Frequency Permissible Supply Voltage Frequency Fuse Maximum Power Consumption Withstand Voltage Specifications 23 eG Ambient Humidity 55 10 RH Power Voltage and Frequency Less than 1 of the rated voltage frequency fluctuation 30 min or more Temperature 20 to 60 C 20 to 50 C J2 built in Zip drive model Humidity 20 to 80 RH no condensation allowed Temperature 5 to 40 C Humidity 20 to 80 RH without a printer 35 to 80 RH with a printer 3000 m or below 2000 m or below 100 to 120 VAC 220 to 240 VAC 90 to 132 VAC 198 to 264 VAC 50 60 Hz 48 to 63 Hz 250 V 4 A time lag VDE SEMKO UL CSA SEV approved 200 VA when the built in printer is used 1 5 k VAC for 1 minute between power supply and case Insulation Resistance 10 MQ or more at 500 VDC between power supply and case External Dimensions details on next page Weight including printer Cooling Method Installation Position Batt
50. 7 7 Using the History Memory Display a List of Time Stamps 8 Pressing the Show Map soft key displays a list of acquired data numbers and the time at acquisition end NN History Memory Map Ht 0000 09 02 33 37 v CH1 10 1 0 500 Udi DC Full 0025 09 02 32 86 0050 09 02 32 35 0026 09 02 32 84 0027 09 02 32 82 0028 09 02 32 80 0029 09 02 32 78 0030 09 02 32 76 0031 09 02 32 74 0032 09 02 32 72 0033 09 02 32 70 0034 09 02 32 68 0035 09 02 32 66 0036 09 02 32 64 0037 09 02 32 62 0038 09 02 32 60 0039 09 02 32 58 0040 09 02 32 56 0041 09 02 32 54 0042 09 02 32 52 0043 09 02 32 50 0044 09 02 32 48 0045 09 02 32 46 0046 09 02 32 44 0047 09 02 32 42 0023 09 02 32 91 0048 09 02 32 40 0049 09 02 32 38 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select the waveform to be displayed and press SELECT The acquisition memory retains waveform records generated by the most recent triggers If a trigger is activated beyond the number of triggers that can be held the oldest waveform data are cleared Once the history becomes full each new trigger causes loss of the oldest waveform record in the memory Selected Record Number You can display any waveform from the history by entering its record number The newest current waveform is Record 0 the immediately previous waveform is Record 1 and soon The range for Selected Record No is therefore 0 to reta
51. Address using the jog shuttle then press SELECT to display the keyboard Enter the mail address of 40 characters or less If necessary move the cursor to Comment using the jog shuttle then press SELECT to display the keyboard Enter a comment or 30 characters or less Move the cursor to Mail Base Time using the jog shuttle then press SELECT to display the keyboard Enter the mail transmission time Move the cursor to Interval using the jog shuttle then press SELECT to select the mail interval IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 13 6 Using the Mail Function Fixed Interval Sending a Test Mail Transmission 13 Move the cursor to Mail Test with the jog shuttle then press SELECT to senda test transmission to the specified mail recipient Note e For keyboard soft keyboard operation see section 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings e For mail sent by this instrument the sender s address will be the same as the specified recipient address e When error history is included in the mail s contents the most recent errors appear at the top e Before using this function refer to section 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP and enter the TCP IP settings e If you set Interval to OFF mail is not transmitted at specified intervals You can transmit DL1720 DL1710 status information to a specified email address on the network at periodic intervals Mail Settings Mail Serve
52. CH1 L CH2 L Enter When patternB CH1 H CH2 H Enter Delay 1 us Pattern Trigger Section 6 10 Multiple trigger sources are selected and a trigger is activated when all of the trigger conditions set for each trigger source become true or false Trigger conditions are established by setting combinations of the state High or Low of each trigger source Furthermore one of the trigger sources can be used as the clock signal and triggering is synchronized with this clock signal Example a trigger is activated when CH1 L CH2 L CH3 L and CH4 L 1 The DL1720 is not equipped i with channels 3 and 4 CH1 j t l A Trigger is activated Pulse Width Trigger Section 6 11 The time period during which the specified condition is met or not met is compared with the specified time period The trigger condition is set with the AND of the signal state of each channel High Low or Don t Care or the AND of the window conditions of each channel IN OUT or Don t Care CH2 CH1 H H L H L CH2 H L H L H L H L 500 ns 300 ns 400 ns E gt o a 450 ns k I A A A DA B C IM 701710 01E 1 9 suonoun 1 3 Setting a Trigger The description of the figure above is as follows If CH1 H CH2 L CH3 X CH4 X Condition True Time 350 ns The DL1720 is not equipped with channels 3 and 4 The trigger is activated at point B if Pulse lt T The trigger is activ
53. Count under Reference Press SELECT to select which rising or falling edge to make the reference Setting the 1 Cycle Mode 26 Press the 1 Cycle Mode soft key to select ON or OFF MEASURE Mode a a Cycle Mod la T Range1 Item Delay 5 000di Next ON Setup Setup ON f6T Range2 1 2 Setting the Measurement Range 21 28 29 30 Press the T Range1 T Range2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to T Range1 Turn the jog shuttle to set the start of the measurement range Press the T Range1 T Range2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to T Range2 Turn the jog shuttle to set the end of the measurement range Selecting the Target Waveform for Distal Mesial and Proximal Points 31 32 33 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu MEASURE Mode a a Cycle Mod la T Range1 Item Delay 5 000di Next ON Setup Setup ON feT Rangez 7 5 000di Pressing the Trace soft key displays the measured waveform menu Press the soft key corresponding to the desired waveform The CH3 CH4 and Math2 soft keys are not displayed on the DL1720 MEASURE CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Math1 Math2 Next 272 Setting the Distal Mesial and Proximal Unit Dist Prox 34 35 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu Press the Dist Prox soft key to select the distal mesial or proximal unit Setting the Distal Mesial and Proximal Points Distal Mesial Proximal 36 37 Press th
54. Cursors Move the cursor on the waveform data and measure the waveform data values T The time difference from the trigger point at the cursor X The X axis value at Cursor Y The Y axis value at Cursor Movement Range of the Cursors When Not Displaying the X Y Waveform H Cursors can be moved in the range from 4 to 4 div from the center of the screen The resolution is 0 01 div V Cursors marker cursors and angle cursors can be moved in the range from 5 to 5 div from the center of the screen The resolution is as follows Resolution T div x 10 displayed record length 9 9 SISAJEUY WAOJOARM 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using 9 10 Movement Range of the Cursors When Displaying the X Y Waveform H Cursors and V Cursors can be moved in the range from 4 to 4 div from the center of the screen The resolution is 0 01 div Marker cursors can be moved in the range from 5 to 5 div from the center of the screen The resolution is as follows Resolution T div x 10 displayed record length Cursor Jump When Not Displaying the X Y Waveform You can make Marker cursors V cursors and angle cursors jump to the center of the zoom window The cursors can be jumped in the following manner For marker cursors to Z1 Make the selected marker jump to the Z1 window to Z2 Make the selected marker jump to the Z2 window V cursor and angle cursor C1 to Z1 Make Cursor1 jump to the Z1 window C1 to Z2 Make Cursor1 jump to th
55. D converter in accordance with the time axis settings The A D converter converts the voltages into digital values The Primary Processing Circuit then writes converted values into the primary memory at the appropriate sampling rate as determined by the time axis setting The secondary processing circuit performs averaging and other types of processing on the data in the primary memory and writes the resultant data to the acquisition memory The data written in the acquisition memory is then converted to waveform display data by the secondary processing circuit and transferred to the waveform processing circuit by which the data are stored in the display memory Waveforms are displayed on the screen based on the data stored in the display memory IM 701710 01E 1 2 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes Offset Voltage lt Section 5 5 gt When observing a voltage riding on top of a predetermined voltage an offset voltage can be applied to eliminate the predetermined voltage so that only the changes in the signal can be observed with higher voltage sensitivity Normally the offset voltage does not affect the cursor measurement values automated measurement of waveform parameters and computed values However you can turn ON offset cancel to apply the offset voltage to them See section 14 4 When offset cancel is OFF 1 V div Offset 0 V Position 0 div 1 V div Offset 2 V 500 mV div Offset 2 V FREES E Se CST ae are ee sy
56. DFF ON DEFF ON Infinite aes Selecting the Number of Waveform Acquisitions 4 Turn the jog shuttle to set the waveform acquisition count You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits In addition pressing RESET sets the count to Infinite Executing the Action On Trigger 5 Pressing the Exec soft key starts the waveform acquisition and executes the action on trigger Aborting the Action On Trigger 6 Pressing the Abort soft key or START STOP stops the waveform acquisition and aborts the action on trigger IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 6 15 Setting the Action On Trigger Operation to Perform when the Trigger is Activated The specified operation from the following list is performed every time a trigger is activated Hard Copy Outputs the screen image data to the destination Built in USB or Net Print Ethernet interface option that was specified in Copy to of the Copy menu Image Save Saves the screen image data to the output destination FD Zip disk or SCSI when SCSI and serial interface option are installed that you specified in the Image Save menu Save to File Saves the waveform data the automated measurement value of waveform parameters or snapshot waveforms to the storage medium FD Zip disk or SCSI option and so on specified in the File menu Buzzer Sounds an alarm Send Mail Sends a mail Ethernet Interface option For details see section 13 7 Using
57. DISPLAY 2 Pressing the Format soft key displays the format menu DISPLAY Format Interpol Graticule Scale Trace ccumu late Value Label Next Quad Sine A H O A ON ON OFF 1 2 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired format Quad and Hexa are not displayed on the DL1720 DISPLAY Single Dual Triad Quad Hexa cunulate Next OFF 1 72 4 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu DISPLAY Format Interpol Graticule Scale Trace ccunulate Label Next Value Dual Sine FO E ON ON OFF 1 2 Press the Mapping soft key to select Auto Fixed or User DISPLAY Translucent Mapping Next ON Auto 2 2 DISPLAY ans lucen Auto Fixed User Next ON 272 5 Pressing the Set Mapping soft key displays a menu used to assign the waveforms On the DL1720 the CH3 CH4 and Math2 settings are not displayed anslucent Mapping Ja Set Mapping ON User 8 1 8 1 Changing the Display Format Explanation 8 2 6 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the desired channel Pressing SELECT displays a menu used to set the number N 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select a number Pressing ESC closes the menu Repeat steps 5 to 7 as necessary Main Format Single 1 waveform window Quad 4 waveform windows DL1740 only Dual 2 waveform windows Hexa 6 waveform windows DL1740 only Triad 3 waveform windows Mapping Auto Windows are
58. DL1720 Scaling of Math1 and Math2 Waveforms Section 9 5 to 9 9 The instrument normally auto scales when displaying the computed waveform but manual scaling can also be selected If you select auto scaling the upper and lower value suitable for displaying the waveform is calculated from the voltage axis offset voltage type of computation and other factors of the waveform being computed If you select manual scaling then the upper and lower limits of the computed waveform display can be set to any desired values Phase Shifted Addition Subtraction and Multiplication Section 9 11 Displays the phase shifted waveforms of CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 or performs a computation using the phase shifted waveforms IM 701710 01E 1 5 Analyzing the Waveform Power Spectrum Display lt Section 9 9 gt FFT Fast Fourier Transform computation can be performed on the input signal to display its power spectrum This is useful when you want to check the frequency distribution of the input signal T lt Molin 3 T Y 9 1797E 66 Y Power Spectrum gt Waveform Three time windows are available a Rectangular window a Hanning window and a Flattop window The Rectangular window is effective for transient signals such as impulse waves which attenuate completely within the time window The Hanning window allows continuity of the signal by gradually attenuating the parts of the signal located near the
59. Duty Low Burst1i Int2xY 0Shot Burst2 co 0Shot 0 Pulse Delay source 10 Use the jog shuttle to highlight the parameter to be used in the search then press SELECT to assign the parameter to the channel Set the Condition Range 11 Press the Upper Lower soft key to highlight the Upper jog shuttle icon Select Condition Ja Item fe7T Rangei Paran 5 000di Search Parami DFF IN DUT 6T Rangez Exec 5 600di 12 Turn the jog shuttle to set the upper edge of the condition range Use the arrow keys to move between the digits Press RESET to return to the initial value XXX 13 Press the Upper Lower soft key to highlight the Lower jog shuttle icon 14 Turn the jog shuttle to set the lower edge of the condition range Use the arrow keys to move between the digits Press RESET to return to the initial value XXX 15 Repeat steps 6 14 to set Param1 through Param4 search Setting the Logic 16 Press the Logic soft key to select AND or OR Setting the Parameter Measuring Range 17 Press the T Range1 T Range2 soft key to highlight T Range1 Select Condition Ja Item Paran iv Search Parami DFF IN DUT Exec 18 Turn the jog shuttle to set the left edge of the measuring range Use the arrow keys to move between the digits Press RESET to return to the initial value XXX 19 Press the T Range1 T Range2 soft key to highlight T Range2 20 Turn the
60. Envelope Mode is Active Interleave mode OFF Interleave mode ON Interleave mode Interleave mode Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON OFF ON Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word 0 250 k 20s ik 200k ik fzook ik 200k fik fzook 400m _ 200k soom _ 200k Be k k 5 2 5 5 3 2 2 200 k 5 5 1k k k 250k 5k f2sok_ fsk esok soom 250k _ a00M_ 250k 0 0 2 200 k 200 k 250 k 200 k 200 k 250 k 200 k 200 k 250 k 200 k 200 k 250 k 200 k 200 k 250 k ee EEE A i eae 1 For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active 2 Roll mode display is available in shaded sections IM 701710 01E App 5 ES x pu ddy Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 500 kwords Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active When Envelope Mode is Active Interleave mode OFF Interleave mode ON Interleave mode Interleave mode Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON OFF ON fate rctdlen rte acran ite record er Sample orton rate face Sample _ Displayed rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate reco
61. GetData FTP Error PutData FTP Error AppendData FTP Error Client Handle FTP Error Others Cannot send data to a network printer Cannot send the e mail message Connecting to a NetDrive Wait until connection has been established Error in Setting 800 to 899 Code 800 801 804 806 814 819 821 836 840 841 842 843 846 847 848 850 851 IM 701710 01E Message Illegal date time Illegal file name Cannot change this parameter while data acquisition is in progress GO NO GO is in execution Please press the Abort key Duplicated label Cannot change when Channel Display is OFF or Math settings are invalid Cannot change when ExtClock is active Cannot change settings during action on trigger Cannot set the acquisition mode to Average when the trigger mode is set to Single or Single N It is not possible to make a setting that will result in the repetitive mode when the trigger mode is set to Single N Cannot specify A gt B N and A Delay B when the trigger gate is active Cannot set the trigger mode to Single or Single N when the acquisition mode is Average Cannot set the trigger mode to Single N during repetitive sampling mode Cannot set this parameter during repetitive sampling mode Not possible during the interleave mode Not possible in the current record length Cannot carry out computation at the current record length 15 2 Messages an
62. Hysteresis A B Always Determined as True IM 701710 01E 8 32 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function Display Position for Pulse Width Searches The position of the waveform displayed in the zoom screen will change in the following manner depending on the Type setting An example in which the polarity is H is shown below ne PUR ali na iT ae aes IV ri i r TET Co aed Po Aa anea Gla Fae ul es ces em ce aaa Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 Time Out V Zoom Screen Center Position Y Starting Point for the Next Search Pulse Time Width when the Specified Condition is Met T Specified Time Width The center position of the waveform displayed in the zoom screen differs between Pulse gt T and Time Out Auto Scroll Set the scroll soeed choosing from one of 7 steps The higher the number the faster the scrolling You cannot set any settings other than direction and speed while auto scrolling IM 701710 01E 8 33 Chpater 9 Waveform Analysis 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using Cursors lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 21 gt Relevant Keys CLEAR NAP TRACE OO HELP e Ca ED FILE MISC paroodia SETUP ae SPLA COPY MAGE SAE ae ae O SHIFT C wm A SEARCH O TRIG D V DIV TIME DIV OIO x AA The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 o 2 SIMPLE ENHANCED o o Operating Procedure Selecting the Cursor Type 1
63. IP and enter the TCP IP settings You can send the trigger time and other information to the specified network mail address as the action of a GO NO GO determination or an action trigger Mail Settings For details see section 13 6 Using the Mail Function Fixed Interval Data Sent from the DL1720 DL1740 The following five items are sent e Acquisition status Start Stop acquisition counter e Trigger time e GO NO GO success fail information Time of GO NO GO determination only see section 9 12 and 9 13 e Cause of failure Time of GO NO GO determination only see section 9 12 and 9 13 e Results of waveform parameter measurement Automatic measurement of waveform parameters See sections 9 2 and 9 4 and the time of GO NO GO determination by waveform parameters only see section 9 12 Sample Transmission Report Comment aaaaaa ACQ Status Stopped 1 Trigger Date and Time 2000 07 17 GO NOGO Status Success 9 Fail NOGO Factor Param4 Ch4 tWd Max Cl 4 16667V SDv C2 697 941mV Freq C3 500 0000kHz Wd C4 1 00us gt 17 28 59 38 1 IM 701710 01E 13 8 Accessing DL1720 DL1740 Drives from a Network Drive FTP Server Function lt For a description of this function refter to page 1 29 gt Relevant Keys CLEAR SNAP HELP OC LE LLL o CRE misc fonoa mari X Y MEN ENO PHASE setup pispLay Copy mace save o SHIFT SEARCH O TRIG D oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACT
64. Image to the External Storage M iUM cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 10 Chpater 11 Saving and Loading Data to and from the Storage Medium MWe FODD DISKS esera E wacel Gotan ae eas eave iene at faeces Stale cae a 11 1 112 ZP DISKS i cna aes ie tile echiara cia arhae gecclueewedere a a sie 11 2 11 3 Connecting MO Disk Drives or Hard Disks to the SCSI Interface Option 11 4 11 4 Formatting the Storage Medium cccccccccccceceeeeseeeseeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesssaaeaeaeeess 11 5 11 5 Changing the SCSI ID Number cece ccccceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaeaaeeeseeeeeeeesessasaaaaeseees 11 9 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data cccccccccccccceceeesseeeeeeeeeceeesesssaeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesssaaaasesees 11 10 11 7 Saving LOACING Setup Data seasea E ea e a E EN E 11 17 11 8 Saving Loading Snapshot Waveforms ccccccccccccsessseecceeeceeeessaeeseeeeeeeeeessesaaeeeseees 11 21 11 9 Saving the Results of the Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters 11 24 11 10 Changing the File Attributes Deleting Files no00000nnnnnnnnnnesssnnnnrnnrnrnsssnsnrrrrrereessse 11 26 11 11 COpyiNO File 22 s creccesteaccdsteet ewes eataiad gust sty aesacei ecw asneneraaeietadtuodeagtaateeetestentenesauaede 11 30 11 12 Changing the Directory File Name of the Storage Medium and Creating a Directory 11 34 Chpater 12 Trigger Input Trigger Output RGB Video Signal Output 12 1 12 2
65. Measured data of record 1 of CH1 Measured data of record 2of CH1 Measured data of record N of CH1 Measured data of record 1 of CH2 Measured data of record 2 of CH2 Measured data of record N of CH2 IM 701710 01E 11 7 Saving Loading Setup Data A N CAUTION Never remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or the floppy disk or the Zip disk icon is blinking This can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Relevant Keys SEAR O TRIG D CH o Non o ACTION DELAY GA The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press FILE 2 Pressing the File Item soft key displays the file item setting menu FILE a File Item a a Save Load Utility Setup 3 Press the Setup soft key FILE Setup Waveforn Snap Measure Image a Utility Selecting the Setup Data Selecting the Destination Medium 4 Pressing the Save soft key displays the save setting menu FILE File Item a a a Save Load Utility Setup 5 Pressing the File List soft key displays the file list dialog box a aFile Nane File List IM 701710 01E 11 17 wnIp n Helos y woz pue o e eq Hulpeo7 pue Bulnes 2 11 7 Saving Loading Setup Data 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select the save destination medium displayed with parentheses File List Path FDO Space 437248 byte File Nane Size Date Attr FD J lt THEVOL 1
66. Measurement of Waveform Parameters e The parameter name when the measured value is displayed is Dly Note If the Mode is set to Degree and the reference waveform is Trig the measured value shows kkk I Setting Proximal Mesial and Distal Dist Prox Unit According to Dist Prox setting Proximal Range O to 100 resolution 1 or voltage corresponding to 8 div resolution V div x 1 100 Mesial Range 0O to 100 resolution 1 or voltage corresponding to 8 div resolution V div x 1 100 Distal Range O to 100 resolution 1 or voltage corresponding to 8 div resolution V div x 1 100 Notes when Making Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters e The measured value will display if the measurement is not possible e Ifthe waveform is of small amplitude measurements may not produce correct results e lf there are two or more cycles of a waveform in the measurement range the measurement is made on the first waveform 1 Cycle Mode This mode is used to compute items related to the voltage axis or the area over one cycle after determining the cycle This is suited to items such as Rms and Avg that produce errors depending on the measurement range This does not affect the items related to the time axis or the area of the X Y waveforms 9 17 SISAJEUY WAOJOARM 9 3 Statistical Processing Relevant Keys Operating Procedure 9 18 CLEAR TRACE Gale ee S MEASURE A XY MENU MENU PHASE
67. Multiplication Section 9 5 Addition subtraction and multiplication can be performed between CH1 and CH1 to CH4 CH2 and CH1 to CH4 CH3 and CH1 to CH4 or Math1 and CH4 and CH1 to CH4 or Math1 or between CH1 and CH1 to CH2 and CH2 and CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 The result is displayed as waveform Math1 or Math2 or waveform Math1 on the DL1720 Addition and subtraction are useful for comparing signals to the standard signal checking the signal logic and comparing signal phases Multiplication is useful for checking power signals by applying voltage and current signals Addition Subtraction Multiplication Computed Waveform Computed Waveform Computed Waveform Binarization Section 9 6 Converts the selected waveform into a binarized waveform All voltages below the threshold become 0 while voltages above the threshold become 1 This operation is available for CH1 to CH4 and the Math1 waveform or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 Inverted Display Section 9 7 By multiplying the measured data by 1 the waveforms are displayed with their voltage axes inverted This operation can be performed on CH1 to CH4 and Math1 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 Differentiation and Integration Section 9 8 Differentiates or integrates the waveform on the specified channel This operation can be performed on CH1 to CH4 and Math1 or CH1 to CH2 for the
68. NO GO Determination Determination results number of successes failures are displayed on screen Functions other than START STOP and Abort soft key are inactive during determination When performing GO NO GO determination the trigger mode is automatically set to Single Determination is not possible when acquisition mode is set to Average Note The zone waveform you created is stored as setting information onto the floppy disk Zip disk the internal ROM and so on 9 59 SISAJEUY WWAOJOARM 9 14 Using the GO NO GO Signal Output Function Output Signal Output Connector Output Timing 9 60 NO GO OUT Signal The output signal level TTL level changes from high H to low L temporarily when a NO GO determination is made GO OUT Signal The output signal level TTL level changes from high H to low L temporarily when a GO determination is made Signal Output Circuit Diagram 5V GO OUT NOGO OUT ze HCT04 100 Q The format and pin arrangement of the output connector on the DL1720 DL1740 are as follows Format The connector uses a modular jack RJ12 Use the optional accessory 36973 sold separately for the cable If you are using a commercially sold cable 4 contact modular cable for telephone circuits wire te pins according to the following figure Pin Arrangement GO NO Asa Re S a a Pin Number Signal Logic 1 NC Unconnected 2 NC Unconnected 3 GO OUT Negative 4 NO GO O
69. Output Example when Mag is Set to Long Hi od 1 u f 4 CHI gt cT 10 4 IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 10 2 Outputting to the Built in Printer Option Output Format In addition to normal size long copy is possible in which the displayed waveform is magnified 2 to 20000 times before printing The magnification ratio varies depending on the T div and record length settings Outputting Optional Information Outputs the results of the setup information at the same time as the waveform Comments You can output a comment string consisting of up to 20 characters in the lower section Print Range Sets the range to output to the printer from 5 div to 5 div Preview The output image can be previewed using the specified output format Precautions to be Taken when Printing with the Built in Printer e Printing is not possible while the waveform acquisition is in progress e Only the main waveform is long copied e When displaying a waveform using the history memory function only the waveform selected for Selected Record No is long copied e Long copy is not possible when displaying X Y waveforms e Long copy of snapshot waveforms and accumulated waveforms is not possible 10 5 e eq U9919NS JO INd1nNO 10 3 Outputting Screen Images to a USB Printer Relevant Keys SEARCH O TRIG D oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input termina
70. Partition 1 of the SCSI device with an ID number of 5 NDO Network drive available with the Ethernet interface option Selecting the File Attributes Excepting Net Drive Select the attributes for each file from the following choices e R W Read and write possible e R Read only Cannot write to the file or delete the file Selecting the Files to be Deleted You can delete all files that have an asterisk to the left of the file name There are two methods available to select the files that are to be deleted e Selecting the Files One at a Time Place an asterisk to the left of the file names one at a time using the Set Reset soft key e Selecting All Files at Once Selecting a file or directory and pressing the All Set soft key places an asterisk on every file in the directory containing the selected file or directory IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 11 10 Changing the File Attributes Deleting Files Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box You can specify the type of files to display e extension Displays only the data file that was selected in the File Item setting menu and the data type menu m xk Displays all the files on the medium Properties Lists the file name extension file size the date it was saved the attributes and the comment for the selected file Displaying Compressed Images in the File List Selecting screen image data files from the File List causes a compressed image of the
71. Resolution cseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeneeans 1 4 IM 701710 01E Index WIGITION YTS Ue si wa nieu a a 15 9 i Cohoi ks Ree ae ent narn a ee eee 9 14 9 29 Message Language siicicesicsssciieetenexstonstechercedivecetbnaes te 14 4 MISC KOy 2 6 ec cahtess2utetehca st nA ccs aga sGeus Weak 2 4 MODE KOV seit heheh ee et he teh el es E 2 3 MODEL sc sacra ede E S ji MUITIDIIG ALON a aa E AE E a 1 24 MUNUDIV IAG sisne A AA 9 32 N Network Interface ocncicchriued ine Giecta aed Glee 1 30 No ISTO OL AU OT aeneae a 1 18 NOGO OUT Sri meer teem init eres Menernt tern A 16 8 NO GO QUT Signal eserita 9 60 Normal Acquisition Mode seseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeaes 7 3 Normal MOJE ss trian essen rte a E E EE REN 6 1 Normal Mode Acquisition Mode 0esseeeeeeeeeeeeaees 1 14 Normal Mode Trigger Mode sseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 11 Normal Statistical Processing cccccccssssseeseeeeeees 1 22 9 23 NGS C erroneo n e a EES S 1 10 6 37 O ON ET ses E RR 5 14 oset VON AGG ereo a a e 1 3 5 7 One to One Connection cece cece esas eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeaeeees 13 2 Operation Kays enra a a sexier wales 2 3 Optional Accessories ccccccccccccecceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeteess jii Optional Spare Parts s ninvcusioscsentaseccactwnede iv ORION ovis hi rwied dos eae cee rT Te i OR TIQQ G8 sy stros wvavedaascavsradeasenswancees veratentevsgutoceswanctans 1 10 6 29 O
72. Saving Loading Waveform Data Selecting the Waveform to be Saved 6 Pressing the Save soft key displays the save setting menu FILE File Item Data Type ry rs rs 2 Save Load Unload Utility Waveform Binary Pressing the Trace soft key displays the waveform menu a e Trace Range History P P Comp File List ave Exec All Main All ON Binary Press the soft key corresponding to the channel you wish to save CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1720 e All CH1 CH2 CH3 Mathi Math2 Selecting the Range of the Waveform to be Saved 9 10 11 Pressing the Range soft key displays the save range selection menu Press one of the Main to Z1 amp Z2 soft keys to select the range of waveforms to be saved a File Name Trace File List All Press the History soft key to select whether to save all the data in the history memory All or only the currently displayed waveform One Compressing the Data and Saving When Data Type is Set to Binary 12 Press the P P Comp soft key to select ON compress and save or OFF do not compress and save Compressed data cannot be loaded If P P Comp is turned ON when saving waveform data only the maximum and minimum values of the multiple data points existing at the same time position are saved In this way the file size can be reduced Selecting the Destination Medium Directory 13 14 15 Pressing the File List soft key displays the fil
73. Snap Grid Cursor Intensity 10 10 10 10 10 7 Turn the jog shuttle to set the brightness of the menu screen 8 In a similar fashion set the brightness for Waveform Snap Grid and Cursor items 14 2 IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 14 1 Setting the Screen Color and Brightness Screen Color You can set arbitrary colors for the following items The colors are set using R red G green and B blue ratios from 0 to 15 Menu Screen Fore Selected menu item Back Background Focus Selected cursor Select Selected menu Dialog Dialog box Shadow Background color of the selected menu Line Lines on the menu screen Waveform CH1 to CH4 Waveform or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 Back Background color of the waveform display area Others Snap Snapshot waveform Snap1 to 4 Loaded snapshot waveforms Grid Grid Cursor Cursor Marker Marker Brightness You can set the brightness for the following items from 1 to 15 steps Menu Menu screen Waveform Waveform Snap Snapshot waveform Grid Grid Cursor Cursor 14 3 suoljeiadC 18410 z 14 2 Changing the Message Language and Click Sound Relevant Keys NAP SNAP HELP Co Eee ai fuse Roca MATH Reser eect rA ER a rr stanrisror PHASE A SETUP ETT SPLAN COPY MAGE SAVE ES SAVE O SHIFT SEARCH O TRIG D V DIV TIME DIV ACTION DELAY 4 cn2 SIMPLE ENHANCED o o a Te The DL1720 is not equipped with
74. TTL ECL or the Current probes 700937 or 701930 Optional Accessories GO NO GO Determination lt Section 9 12 9 13 gt The GO NO GO function is useful when you want to inspect signals and track down abnormal symptoms on a production line making electronic equipment Two determinations are available GO NO GO operation using the Measurement of Waveform Parameters and using the zone This function detects whether an automatically measured value falls within the specified range and responds accordingly either by sounding the buzzer saving the waveform data to internal memory or disk printing out the screen image option or sending a mail Ethernet interface option In addition the determination results can be output by an external signal 132 IM 701710 01E 1 7 Other Useful Functions Displayed Data Output Functions lt Chapter 10 gt You use these functions to print the screen image to the optional built in printer or an exteral USB printer or a network printer to save the image data to the storage medium floppy disk Zip disk external SCSI device option or network drive Ethernet interface option Also the instrument can display a thumbnail miniature sample of the screen data saved to the storage medium This is useful for checking the contents of saved image data files This function is available on products with firmware version 1 30 or later Floppy Disk Drive or Zip Drive External SCSI Device
75. Turn the jog shuttle to set the desired color width DISPLAY Format Interpol Graticule Scale Trace ccumu late Value Labe1 Color a Quad Sine y Fy E ON DFF ON fo a IM 701710 01E 8 9 8 6 Accumulated Waveform Display Explanation 8 10 During normal operation the display is updated every time the trigger is activated making it difficult to capture transient conditions such as sudden distortion of waveforms By using the accumulate function the waveform display of the acquired data remains on the screen for the specified time Accumulate Mode Persist Accumulate using each channel color Displayed for the specified time period by gradually lowering the brightness Color Accumulate using eight colors that indicate the frequency of waveforms in the data Accumulation Period During Persist Mode When using the persistence mode select the period over which waveforms are accumulated from the list below If you select infinite the accumulation is carried out infinitely The default value is 100 ms 100 ms 200 ms 500 ms 1s 2 s 5 s 10 s 20 s 50 s and Infinite Grade Width for Color Grade Mode In color grade mode the frequency of data value occurrence is indicated in eight colors as illustrated below The grade width can be set within the range given below The default setting is 16 Overlapping display is performed indefinitely in color grade mode 2 to 2048 steps of 2 Higher Frequency
76. Width Pulse lt T Coup ing 9 001 OFF PN 0 08 Setting the Hold Off 15 Set the hold off time according to the procedures given in 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 6 11 Setting the Width Pulse lt T Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 Time Out Trigger ENHANCED Pulse gt T When the time during which the status pattern is met is longer than the specified pulse width the trigger is activated when the condition changes Pulse lt T When the time during which the status pattern is met is shorter than the specified pulse width the trigger is activated T1 lt PLS lt T2 When the time during which the status pattern is met is in between the two specified pulse widths the trigger is activated Time Out The trigger is activated when the time during which the status pattern is met becomes longer than the specified pulse width The point at which the trigger is activated differs between Pulse gt T and Time Out as indicated in the figure below ue gt 100 ns TeL gt lt 100 ns CHI j l CHi l Trigger Trigger When Pulse gt T CH1 H and Time 400 ns When Pulse Time Out CH1 H and Time 40 Pulse lt T Setup Example 300 ns lt gt l CH1 k l CH2 Trigger CHi L H L H cH2 L H L H L 300 ns 500 ns A e Pulse lt T Condition CH1 H CH2 H Time 400 ns Conditions of Each Channel 0 ns When the window trigger tur
77. You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the hysteresis to 0 3 div e Setting the Count 10 Turn the jog shuttle to set the count and press SELECT You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the count to 0 e Setting the Start Point 11 Turn the jog shuttle to set the start position of the search Press SELECT You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET sets the position to 5 div 12 Press ESC to close the search condition setting dialog box Setting the Display Position of the Search Results When Zoom Mode is Z1 amp Z2 or Main amp Z1 amp Z2 13 Press the Result Window soft key to select Z1 or Z2 SEARCH Type fa Result j ai Fag 5 A Pos Searched Setup Window 6 006di4 Pattern ka Edge zi 22 I zz fag ai a ris No Match Executing the Search 14 Pressing the Exec soft key starts the search The search results are displayed in the zoomed waveform display position selected in step 13 You can search 1000 times using the same conditions Displaying the Previous Search Results 15 Press the Searched Pattern soft key 16 Turn the jog shuttle to select the number of the search result to be displayed Newer search results are displayed with higher numbers result 2 is newer than result 1 8 19 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function When Performing a Serial Pattern Search 1 Press SHIFT to activate shift
78. Z1 Displays the main waveform in the top window and zoomed waveform of zoom box 1 in the bottom window Main amp Z2 Displays the main waveform in the top window and zoomed waveform of zoom box 2 in the bottom window Z1 amp 22 Displays the zoomed waveform of zoom box 1 in the top window and the zoomed waveform of zoom box 2 in the bottom window Main amp Z1 amp Z2 Displays the main waveform in the top window the zoomed waveform of zoom box 1 in the lower left window and the zoomed waveform of zoom box 2 in the lower right window Selecting the Zoomed Trace Allocation The traces CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2 or CH1 CH2 and Math1 for the DL1720 whose Allocation is turned ON are zoomed If the allocation is OFF the trace is not zoomed You cannot allocate channels whose display is turned OFF Display Format of Zoomed Waveforms Format Similar to the main waveform 6 types or 4 types for the DL1720 of display formats are available You cannot set different formats for Z1 and Z2 Main Single Dual Triad Quad DL1740 only Hexa DL1740 only Selecting Main results in the same format as when Format is specified for DISPLAY Zoom Rate Z1 Mag Z2 Mag e The maximum zoom rate varies depending on the displayed record length Maximum zoom rate displayed record length 50 or 40 Note that the displayed record length is not necessarily the same as the record length of the acquisition memory For details regarding the
79. above are available only if interleave mode is ON A N uae eS Restriction During repetitive sampling waveform acquisition is not possible when the trigger mode is Single N 7 9 7 7 Using the History Memory Relevant Keys lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 17 gt CLEAR NAP ae 100 someon aca stanr sr0P SETUP oe a me ae O SHIFT C wm A SEA O TRIG D V DIV TIME DIV ACTION DELAY ED oe o2 smpe ENHANCED m Oo The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Recalling Data from the History Memory 7 10 1 2 Press HISTORY Press the Select Record soft key HISTORY fe select Display eStart Reda earch Mod Record 0 Show Map 0 One A11 f End Rec OFF Turn the jog shuttle to set the record number that you wish to recall Specify a record number in the range Start Rec to End Rec Press the Display Mode soft key to select One or All Go to step 5 if you selected All Otherwise go to step 8 Setting the Accumulation Range When Display Mode is All 3 6 Press the Start Rec End Rec soft key HISTORY fe Select Display fgstart Reda earch Mod Record 0 Show Map 0 One All f End Rec OFF Turn the jog shuttle to set the first record number to be accumulated In a similar fashion set the end record number End Rec IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E
80. ae zj SEA V DIV TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Setting the Trigger Type 1 Press ENHANCED 2 Pressing the Type soft key to display the trigger type menu ENHANCED Type a a E Count Hold Off Bet Patter Levely uS A gt B N Coupling 1 0 08 3 Press the A B N soft key NHANCED_ i gt ro A Delay B Pattern Width OR TY Hold Off Cus 0 08 Setting the Status and Condition for Conditions A and B 4 Pressing the Set Pattern soft key displays a menu used to set the status and condition for conditions A and B On the DL1720 settings for CH3 and CH4 are not displayed CH1 CH2 Condition Enter Enter Enter 5 Set condition A Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel to which the Status of condition A will be set 6 Press SELECT to select H L or X 7 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the Condition position of condition A 8 Press SELECT to select Enter or Exit 9 In asimilar fashion set condition B IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 6 8 Setting the A B N Trigger ENHANCED Setting the Level 10 Pressing the Level Coupling soft key displays a menu used to set the level coupling hysteresis and HF rejection On the DL1720 settings for CH3 and CH4 are not displayed Level CH1 0 0 vI tE I DC I OFF cuz C oov w __ _orF_ cus C oov K O e OF cH oov w I e F
81. brackets lt gt File List Path ZPO Space 74729472 byte File Nane Size Date Attr ZP NDO J lt IMAGE gt 2601 06 26 14 43 RW lt MEASURE gt 2601 06 26 14 33 RW lt THEVOL 1 gt 2661 06 04 18 38 R W lt SETUP gt 2601 05 28 19 28 R U lt SNAP gt 2001 05 28 17 02 RW lt WAVEFORM gt 2601 05 17 19 33 RW lt THEF IN 1 gt 2001 05 15 16 46 R W lt OTHERS gt 2001 04 27 10 47 RW IMAGE a Format Color a a aFile Name Thumbnail Comment File List TIFF OFF 11 Pressing SELECT displays the contents of the selected storage medium or the directory For details related to setting the storing destination see section 11 6 Display of Compressed Images Firmware Version 1 30 or Later 12 When Image is selected under File Item selecting a screen image data file files with the tif omp or ps extensions in the File List window and pressing SELECT causes the screen image file s compressed image to appear in the upper right portion of the file list 2601 07 03 11 47 24 J Stopped 31 BSS a 1 lt lt Mainz 10k gt gt File List Path ZPO Space 74729472 byte File Name Size Date ZP NDO 1 lt gt 2661 06 20 14 43 R W 969 TIF 38574 2001 07 03 99 52 R U 968 TIF 38574 2001 07 03 09 39 RW fit 007 TIF 38574 2001 06 22 13 31 R U 004 TIF 38574 2001 06 22 13 31 R U 006 TIF 38574 2001 06 22 13 29 RW P 905 T
82. can be specified redundantly T Rangei T Range2 T Range3 T Range4 T Rangei T Range3 T Range2 T Range4 Area2 i gg r Area1 Area2 Area Dual Area Measurement Mode Mode If you set the mode in the Item Setup menu to ON the measurement result is displayed in the two areas You can select User1 through User4 Measurement Trace Trace You can select the trace from 11 types or from 8 types on the DL1720 CH1 to CH2 Math1 None and Const1 through Const4 CH1 through 4 Math1 Math2 None and Const1 through Const4 Const1 through Const4 are constants that can be specified arbitrarily Measurement Parameters Items Select from 27 types of measurement parameters P P Max Min Rms Avg Sdev High Low OShot OShot Freq Period Rise Fall Width Width Duty Burst1 Burst2 Pulse Delay AvgFreq AvgPeriod Int1TY Int2TY Inti XY and Int2XY For details on each item see the Measurement Parameters Items and Delay between channels Delay Setup sections in section 9 2 If you set the measurement trace to None or Const1 through Const4 you cannot select the measurement parameter Computation Ope Select the computation to be performed between items of Areai and Area2 You can select or If you set the measurement trace to None the computation is not performed In this case the value of the measurement parameter in the other area is displayed Setting Proximal Mesial and Distal Dist Prox
83. control is set to both Cursor and Cursor2 both cursors are moved For V Vertical Cursors When Not Displaying the X Y Waveform Selecting the Waveform to be Measured Refer to steps 1 3 to set the Type to Vertical Degree CURSOR Press the Trace soft key to display the waveform selection menu CURSOR ursor Jum C1 to 21 OFF orizontal Vertical Marker eS es ee ee Type Trace ff Cursori 4 000d i Vertical CH1 6 Cursorz 4 000di ump Exec Press the soft key corresponding to the desired waveform to select it The CH3 CH4 and Math2 soft keys are not displayed on the DL1720 All CH1 CH2 CH3 4 000di Moving the Cursor CH4 Mathi Math2 Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 soft key to highlight the jog shuttle icon for Cursor1 7 Move Cursor1 using the jog shuttle 2000 10 31 16 16 16 Jo Normal Stopped 265 7 500kS S5S 2Zms div f l lt lt Mainz 10k gt gt CH1 10 1 0 500 U div EENE ees e sess tone saad setulae aan tiai aar E EE Re IRIS EL CES TREE TORY CARE RE MORTALS ORRIN EE TY AA OCONEE ASEE TAY Ete EON Se ace ee page o F Auto x1 6 000ms Y1 125 000mV 0 010 V FEE 00t E R e e bn 875 000mV f Cursori 3 000d i E Cursor2 4 000d i In the same manner move Cursor2 If you highlight the jog shuttle icon for Cursor1 and Cursor2 you can move them at the same time 9 2 IM 701710 01E 9 1 Measuring Wa
84. cord into an AC outlet that meets the following conditions The AC outlet must be of 3 pin type with a protective grounding terminal Rated supply voltage 100 to 120 VAC 220 to 240 VAC Permitted supply voltage range 90 to 132 VAC 198 to 264 VAC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Permitted supply voltage frequency range 48 to 63 Hz Maximum power consumption when the built in printer is used 200 VA Main Power Switch 3 Pin AC Outlet 1 Supplied Wth Instrument IM 701710 01E 3 5 espn Bung suonnes ld e 3 3 Connecting the Power Cord Turning ON OFF the Main Power Switch Main power switch rear panel on the right Press the switch to the right to turn it ON press the switch to the left to turn it OFF Turning ON OFF the Power Switch Items to be Checked before Turning ON the Power Check that the instrument is installed correctly as instructed in section 3 2 Installing Check that the power cord is connected correctly as sown in section 3 3 Connecting the Power Cord Turning the Power ON OFF POWER switch The power is turned ON and OFF alternately as the switch is pressed ON E l L Response at Power ON Self test and calibration start automatically when the power switch is turned ON If the check results are satisfactory the normal waveform display screen will appear Note e Wait at least 10 seconds after turning the power OFF before turning it back ON again e If calibrat
85. div DC to 500 MHz 5 mV div to 2 mV div DC to 400 MHz 1 MQ input defined at the tip of the probe when using the passive probe 700988 10 V div to 10 mV div DC to 400 MHz 5 mV div to 2 mV div DC to 300 MHz 10 Hz or less When using the 10 1 probe standard accessory 1 Hz or less 1 ns or less Larger of 1 25 mV or 0 15 div typical 34 dB typical at identical voltage sensitivity DC to 500 MHz A D Conversion Resolution Probe Attenuation Settings Bandwidth Maximum Sample Rate Maximum Record Length 1 As measured following calibration after 30 minute warmup with internal clock timebase under standard operating 8 bits 24 LSB div 1 1 10 1 100 1 1000 1 100 MHz or 20 MHz band limit ON OFF Realtime sampling mode With interleave ON 1 GS s With interleave OFF 500 MS s Repetitive sampling mode 100 GS s With interleave ON 1 Mwords CH With interleave OFF 500 kwords CH conditions as described on section 16 11 2 For repetitive events The frequency region for single shot is DC to sampling frequency 2 5 or the frequency region for the repetitive event whichever is less 3 Measured under following conditions input block shorted 10 kWord record length Normal acquisition mode accumulation OFF 1 1 probe attenuation 4 The typical value is a representative or standard velue It is not a warranted value IM 701710 01E 16 1 3 suol eoyioeds 16 2 Trigger S
86. e The search result is void if the following operations are carried out Starting data acquisition Changing the Search Setup setting Shifting the phase of the source or the clock e Searching is not possible when setting CH2 or CH4 or CH2 only for the DL1720 as the clock channel while in interleave mode e Searching is not possible when all patterns are set to X e Patterns from undisplayed waveforms will not be referenced during searcles Determination when Using the Edge for the Search When the peak immediately after the rising edge of the waveform is less than or equal to the upper limit of the hysteresis or when the peak immediately after the falling edge is greater than or equal to the lower limit of the hysteresis it is determined as false not counted as a specified edge Determined as False Detected Position The Upper Value of Hysteresis The Lower Value __ of Hysteresis gt Specified Level a _ f Start Point of the Search When the Edge is Set to Rising and the Count is Set to 2 Determination when Searching Using a Serial Pattern The points between the Thr Upper and Thr Lower are always determined to be true matches the specified status If such a point is included at the time the pattern is checked a message is displayed as a notification High Thr Upper Thr Lower A B Always Determined as True 8 31 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zo
87. entry box If the soft key is pressed again after the eighth string the display will return to the first string 2 Make appropriate corrections to the recalled string and confirm it according to steps 1 to 4 that were described above in Entering a Character String and Operation to Temporarily Store Character Strings At this point the confirmed string is temporarily stored Keys other than Characters DEL Deletes the character on the cursor INS Switches between insert and overwrite modes The indicator is lit when in insert mode SPACE Enters a space ENT Confirms the displayed characters CAPS Toggles uppercase and lowercase characters Number of Characters and Types Available Number of Characters Available Characters Date time Specified number 0to9 File name 1 to 8 Oto9 AtoZ _ Display image comment 0 to 20 All characters including space File comment O to 25 All characters including space Mail address 0 to 40 All ASCII characters on the keyboard including space User name Login name Oto 15 All ASCII characters on the keyboard including space Password Oto 15 All ASCII characters on the keyboard including space Ol M a I e Comments and file names can both contain both uppercase and lowercase letters However file names are not case sensitive The following five file names are not allowed due to MS DOS restrictions AUX CON PRN NUL and CLOCK e You cannot enter two
88. equipped with a built in printer Optional Accessories The following optional accessories are available On receiving these optional accessories make sure that all the items that you ordered have been supplied and that they are undamaged If you have any questions regarding optional accessories or if you wish to place an order contact the dealer from whom you purchased the instrument Differential Probe Differential Probe FET Probe A 700939 700924 700925 Differential Probe Current Probe Current Probe ES 701920 700937 ee ae IM 701710 01E ili Checking the Contents of the Package Optional Spare Parts The following optional spare parts are available On receiving these optional spare parts make sure that all the items that you ordered have been supplied and that they are undamaged If you have any questions regarding optional spare parts or if you wish to place an order contact the dealer from whom you purchased the instrument Part Name Part No Roll chart B9850NX 400 MHz passive probe 700988 Fuse A1352EF Front panel protection cover B9989FA clear Minimum Q ty Remarks 5 1 2 1 Thermo sensible paper Total Input impedance 10 MQ Length 1 5m 4 A 250 V IM 701710 01E Safety Precautions This instrument is an IEC safety class instrument provided with terminal for protective grounding The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation servic
89. gt 2600 16 31 69 25 625 TIF 2606 16 31 18 62 024 TIF 2600 10 31 18 62 623 TIF 2600 16 31 18 61 022 TIF 2600 16 31 18 60 021 TIF 2000710731 17 59 020 TIF 2600 16 31 17 58 9019 TIF 2000710731 17 57 018 TIF 2600 16 31 17 56 017 TIF 2000710731 17 55 016 TIF 2600 10 31 17 54 015 TIF 2600 10 31 17 54 Py Filter Property E a Fa Press SELECT to confirm the selection Selecting the Destination Directory Use this only when there are directories on the medium 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select the save destination directory displayed in angle brackets lt gt 9 Press SELECT to confirm the selection The Path _____ box on the top left corner of the File List dialog box displays the selected medium directory Selecting lt gt moves to a higher level directory Setting the File Name Comment 10 Pressing the File Name soft key displays the file name setting menu File Nang a Filter Property ave Exec SET a Setup 11 Turn the jog shuttle to select Auto Naming File List Path FDO Space 398336 b File Name amp Comment File Name ino 1 auto Naning lt THEVOL 1 gt 026 TIF File Name 625 TIF 024 TIF Comment C 023 TIF 022 TIF 021 TIF 020 TIF 619 TIF 2600 16 31 17 57 618 TIF 38574 2000 10 31 17 56 R U 017 TIF 38574 2000 10 31 17 55 R W 016 TIF 38574 2000 10 31 17 54 R U FILE ave Exec Setup a Propert
90. is 0 to 3600 s The default setting is 15 s 13 13 uodo ddej19 U JOUIBUI 3 13 5 Sending Screen Image Data to a Network Printer LPR Client Function lt For a description of this function refter to page 1 29 gt Relevant Keys re SOF neve JO Tt Woo Crate msc Jfonosd mara X Y VENG S Gor uae sa 2 O TRIG D oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED TIME DIV ACTION _ DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Entering Settings for a Network Printer 1 Press MISC 2 Press the Network soft key then press the Net Print Setup soft key to display the settings menu MISC alibrationRemote Cnti SCSI ID Network Bysten Cnfgj vervieu Next 1 2 a a a a a TCP IP User Mail Net Drive f Net Print Others Comect Setup Account Setup Setup Setup Log List 3 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to LPR Server then press SELECT to display the keyboard Net Print Setup LPR Server 10 6 111 222 LPR Name PASSTHRU MISC a a a a a TCP IP User Mail Net Drive Net Print Others Comect Setup Account Setup Setup Setup Log List 4 Enter the printer server address If you are using a DNS specify it by name 5 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to LPR Name then press SELECT to display the keyboard 6 Enter the printer name Note For keyboard soft keyboard operation see section 4 1 Entering Values and Character Str
91. is not used Note also that the insturment treats an A D output value of 0 as if it were a 1 The screen s effective display range extends approximately 5 29 divisions in each direction from the screen s center line However if the vertical axis position is moved while the data acquisition is stopped the effective data range also moves by the same amount IM 701710 01E Vertical Position lt Section 5 2 gt Since a total of four input waveforms or two for the DL1720 can be displayed they may overlap each other making observation difficult In this case the waveforms can be moved in the vertical direction so that they can be observed more easily The vertical position mark can be set to any value in the range between 4 div Changing the V div setting the vertical axis setting is rescaled with respect to the vertical position 1 2 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes Position 2 div Position 0 div Position 2 div Time Axis lt Sections 5 10 and 5 11 gt Selection of the Timebase With the default settings sampling timing is controlled by the clock signal output from the timebase circuit of the instrument refer to the Block Diagram section 1 1 The sampling timing can be controlled by an external clock signal instead of the clock signal from the timebase circuit An external clock signal can be input to the EXT CLOCK IN terminal on the rear panel This ex
92. jog shuttle you can undo the change by pressing RESET 4 1 suoeiado uowwos gt 4 1 4 2 Entering Values and Character Strings Entering a Character String The date time file name and comment can be entered using the keyboard displayed on the screen Operate the keyboard using the jog shuttle the SELECT key and arrow key to enter a character string as follows Keyboard Operation 1 Turn the jog shuttle and move the cursor to the character you wish to enter The A and W soft keys can be used to move the cursor up and down 2 Press SELECT to confirm the character entry If a character string is already entered use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the position at which you wish to enter the character 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to enter all the characters 4 ENT onthe keyboard and press SELECT The character string is confirmed and the keyboard disappears The ENT soft key can be used to confirm the string and hide the keyboard At this point the confirmed string is temporarily stored If RESET is pressed before confirming the character string the entire string is cleared 200017107 17 1621 E ir ain Stopped 157s AnsAtiv 50 0 U diyv DC Full CH4 10 1 56 6 Udi DC Full Edge CH1 uto 0 0 Y Symbol indicating the 0 Confirms the displayed characters CAPS a capital letter INSERT CAPS a small letter Recall the temporary stored character string
93. less 7 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Password then press SELECT to display the keyboard IM 701710 01E 13 11 uodo ddej19 U JOUIBUIA 3 13 4 Saving Screen Image Data to a Network Drive 13 12 8 Enter the password of 15 characters or less for the login name Net Drive Setup FTP Server 156 9 222 111 Login Name YOKOGAWA Password WHOOO Time Out sec MISC Pns TCP IP User Mail Net Drive Net Print Others Comect Setup Account Setup Setup Setup Log List 9 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Timeout then press SELECT to set the timeout time The available setting range is 0 to 3600 s Note e For keyboard soft keyboard operation see section 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings e If Login Name is set to anonymous it is not necessary to enter a password Connecting to a Network Drive 10 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Connect then press SELECT to make the connection If the connection was made successfully the mr icon appears in the upper right of the screen Saving the Screen Image 11 Press SHIFT to activate shift mode Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 12 Press IMAGE SAVE 13 Press the File List soft key to display the File List and select NDO Net Drive Zero IMAGE Format Color a a aFile Name Comment File List TIFF OFF Path NDO Space 2147463647 byte File Nane Size 14 Fo
94. not displayed on the DL1720 Pulse lt T Select Level Polarity Hysteresis Tine Start Point Setting the Level 8 Use the jog shuttle to set the level then press SELECT Use the arrows to move between the digits Pressing RESET restores the value to 0 V Setting the Polarity 9 Press SELECT to select H or L Setting the Hysteresis 10 Use the jog shuttle to set the hysteresis then press SELECT Use the arrow keys to move the arrows between the digits Pressing RESET restores the value to 0 3 div e Setting the Time 11 Use the jog shuttle to set the count then press SELECT Use the arrow keys to move the arrows between the digits Pressing RESET restores the value to minimum resolution 1 sample rate Set Time1 and Time2 if you selected T1 lt PLS lt T2 in step 6 e Setting the Start Point 12 Use the jog shuttle to set the search start position then press SELECT Use the arrow keys to move the arrows between the digits Pressing RESET restores the value to 5 div 13 Press ESC to close the dialog box Setting the Search Results Display Position When Zoom Mode is Z1 amp Z2 or Main amp Z1 amp Z2 14 Press the Result Window soft key to select Z1 or Z2 SEARCH Result a a Hag ay 21 Pos Searched morn rae 6 006di4 Pattern fae Width zz o zz fag 6 oi No Match Executing the Search 15 Press the Exec soft key to perform the search The search results are displayed in the zoom wa
95. of every file in the directory containing the selected file or directory These directories and files will be copied The name of the All Set soft key changes to All Reset Resetting All Selected Copy Source 10 Pressing the All Set soft key removes the asterisk to the left of every file in the directory containing the selected file or directory The directories and files will not be copied The name of the All Reset soft key changes to All Set 11 31 WINIPs Helos y woz pue o e eq Hulpeo7 pue Bulnes 2 11 11 Copying Files Selecting the Copy Destination 11 Press the Dest Dir soft key The copy execution menu and the copy destination file list dialog box appear Function a Filter pa etzReset All Set Property Attr Dest Dir Copy SET e File List Utility Path FDO Path FDO Space 830464 byte Space 830464 by File Name Size Date Attr File Name FDO FDO J lt THEVOL 1 gt CHAPT 15 TIF CHAPT 14 TIF CHAPT 13 TIF CHAPT 12 TIF CHAPT 11 TIF CHAPT 10 TIF CHAPTO69 TIF CHAPTO 8 TIF lt THEVOL 1 gt CHAPT 15 TIF CHAPT 14 TIF CHAPT 13 TIF CHAPT 12 TIF CHAPT 11 TIF CHAPTO10 TIF CHAPTO09 TIF CHAPTOO8 TIF CHAPT 6 TIF 2600 16 31 15 69 2600 16 31 18 41 2600 16 31 18 40 2600 16 31 18 37 2600 16 31 18 36 2600716731 18 35 2600 16 31 18 35 2600 10 31 18 33 2600 16 31 18 36 2600 16 31 18 29 R U R U R U R U R U R W
96. on Dual Areas Selecting the Target Waveform of Distal Mesial and Proximal Points 22 Press ESC 23 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu 24 Press the Trace soft key to display the target waveform selection menu 25 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired waveform to select the target waveform The CH3 CH4 and Math2 soft keys are not displayed on the DL1720 MEASURE CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mathi Math2 Next 2 72 Unit for Distal Mesial and Proximal Points Dist Prox 26 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu 27 Press the Dist Prox soft key to select the unit for distal mesial and proximal points Setting the Distal Mesial and Proximal Points Distal Medial and Proximal 28 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu 29 Press the Distal Mesial or Proximal soft key Dist Prox 6 Mesial 7 30 Set the distal point mesial point and proximal point using the jog shuttle Setting the High and Low Points 31 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu 32 Press the High Low soft key to select Auto or MaxMin Dist Prox 6 Mesial 7 9 28 IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 9 4 Performing Automated Measurements of Waveform Parameters on Dual Areas You can perform automated measurement of various measurement parameters waveform parameters on the data retrieved in the acqu
97. or more atmarks in succession Connecting a USB Keyboard You can connect a USB keyboard for entering file names comments and other information In addition the keys on the keyboard are assigned to the keys on the front panel of the DL1720 DL1740 which allows you to operate the DL1720 DL1740 ina similar fashion See appendix 5 PRN KBD Terminal When connecting a USB keyboard to the DL1720 DL1740 connect a USB cable to the PRN KBD terminal There are two PRN KBD terminals 12 3 4 Pin No Signal name Port 1 1 Vbus 5 V 2 D Data 3 D Data Port 2 4 GND Ground IM 701710 01E 4 3 suoeiado UuowWwo gt 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings Keyboards that can be Used The keyboards that can be used depend on the type of message language that you selected in section 14 2 English or Japanese A 104 USB keyboard English or a 109 USB keyboard Japanese that conforms to USB Human Interface Devices HID Class Ver 1 1 can be used e When the message language is English 104 keyboard e When the message language is Japanese 109 keyboard Note e Connect only the keyboards that are allowed However operation of USB keyboards connected to a USB hub or those that have mouse connectors is not guaranteed e For USB keyboards that have been tested for compatibility contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual Connection Procedure When connecting a USB keyboard directly connect t
98. record as 0 Computation and automatic measurement of waveform parameters are always performed on the currently displayed waveform i e the waveform identified by the record No designated for Selected Record No Analysis of old data is possible as long as the history memory content remains unchanged after acquisition is restarted In roll mode only the record most recently acquired when acquisition was stopped will be loaded into record No 0 Time at acquisition end is displayed under Show map Turning OFF the power will delete the entire contents of the history memory IM 701710 01E 7 8 Searching the Historical Data Using Zone History Search Function lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 26 gt Relevant Keys Co MENU MENU PHASE X Y setup pIsPLay CoPyY MAGE SAVE O SHIFT SEARCH O TRIG D D SIMPLE ENHANCED TIME DIV ACTION _ DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Selecting the Search Mode 1 Press HISTORY 2 Pressing the Search Mode soft key displays the search mode selection menu HISTORY 6 select Display gStart Rega earch Mod Record o Show Map o All End Rec OFF 0 3 Press the Zone soft key 6 select Display Start Rega OFF zone Parameter Record o Shou Map o All End Rec 0 Selecting the Search Zone Select Zone 4 Pressing the Search Setup soft key displays the search condition setting
99. screen data to appear in the upper right portion of the File List Screen image data is the only type of compressed image that is displayed The compressed images of waveform and setting data are not displayed Also file name and color information are not displayed in the compressed image Note e You cannot delete files while data acquisition is in progress e Deleted data cannot be recovered Make sure not to erase the wrong files e Directories can be deleted if there are no files in them e If an error occurs while deleting multiple files the files after the error will not be deleted e Directory attributes cannot be changed e This function can not be used in conjunction with FTP server function or LPR client function e Screen image data and thumbnail display data is saved together as a file pairs If you set the designation filter of the files displayed in the file list to then process Delete Rename Copy each file individually the thumbnail function becomes disabled 11 29 wnip n Helos 9y Wold pue o e eq Hulpeo7 pue Bulnes 2 11 11 Copying Files A N CAUTION Never remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or the floppy disk or the Zip disk icon is blinking This can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Relevant Keys Z SEARCH O TRIG D oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal
100. selected in the File Item setting menu and the data type menu x Displays all the files on the medium 11 32 IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 11 11 Copying Files Properties Lists the file name extension file size the date it was saved the attributes and the comment for the selected file Displaying Compressed Images in the File List Selecting screen image data files from the File List causes a compressed image of the screen data to appear in the upper right portion of the File List Screen image data is the only type of compressed image that is displayed The compressed images of waveform and setting data are not displayed Also file name and color information are not displayed in the compressed image Note You cannot copy files while the data acquisition is in progress If an error occurs while copying multiple files the files after the error will not be copied Directory attributes cannot be changed If a file with the same name exists at the destination copying is not allowed You cannot copy the same files to another directory immediately after copying those files You must again select the files you wish to copy This function can not be used in conjunction with FTP server function or LPR client function Screen image data and thumbnail display data is saved together as a file pairs If you set the designation filter of the files displayed in the file list to then process Delete Rename Copy each file indi
101. soft key to select f 4 or f Setting the Trigger Coupling 7 Press the Coupling soft key to select DC or AC Note The trigger coupling setting applies to simple trigger and enhanced trigger IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 6 5 Setting the Edge Trigger SIMPLE Setting the HF Rejection 8 Pressing the HF Reject soft key displays an HF rejection menu 9 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired frequency to select HF rejection Source Level Slope Coupling OFF 20MHz 15kHz CH1 0 0 Y Ft AC Setting the Hysteresis 10 Press the Hysteresis soft key to select A4 or ZZ Setting the Hold Off 11 Set the hold off time according to the procedures given in 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time An edge trigger is generated when the trigger source signal crosses a specified level Selecting the Trigger Source Select from the following list of choices e CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 e Ext EXT TRIG IN terminal on the rear panel or EXT terminal on the front panel of the D1720 see section 6 6 Setting the External Trigger SIMPLE e Line power signal see section 6 7 Generating a Trigger Using the Power Signal SIMPLE Setting the Trigger Level Range 8 div within the screen Resolution 0 01 div For example the resolution is 0 02 mV when the V DIV setting is 2 mV div You can also reset the trigger level to the current offset voltage with one key operation Se
102. summation of the triangular area of the X Y waveform Int2XY The summation of the trapezoidal area of the X Y waveform For details regarding the area calculations see Appendix 2 How to Calculate the Area of a Waveform Delay between Channels The time difference between the rising or falling edges of trace waveforms or trigger points is called the delay between channels Measurement Range gt 1 count N1 count Setting Example eEdge Polarity Rising l l l l l l Reference Mesial Line E t N1 1 to 9 Waveiormn i dge Coun N1 1 to 9 l l Delay between Channels l l 1 count N2 count Setting Example of Measurement Waveform Edge Polarity y Falling l Edge Count N2 1 to 9 Measurement Waveform e If Mode is set to Time or Degree measurements will be made The default setting is OFF Time Display the delay between channels as a time Degree Display the delay between channels as a degree Degree Delay s Period s x 360 deg The period is that of a standard waveform e Select rising f or falling f for the slope of the edge to be detected in Edge Polarity The default setting is rising f e Set the number of edges to detect before actually considering it a detection point in Edge Count The range is an integer from 1 to 9 The default setting is 1 e The voltage level at the detection point is the mesial point 9 16 IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 9 2 Automated
103. the Interpol soft key to display the interpolation method menu DISPLAY Format Interpol f Graticule Scale Trace ccumu late Value Label Next Dual Sine FO E ON ON OFF 1 2 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired interpolation method Explanation Interpolate Any area along the time axis having less than 500 points per 10 divisions less than 250 points in the Z1 and Z2 window when displaying Main amp Z1 amp Z2 is recognized as an interpolation area If you leave interpolation off these points will appear as discrete dots so that the display will show gaps between dots or vertical lines If you set interpolation on however the DL1720 DL1740 will connect the points Three interpolation settings are available Sine Ara Interpolates between two dots using a sin x x function Line Aa Interpolates between two dots in a straight line PULSE Draws a horizontal line to a point directly above or below the next data point and then interpolates using two dots so that the end of the horizontal line is connected to the next data point by a vertical line OFF No interpolation IM 701710 01E 8 3 8 2 Setting the Interpolation Method Outside the Interpolation Area If interpolation is set to Sine Line or Pulse the instrument draws lines between points that are aligned vertically MER Interpolate Sine Line Pulse Within the Interpolation Area Interpolate OFF Sine Line Pul
104. the Waveform e Statistical Processing for Each Period Divides the displayed waveform using a period that is automatically calculated and performs statistical processing on the measured values over the determined period Statistical processing is performed from the oldest measured data of the displayed waveform Example in which CH1 is selected as the target waveform for determining the period The parameters for automated measurement are measured in each range a b and c and statistical processing is performed on each automated measurement parameter in the order a b and c Automated measurement parameters of other channels are also measured over each range a b and c Automated measurement can also be performed on the period of each waveform e Statistical Processing of Historical Data Performs automated measurement of waveform parameters on the waveform that is acquired using the history memory function and performs statistical processing Statistical processing is performed from the oldest waveform Perform Automated Measurements of Waveform Parameters on Dual Areas gt Section 9 4 You can specify two areas and perform automated measurement of waveform parameters on each area You can also perform computation on the parameters determined in the two areas Statistical processing for each period is not possible 1 23 suonoun 1 5 Analyzing the Waveform Waveform Math lt Chapter 9 gt 1 24 Addition Subtraction and
105. the eject button pops out Removing the Floppy Disk from the Drive Check that the access indicator is not lit then press the eject button CAUTION Removing the floppy disk while the access indicator is lit can damage the drive s magnetic head or destroy the data on the disk General Handling Precautions For general handling precautions see the instructions that came with the floppy disk IM 701710 01E 11 1 wnIp n Helos 9y Wold pue o e eq Hulpeo7 pue Bulnes 2 11 2 Zip Disks Zip Disks that can be Used The following types can be used You can format the zip disk on the DL1720 DL1 740 Size 100 MB and 250 MB Format FDISK 1 partition hard disk format Inserting the Zip Disk in the Zip Drive With the label facing left insert the disk from the side with the shutter Removing the Zip Disk from the Zip Drive With the DL1720 DL1740 turned ON check that the access indicator is turned OFF and press the eject button Eject Button Access Indicator Procedure when the Zip Disk cannot be Ejected If the Zip disk cannot be removed by performing the steps given above in Removing the Zip Disk from the Zip Drive carry out the following steps to remove it Insert a pin of approximately 1 mm in diameter into the eject button hole and press slowly This will cause the Zip disk to be ejected Zip Disk Eject Button Hole for Removing th Zip Disk Insert Z Pin 11 2 IM 701710 01E 11 2 Zip Disks CAUTIO
106. the normal Main waveform It is the range defined by the displayed record length range displayed on the screen e Zi The range of zoom waveform Z1 e Z2 The range of zoom waveform 22 e Zi amp Z2 The range of zoom waveform Z1 amp Z2 Data Compression e You can select whether or not to P P compress the waveform data before saving e Power spectrum computation data cannot use P P compression Selecting the Medium and Directory The storage medium that can be used to save and load waveform data are displayed in the File List dialog box Display Example of Storage Medium FDO Floppy disk ZPO Zip disk SC5 SCSI device with an ID number of 5 SC5 1 Partition 1 of the SCSI device with an ID number of 5 NDO Network drive available with the Ethernet interface option File Name and Comments e You must specify a file name Comments can be omitted e You cannot save to a file name that is already in use in the same directory no overwriting Number and Types of Characters that can be Used Item Number of Characters Characters that Can be Used File name 1 to 8 chars 0 to 9 Ato Z _ parenthesis minus sign Comment 0 to 25 chars All characters including spaces Auto Naming Function When Auto Naming is turned ON files with three digit numbers from 000 to 999 are automatically created Specify the common name maximum of five characters specify at the Filename item that is placed before the three digit n
107. time axis direction This function is useful when you want to change the T div setting after the waveform has been displayed in single mode or when you want to extend the acquisition time to observe a particular part of the waveform thoroughly Zooming is not available on areas with less than 11 data points You set the zoom position according to it s time axis location Zoom Display Arrangement You can display one or two zoom windows on the screen Four display arrangements are available as follows Main Main area Z1 Z2 Zoom area IM 701710 01E 1 19 suonoun 4 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions If you display the main area normal waveform display together with one or both zoom windows the main area will include vertical lines or zoom boxes indicating the zoom area s The center of the zoom area corresponds to the center of the zoom box Z1 Box Z2 Box 2000 11 06 11 47 402 Norm Stopped 5193 p Ok oT e ain 7 1 f z 1 l 4 al 4 z M I 7 aP i i Main Waveform Z2 Waveform 1 20 IM 701710 01E 1 5 Analyzing the Waveform Linear Scaling lt Section 5 9 gt It is possible to append a scaling constant A an offset value B and a unit to the measurement value X of cursor or automated measurements Linear scaling is useful when applying a voltage divider ratio to the measurement values Linear scaling is also handy when you want to your scope to automatically conver
108. to set the jog shuttle action to Record Length ACY Record Mode Inter leave Repetitive f Time Base p Length 10k Norma 1 ON PFF ON f Int 3 Select the length by turning the jog shuttle choose 1 k to 1 M The record length sets the amount of data to be written into the acquisition memory Available length settings are as follows 1 kwords 10 kwords 50 kwords 100 kwords 250 kwords 500 kwords 1 Mwords Value in parenthesis is available only if interleave mode is ON Setting Precautions e The sampling rate and displayed record length vary according to the T div setting For details see appendix 1 e The maximum record length for box average is half the record length indicated above Aejdsig pue uoinisinboy 7 2 Acquisition Mode lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 14 gt Relevant Keys MENU__ MENU X Y E Cserup pispLav Cory mace save jo sHrrr SEARCH O TRIG D o2 SIMPLE ENHANCED V DIV TIME DIV ACTION DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Setting the Acquisition Mode 1 Press ACQ 2 Press the Mode soft key to display the acquisition mode menu ACQ Record Mode fe Count Inter leave Repetitive Time Base Length 10k Normal Inf inite ON ON Ext 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired mode ranging from Normal to Box Avg You may not be able to select some modes depending on the record le
109. trigger mode should be set to normal e When used with the A gt B N or A Delay B trigger the holdoff time operates with respect to condition A only 6 7 Bbunebb1 1 gt 6 5 Setting the Edge Trigger SIMPLE lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 8 gt Relevant Keys NAP SNAP HELP ca mse sone SETUP ae a IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT SEARCH oar TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Setting the Trigger Source 1 Press SIMPLE 2 Press the Source soft key to display the trigger source menu SIMPLE Source fg Level Slope Coupling HF Reject Hysteresis Hold Off us CH1 0 0 V Ft AC pd T 6 68 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the channel to be set as the trigger source CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1720 SIMPLE CH1 CHZ CH3 CH4 Ext Line Hold Off us 0 08 Setting the Trigger Level 4 Ifthe jog shuttle control is not set to Level press the Level soft key SIMPLE Source fg Level Slope Coupling HF Reject Hysteresis Hold Off us CH1 0 0 V Ft AC OFF pd T 0 08 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the trigger level You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits In addition pressing RESET resets the trigger level to the current offset voltage value Note The trigger level setting applies to simple trigger and enhanced trigger Setting the Trigger Slope 6 Press the Slope
110. turned OFF Data Type Extension Data Size Bytes Binary WVF Approx 800 K 100 kwords 32 x 4 channels x number of history waveform x 2 HDR Approx 2 K approx 3 K if Mathi and Math2 are ON ASCII CSV Approx 6 M depends on the input signal condition It takes more than 10 minutes to save the file Float FLD Approx 1 6 M 100 kwords 32 x 4 channels x number of history waveform x 4 Selecting the Waveform to be Saved e You can save all waveforms or the specified waveforms from CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2 or CH1 CH2 and Math1 for the DL1720 e The vertical and horizontal axes and trigger settings of the waveform being saved are also saved e For waveforms that are loaded using the history memory function you can select whether to save all of the history data or just the current displayed waveform on the screen You can also save only the search results of the data in the history memory For details regarding data search of the history memory see sections 7 8 to 7 9 e For snapshot waveforms see section 11 8 Saving Loading the Snap Shot Waveforms IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Selecting the Range of the Waveform to be Saved Select the range region of the waveform from the following list of choices Only the data that have been saved by selecting Binary above in Selecting the data type file extension data size can be loaded in this instrument e Main The range of
111. which the auto set up function may not work properly Storing and Recalling Setting Parameters lt Section 4 4 gt You can store setting parameters to the internal memory The stored parameters can also be recalled to modify the settings on the instrument IM 701710 01E 1 31 1 7 Other Useful Functions Snapshot lt Section 4 6 gt If single start is not selected a waveform is updated at the specified intervals or is displayed in roll mode Thus to retain the currently displayed waveform acquisition must be stopped Use of the snapshot function allows the currently displayed waveforms to remain temporarily on the screen without acquisition being stopped To activate this function just press SNAP SHOT without stopping acquisition The currently displayed waveform will be retained This waveform is called a snapshot waveform The snapshot waveform is displayed separately in white making comparison between the two easier Snapshot waveforms are screen image data so they cannot be used for cursor measurement or automated measurement However screen image data output hard copy is possible Snapshot Waveform Clear Trace lt Section 4 6 gt This function clears all waveforms other than the loaded waveforms and restarts the averaging repetitive sampling and accumulation in a signal operation Preset lt Section 5 6 gt This feature automatically sets the V div input coupling trigger level and other parameters to appropriate values for
112. 01 06 22 13 27 R U 962 TIF 38574 2001 06 20 14 44 RW fi ft Edge CH1 001 TIF 38574 2001 06 20 14 44 R U Auto 000 TIF 38574 Function z z et Reset A11 Set Delete lf compressed image thumbnail data does not exist for the selected file an error message appears Pressing ESC clears the error message The following procedure clears the compressed image from the screen e Move the cursor using the jog shuttle 2601 06 20 14 43 0 000 Press the Set Reset soft key If an asterisk is displayed to the left of the file name in the File List dialog box the file will be copied If you press the Set Reset soft key the asterisk to the left of the file name disappears This file will not be copied Go to step 11 Path FDO Space 669376 byte File Nane ae x lt THEVOL 1 gt 2006 16 31 15 69 CHAPTO14 TIF 2600 10 31 18 40 CHAPT 13 TIF 2006 16 31 18 37 CHAPT 12 TIF 2000 16 31 18 36 CHAPT 11 TIF 2600 10 31 18 35 CHAPT 10 TIF 2006 16 31 18 35 CHAPTO69 TIF 2006 16 31 18 33 CHAPTOO8 TIF 2600 10 31 18 30 CHAPTO6 TIF 2006 16 31 18 29 CHAPT666 TIF 2600 10 31 18 24 CHAPT 6 5 TIF 2600 10 31 18 23 CHAPTO64 TIF 2006 16 31 18 22 Function a Filter a et Resetj A11 Set Property Attr Dest Dir Copy SET f a Selecting All Copy Source Files at Once 8 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file a directory or a medium Pressing the All Set soft key places an asterisk to the left
113. 1 12 Press the Z1 Pos Z2 Pos soft key If you set Mode to Z1 Z1 Pos is displayed If you select Z2 Z2 Pos is displayed If you select Z1 and Z2 Z1 Pos Z2 Pos is displayed Turn the jog shuttle to set the zoom position of the Z1 zoom box Z00M Node Format 5 ai Fag fe ai Pos Alied a a Meas Fit Meas ain amp Z1 amp azz Main oz fag 5 22 Pos a to 21 Rng to 22 i In a similar fashion press the Z2 Pos soft key to set the zoom position of Z2 zoom box By setting the jog shuttle control to both Z1 Pos and Z2 Pos the zoom positions of both Z1 and Z2 can be moved simultaneously Changing the Range of the Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters 13 8 16 Press the Fit Meas Rng to Z1 or Fit Meas Rng to Z2 soft key depending on the display format of the zoom waveform to set the range of the automated measurement of waveform parameters to the zoom range of Z1 or Z2 respectively IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 8 9 Zooming the Waveform The zoomed waveform of two locations can be displayed simultaneously dual zoom You can also select which channel to zoom Note that if the number of displayed points is less than or equal to 50 or 40 zooming is not possible Selecting the Display Mode of Zoomed Waveforms Mode Main Displays only the main unzoomed waveform Z1 Only Displays only the zoomed waveform of zoom box Z1 Z2 Only Displays only the zoomed waveform of zoom box Z2 Main amp
114. 1 2 gt NAP SNAP HELP OO ae ae O TRIG D sme ENHANCED ACTION DELAY TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Explanation IM 701710 01E Setting the Offset Value 1 Press one of the keys from CH 1 to CH 4 or CH 1 to CH 2 for the DL1720 to select the channel 2 Press the Offset soft key 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the offset value You can change the setting a digit using the arrow keys located below the jog shuttle Display fPosition J Coupling Probe fq Offset J Bandwidth rape od Resetting the Offset Value Set to 0 V 4 Press RESET to set the offset value to 0 V The offset voltage setting applies to all input couplings AC 1 MQ DC 1 MQ DC 50Q and GND couplings Offset Voltage Setting Range Sensitivity Range Probe 1 1 Offset Voltage Setting Range 2 mV div to 50 mV div 1 0 V to 1 0 V 0 1 V div to 0 5 V div 10 0 V to 10 0 V 1 V div to 10 V div 100 0 V to 100 0 V DC 50 Q 1 V div only The setting resolution is 0 01 div If the voltage scale is 2 mV div for example the setting resolution will be 0 02 mV Resetting the Offset Voltage You can return the offset to OV by pressing RESET Important Points e Setting the offset voltage while acquisition is stopped will change the display position only The newly set offset voltage will come into effect when acquisition is restarted e You can se
115. 10 13 13 FIP Server FUNGON is cect a a e 1 29 13 21 G Generating Triggers on the Power Signal e 6 13 GOO Wes scree aces E ease remesnacs 16 8 GO OUT Sigma Senasa ea a a 9 60 GO NO GO Determination cccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 32 GO NO GO Determination Parameter ccccccceceeeeeeees 9 51 GO NO GO Determination Zone ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 55 GINGO Key oreka aaa A 2 4 GONO GO QUPUT iicn a rt ened as os 16 8 GO NO GO Signal Output cccccccceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 60 GPIB IMte aCe eset tecnica era Sue aes 1 30 16 9 AGS WIC asiasant capeiemiaersty heroes casa damnalantedcesatiaducintlelsttnteaaruahndsives 8 10 121 1 o7 0 EREE seers eR te aN E E se eR 1 17 8 5 H FA GUTS OF onrein 1 21 9 1 9 6 Hard Copy Action 2 ceeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 39 9 54 9 59 Help EU CUOM sa O 4 16 HEER ROY ce so stoern creat etiuisnsteseiied ecbar eae see hakseeaan 2 5 FO WV UNG OW cities 2 Sa reve gen cau a E 4 16 HF Rejection 1 12 6 9 6 16 6 19 6 23 6 28 6 31 6 34 High Levels orea a Y 12 4 PIS TORY ey hea a a a 2 5 History MeMO y oraria a e cave es 1 17 7 10 History Memory Search Using Waveform Parameters 1 26 History Memory Search Using Zone 0eeeeeeeeees 1 26 History Search Function ccccccssseseeeeeeeees 1 26 7 13 7 17 ROIT OM TME sarrerara ee ta eee eee Peer aera 6 6 Horizontal Cursor Measurement
116. 10417U Minimum Value of P P CH1 1 BY 60016 2 18750U 00017 8 2 18750U 00018 Bibs XT 2 208330 Sdy 5 93718mV t 98 Qn MaxMin MaxMin MaxMin Itemi Itemz Item3 Utility MEASURE Sort Fun REV Sdy Cnt MaxMin Item4 3 58885mV 38 Maximum Value of P P CH1 Performs statistical processing on the same measurement parameters as those of the automated measurement of waveform parameters The following five statistics are determined on the two measured values of automated measurement parameters e Max Maximum value e Min Minimum value e Avg Average value e Sdv Standard deviation e Cnt Number of measured values used in the statistical processing For example if you selected P P of CH1 as an automated measurement parameter the maximum minimum average standard deviation and the number of measured values used in the statistical processing of the P P of CH1 are displayed The result of statistical processing that can be displayed is two parameters of automated measurement If you selected three or more parameters for automated measurement the first two parameters in the automated measurement parameter selection menu under Item Setup P P Max Min InitiXY and Init2XY are displayed starting from the smallest numbered channel For example if you selected P P of CH1 Min of CH2 and Max of CH3 P P of CH1 and Min of CH2 are displayed The results of statistical processing th
117. 11 8 IM 701710 01E 11 5 Changing the SCSI ID Number Relevant Keys Gay a ETE Fine msc e Jpono ee war MATH raiaee 400 aca stanrisror SETUP FENT SPLAN COPY MAGE SAE ae cae O SHIFT Cm A HORIZONTAL ay O TRIG D a c7 2 sme ENHANCED TIME DIV ACTION DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press MISC 2 Pressing the SCSI ID soft key displays the SCSI number setting menu a a a a a alibrationRemote Cnti SCSI ID Network Pystem Cnfg 3 Press the Own ID soft key MISC verviey Next 172 ry ie ID iw Oun ID Ea Ea 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select a value from 0 to 7 5 Press the Init SCSI soft key The ID number is changed to the new number An icon blinks at the upper right of the screen while the change is being made When the change is complete the icon disappears Explanation The SCSI ID number is used to distinguish between the various devices connected to the SCSI chain Make sure not to use duplicate ID numbers on any of the connected devices Range of Own ID Numbers Select this instrument s ID Own ID from the range 0 to 7 The default ID is 7 Note When changing the Own ID number make sure to press the Init SCSI soft key e Assign numbers that are different from the ID numbers of the external SCSI devices attached to the instrument e The SCSI ID numbers of external SCSI devic
118. 119 09 26 29 87 0066 09 26 30 95 0120 09 26 29 85 0067 09 26 30 93 0121 09 26 29 83 0068 09 26 30 91 0122 09 26 29 80 0069 09 26 30 89 0123 09 26 29 78 0070 09 26 30 86 0124 09 26 29 76 0071 09 26 30 84 0125 09 26 29 74 0072 09 26 30 82 0126 09 26 29 72 0073 09 26 30 80 0127 09 26 29 70 0074 09 26 30 78 Width 0090 09 26 30 46 Auto 0091 09 26 30 44 T1 lt PLS lt T2 0092 09 26 30 42 0093 09 26 30 40 0094 09 26 30 38 0095 09 26 30 36 21 Turn the jog shuttle to select the waveform to be displayed and press SELECT Resetting the Search Results 22 Select HISTORY gt Search Mode gt OFF or turn OFF Zone 1 to Zone 4 and execute the search to reset the search results You can search for a waveform that matches the specified conditions from the past waveforms in the acquisition memory and display it Search Parameters Four types of search parameters can be registered in Zone1 to Zone4 You can change the channel that is to be searched the search condition and the search range for each search zone Search Condition Condition IN Searches for waveforms that pass through the specified search window OUT Searches for waveforms that do not pass through the specified window OFF Do not search for waveforms Source Channel Source Search is carried out on the channel that is specified as the Source Waveforms of other channels are also displayed The Vertical Range of the Searc
119. 12 3 External Trigger Input External Clock INDUt cccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeas 12 1 Moger Output TAG OU e ieee ae ca eat 12 3 RGB Video Signal Output RGB VIDEO OUT ceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeesaeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaees 12 5 Chpater 13 Ethernet Interface Option 13 1 Connecting the DL1720 DL1740 to a Personal Computer cccccccsesseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeees 13 1 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP ccccccsesseccececeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaseeeeeeeeas 13 3 13 3 Saving Waveform and Setting Data to a Network Drive FTP Client Function 13 8 13 4 Saving Screen Image Data to a Network Drive FTP Client Function c00 13 11 13 5 Sending Screen Image Data to a Network Printer LPR Client Function 0 13 14 13 6 Using the Mail Function Fixed Interval ccccccccssssseseecceeeeeeeseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeessaseeeeeees 13 16 13 7 Using the Mail Function Action Mail Function cccccccccseeccceceeeeeeceeeecesseeeeeeseaees 13 19 13 8 Accessing DL1720 DL1740 Drives from a Network Drive FTP Server Function 13 21 13 9 Viewing the Ethernet Interface Option and MAC Address ccccccceseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 23 13 10 Setting the FTP Passive Mode and LPR SMTP Timeout cccccessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 24 Chpater 14 Other Operations IM 701710 01E 14 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 Setting the Screen Color and B
120. 14 6 IM 701710 01E 14 4 Canceling the Offset Voltage Relevant Keys NAP SNOr HELP Reser eect A ie Gea aca stanrisror O TRIG D Oo oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY TIME DIV Te The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press MISC 2 Pressing the System Cnfg soft key displays the system configuration menu a a a a a alibrationRemote Cnti SCSI ID Network Pystem Cnfg 3 Press the Offset Cancel soft key to select ON or OFF The default value is OFF MISC verviey Next 172 E Message lick Sound Offset Trig a Date Time Cancel ENG OFF pN ON Explanation You can select whether or not the offset voltage that is specified for each channel is reflected in the results of computations and automated measurement of waveform parameters OFF Does not reflect the offset voltages in the results of computations and automated measurement of waveform parameters The vertical position of the display screen corresponds to the offset voltage ON Reflect the offset voltages in the results of computations and automated measurement of waveform parameters The waveform that has offset voltage DC voltage removed from the input signal can be observed In this case the vertical position becomes 0 V Note e Offset cancel applies to all channels e To set whether or not to cancel the offset for each channel use linear scaling IM 701710 01E 14 7
121. 1740 DHCP IP Address LaL aL 4 9 Net Mask 253 253 255 9 Gate Way 9 9 9 9 DNS Domain Name Yd DNS Serveri 9 9 9 DNS Server 9 9 9 9 Domain Suffix1i___ Domain Suffix o MISC a a ro a User Mail Net Drive f Net Print Others Connect Account Setup Setup Setup Log List 14 Move the cursor to Domain Name by turning the jog shuttle 15 Press SELECT to display the keyboard 16 Input the domain name 17 Move the cursor with the jog shuttle to the DNS Server 1 field and press SELECT to display the setting menu 18 Setthe primary DNS server values from 0 to 255 using the jog shuttle Settings for the following items can be input directly using a USB keyboard i IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP 19 Inthe same manner set the secondary DNS server in the DNS Server 2 field 20 Move the cursor to Domain Suffix1 by turning the jog shuttle 21 Press SELECT to display the keyboard 22 Input the primary domain suffix 23 Inthe same manner set the secondary domain suffix in the domain suffix 2 field Note For keyboard soft keyboard operation see section 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings Turning the Power ON OFF 24 You must restart the DL1720 DL1740 for the settings to take affect After all the settings are complete turn the power to the DL1720 DL1740 OFF then back ON a
122. 2 Protective Grounding sseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees vi ime A 4 19 Reno noe a an a ee ee 9 14 9 29 PUSS Interpolation ocefesncrne n a 1 18 Pulse Wiot adone a a E 8 28 Pulse Width Search sical oki eae ee 1 28 8 25 Pulse Width TriQQelr cccccsseeseececeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeseanenseeeseeas 1 9 R Real Time Sampling Mode eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 6 cya el etc Meee keene ene eter e arian Tear ees eee rot 2 1 RecCalNG sasoca don aciias eeepc casa ect 1 31 4 10 Recommended Replacement Parts 0scceeeeeeeees 15 12 Record Length iira 1 6 1 14 7 1 App 1 Repetitive Sampling Mode eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 7 7 9 FE SED Key aS eee ed deine ete 2 5 AGB VIDEO QUT aioin settee antl 12 5 16 8 RGB Video Signal Output eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 5 16 8 PRONG OCS assen eia a r a i A 5 17 FOIL MOG DISP iusan a RN 1 7 FO e2G2 MEn CE a E at dapat alan 16 9 S Sample Rdl a E 1 6 App 1 sampling Mde sssi vseede sees sasceese 1 6 1 16 5 17 Save to File Action ccccceeeeeseeseseeeeeeees 6 39 9 54 9 59 SAVING Setup Dala e E A S 11 17 Saving Snapshot Waveforms cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 21 Saving the Results of the Automated Measuremert 11 24 Saving to a Network Drive ccccccccececcececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 29 Saving Waveform Dat cccccccceceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeteees 11 10 Se
123. 22 Pressing SELECT displays a keyboard 23 Enter the file name according to the procedures given in section 4 1 24 Turn the jog shuttle to select Comment 25 Pressing SELECT displays a keyboard 26 Enter the file comment according to the procedures given in section 4 1 27 Press ESC to close the file name setting dialog box Saving the File 28 Press the Save Exec soft key to save the file to the directory indicated in Path ___ The name of the Save Exec soft key changes to Abort Canceling the Saving Operation 29 Press the Abort soft key to cancel the save operation The name of the Abort soft key changes to Save Exec Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box and Viewing its Properties 30 Inthe File List dialog box press the Filter soft key to select extension or 31 Inthe File List dialog box turn the jog shuttle to select the desired file 32 Pressing the Property soft key displays the properties of the selected file 33 Pressing ESC closes the window displaying the properties IM 701710 01E 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Loading the Waveform Data Set the data type to Binary For the procedures see steps 4 and 5 in the section Saving the Waveform Data on page 11 14 6 Pressing the Load soft key displays the load setting menu and the file list dialog box FILE File Item Data Type a x p3 FS Save Load Unload Utility Waveforn Binary Selecting the Source Medium Direct
124. 2cctstnevesvanccetacinetateevesvencassarnd atedaavemnenanees 9 42 Ditferentatio M ran e a a see detees adele 1 24 DISPIAY sare a E 16 4 Display Formal arnrenu aeaea e ees 1 17 8 1 8 17 Display Interpolation s ssesssictitcasoinastevasyseidicavievestedbnncteiateens 1 18 DISPLAY KOV ar a este ets eeee eceeneees 2 4 Display Settings ssccrsacicsnivsitirdentadcnied A 1 17 Displayed Data Output FUNCTIONS 0 0 eee 1 33 DISA saaier penr EA EE 9 14 9 29 DIN Savion ee eae REN E eee eee 13 6 DNS SEVE esis ated na AA 13 6 Doman S le ere A sre ten ret 13 6 Dual Area Measurement Mode eeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeees 9 30 Dual Ae JS a A iu a A ATE AEA 1 23 9 25 Dual ZOOM siciatessae dial t cash ees se Mar a a 8 17 E EOJ vere Me mete aA ee eat nee eT eM 8 28 Edge SEATON oiia iaaea DiE Eia 1 26 8 18 Edge ilo 6 1c ara ert rnnrtrcre aren tne 1 8 6 8 Effective Data Range ssrin a pie 1 4 ENHANCED KEY iiien Oh ae orth dee tented 2 3 Enhanced Trigger ate nescnnchideteecadcatecutenbiaceabd teeta lenrinserbunntin 1 8 Entering a Character String c cccccccssssssesesessssesenssenenes 4 2 ETHIC AV Al WG aa a ae 4 1 Entering Numerical Values cccceeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 4 5 E NVOIODE stat tere tedsla cutee a sudanktceniemdanaeahtuebeapaupadents 7 3 Envelope MOG ressnssn nan aves 1 15 Enor in EXCCULUOM areen a a 15 3 EROINA SCRIOS merean Rarer dor nT rene reese eee 15 5 Emor Message Sdan a ea 15 2 Ethernet Intenace n
125. 3 GO OUT Negative Green 4 NO GO OUT Negative Blue 5 GND 9 61 SISAJEUY WAOJOARM Chpater 10 Outputs of Screen Data 10 1 Loading the Paper Roll into the Built in Printer Option Printer Roll Chart Use only YOKOGAWA s roll charts When you are using the printer for the first time use the roll chart supplied with the instrument When your roll charts have run out purchase more from your dealer or YOKOGAWA sales offices listed on the back cover of this manual Part No B9850NX Specification Thermo sensible 30 m Minimum Quantity 5 rolls Handling the Roll Chart IM 701710 01E Thermosensible roll charts produce color using a thermal reaction therefore the following precautions must be taken Storage Precautions The roll chart begins to develop color at approximately 70 C It is very sensitive to heat damp light and chemicals both before and after use e Keep roll charts in a dry cool and dark place e Once the package is opened use the roll chart as soon as possible e If the roll chart is left in contact with plastic films containing plasticizer for instance vinyl chloride film cellophane tape etc for a long period of time discoloration will occur on the recording area of the chart due to the plasticizer If you are going to keep the roll chart in a holder for instance use a polypropylene holder e When you use adhesive on the roll chart never use adhesive which contains an organic solvent such as alc
126. 3 When set to T1 lt Pulse lt T2 the value of T2 4 The typical value is a representative or standard value It is not a warranted value IM 701710 01E 16 3 3 suoljeoyioeds 16 3 Time Axis Item Time Axis Range Time Base Precision Time Axis Precision EXT CLOCK IN Specifications 1 ns div to 50 s div record length is 10 k words or more 1 ns div to 5 s div record length is 1 k words 0 005 0 005 50 ps 1 digit Connector Type BNC Maximum Input Voltage 40 V DC ACpeak or 28Vrms 10 kHz or less Input Frequency Range 40 Hz to 20 MHz continuous clock only Sampling Jitter not above 1 25 ns or less Minimum Input Level 0 1 Vp p for the DL1740 or the DL1720 with the 1 V range selected 1 Vp p for the DL1720 with the 10 V range selected Threshold Level 2 V 5 mV resolution for the DL1740 1 V 5 mV resolution for the DL1720 with the 1 V range selected 10 V 50 mV resolution for the DL1720 with the 10 V range selected Input Impedance Approx 1 MQ 18 pF or Approx 1 MQ 20 pF for the DL1720 Minimum Pulse Width At least 10 ns for both High and Low 1 As measured under standard operating conditions see section 16 11 after warmed up 2 1 digit may be unreliabel depending on the sampling 3 EXT CLOCK IN EXT TRIG IN TRIG GATE IN terminal for the DL1740 or EXT terminal for the DL1720 16 4 Display Item Display Screen Size Total Picture Elements Waveform Pictur
127. 5 000di Next T Rangez 1 2 5 600di Selecting the Measurement Parameter 4 Press the Item Setup soft key Dual Area is displayed at the right end of the soft key menu MEASURE Mode a a Cycle Mod la T Range1 Item Delay 5 000di Next ON Setup Setup ON f T Range2 1 2 5 600di 5 Press the Dual Area soft key to turn it ON To return to the usual automated measurement screen press the Dual Area soft key again to turn it OFF The CH3 CH4 and Math2 soft keys are not displayed on the DL1720 0 P P 0 Freg 0 AYgFreq 0 Max Period 0 AvgPer iod Min Rise IntiTy 2 Avg Fall Int2Ty Rms Width Intixy 2 Sdey Width Int2xy High Duty Low 0 Bursti o 0Shot Burst2 OShot c Pulse All Clear_ Copy To All Trace_ MEASURE Dual Area DFF ON CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Math1 Math2 IM 701710 01E 9 25 s s jeuy WIOJ neM o 9 4 Performing Automated Measurements of Waveform Parameters on Dual Areas 6 10 11 12 13 9 26 Press the Item Setup soft key to display the waveform parameter dialog box Areai AreaZ Mode Trace Item Ope Trace Item Unit sert DFFTON C EF Cow Fax User2 PFF ON L_CH3_ Min___ cH Rns__ L___ User3 PFFTON Math Period Matn fogera sera DFFTON None Cime 7 ponse Emez E Consti Const2 Const3 Const4 MEASURE F3 feT Rangei Jf al Range3
128. 5 11 SOXY JE UOZIJOH pue eo1 10 5 8 Setting V div Explanation 5 12 The V div voltage axis sensitivity setting is used to adjust the amplitude of the displayed waveform so that the waveform can be observed easily The V div setting is made by setting the voltage value per division on the screen grid There are two methods available in setting the V div Setting the V div Using the V div Knob The settings are 1 V div 2 V div 5 V div and their tenfold multiples This setting will become the reference for the range that can be set using the Variable parameter described next and the resolution e V div Setting Range The V div setting range for each probe attenuation value is shown in the table below Probe Attenuation Setting Range DC 1 MQ Setting Range DC 50 Q 1 1 2 mV div to 10 V div 2 mV div to 1 V div 10 1 20 mV div to 0 1 kV div 20 mV div to 10 V div 100 1 0 2 V div to 1 k V div 0 2 V div to 0 1 kV div 1000 1 2 V div to 10 k V div 2 V div to 1 kV div Setting the V div Using the Variable Parameter in the CH Menu You can set the V div using a resolution that is finer than the resolution provided by the V div knob and vertically expand or reduce the displayed waveform The waveform acquisition can be started with the changed V div setting e Range The following table shows the range when the probe attenuation setting is 10 1 V div Setting with V div Knob Setting Range of Variable Setting Resolutio
129. 6 1 5 Set the type by pressing the soft key corresponding to TTL ECL User Current 700937 or Current 701930 PRESET select TTL ECL User Current Current 700937 701930 Exec all h A a Selecting the Probe Attenuation for TTL ECL or User Preset 6 Press the Probe soft key to display a menu used to select the attenuation PRESET Select Type Probe Exec All TTL 16 1 7 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired attenuation 5 8 IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 5 6 The Preset Function Setting the V div Offset Voltage and Trigger Level When the Preset Type is User 8 Press the Type soft key to display the preset type selection menu PRESET Select Type Probe Exec All TTL 16 1 Press the User soft key 700937 701930 Exec All ew LOL aoo A 9 Press the V div soft key to highlight the jog shuttle icon 10 Turn the jog shuttle to set the V div value PRESET Select Tupe Probe I U7div e Offset trig Lvi All User 10 1 56 6 Y 6 60 VU 0 0 V ee 11 Prees the Offset soft key to select Offset then turn the jog shuttle to set the Offset value PRESET Select Tupe Probe U7div i Offset trig Lvi All User 10 1 50 0 V 0 0 U 0 0 U Si 12 Ina similar fashion set the Trig Lvl You can change the setting a digit using the arrow keys located below the jog shuttle Executing the Preset 13 Press the Exec soft key to execute the prese
130. 6 13 Jo Normal 621 7 5 Stopped MAH Mi DisplayaMi Setup M1 Label Z Display Janz Setup MZ Label OFF EN Pscc1 Math ON C3 C4 Mathz OOkS S 2NSfliv CH1 10 1 6 500 Vrdiv DC Full Edge CH1 F Auto 0 000 VY This function displays the power spectrum of CH1 to CH4 and Math1 waveforms or CH1 to CH2 waveform for the DL1720 Number of Computing Points Point Select 1000 or 10000 Using the number of computing points from the specified Start point an FFT is performed and the power spectrum is displayed Selecting the Time Window Window Select from the following windows Best suited for transient signals that attenuate completely within the Rect Rectangular Hanning Hanning Flattop Flat Top time window Best suited for continuous and non periodic signals Best suited for improve the accuracy of the level even if the frequency resolution is to be compromised Notes when Displaying Power Spectrums e Cannot be executed if the displayed record length is less than number of computation points Point 9 47 SISAJEUY WWAOJOARM 9 10 Smoothing Relevant Keys MENU__ MENU X Y 4 setup pispLav Cory mace save O SHIFT SEARCH O TRIG D o SIMPLE ENHANCED o ACTION DELAY 2 V DIV TIME DIV a a The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Turning ON OFF the Display 1 Press MATH 2 Press the M1 Display soft key a
131. 720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press MISC 2 Press the Network soft key to display the Network menu MISC alibrationRemote Cnti SCSI ID Network Pystem Cnf a l Next 1 2 3 Press the Others soft key to display the Others settings menu A a a a a a TCP IP User Mail Net Drive Net Print Others Setup Account Setup Setup Setup Turning ON OFF the FTP Passive Mode 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select FTP Passive Netuork_ MISC Connect Log List Settings for the following items can be input directly using a USB keyboard i8 Network a a gt a a TCP IP User Mail Net Drive Net Print Others Setup Account Setup Setup Setup Ea 5 Press SELECT to select ON or OFF Setting the LPR Timeout Time 4 Turn thejog shuttle to select LPR Time Out 5 Press SELECT to display the timeout time selection box 6 Turn thejog shuttle to set the timeout time 7 Press SELECT or ESC to close the box Setting the SMPT Timeout Time 4 Turn the jog shuttle to select SMTP Time Out 5 Press SELECT to display the timeout time selection box 6 Turn the jog shuttle to set the timeout time 7 Press SELECT or ESC to close the box 13 24 IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 13 10 Setting the FTP Passive Mode and LPR SMTP Timeout Enters special settings related to the FTP client LPR and SMTP Normally thes
132. 8 Saving Snap Shot Waveforms Clear Trace This function clears every waveform currently displayed on the screen If the trace is cleared while waveform acquisition is in progress it is restarted from the first trace The instrument is performing GO NO GO determination action on trigger or waveform search The SNAP SHOT and CLEAR TRACE are not Operative in the Following Cases e The instrument is in remote state controlled via the communication interface e The instrument is performing an operation for example it is in the process of printing out or performing auto set up determining GO NO GO performing an action on trigger or searching data 4 13 suoljes0doQ uowWwo gt 4 7 Calibration Relevant Keys tegen PHASE Ba ac rrr aca stanr sroP a I SEARCH O TRIG D cD oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY TIME DIV aes a Operating Procedure Performing Calibration 1 Press MISC The MISC menu will appear 2 Press the Calibration soft key MISC a alibrationRemote Cnti SCSI ID Netuork Bysten Cnf i l Next 1 2 3 Press the Auto Cal soft key to select either ON or OFF F Exec 4 Press the Deskew soft key to select either ON or OFF 5 If ON is selected in step 4 select the desired channel The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Pressing the Target CH soft key displays a menu used to select the channel atibrati
133. 8 1978 JIS C 1901 1987 SH1 AH1 T5 L4 SR1 RL1 PPO DC1 DTO CO Conforms to IEEE St d 488 2 1992 ISO ASCII code Addressable mode Listener and talker addresses 0 to 30 are settable Remote mode can be cleared by pressing the SHIFT key the CLEAR TRACE key except when local lockout has been set For details refer to the Communication Interface Users Manual IM701710 17E Serial RS 232 Option Item Connector Type Electrical Specifications Connection Format Communication Format Synchronizing Format Baud Rate Specifications Half pitch interface cable D Sub 9 pin plug Conforms to EIA 574 Standard EIA 232 RS 232 Standard for 9 pin Point to point Full duplex Start stop asynchronous transmission 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 For details refer to the Communication Interface Users manual IM0701710 17E USB Item Connector Electrical and Mechanical Specifications Speed Number of Ports Supported Systems Ethernet Option Item Communication Port Number Electrical Mechanical Specifications Transmission Method Transmission Rate Communication Protocol Supported Services Connector Type IM 701710 01E Specifications Type B connector receptacle Conforms to USB Rev 1 0 Max 12 Mbps PC system supported Models with a standard USB port that operates on Windows 98 SE or Windows 2000 A separate driver is required for connecting to a PC Specifications 1 IEEE 802
134. 800 M 800 M 800 M 800 M 800 M 800 M 800 M 800 M 800 M Changes to normal mode even when envelope mode has been set App 7 ES x pu ddy Appendix 2 How to Calculate the Area of a Waveform IntegiTY Total Area for Positive Side Only S1 S2 AA Integ2TY Total Area for both Positive and Negative Sides S1 S3 S2 Se G IntegiXY 1 Multiplc Loops 2 Non Closed Curve A Xy Area S So ees Loops c N Area Enclosed by a Curve Connecting the Start and Stop ee Pori Start Point WW Points Int i Stop Point x Waveform Stop Point 3 Loop Tracing a Figure Eight 4 Spiral Loop Area S So S1 Area S Sox2 S1 Number of Overlaps Varies According to the Number of Loops Start Point Stop Point Stop Point App 8 IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E Appendix 2 How to Calculate the Area of a Waveform Integ2XY 1 When Only One Y Data Corresponds to X Data 1 3 X Axis Y 0 Start Point Stop Point UY Area S S0 Area S So Start Point Stop Point X Axis Y 0 Stop Point Start Point Area S So oer ae Stop Point Start Point X axis Y 0 2 When the Waveform Extends into the Negative Side Start Point X Axis Y 0 Area S So S1 Stop Point 2 When Two or more Y Data Correspond to X Data Start Point f Area S So Start Point S A Area S S0 2xS1 S2 Stop Point X Axis Y 0 X Axis Y 0 App 9 Ea xipued
135. ALA O TRIG D SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Explanation 1 Turn the TIME DIV knob to set the desired T div Note e Turning the TIME DIV knob while acquisition is stopped displays the new T div value in parentheses on the upper right of the screen The new setting will come into effect the next time the acquisition is started e When repetieive sampling mode is OFF see section7 6 the maximum sampling rate is 500 MS s or 1 GS s when interleave mode is ON e Even when the repetitive sampling is turned OFF there are cases in which the mode automatically changes to the repetitive sampling mode when the T div is changed For the relationship between the T div setting and the sample rate see appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record length The T div setting is made by setting the time per division on the screen grid Setting Range Record Length is 10 kwords or more 1 ns div to 50 s div 1 2 5 steps Record Length is 1 kwords 1 ns div to 5 s div 1 2 5 steps T div and Sampling Mode Use of repetitive sampling mode lets you get the sample rate of 1 GS s and above or 100 GS s and above if interleave is also ON But note that the allowable time scale settings vary according to record length For details see appendix 1 T div and Roll Mode When acquisition count is infinite
136. ANCED TIME DIV ACTION DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Setting the V div Using the V div Knob 1 Press one of the keys from CH 1 to CH 4 or CH 1 to CH 2 for the DL1720 to select the channel 2 Turn the V DIV knob to set the V div value Note e Changing the V DIV setting while the waveform acquisition is stopped will not change the displayed waveform The new V div value takes effect the next time waveform acquisition is started e When the waveform acquisition is stopped the cursor measurement value and automated measurement of waveform parameters will show values using the old V div setting even if the V DIV knob is turned Setting the V div Using the Variable Parameter 1 Press one of the keys from CH 1 to CH 4 or CH 1 to CH 2 for the DL1720 to select the channel 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key Display Position J Coupling Probe fq Offset J Bandwidth OFF PN 0 0 div DCMR 16 1 6 6 Y Full 3 Press the Variable soft key fg Var iable inear 5Scl Label AX B 50 0 V ON CH1 4 Turn the jog shuttle to set the V div value You can change the setting a digit using the arrow keys located below the jog shuttle Note e If the V div setting is changed by rotating the V DIV knob the Variable value is set to the modified V div value e If Variable is reset with RESET the V div setting returns to the value set with the V div knob IM 701710 01E
137. AVE ae eae O SHIFT CHORZONTAL fv neo O TRIG D o1 o2 SIMPLE ENHANCED Enen Crui mec Jfonoad mamm ea oam E Reser _ seuect TART STOP V DIV TIME DIV ACTION DELAY Tre The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press MISC 2 Pressing the Overview soft key displays the overview screen Pressing any key clears the overview screen MISC A A A a A alibrationRenote Cnti SCSI ID Network Bysten Cnfgj Overview Next d System Overview Mode 1 701710 Record Length gt Max1MW S00kW CH Option Printer Yes B5 Fdd Zip Zip J2 RSZ232 SCSI Yes C Ether Yes C10 MAC 000064_824_052 Default Language JPN Soft Version 1 36 ROM Sum 86B4H Linkage Date 61707716 Mon 14 45 MISC Next 1 2 Note e Backup battery Displays OK if the built in lithium battery is normal Empty if the battery is flat If Empty is displayed contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual Explanation This function allows you to check the ROM version model and installed options The screen is shown in the procedure em i U 15 5 Replacing the Power Fuse A Specified Rating e To prevent the possibility of fire use only a fuse having the specified rating voltage current and type e Make sure to turn OFF the instrument and unplug the power cord before replacing the fuse e Never
138. Client Function 8 Enter a password of 15 characters or less for the login name If the login name is anonymous you don t need to enter a password Net Drive Setup FIP Server Login Nane YOKOGAWA Password C r Time Out sec Connect Disconnect 9 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Timeout Press SELECT to set the timeout time The available setting range is O to 3600 s Note e For keyboard soft keyboard operation see section 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings e If Login Name is set to anonymous it is not necessary to enter a password Connecting Disconnecting to a Network Drive 10 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Connect then press SELECT to make the connection If the connection has been made successfully the icon appears in the upper right part of the screen Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Disconnect then press SELECT to close the connection The icon in the upper right of the screen is turned off Saving the Waveform and the Setting Data 11 Press FILE and press the Utility soft key to display the File List FILE File Item a a a Save Load Utility Setup 12 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to NDO Net Drive Zero File List Path NDO space 2147463047 byte File Name Size Date Attr a ZPO NDO J 13 For the remaining procedures please refer to section 11 7 Saving Loading Set
139. DL1720 DL1740 Printer Note The instrument provides a function which enables you to use the keyboard displayed on the screen or the USB keyboard to enter and display a comment If you enter a comment which indicates the contents of the displayed waveforms before printing a hard copy it will help you to distinguish between different print outs Storage Medium Saves and Loads lt Chapter 11 gt The instrument standard configuration includes a built in floppy disk drive or a built in Zip drive and the optional configuration includes a SCSI connector and an Ethernet conector You can also choose to install an optional MO drive It is also possible to save data to an external SCSI device or network drive You can save data in any of the following formats Postscript TIFF and BMP This means that you can easily insert the saved images into documents produced by conventional DTP software packages Personal Computer 5 Floppy Disk or Zip Disk DL1720 DL1740 o TLL T IM 701710 01E 1 33 suopuny Chapter 2 Name and Use of Each Part 2 1 Front Panel Rear Panel Esc Key Closes pop up menu or soft key menu LCD Screen Menu keys Section 2 2 Press a key to display the corresponding menu VERTICAL Group Section 2 2 Menu group used to make settings for the vertical axis HORIZONTAL Group Section 2 2 Menu group used to make settings for the horizontal axis Power Switch Section 3 3 Seri
140. DL1720 DL1740 Digital Oscilloscope USER S MANUAL YO MA Yokogawa Elec IM 701710 01E 2nd Edition Product Registration Thank you for purchasing YOKOGAWA products YOKOGAWA provides registered users with a variety of information and Services Please allow us to serve you best by completing the product registration form accessible from our homepage http www yokogawa com tm PIM 103 01E Foreword Notes Trademarks Revisions Disk No DL31 2nd Edition July 2001 YK Thank you for purchasing the DL1720 DL1740 Digital Oscilloscope This user s manual contains useful information about the instrument s functions and operating procedures as well as precautions that should be observed during use mainly DL1740 To ensure proper use of the instrument please read this manual thoroughly before operating it Keep the manual in a safe place for quick reference whenever a question arises Three manuals are provided with the instrument including this user s manual Manual Name Manual No Description DL1720 DL1740 IM 701710 01E Describes all functions except for the User s Manual communications function and their operation procedures for the instrument DL1720 DL1740 IM 701710 17E Describes the communications functions of Communication Interface the GP IB RS 232 USB and network User s Manual interface DL1720 DL1740 IM 701710 02E Explaings basic operations only Operation Guide e The contents of thi
141. E ENHANCED TIME DIV ACTION DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press FILE 2 Pressing the Utility soft key displays the utility setting menu and the file list dialog box File Item FILE a a a Save Load Utility Setup Selecting the Medium to be Formatted 3 Pressing the Function soft key displays the file function menu Utility FILE Function a etzResetj A11 Set f Property Attr Delete Delete Exec 4 Pressing the Format soft key displays a list of media in the file list dialog box Net Drive cannot be formatted Delete Copy Rename Format FILE Delete Exec IM 701710 01E 11 5 wnIp n Helos y woz pue o e eq Hulpeo7 pue Bulnes 2 11 4 Formatting the Storage Medium 11 6 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select the medium to be formatted If no external SCSI devices option are detected and only the floppy disk or the Zip disk is inserted in the drive only FDO or ZPO is displayed File List 1457664 1332224 Utility FILE Function fa a edia Info Format Format Selecting the FD Format 6 Pressing the Format soft key displays the format menu Utility Function fa a edia Info Format Format 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select the format 2DD 720 K or 2HD 1 44 M Go to step 9 Format_ Function Ja j BFI Forma maa E e l Selecting the Format Type for the Zip Disk 6 Pressing the Forma
142. E DIV ACTION DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press DISPLAY 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu DISPLAY Format Interpol Graticule Scale Trace ccumu late Value Label Next Dual Sine FO A ON ON OFF 1 2 3 Press the Translucent soft key to select ON or OFF DISPLAY anslucent Mapping Next OFF PN Auto 2 2 Translucent OFF Translucent ON BLA H A n Moraal o TEIE z n opp Faci Chi tion a or Coy mm Le Da ee E a te Cy ye mez L Ce Ce kti th a TET aia a Zone Lr J CFF Cay let Eiye Hi F cy D Pd te Ede M Lo fart Taus in File a g u fo Sawer bo Pibt fo Hird oopy T Image hee Gi Send Hail Hail Count C ioe mma eT rae ET iame Explanation When this is turned to ON the pop up menu becomes translucent The contents underneath the pop up menu can be seen IM 701710 01E D D lt 8 8 X Y Waveform Display lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 19 gt Relevant Keys NAP OO HELP O 6 MMEASURE CURSOR mre Kal ACQ sranvaron Se O TRIG D V DIV DIV ACTION DELAY SS CO wove cso A The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 ORIZONT ED Gas o ay oss SIMPLE ENHANCED o o Operating Procedure 1 Press SHIFT to activate shift mode Function
143. F for the DL1720 2 V for the DL1740 1 V for the DL1720 at the 1 V range 10V for the DL1720 at the 10 V range 2 V in 5 mv resolution for the DL1740 1 V in 5 mv resolution for the DL1720 at the 1 V range 10 V in 50 mv resolution for the DL1720 at the 10 V range 0 1 Vp p for the DL1740 0 1 Vp p for the DL1720 at the 1 V range 1 Vp p for the DL1720 at the 10 V range 10 ns for both High and Low IM 701710 01E 12 2 Trigger Output TRIG OUT A N CAUTION Never apply an external voltage to the TRIG OUT terminal This may damage the instrument TRIG OUT Terminal TRIG OUT TTL LF This trigger outputs a TTL level signal when a trigger occurs The signal level is normally high but goes low when a trigger occurs Specifications Connector Type BNC Output Level TTL Output Logic LI negative Output Delay Time 50 ns or less Output Hold Time 1 us min at low level 100 ns min at high level Output Circuit Diagram LS06 470 Q 47 Q Trigger Point Trigger Signal z ns Max i H Trigger Output L Timing Chart Output Delay Time IM 701710 01E 12 3 nd no jeubis osp A 994 Andino 136p LAnduj 49661 12 2 Trigger Output TRIG OUT Low Level High Level Hold Time Trigger Occurrence Trigger Occurrence H Trigger ee 2 p Post Trigger Time Internal Process Time gt 4 bial e Internal Process Tim Trigger Trigger Pre Trigger y Post
144. F to not display Math1 Math2 is not available on the DL1720 so these soft keys are not displayed Setting the Operator 3 Press the M1 Setup soft key to display the computation dialog box 4 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Operation Source1 Operation Source2 Scale Upper 4 0000E 00 Lover 4 O60GE 00 Unit Smoothing M1 Displaya M1 Setup M1 Label 5 Pressing SELECT displays the operator setting menu 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select Bin and press SELECT Source1 Operation Source2 Scale Upper Lower Invert Unit Diff Smoothing Integ PS Pass Thru TH a Mi DisplayaMi Setup M1 Label Z Display ja MZ Setup M2 Label 9 36 IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 9 6 Binary Computation Selecting the Channel on which to Perform Computation 7 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Source 8 Pressing SELECT displays the channel setting menu 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select the channel on which to perform computation and press SELECT CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1720 Operation Source Scale Upper Lover Unit Smoothing Thr Upper Settings for the following items can be input directly using a USB keyboard i8 NATH Mi Displayati Setup M1 Label Z Display Janz Setup MZ Label ON C1 C2 Math ON C3 C4 Mathz Scaling The upper limit and lower limit of scaling are fixed to
145. FDR Con P postr ag E User2 PFF_DN L_CHI1_ L_Min__ LcH2_ L_Min__ L__ User3 PFF_PN C Avg None pegero sera PFF OR None IWeIRY 7 poser Cez E Const1 Const2 Const3 Const4 Dual Area MEASURE a ET Range1 fieT Range3 Dual Area Iten 5 000di4 5 000di Setup ST Rangez 6T Range4 OFF pN 5 000di4 5 000di Setting the Measurement Range 15 Press ESC 16 To set the measurement range of Areal press the T Range1 T Rangez2 soft key _MEASURE _ 6T Range3 Dual Area 2 ST Ranges 17 Set the measurement start point of Area1 If the jog shuttle action is not set to T Range press the T Range1 T Range2 soft key to set the action to T Range1 18 Turn the jog shuttle to set the start point of the measurement range 19 Set the measurement end point of Areai Press the T Range1 T Rangez2 soft key to set the jog shuttle action to T Rangez 20 Turn the jog shuttle to set the end point of the measurement range 21 Set the measurement range of Area2 in a similar fashion by pressing the T Range3 T Range4 soft key 2600 11 68 16 34 10 J pok Normal Stopped 339 T 500k5 S 2ZMs div i aint 10k gt gt i CH1 10 1 0 500 Uzdi v DC Full CH2 10 1 0 500 Vrdiy DC Full Edge CH1 F 11667E 00 i User 1 43 44E 03 User 3 3 2 9 27 SISAJEUY WAOJOARM 9 4 Performing Automated Measurements of Waveform Parameters
146. Hold Off us CH1 0 0 V Ft AC OFF pd T 0 08 During Enhanced Trigger 1 Press ENHANCED 2 Ifthe jog shuttle control is not set to Hold Off press the Hold Off soft key ENHANCED Count ahold ue bet Patter ko A gt BN Coupling 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the hold off period You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits In addition pressing RESET resets the value to 0 08 us 0 08 us SIMPLE Type a a E Count gHold Off et Pattern Level us A gt BCN Coupling 1 0 08 Note The hold off time setting applies to simple trigger and enhanced trigger IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time This function prevents a trigger from being activated for a specified time even if the trigger conditions are met during this time The following two methods can be used to prevent the trigger This is useful when you wish to activate the trigger in sync with a signal that is periodic as shown in the figure below Repetitive Period T Trigger Level Input sia j Trigger Source Signal Trigger Signal during Hold Off Period t When Trigger Slope is Set to Rise Hold Off Time Setting Range 80 ns to 10 s default 80 ns The setting resolution is 20 ns Points for Attention e Updating of the waveform may be slow in repetitive sampling mode In this case set the hold off time to a smaller value e f holdoff time is set to 100 ms or above the
147. IF 38574 2001 06 22 13 29 R U 963 TIF 38574 2001 06 22 13 27 R U 962 TIF 38574 2001 06 20 14 44 RW P Edge CH1 001 TIF 38574 2001 06 20 14 44 R U Auto 000 TIF 38574 2061 06 20 14 43 R U 0 000 VY IMAGE rN Fornat Color a rN File Nane Thunbnai Comment File List TIFF OFF If compressed image thumbnail data does not exist for the selected file an error message appears Pressing ESC clears the error message Note The following procedure clears the compressed image from the screen e Move the cursor using the jog shuttle IM 701710 01E 10 11 e eq Ud919NS JO INd1nNO 10 4 Storing Screen Image to the External Storage Medium Selecting the File Name 13 14 15 16 17 Pressing the File Name soft key displays the file name setting menu Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Auto Naming File Name Auto Naming OFF PN Filename C IMAGE a rN Thunbnai 1 Comment File List Format color a File Name TIFF OFF Press SELECT to select ON or OFF Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to File Name Pressing SELECT displays a keyboard Enter the file name using up to eight characters according to the procedures given on section 4 1 If you turned ON the auto naming function the first five characters are valid Executing the Storing 18 Pressing IMAGE SAVE store the screen image Pressing IMAGE SAVE aborts the storing Displaying the Thumbnail Preview Wind
148. ION DELAY POSITION TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure User Account Settings 1 Press MISC 2 Press the Network soft key to display the Network menu MISC a a a a alibrationRemote Cnti SCSI ID Netuork Bystem Cnf i Next 1 2 3 Press the User Account soft key to display the account settings menu a a a TCP IP User Mail Net Drive Net Print Others Comect Setup Account Setup Setup Setup Log List 4 Move the cursor to User Name using the jog shuttle then press SELECT to display the keyboard Netuork_ User Account User Name anonynous__ Passuord Cd Tine OUTSET The numerical values for this rey item can be input directly using TCP IP r User 7 Mail Net Drive Net Print F Others Connect a U S B keyboard s Setup Account Setup Setup Setup Log List 5 Enter the user name If you do not wish to limit access use the anonymous setting If access is to be limited enter a user name of 15 characters or less 6 Move the cursor to Password using the jog shuttle then press SELECT to display the keyboard 7 Enter the password Enter the same password again If the user name is set to anonymous it is not necessary to enter a password 8 Move the cursor to Timeout using the jog shuttle then press SELECT 9 Enter the Timeout time using the jog shuttle If the DL1720 DL1740 is not being accessed at the Time
149. Iwao C ruei msc sonoad mam Serur pispa orv mace save o SHE EARCH O TRIG D o o V DIV TIME DIV o ACTION DELAY o The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 C o c 2 SIMPLE ENHANCED Operating Procedure Entering Settings for a Network Drive 1 Press MISC 2 Press the Network soft key and press the Net Drive Setup soft key to display the settings menu MISC alibrationRemote Cnti SCSI ID Network Bysten Cnfgj vervieu Next 1 2 a a a a a TCP IP User Mail Net Drive f Net Print Others Comect Setup Account Setup Setup Setup Log List 3 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to FTP Server then press SELECT to display the keyboard Net Drive Setup FIP server C O U Login Name anonymous Password Time Out sec The numerical values for this item can be input directly using a USB keyboard a MISC a a a a a TCP IP User Mail Net Drive Net Print Others Comect Setup Account Setup Setup Setup Log List 4 Enter the IP address of the FTP server When using DNS you can specify it by name 5 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Login Name then press SELECT to display the keyboard 6 Enter a login name of 15 characters or less 7 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Password then press SELECT to display the keyboard 13 8 IM 701710 01E 13 3 Saving Waveform and Setting Data to a Network Drive FTP
150. LP E e SEARCH O TRIG D z 2 SIMPLE ENHANCED V DIV TIME DIV ACTION DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Explanation 4 12 1 Pressing START STOP starts or stops the waveform acquisition Waveform acquisition is in progress when the indicator above the key is lit START STOP is pressed when starting or stopping waveform acquisition e When the indicator to the upper right of START STOP is ON waveform acquisition is Started e When the indicator to the upper right of START STOP is OFF waveform acquisition is stopped Stopped is displayed on the upper left corner of the screen Operation when the Acquisition Mode is Set to Averaging Mode e When the waveform acquisition is stopped the averaging process also stops e When the waveform acquisition is restarted a new averaging process starts START STOP Operation while Accumulation is in Progress When the waveform acquisition is stopped accumulation is temporarily suspended When the waveform acquisition is restarted accumulation resumes Conditions in which the START STOP is Disabled e When the instrument is in the remote mode controlled via communication e When the instrument is printing or auto setup is in progress Note e Pressing FILE or HISTORY while the waveform acquisition is in progress stops the waveform acquisition e Ifthe waveform acquisition conditions are changed and
151. M 701710 01E 9 39 SISAJEUY LUIOJOARM 9 7 Inverting the Waveform Display 9 40 Selecting the Waveform to be Inverted 7 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Source 8 Pressing SELECT displays the channel setting menu 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select the channel on which to perform computation and press SELECT CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1720 operation Source Scale Upper Lover Unit Smoothing HI Disple Wi Setup AT Label Z Display enz setup WE Label r leslel Scaling 10 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Scale 11 Press SELECT to select Auto or Manual 12 If you selected Manual turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Upper 13 Pressing SELECT displays a menu used to display the upper limit of the waveform 14 Turn the jog shuttle to set the upper limit and press SELECT 15 Set Lower in a similar fashion Setting the Unit 16 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Unit 17 Using the keyboard that appears when SELECT is pressed enter the unit using four characters or less Smoothing 18 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Smoothing 19 Press SELECT to select ON or OFF Note For details regarding smoothing see section 9 10 Smoothing IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 9 7 Inverting the Waveform Display Entering Labels 20 Press the M1 Label soft key to display the keyboard See section 8 5 Setting Wa
152. MS s for the interleave mode For all other cases the acquisition mode is set to normal even if envelope is specified Average The instrument calculates average values and writes these into the acquisition memory If the acquisition count is set to Infinite the instrument uses exponential averaging and you are required to set a Weight value If the count is set to a numerical value from 2 to 65536 the instrument calculates simple averages using the specified number of readings Aejdsig pue uoinisinboy x Exponential Averaging Count Infinite Linear Averaging Count 2 to 65536 N x Xn An N 1 An 1 Xn An N N An Value Obtained after nth Averaging Xn nth Measured Value Xn nth Measured Value N Number of Averaging Times N Attenuation Constant Acquisition Count 2 to 256 in Steps of 2 in Steps of 2 Exponential averaging cannot be used when trigger mode is single or single N Simple averaging cannot be used with repetitive sampling The maximum record length is 500 k 1 M Word during simple averaging Value in parenthesis is available only if interleave mode is ON For more information about the relationship when roll mode or repetitive samplingmode is active or trigger mode is single or single N refer to appendix 1 Box Average For details see section 7 4 Acquisition Count The available count settings are indicated below If you set the value to Infinite acquisition will continue un
153. Math1 Math2 is not available on the DL1720 so these soft keys are not displayed Setting the Operator 3 Press the M1 Setup soft key to display the computation dialog box 4 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Operation Source1 Operation Source2 Scale Upper Louer Unit Smoothing 5 Pressing SELECT displays the operator setting menu 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select Diff differentiation or Integ integration and press SELECT Source1 Operation Source2 Scale Upper Lower Invert Integ Unit Smoothing PS Pass Thru NATH Mi Displayati Setup Mi Label Z Display ja Mz Setup MZ Label DFF ON C1 C2 Math ON C3 C4 Mathz 9 42 IM 701710 01E 9 8 Differentiating and Integration Waveforms Setting the Channel on which to Perform Computation 7 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Source 8 Pressing SELECT displays the channel setting menu 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select the channel on which to perform computation and press SELECT CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1720 Diff Integ Operation Source CHI Scale Puto Manual Upper Louer Unit gt Smoothing _DFF _ON__ Operation Source Scale Upper Louer Unit Smoothing _DFF __ON__ Start Point M1 Label Mi Displayami Setup The numerical values for this item can be input directly using a USB keyboard i8 Mathi Scaling
154. N Coupling 5 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel to be set 6 Press SELECT to select f 4 or when the Window is ON IN OUT or IM 701710 01E 6 29 Bbunebbi yp gt 6 12 Setting the OR Trigger 6 30 Setting the Level Hysteresis Trigger Coupling and HF Rejection 7 Pressing the Level Coupling soft key displays a menu used to set the level coupling hysteresis and HF rejection On the DL1720 settings for CH3 and CH4 are not displayed Level Coup1 ing Level Hys Coupling HF Rej CH1 0 0 vI z I DC I OFF czo oov _ p m orF_ c3 0 0 UE vc oF ao The Level setting for each fence Channel can be input directly P Bet Patter gore ae cis ie using a USB keyboard s OR Coupling ON 0 08 The setting also applies to A gt B N trigger See section 6 8 When the Window is ON set the window position width trigger coupling and HF rejection The settings are the same as the window trigger See section 6 13 Setting the Window Trigger Note The trigger level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection settings apply to simple trigger and enhanced trigger Setting the Window 8 Press the Window soft key to select either ON or OFF If OFF is selected triggers are activated on the OR of the channel edge If ON is selected triggers are activated on the OR of the channel s window conditions ENHANCED a a Window gHold Off et Patter
155. N e Removing the Zip disk while the access indicator is ON may damage the data on the Zip disk e Do not use the Zip drive with the rear panel facing down This may damage the data on the Zip disk e When turning ON OFF the DL1720 DL1740 have the Zip disk removed from the drive e Immediately after inserting the Zip disk the access indicator lights Do not use the instrument while the access indicator is lit as this may cause a malfunction General Handling Precautions of Zip Disks IM 701710 01E For the general handling precautions of the Zip drive read the instruction manual that came with the Zip disk wnIp n Helos 9y Wold pue o e eq Hulpeo7 pue Bulnes 2 11 3 Connecting MO Disk Drives or Hard Disks to the SCSI Interface Option SCSI Specifications Item Specification Interface Standard SCSI Small Computer System Interface ANSI X3 131 1986 Connector Type 50 pin half pitch pin type Connector Pin Assignments Unbalanced single ended see below 25 23 24 ww wae ee 321 lt Pin No 5049 48 28 27 26 Pin No Signal Pin No Signal 1 to 12 GND 38 TERMPWR 13 NC 39 40 GND 14 to 25 GND 41 ATN 26 DBO 42 GND 27 DB1 43 BSY 28 DB2 44 ACK 29 DB3 45 RST 30 DB4 46 MSG 31 DB5 47 SEL 32 DB6 48 C D 33 DB7 49 REQ 34 DBP 50 O 35 to 37 GND Items Necessary for Connection Cable Use a commercially sold cable that is 3 m or less in length that has a ferrite core on
156. N OFF 1 2 M Date and Time For the procedures used to set the date and time see section 3 6 Setting the Date and Time Operation State Displays Running when data acquisition is in progress and Stopped when it is stopped Waveform Acquisition State and the Number of Acquisitions Waiting for Trigger trigger wait state Pre pre trigger Post post trigger Value the number of waveforms acquired Display Position Zoom Position Record Length i o IE v J Display Record Length Display Record Length lt Normal Waveform gt lt Zooming Waveform gt Record Length Sample Rate Sampling Mode Varies depending on the T div and record length settings Normal Env Avg BoxAvg Realtime sampling mode Norm Rep Repetitive sampling mode Avg Rep Repetitive sampling mode in the averaging mode T div Setting that has been Changed after Waveform Acquisition Trigger Level Display Format 1 2 3 4 and 6 windows are possible or 1 2 and 3 windows for the DL1720 see section 8 1 Ground Level Probe Attenuation V div Input Coupling and Bandwidth Limit Settings IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 2 3 Screens M Soft Key Menu N Trigger Level Trigger Mode Trigger Type and Trigger Source Settings Note In some cases up to 0 02 of the total number of pixels of the LCD can be defective 2 7 Hed y283 JO os pue oweyN Chpater 3 Precautions During Use
157. Naming Function If you use Auto Naming files are automatically created with three digit numbers from 000 to 999 in their file name You can place a common name in front of the numbers up to 5 characters specified in File Name Note You can enter up to eight characters for the common name but the last three characters are discarded IM 701710 01E 10 13 e eq Ud919NS JO INd1nNO 10 4 Storing Screen Image to the External Storage Medium Notes when Saving the File e The maximum number of files that can be saved using the auto naming function is 1000 e When the total number of files and directories in one directory exceeds 2400 the file list will no longer be displayed Also a thumbnail window for screen image data can be displayed Thumbnail e Thumbnail Window The instrument can display a thumbnail window containing screen image files with the tif omp and ps extensions located in the directory selected from the File List under the IMAGE SAVE menu The data used to generate the thumbnail is separate from the screen image data itself but they are created at the same time The extension of the thumbnail data depends on the extension of the original image data and is shown as follows tif files ttd omp files btd ps files ptd Each of these files is approx 17 KB in size e Thumbnail Window Items The following three items are displayed in the thumbnail window e A compressed image of the waveform e File n
158. Off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Correlation with the Window Trigger If the window is turned ON the trigger is activated when either the OR trigger or the window trigger becomes true For details related to window trigger see section 6 13 Setting the Window Trigger 6 31 Bbunaebbi yp gt 6 13 Setting the Window Trigger ENHANCED lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 10 gt Relevant Keys ae zi SEA V DIV TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Setting the Trigger Type 1 Press ENHANCED 2 Pressing the Type soft key displays the trigger type menu ENHANCED Type a a 6 Count iaHold Off et Pattern Levely uS A gt BCN Coupling 1 0 08 3 Press the OR or Width soft key NHANCED_ A gt B N J A Delay BE Pattern Width OR TV Hold Off us 6 68 Setting the Window Trigger 4 Press the Window soft key to select ON Set the status and trigger conditions of each channel according to the procedures given in section 6 11 Setting the Width Pulse lt T Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 Time Out or 6 12 Setting the OR Trigger ENHANCED ENHANCED Type a a Windou J gHold OFf et Pattern Levely us OR Coupling OFF DN 6 08 6 32 IM 701710 01E 6 13 Setting the Window Trigger ENHANCED Setting the Center Level and Window Width 5 Pressing the Level Coupling soft key displa
159. Procedure Setting the Waveform Label 1 Press one of the keys from CH 1 to CH 4 or CH 1 to CH 2 for the DL1720 to select the desired channel 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu Display Position Coupling 6 Offset Bandwidth 0 00div 3 Press the Label soft key to display a keyboard and enter the waveform label according to the procedures described in section 4 1 CH1 Variable inear Scl Label Next 50 0 V ON CH1 272 IM 701710 01E 8 5 Setting the Waveform Labels 8 8 Explanation Turning ON OFF the Waveform Label 4 9 Press DISPLAY Press the Trace Label soft key to select ON or OFF Nornal OkS S 2Ms div T 2000711701 10 01 47 J 5393 Ji ok Stopped 50 CH1 10 1 0 500 Udi DC Full Edge CH1 F Auto 0 010 V scale Trace Pccunulate Value Label ON ON OFF 2600 11 01 16 61 59 J pios Normal Stopped 5393 7 500k57S DISPLAY Next 1 2 CH1 10 1 0 500 Vrdiy DC Full 2nS liv Edge CH1 F Auto 0 010 V Format Interpol Graticule Scale Trace Accumulate Value Label Single Sine y A ON OFF DN OFF Label Display ON OFF Trace Label Use this parameter to select whether or not to include waveform labels channel identification labels on the display Entering Customized Labels You can use the Define Label feature to enter customized labels for each channel Each label is a char
160. R U R U R U R W 2600 10 31 18 24 R U 2600 16 31 18 23 R U v A Co Utility FILE Function a Filter et Reset A11 Set Property Attr opy Exec Copy SET fe Selecting the Destination Medium Directory 12 The procedures are the same as steps 13 to 17 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data CHAPTOO TIF CHAPTO66 TIF CHAPTO 5 TIF CHAPTO 6 TIF CHAPT 5 TIF Executing the Copy Operation 13 Press the Copy Exec soft key to copy all source files that have an asterisk Function a Filter et Reset A11 Set f Property Copy SET f Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box and Viewing its Properties The procedures are the same as steps 30 to 33 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Explanation Selecting the Copy Source Files You can copy all files that have an asterisk to the left of the file name There are two methods available to select the files that are to be copied e Selecting the Files One at a Time Place an asterisk to the left of the file names one at a time using the Set Reset soft key e Selecting All Files at Once Selecting a file or directory and pressing the All Set soft key places an asterisk on every file in the directory containing the selected file or directory Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box You can specify the type of files to display e extension Displays only the data file that was
161. S s The time interval used to determine the values is the twice sampling interval of the normal mode The maximum and minimum values are paired and acquired in the acquisition memory Envelope mode is useful when you want to avoid aliasing section 1 2 since the sample rate is kept high irrespective of the time axis setting T div Furthermore envelope mode is also useful when you want to detect glitches pulsing signals which rise very fast or display an envelope of a modulating signal rae I ll FA l l l I I I l Ep Envelope I l l L Box Average Taking the data sampled at 400 MS s for the DL1720 DL1740 interleave mode 800 MS s the moving averages of certain number of data points are determined as shown in the following figure These data are acquired in the acquisition memory and displayed Box averaging is useful for eliminating the small amount of noise on the input signal It is also effective in removing the noise from a signal acquired only once e e e e0 36 T 2 ecoooo o Input Signal 4 20 MS s a Interleave Mode is OFF gt eee gt Time Axis Box Averaging Data a O gt gt Time Axis 1 15 suonoun 4 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions Sequential Store lt Section 7 3 gt In the real time sampling mode waveform data will be stored in the acquisition memory only a set number of times and all waveforms can be displayed This stops aut
162. Trigger Pre Trigger y Post Trigger Acquisition 1 HIGH High Level Period Indicates the pre trigger and internal processing time 100 ns minimum 2 LOW Low Level Period Indicates the post trigger and internal processing time 1 us minimum 12 4 IM 701710 01E 12 3 RGB Video Signal Output RGB VIDEO OUT A N CAUTION e When making a connection turn OFF the DL1720 DL1740 and the monitor e Never short circuit the RGB VIDEO OUT terminal or apply an external voltage This may damage the instrument RGB VIDEO OUT Terminal 0202020202 O VIDEO OUT VGA Through RGB output the contents displayed on the instrument can be displayed on an external monitor Monitors that can be connected are VGA monitors or multi synchronous monitors that can display VGA Specifications D Sub 15 Pin Receptacle Pin No Signal Specification 1 Red 0 7 Vp p 2 Green 0 7 Vp p 3 Blue 0 7 Vp p 4 5 6 GND 7 GND 8 GND 9 10 GND 11 12 13 Horizontal synchronous signal Approx 31 3 kHz TTL negative logic 14 Vertical synchronous signal Approx 60 Hz TTL negative logic 15 IM 701710 01E 12 5 yndyno euis oapiA 994 Andino 136p LAndu 49661 12 3 RGB Video Signal Output RGB VIDEO OUT Connecting the Monitor 1 Turn OFF the DL1720 DL1740 and the monitor 2 Connect the monitor to the DL1720 DL1740 using an analog RGB cable 3 Turn ON the DL1720 DL1740 and the monitor Th
163. UT Negative 6 1 5 GND DL Side Connector 6 NC Unconnected Output Timing EXEC 10ms or more Acquisition lt gt Acquisition l Determination Determination Result Result NOGO OUT GO OUT Ld Remains Low until the system is ready for the next judgement If an action is specified for when the condition is met the time is prolonged until the action has finished IM 701710 01E 9 14 Using the GO NO GO Signal Output Function Connecting to Another Instrument IM 701710 01E CAUTION e Never apply an external voltage to the NO GO OUT and GO OUT terminals otherwise damage to the instrument may result e When connecting the GO NO GO signal output externally make sure not to connect other signal pins by mistake Errors in connection may cause damage to this instrument or to the other connected instrument e Do not mistakenly insert the USB cable to the GO NO GO output terminal This may cause damage to the DL1720 DL1740 To connect the DL1720 DL1740 to external equipment use the GO NO GO cable 366973 sold separately Do not use the GO NO GO cable 366973 sold separately for any other purpose than for carrying out GO NO GO determination on the DL1720 DL1740 e About the GO NO GO Cable 366973 Sold Separately Approx 1 5 m 6 To the DL1720 DL1740 gt Wires are separated Modify them to suit your needs RJ 12 Connector Color Pin No Signal Name Logic Yellow 2 NC White
164. When Zoom Mode is Z1 amp Z2 or Main amp Z1 amp Z2 20 Press the Result Window soft key to select Z1 or Z2 SEARCH Type a Result 21 Mag fs Z1 Pos amp Searched Setup Window x 2 6 606di4y Pattern Exec Serial 22 22 Mag Z2 Pos No Match Pattern x2 6 606di Executing the Search 21 Pressing the Exec soft key starts the search The search results are displayed in the zoomed waveform display position selected in step 17 You can search 1000 times using the same conditions Displaying the Previous Search Results 22 Press the Searched Pattern soft key 23 Turn the jog shuttle to select the number of the search result to be displayed Newer search results are displayed with higher numbers result 2 is newer than result 1 Changing the Zoom Rate and Position 24 Asin the zoomed waveform you can change the zoom rate of Z1 and Z2 by pressing the Z1 Mag Z2 Mag soft key and turning the jog shuttle 25 As inthe zoomed waveform you can move the section that is being zoomed by pressing the Z1 Pos Z2 Pos soft key and turning the jog shuttle When Performing a Parallel Pattern Search 8 22 1 Press SHIFT to activate shift mode The functions printed in purple letters on the front panel become activated 2 Press ZOOM Selecting the Search Method Type 3 Press the Type soft key to display the search method selection menu SEARCH Type fa 21 Nag 6 Z1 Pos Searched Setup Pattern Exec Edge x 2 900di4 No Mat
165. Y MEN JEN SETUP DISPLAY IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT SEARCH O TRIG D C Oo g o ACTION DELAY o a The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press MISC 2 Press the Network soft key to display the Network menu a a a a a alibrationRemote Cnti SCSI ID Network Pystem Cnfg ian 3 Press the TCP IP Setup soft key to display the TCP IP settings menu Netuork_ MISC Connect Log List a a a a a TCP IP User Mail Net Drive Net Print Others Setup Account Setup Setup Setup DHCP ON OFF 4 Move the cursor to DHCP using the jog shuttle and press SELECT to turn DHCP ON or OFF If you select ON then it is not necessary to the set the IP address subnet mask and default gateway If you wish to set up the DNS please skip to step 11 If you do not wish to set up the DNS check the network cable connection and restart the DL1720 DL1740 The IP address subnet mask and default gateway are automatically set TCP IP Setup DHCP IP Address LaL aL 4 9 Net Mask 255 255 255 9 Gate Way 9 9 9 9 DNS Settings for the following items can be input directly using a USB keyboard i8 Connect a a a a PN User Mail Net Drive Net Print Others Account Setup Setup Setup Setting the IP Address Set the IP address if you turned DHCP OFF in step 4 5 Move the cursor to the IP Address field with the jog shuttle and press SELECT
166. a CE nenie a N es 1 30 16 9 USB Keyboard aao r E 1 31 4 3 App 15 USB PINO aosan eae eh ee 1 33 10 6 User Account Settings sesesesesessssesssesseeseeeeeeees 13 22 UserName etait ciel at integrons ahd iaadhee om Sea 13 22 User Frese eeen O 5 9 UTP unshielded twisted pair Cable ccesceseeeeeeeees 13 1 V V GUSOT arare n a na 1 21 9 2 9 7 VIOI andae ea cia ee tance hea uses 5 11 bY 7A bY a 3g 9 entered eee tne en ene per eee 2 3 Vahlable Parameters cnscavearcendesanscladcavecvaandassnedd ateavgonsontenscs 5 12 Vertical s lt 2 eea eE e stance E 1 3 Vertical Cursor Measurement seeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 21 Vertical Gurson onara oe See eee 9 2 9 7 Vertical Position ico ssicntevavdcescssasceecetdeaviopencses tan eee 1 5 5 2 VEHiICal Sensitivity sacccesiaterei eit E 1 4 Video SIGN Al esst ad aE 1 10 6 36 W Waveform ACQUISITION soiis lian 4 12 Waveform Label neeneennennnnoenonnenernornnnrnrennorrerrerrrne 1 18 8 7 VV AV STO TEI ise ss aun ee aeidaa E encanta 1 24 Width IO Cl wo casttceaccert ait ceveshntnadeaiel r apintensetulot a 6 24 WWINGOW IMQQOR derisi a eaa 1 10 6 32 IM 701710 01E Index X X Y Waveform sescccevicbcacese neds aes ded covets ndootee tenes 1 19 8 12 Z ZID DISKS muri a dita a nesses 11 2 PESEN AN Nene career E EE T E T 1 33 16 7 ZIO DIVO TS SU sariei a a ehh ealbs 15 9 ZOO ar E N 1 19 ZOOM KOV se a 2 3 Zooming the Waveform sesssssesss
167. a a e Ei 10 14 THUMM all WINDOW iesin A A 10 14 MME a A e iar E 3 12 TIMEAXIS orn ae reat i taccnteciicet 1 5 16 4 App 1 HME COUT a AN 13 10 13 13 13 22 TIME DIV KNOB icc a 2 3 TINS OAS Co cck ed teers cae teeth e a e a RS 1 5 5 15 IWaAnSIUCENT ModS oiin nae RA 8 11 TRE DAN GICATOR iina e AE 2 3 IM 701710 01E TERUG OUT cei tee teehee ed vedy uae eet te ede cea ie eed tara ds 12 3 16 8 Diale lols AEE E EE E EE biaavesendasaweetacsnes 1 8 Tagger CONGINON assas r E 6 22 Trigger Coupling T EE 1 11 6 9 6 16 6 19 6 23 6 28 6 31 6 34 ngger Delay iere ta aae 1 13 6 3 Tigger GIE epre S 6 40 Taggsr GteiNDU kni a abies 16 8 Trigger Gate Input Terminal cccccccceeeeceseeseeeeeeeeeees 6 41 TRIGGER Group isis sssascncesnszeapsciaciaviavecharsanaciactetenveaberedanseeet 2 3 Tagger HO OM ee E casera 1 12 Trigger Hysteresis erara da ian aar 1 12 Trigger Level nieas 1 12 6 9 6 12 6 16 6 19 6 22 6 28 6 31 6 37 Tagger Mode nere A 1 11 6 1 TIGOST OUIDUN nen nean a aaa 12 3 16 8 Tagger POSIION seesecte er hasn a 1 13 6 4 ngger SOCOM ss cstscevensaeesnsesendseavecereseatssaesdiea E 16 2 THOGS SIOD Cece tacicss nar E E E E 6 9 6 12 TriQQer SOUICE 0 0eceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 12 6 9 6 12 6 13 6 22 Tagger TY Oe sereo a us decease aca eee 1 8 WOUDICSHOOUING nessico seene a iie 15 1 Turning Channels ON OFF ccccccceeeceeeenesceeeneeseeeseees 5 1 TV INGO acts rona a a aina 1 10 6 35 U USB INor
168. a drive refer to 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP and enter the TCP IP settings e You must restart the DL1720 DL1740 for the settings to take effect Explanation You can access the DL1720 DL1740 s Zip drive floppy drive or SCSI drive optional from a PC or workstation via Ethernet In order to access these devices you must be running FTP client software on the PC or workstation User Account Settings e User Name 15 characters or less may be used The default value is anonymous The available characters consist of all ASCII characters on the keyboard including space e Password 15 characters or less may be used The available characters consist of all ASCII characters on the keyboard including space e Time Out If the instrument is not being accessed at the time specified here the connection to the network will be automatically closed 13 22 IM 701710 01E 13 9 Viewing the Ethernet Interface Option and MAC Address Relevant Keys NAP SNOr HELP a Aca SETUP PET SPLAN COPY MAGE SAE ae aE O SHIFT HORZONTAL v neo O TRIG D a t o 2 sme ENHANCED MEASURE CURSOR FILE misc MATH eee Cre se roed wars ER xem C2 Reser eect V DIV TIME DIV ACTION DELAY Te The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press MISC 2 Press the Overview soft key MISC a an a alibrationRe
169. a to a USB BJ printer select the output resolution from 180 dpi 300 dpi and 360 dpi Comments A comment string of up to 20 characters that is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen can be printed Color Select from the following list of choices ON Prints the image using the same colors as the screen no background color grid printed in black OFF Prints the image using the same colors as the image printed using the built in printer Precautions when Printing on a USB Printer e Images may not print properly on some printers Use USB printers that have been tested for compatibility e You can also print to a USB printer that is connected to your PC Save the screen image data to a floppy disk or a Zip disk according to the procedure given in section 10 4 Storing Screen Image to the External Storage Medium Then load the data on the PC and print it Note The DL1720 DL1740 does not detect out of paper and printer errors on the USB printer If you executed printing on the DL1720 DL1740 when the USB printer is in such condition press COPY to stop the printing 10 9 e eq Ud919NS JO INd1nNO 10 4 Storing Screen Image to the External Storage Medium Relevant Keys CLEAR TRACE O X Y_ ME ENO BAAS ETOP pseu Com mace save A gt O TRIG D C venea A HORIZONTALS SEARCH m 2 SIMPLE ENHANCED V DIV TIME DIV u e3 O O ACTION DELAY The DL1720 is not equi
170. aaaa ACQ Status Stopped 162 GO NOGO Status Success 140 Fail 21 Max C1 4 16667V SDv C2 697 941mV Freq C3 500 0000kHz Wd C4 1 00us gt ErrNo 004 Exit from GO NO GO mode ErrNo 806 Cannot change settings during GO NO GO Stop the GO NO GO ErrNo 004 Exit from GO NO GO mode ErrNo 806 Cannot change settings during GO NO GO Stop the GO NO GO ErrNo 602 No SCSI device or no media inserted Check the SCSI device connection and the SCSI ID and make sure that the storage medium is inserted if applicable IM 701710 01E 13 7 Using the Mail Function Action Mail Function Relevant Keys Operating Procedure IM 701710 01E lt For a description of this function refter to page 1 30 gt NAP SNAP HELP C III o Cene mse conoco juam Gea erro Reser eeo X Y MENU __ MENU _ 77 PHASE ACQ START STOP CETP psp orr mace save o Surr SEARCH O TRIG D oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION _ DELAY TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Mail Settings 1 Follow steps 1 through 9 in section 13 6 Using the Mail Function Fixed Interval to input the MailServer MailAddress and a Comment if necessary It is not necessary to set the MailBaseTime and Interval using the action mail function However turn Interval OFF when only using the action mail function without using the fixed interval mail function Setting the Action
171. acquisition mode is not average or the trigger mode is auto auto level or single roll mode display is enabled at the following T div settings Record Length T div 1 kword 50 ms div to 5 s div 10 kword to 1 Mword 50 ms div to 50 s div IM 701710 01E SOXY e UOZIIOH pue eo1 10 Chpater 6 Triggering 6 1 Setting the Trigger Mode lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 11 gt Relevant Keys NAP amp 0 TRACE OO HELP SETUP PET a ae ae O SHIFT C wm A SEA O TRIG D 12 sme ENHANCED V DIV TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press MODE 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired mode to set the trigger mode Auto i Level Normal Single Single N 3 If Single N is selected turn the jog shuttle to set the number of times to acquire the waveform MODE fesingle N Auto uto Level f Normal Single a Count 2 Auto Mode If the trigger condition is met within the 100 ms timeout period the waveform is updated on each trigger occurrence If the trigger condition is not met after the timeout period elapses the waveform is automatically updated If the time axis setting is in the range in which the display mode is set to roll mode the display is set to roll mode MODE Explanation Auto Level Mode If a trigger occurs within the timeout period the waveform is displayed in the same fas
172. acter string of up to eight alohanumerics You can set the label display ON OFF using the Trace Label function the label appears in the scale value display and with measurement results IM 701710 01E 8 6 Accumulated Waveform Display lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 16 gt Relevant Keys s oO E CACATE wer zea sramrror MENU MENU PHASE aca srarrisroP START STOP esra A ee C HORIZONTAL fv O TRIG D oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED TIME DIV E O OO HELP ACTION _ DELAY ee a a Operating Procedure Selecting Averaging Mode 1 Press DISPLAY 2 Press the Accumulate soft key to display the accumulate mode menu The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 DISPLAY Format Interpol Graticule Scale Trace ccumu late Value Label Next Quad Sine gt H O GS DFR on ON OFF 1 2 3 Press the corresponding to the desired accumulate mode Format Interpol J Graticule Scale OFF Persist Color Value Quad Sine gt G BY ON Proceed to step 4 if you have selected Persist or to step 5 if you have selected Color Setting the Accumulative Time When Persist has been Selected 4 Turn the jog shuttle to set the desired accumulative time DISPLAY Format Interpol Graticule Scale Trace ccumu late Value Labe1 Persist Ez Quad Sine y G BY ON PFF ON fo ps Setting the Grade Width When Color has been Selected 5
173. age data to the output destination FD Zip disk or SCSI when SCSI and serial interface option are installed that you specified in the Image Save menu Send Mail Sends a mail Ethernet Interface option For details see section 13 7 Using the Mail Function Action Mail Function Number of Actions Sequence Single Executes the Action once and terminates Continue Repeats the execution of the Action up to the number of acquisition count specified in ACQ Count until the acquisition is stopped if infinite is specified Number of Waveform Acquisitions ACQ Count Set the number of waveform acquisitions Infinite Continues until the waveform acquisition is stopped with START STOP 1 to 65536 Stops when the specified number of waveforms is acquired Executing Aborting GO NO GO Operation The operation starts when you press the Exec soft key Waveform acquisition is automatically stopped when the determination is complete To forcibly stop the operation press START STOP or press the Abort soft key Save to File Hard Copy Image Save Operation Operates according to the settings in the File menu the Copy menu or the Image Save menu File Name when Action is Set to Save to File or Image Save The file is saved with AutoName under the File menu or the Image Save menu For details see section 10 4 Outputting to Storage Medium or section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Notes when Performing GO NO GO Determ
174. al Port RS 232 Connector For details about communication functions refer to the instrument Communication Interface Manual IM701710 17E SCSI Connector Section 11 3 Connects to an external hard disk MO disk or other external SCSI storage device PRN KBD Connector Sections 4 1 10 3 A Connect USB printer and keyboard here USB Interface Connector For details about communication functions refer to the communication Interface Manual Doc IM701710 17E IM 701710 01E DL1740 Floppy Disk Drive or Zip Drive Chapter 11 DIGITAL OSCILLOSCOPE 1GS s 500M OT Jog Shuttle Changes the selected value or moves the cursor The more the shuttle ring outer ring is turned the more the setting increment increases TRIGGER Group Section 2 2 Menu group used to make trigger settings COMP Output Section 3 5 N Outputs probe compesation signal Hed 4283 JO os pue oweyN Ground Connector Ground connection used for probe calibration Input Terminals Section 3 4 Used to connect a probe The DL1720 is not equipped with channels 3 and 4 and a multi purpose external trigger external clock trigger gate input terminal is provided in place of channel 4 Ethernet Connector Chapter 13 Option GP IB Connector For details about communication functions refer to the communication Interface Manual Doc IM701710 17E GO NO GO Output Terminal Section 9 14 A Outputs the results of t
175. al on the rear panel 3 Connect the other end of the UTP or STP cable to a hub or router 4 Turn ON the power to the instrument 100BASE TX Compatible Adapter Hub or Router TARR opal Personal Computer d bog g O oon D or Work Station DL1740 DL1720 DC 20 0123 _ O EEN UTP Cable or STP Cable Network Card Straight Cable When Making a One to One Connection to the PC or Workstation 1 Turn OFF the power to the instrument and PC or workstation 2 Connect one side of the UTP or STP cable to the ETHERNET 100BASE TX terminal on the rear panel 3 Connect the other end of the UTP or STP cable to a hub or router In the same manner connect the PC or workstation to a hub or router 5 Turn ON the power to the instrument 100BASE TX Compatible Adapter Hub or Router Personal Computer or Work Station UTP Cable or STP Cable Straight Cable Network Card Note e When connecting the PC or workstation one to one a network card a 1OBASE T 100BASE TX autoswitching card is required for the PC or workstation e When using a UTP cable straight cable be sure to use only a category 5 cable e Avoid connecting the PC or workstation directly to the instrument without going through the hub or router We cannot guarantee results using a direct connection 13 2 IM 701710 01E 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP Relevant Keys Cre mse Prono marn PHASE X
176. ale upper Lover Unit Smoothing DFF 5 Pressing SELECT displays the operator setting menu 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select PS and press SELECT Operation Source2 Scale Upper Lower Invert Unit Diff Smoothing Integ Pass Thru M1 DisplayaMi Setup IM 701710 01E 9 45 SISAJEUY LUIOJOARM 9 9 Displaying the Power Spectrum 9 46 Selecting the Channel on which to Perform Computation 7 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Source 8 Pressing SELECT displays the channel setting menu 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select the channel on which to perform computation and press SELECT CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1720 Mi Setup Operation Source Scale Upper Lover Unit eee The numerical values for this item can be EYE duane input directly using a USB keyboard FFT Window Mi DisplayaMi Setup M1 Label Z Display ja HZ Setup RT ON C1 c2 Math1 ON C3 C4 Mathz Scaling 10 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Scale 11 Press SELECT to select Auto or Manual 12 If you select Manual turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Upper 13 Pressing SELECT displays a menu used to set the upper limit of the waveform display 14 Turn the jog shuttle to set the upper limit and press SELECT 15 Set Lower in a similar fashion Setting the Unit 16 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Unit 17 Using t
177. ale Vale S eee E 1 17 Scaling e Aa 1 24 9 41 9 44 Scaling COSMIC SIU eesis en e A EnS 5 14 SCAMMG Val a A N 8 6 SCIECN Golo ea aE r R 14 1 No 1S fo a eee ee A ee en eee 2 6 SC Sl ID NUMBGR esson ke cdaveeatendis 11 9 SCSI Inte aC oee ici eeeeesteeie ees 11 4 16 7 DO Sl TSS T Anne ea E A 15 9 Search and ZOOM Function ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 26 8 18 Searching the Historical Data Using Parameters 7 17 Searching the Historical Data Using Zone n s 7 13 SELECT KV haus ssteoae cig a 2 5 p Ai f So RR ec ne ee ee T 15 7 Index 4 Self Diagnostic TeSt ieai mentees ene 15 7 Send Mail Action acs ssiesensvoncticanathioasvevereecies 6 39 9 54 9 59 Sending a Test Mall rcer nisen r aE 13 17 Sequential StOre cccceceeecceeeceeeeeaeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 16 7 5 Serial Interface vac egw ia este oh encodes neared 1 30 16 9 senal NUMDET shaves aves ls avencsostaacestaaveennasaastapeaadeasorantieaagied aetee i senal PANETT aori sosusehvaseaudsanetsonned a NEA 8 28 Serial Pattern Search eessessoesnensenenneenereerrerrrerrens 1 27 8 20 Settings for a Network Printer cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 15 SETUP KEV orne e E E 2 4 SIF EKO y esanai E 2 4 SNOW MAD rea a 7 12 7 16 7 20 SIMPLE Koyone nn eee A gecunccses 2 3 SiIMpIe MIJET ssssssasiacvdevarsivsavsesadeasdsvnsdevsassartdaasfevonnicastaxtanas 1 8 Sine Interpola om sser 1 18 Single N MOde enerne 1 11 6 2 Single MOC Gy
178. ally stopped To forcibly stop the operation press START STOP or the Abort soft key to stop the acquisition Explanation Waveform Parameters that can be Determined using GO NO GO Operation Item This function is applicable to the all of waveform parameters 27 items in section 9 2 Up to four types of parameters can be determined simultaneously Mode OFF Does not perform GO NO GO determination ON Performs GO NO GO determination Upper and Lower Limits of Parameters Upper Lower The upper and lower limits depends on the parameters They can be set in the range 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Setting the Condition IN When the value is inside the upper and lower limits OUT When the value is outside the upper or lower limits IM 701710 01E 9 53 SISAJEUY WWAOJOARM 9 12 GO NO GO Determination Using the Measurement of Waveform Parameters Setting the Logic AND Executes the Action when all parameter conditions 1 to 4 types are met OR Executes the Action when any one of the parameter conditions 1 to 4 types is met Action to Take when the Condition is Met not Met Action Buzzer Sounds the buzzer Save to File Saves the waveform data to the storage medium FD Zip disk SCSI option and so on specified in the FILE menu Hard Copy Outputs the screen image data to the destination Built in USB Net Print Ethernet interface option spcified by Copy to in the Copy setting menu Image Save Saves the screen im
179. ame e Color information The file name and color information appear on the bottom of the compressed waveform image e Thumbnail Display Window Format Four thumbnails can be displayed in the window The order in which the files are displayed is the same as that in the File List dialog box Files are displayed from left to right and top to bottom e Scrolling the Thumbnail Window If the number of files compatible with the thumbnail feature is greater than four you can scroll the thumbnail window one row 2 thumbnails at a time To scroll the files upwards turn the jog shuttle in the minus direction counterclockwise To scroll the files downwards turn the jog shuttle in the plus direction clockwise e Displaying Compressed Images in the File List Selecting screen image data files from the File List causes a compressed image of the screen data to appear in the upper right portion of the File List Also file name and color information are not displayed in the compressed image ma OO _ rrr Chpater 11 Saving and Loading Data to and from the Storage Medium 11 1 Floppy Disks Floppy Disks that can be Used The following types of 3 5 inch floppy disk can be used Floppy disks can be formatted on this instrument 2HD 1 44 MB MS DOS format 2DD 720 KB MS DOS format Inserting a Floppy Disk into the Drive Hold the floppy disk with the label facing left and insert it with the shutter section facing the drive Insert the floppy disk until
180. an be omitted You cannot save to a file name that is already in use in the same directory no overwriting e Number and Types of Characters that can be Used Item Number of Characters Characters that can be Used File name 1 to 8 chars 0 to 9 Ato Z _ parenthesis minus sign Comment 0 to 25 chars All characters including spaces e Notes when Saving Setup Data You cannot save while the data acquisition is in progress Press START STOP to stop the acquisition When the total number of files and directories in one directory exceeds 2400 the file list will no longer be displayed File Extension The File extension SET is automatically appended to the file Auto Naming Function When Auto Naming is turned ON files with three digit numbers from 000 to 999 are automatically created Specify the common name maximum of five characters specify at the Filename item that is placed before the three digit number Specifying the Files to Display in the File List Dialog Box You can specify the type of files to display e SET Displays only the setup data files b xk Displays all files on the medium Properties Lists the file name extension file size the date it was saved the attributes and the comment for the selected file Note e Ifa key other than the Abort key is pressed during saving or loading an error occurs e You cannot save or load while the data acquisition is in progress e If you change the file
181. an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press MISC 2 Pressing the System Cnfg soft key displays the system configuration menu MISC alibrationRemote Cnti SCSI ID Network Pystem Cnf a l Next 1 2 Selecting the Message Language 3 Press the Message soft key to select ENG or JPN ysten Cnfg MISC Message lick Sounda Offset Trig Gate Date Tine Cancel ENG OFF pN ON OFF Setting the Click Sound 3 Press the Click Sound soft key to select ON or OFF ysten Cnfg MISC Message lick Sounda Offset Trig Gate Date Tine Cancel ENG OFF pN ON OFF Explanation Selecting the Message Language A message appears when an error occurs You can set whether to display these messages in English or Japanese The message codes are the same for both languages For messages see section 15 2 Turning ON OFF the Click Sound Set whether or not to make click sounds when the jog shuttle is turned The default setting is ON 14 4 IM 701710 01E 14 3 Turning OFF the Backlight and Setting the Brightness of the Backlight Relevant Keys NAP SNOr HELP SETUP PET os ae aE O SHIFT SEARCH O TRIG D m o V DIV TIME DIV o ACTION DELAY et D o 2 SIMPLE ENHANCED The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press MISC 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key MISC a a a a alibrationRemote Cnti SCSI ID Netuork Pyste
182. are measured is the waveform that is displayed on Show Map It can be used with Delay and 1 cycle mode 9 23 SISAJEUY WWAOJOARM 9 3 Statistical Processing 9 24 Target Waveforms CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2 or CH1 CH2 and Math1 for the DL1720 Automated Measurement Parameters for Statistical Processing Items of statistical processing per period are given in section 9 2 Items of other Statistical processing are indicated in section 9 2 and 9 4 The result of statistical processing that can be displayed is only two parameters of automated measurement Measurement Range during Statistical Processing The measurement range is the same as that specified for normal automated measurement See section 9 2 and 9 4 Show Results If you perform statistical processing for each period or statistical processing of historical data a list of measured results can be displayed for the selected automated measurement parameters The waveforms are numbered from the oldest historical data and the corresponding results of automated measurement are displayed The maximum and minimum values of each waveform parameter are displayed with the T maximum and J minimum symbols If there are multiple points that are of the same value the maximum and minimum values are marked on the oldest data The number of data points that can be listed is 24000 If this value is exceeded the most recent 24000 points of automated measurement parameters of historical
183. are not available on the DL1720 e You can select either of the following two methods for assigning channels to windows Auto Channels that are set to ON are displayed in order of channel number with the lowest channel displayed in the top window Fixed Channels are displayed in order of channel number regardless of whether ON or OFF User Arbitrarily assign the channels to the split screens regardless of wether or nor the channel display is turn ON Graticule Section 8 3 Use this feature to select use of grid frame or cross graticule Scale Values Section 8 4 If the Scale Value setting is ON the screen displays numerical values at the top and bottom of the vertical axis and the horizontal axis IM 701710 01E 1 17 suonoun 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions Waveform Labels Section 8 5 You can assign an arbitrary label up to 8 characters to each waveform Trigger Mark fick Normal 260kKS S Sms div CH1 10 1 5 60 U diy Waveform Label DC Full CH2 16 1 0 500 Urdiy DC Full Scale Values Edge CH1 f Auto DISPLAY Format pTpol Graticule Scale Trace Accumulate Value Label Next Selects use of Dual A EA Co ajor px for pN OFF V2 2 waveform windows Display Interpolation lt Section 8 2 gt This feature selects the type of interpolation applied in areas where there are less than 500 sample points Less than 250 points in the zoom window when zooming o
184. arranged from top to bottom in order CH1 CH2 Math1 Math2 But no windows are shown for channels whose display is set to OFF Fixed Channels are displayed regardless of whether their display setting is ON or OFF in order of channel number The Math2 window is at the bottom with the Math1 window directly above it User Assign numbers from 0 to 5 to CH1 CH2 Math1 and Math2 The display position varies depending on the assigned numbers 1 The DL1720 is not equipped with channels 3 4 or Math2 Assignment Example when the Display Format is Set to Dual om oza CH2 1 35 Fixed If CH3 OFF Auto If CH3 OFF User The number of points that can be displayed vertically for each channel varies as follows according to the display format However the vertical resolution remains unchanged Single L_ 384 points Quad EX 96 points Dual H 192 points Hexa H 64 points Triad E4 128 points IM 701710 01E 8 2 Setting the Interpolation Method lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 18 gt Relevant Keys CANRERNR aie OO MEASURE SE CFILE MISC MATH MENU yma Gea ACQ ED TART STOP Cseruffose ay PLAYYCOPY IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT eke O TRIG D preser Goon sur ewance ENHANCED C C one Posmow DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Set the Interpolation Method 1 Press DISPLAY 2 Press
185. ary format e The data that are saved can be loaded to display the waveform and compute numerical data e A header file is automatically created The header file is used when analyzing the waveform on aPC The header file cannot be opened using this instrument For the header file format see appendix 3 ASCII Header File Format e The file extension is WVF The file extension of the header file is HDR e When saving waveform data in binary format a header file is automatically created with the extension HDR When the DL1720 DL1740 is used to copy delete change filenames or change file ownership of waveform data files files with the extension WVF the header files are automatically updated to reflect the changes Do not delete the header file only or the waveform data file only as this may cause a system malfunction ASCII e The sampled data in the acquisition memory are saved in ASCII format The data can be used to analyze the waveform on a PC e Data in this format cannot be loaded on this instrument e The file extension is CSV Float e The sampled data in the acquisition memory are saved in 32 bit floating point format The data can be used to analyze the waveform on a PC e Data in this format cannot be loaded on this instrument e The file extension is FLD Data Size The following list shows the data size when the record length is set to 100 kwords waveform data of CH1 to CH4 are saved and Math1 and Math2 are
186. asennie ecects 1 29 13 1 16 9 Expanded Waveform cccccccccscececccscscseeecensnsnnesnsnsenenes 1 19 External Clock IADU a a ie 12 1 External Dimensions ceseceeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeanenees 16 12 External Storage Interface ccccscsssesssesssessssessseseneees 16 7 External MOGE eeir heh aaneiiceaaes 6 11 External Trigger Input ticriciuegiesdeteuteidaneie easel 12 1 16 8 F FET Probe piana deserves vectites asec treet ere a eeep ee eee ili 3 8 FFT Fast Fourier Transform Computation c0008 1 25 PPT Pun Guo sarea E E N E 1 25 Field NO 2x heeteee se a h AE NE 6 36 FILE CY cs Gath eae a a A ee 2 4 Fixed TGR Vall enn a 13 16 PO All E A E E ater E A T ae 11 14 Floating Point Format aarre enaa 11 14 Floppy Disk Dr srssrrsesnnm arenu ee ee 1 33 16 7 Floppy Disk Drive TeSt ccccsesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 15 9 FIOM DY DISKS waters saat cecenes cicttocs EN 11 1 Formatting a Floppy Disk esveisecucteynevsavtsacsectiri cies stsectss 11 7 Formatting a the SCSI Device ee 11 8 Index 2 FORMA AZO DISK erpina vas r 11 7 Formatting the Storage MediUM cccceseseseeseeeteeees 11 5 Frame SKD T E ate 6 37 Frequency Characteristic ssssssssseseeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 5 Fon Panelian aN 2 1 FTP Client Function ses fevecidad scaccatcerndtectee aster 1 29 13 8 13 11 FTP Passive Mode neinn e E 13 25 PIP OEV ra nenat aan ena AnNa 13
187. at are not displayed can be loaded into a PC using the communication function For details see the communications interface users manual IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 9 3 Statistical Processing The following three methods of statistical processing are available e Normal Statistical Processing Statistics Statistical processing is performed on all acquired waveforms while acquiring waveforms If you stop waveform acquisition and start it again statistical processing continues from where it left off Statistical processing is performed on the selected parameters for automated measurement that are not displayed Therefore if you exclude statistical processing on the automated measurement parameter that is being displayed while waveform acquisition is in progress the result of the statistical processing of the next selected parameter for automated measurement is displayed The number of measured values used in the statistical processing Cnt is the number of waveforms that have been acquired up to that point If you add statistical processing on a new automated measurement parameter while waveform acquisition is in progress or when it is stopped the number of measured values used in the statistical processing Cnt is the number of waveforms that have been acquired since the parameter was added e Statistical Processing for Each Period Determines the period of the displayed waveform from the oldest data measures the selected parameters for
188. ated at points A and C if Pulse gt T The trigger is activated at point C if T1 lt PLS lt T2 where Time1 350 ns Time2 450 ns The trigger is activated at point D if Time out is specified where Time 450 ns OR Trigger Enhanced Trigger Section 6 12 A trigger is activated when any of the edge trigger conditions specified on CH1 to CH4 or CH1 and CH2 for the DL1720 or the window condition is met A trigger can be activated by either the rising edge of CH1 or CH2 CH1 CH2 Tigger Tigger Tigger When CH1 and CH2 Window Trigger Enhanced Trigger Section 6 13 A certain voltage range window is set and a trigger is activated when the trigger source level enters this voltage range IN or exits from this voltage range OUT IN OUT ks Scie trigger is activated trigger is activated Window i Width j j Window Center Center oth trigger is activated a Width oa TV Trigger Enhanced Trigger Section 6 14 The TV trigger is used when you are observing a video signal and is compatible with NTSC and PAL broadcasting systems IM 701710 01E 1 3 Setting a Trigger Trigger Mode lt Section 6 1 gt Conditions for updating displayed waveforms are set The following five types of trigger mode are available Auto Mode Displayed waveforms are updated each time a trigger is activated within a specified time approximately 100 ms referred to as the time out period and are updated automa
189. ating Procedure 1 Press MISC 2 Pressing the System Cnfg soft key displays the system configuration menu 3 Press the Trigger Gate soft key to select Active H Active L or OFF Message Click Sound Offset Trig Gate Date Ti ne Cancel TPN ENG DFF ON The default setting is OFF 6 40 IM 701710 01E 6 16 Setting the Trigger Gate Explanation The trigger gate is used to set the timing to enable the specified trigger conditions OFF Waveforms are acquired when the trigger conditions are met Active High When the external signal is Low waveforms are not acquired even if the trigger conditions are met When the external signal is High waveforms are acquired when the trigger conditions are met Active Low When the external signal is High waveforms are not acquired even if the trigger conditions are met When the external signal is Low waveforms are acquired when the trigger conditions are met When trigger gate is active A gt B N trigger and A delay B trigger can not be specified Level High and low are determined based on the external trigger level See section 6 6 The external signal is applied to the terminal on the rear panel or the front panel for the DL1720 that is shared between external triggers external clock and trigger gate Trigger Gate Input Terminal The external trigger input terminal or external clock input terminal is also used as a trigger gate terminal If you wish to enable the trig
190. automated measurement on the data within the period and performs statistical processing The period is determined in the same fashion as the period for the waveform parameter You can select whether to apply the period of the specified waveform to all waveforms or determine the period for each waveform CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2 Apply the period of the specified waveform to all relevant or CH1 CH2 and Mathi waveforms and perform statistical processing for the DL1720 Own Determine the period for each relevant waveform and perform statistical processing Statistical processing is performed from the oldest data of the displayed waveform in blocks of periods It can not be used with the 1 cycle mode at the same time In addition the following waveform parameters are not measured For waveforms whose period is measured Avg Freq average frequency Avg Period average period PISN pulse count Int1 XY area Int2XY area and Delay For other waveforms Inti XY area Int2XY area and Delay Note Statistical processing for each period is not possible on automated measurement of waveform parameters on dual areas described in section 9 4 e Statistical Processing of Historical Data Performs automated measurement of waveform parameters on waveforms that were acquired using the history memory function and performs statistical processing Statistical processing is performed from the oldest waveform The range on which the Statistics
191. ayed in the entry box of the keyboard Path FDO Space 674816 byte File Name Size Date Attr lt THEVOL 1 gt 2600 16 31 15 09 R U CHAPT 19 TIF 38574 2000 10 31 18 45 R U CHAPT 18 TIF 38574 2000 10 31 18 45 R W CHAPT 1 7 TIF 38574 2000 10 31 18 44 R U CHAPT 16 TIF 38574 2000 10 31 18 43 R U CHAPT 15 TIF 38574 2000 10 31 18 41 R U CHAPT 14 TIF 38574 2000 10 31 18 40 R U CHAPT 13 TIF 38574 2000 10 31 18 37 R W CHAPT 12 TIF 38574 2000 10 31 18 36 R U CHAPT 11 TIF 38574 2000 10 31 18 35 R U CHAPT 16 TIF 38574 2000 10 31 18 35 R W CHAPTO69 TIF 2600 16 31 18 33 R U Function Ja Filter a File Name Property Renane SET gt 9 Enter the directory file name according to the procedures given in section 4 1 Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box Viewing the Properties The procedures are the same as steps 30 to 33 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data IM 701710 01E 11 35 WINIPs Helos y Wold pue o e eq Hulpeo7 pue Bulnes 2 11 12 Changing the Directory File Name of the Storage Medium and Creating a Directory Creating a Directory Explanation 11 36 Follow steps 1 3 to display the file function selection menu 4 Press the soft key corresponding to Make Dir Delete Copy Renane Make Dir Format _ AIA ESF Selecting the Medium Directory 5 The procedures are the same as steps 13 to 17 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Wave
192. be The address used in the program configured or controlled via is different from the actual address the communication interface The GP IB interface is not being used according to the electrical and mechanical specifications IM 701710 01E Corrective Action Use a correct power supply Turn ON the main power switch Press any key Select appropriate colors for the screen Turn ON the power again Unload the loaded waveform Press SHIFT CLEAR TRACE activate local mode Execute a key test If the test fails servicing is required Turn OFF the trigger gate Set correct trigger settings Allow at least 30 minutes for the instrument to warm up after turning ON the power Perform calibration Correct the phase properly Set to the correct value Set the offset voltage to zero Perform calibration If the measured values are still odd servicing is required Servicing is required Format the medium Remove the write protection from the medium Delete unnecessary files or use a new medium Use the same address in the program and the instrument Comply with the specifications Reference Section 3 3 14 3 13 1 3 3 11 6 15 3 6 16 Chapter 6 4 6 3 5 5 4 5 5 4 6 15 6 11 10 Communication Interface User s Manual IM701710 17E 15 1 a uoi 2 dsuj pue sueuazuienN Hunooys jqnoIL 15 2 Messages and Corrective Actions Error Messages If an error occurs dur
193. board and Printer Interface ccccccccceccsssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseueeeeeeeesseaeeeeeeeesaaaeeeeeesaeaaees 16 7 16 9 Auxiliary Input Output Section cccccccccceccceeeeeeecseeesceenseccesccccsscsessseesseesseeeeeneenerers 16 8 16 10 Computer IMMEN ACE corset teres suis via naseanlb ad sitcaeaesitds aa 16 9 i ES Fags General een ere meet ie a ee mca oh nde eee ee ec ee ne en SRE Ee Cee RR ee eet 16 10 16 12 External DIMENSIONS sacar cs teehee eat chee ea a sao aN 16 12 Appendix Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length App 1 Appendix 2 How to Calculate the Area of a Waveform cccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeneaaeaaaaes App 8 Appendix 3 ASCII Header File Format ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesaaeeaaaasaaaaaaaeeneess App 10 Appendix 4 LiStor Defaults sosav nia etic a e E E App 14 Appendix 5 Assignment of Keys on the USB Keyboard cccccccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeees App 15 Index xii IM 701710 01E Chapter 1 Functions 1 1 Block Diagram Tl c m O O m System Configuration SCSI Interface option Su n Per Input BSS22222 G88 option OOoooooo oooo0 Saving loading data BOSSSOoo ooo Hard copy External SCSI device Keyboard Printer Interface lt gt _ gt Screen data Po USB printer External clock input External trigger input Trigger gate input CoC wen lt CDC
194. caling value and waveform label name for each display area refer to sections 8 4 8 5 can also be displayed e f a waveform or waveforms are loaded from history memory store memory floppy disk or Zip disk the input waveform cannot be displayed To compare waveforms use the snapshot function IM 701710 01E 5 1 SOXY e UOZIIOH pue ed1110 5 2 Setting the Vertical Position of a Waveform lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 4 gt Relevant Keys NAP OO HELP s ii Cee ta oo eee O TRIG D sme ENHANCED ACTION DELAY TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press one of the keys from CH 1 to CH 4 or CH 1 to CH 2 for the DL1720 to select the desired channel 2 Press the Position soft key to set the jog shuttle action to Position Display Position J Coupling Probe Offset J Bandwidth OFF PN 0 0 div ICMR 16 1 0 0 U Full 172 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the vertical position You can change the setting a digit using the arrow keys located below the jog shuttle 5 2 IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 5 2 Setting the Vertical Position of a Waveform Range of Movement The vertical position can be moved in the range between 4 div from the center position in the waveform display frame Setting Resolution 0 01 div Confirming the Vertical Position For input waveforms and computed wav
195. ch 4 Press the Parallel Pattern soft key to select the search method SEARCH Edge Serial Width Parallel Auto Scroll gt Searched Pattern Pattern Pattern Exec o Match IM 701710 01E 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function Setting the Search Criteria 5 6 10 IM 701710 01E Press the Setup soft key to display the search criteria settings dialog box Turn the jog shuttle to select the setting item When you press SELECT the settings menu for the selected item is displayed or the selected value is changed On the DL1720 the CH3 CH4 and Math2 settings are not displayed Setup Level Clock CH Pattern x I 0 000 VJ 3diy Mathi X_I 0 00div_ _0 3di0_ Mathz Hysteresis The Level and Hysteresis settings for each channel or Math function can be input directly using a USB keyboard a Start Point Type Parallel Pattern Setting the Clock CH Move the cursor over to the clock channel with the jog shuttle then press SELECT When selecting CH1 CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 proceed to step 7 If you select None skip to step 10 Setup 6 Math2 x I 0 00diy I 9 3div Start Point 5 606di Type Parallel Pattern Setting the Clock Channel Pattern Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the Pattern of the channel set as the clock channel Press SELECT to select f or 4 Setting th
196. chronization pulse and the level at which the trigger level is judged The setting range is from 0 1 div to 2 0 div The setting resolution is 0 1 div The default setting is 0 5 div Setting the Frame Skip Frame This is a function for skipping frames when the color burst is inverted on every frame You can select how many frames to skip from the following choices Framei Trigger every frame at the specified field Frame2 Trigger every two frames at the specified field Frame4 Trigger every four frames at the specified field Frame8 Trigger every eight frames at the specified field Precautions to be Taken when Setting the TV Trigger e Video signals can only be input to CH1 All other channels do not support video signals e Hold off trigger coupling and HF rejection settings are ignored 6 37 Bbunaebbi yp gt 6 15 Setting the Action On Trigger Relevant Keys lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 11 gt zor o2 m o HORIZONTAL Apy SEARCH v DIV TIME DIV lt a The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 6 38 1 Press SHIFT to activat shift mode Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 2 Press MODE Turning ON OFF the Action 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the action you wish to enable and select ON ACTION Buzzer to Hard Copy Image Save fgACQ Count Send Mail DFF ON Exec DFF ON OFF ON
197. cting the Source Medium Directory 5 Select the directory according to steps 13 to 17 on section 11 6 Selecting the File to be Loaded 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file Loading the File 7 Press the Load Exec soft key to load the file from the directory indicated in Path ___ The name of the Load Exec soft key changes to Abort Canceling the Loading Operation 8 Press the Abort soft key to cancel the loading operation The name of the Abort soft key changes to Load Exec Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box Viewing the Properties The procedures are the same as steps 22 to 25 Setup Data that are Saved The setup data of each key existing at the time of the saving operation are saved However date and time communication parameters and SCSI ID numbers are not saved Number of Bytes Necessary in Saving the Setup Data Approximately 13 Kbytes Selecting the Medium and Directory The storage medium that can be used to save and load waveform data are displayed in the File List dialog box 11 19 wnip n Helos 9y Wold pue o e eq Hulpeo7 pue Bulnes Ey 11 7 Saving Loading Setup Data 11 20 e Display Example of Storage Medium FDO Floppy disk ZPO Zip disk SC5 SCSI device with an ID number of 5 SC5_1 Partition 1 of the SCSI device with an ID number of 5 NDO Network drive available with the Ethernet interface option File Name and Comments You must specify a file name Comments c
198. ction just as you would onto internal floppy disks or Zip disks and hard disks DL1720 DL1740 Qo Zoo Q File Retrieval from the DL1720 DL1740 Floppy Disk or Zip Disk FTP Server Function Section 13 8 You can download files from the internal floppy disk or Zip disk of the DL1720 DL1740 using a networked PC or workstation acting as the client DL1720 DL1740 0 a 00 Outputting to a Network Printer LPR Client Function Section 13 5 You can print screen images to a network printer just as you would to the DL1720 DL1740 s built in printer or to a printer with a USB interface 1 29 suonoun 1 6 Communications Mail Transmission SMTP Client Function Sections 13 6 13 7 You can send transmissions to a given email address at specified intervals Using this function you can periodically transmit such information as GO NO GO results and the measurement rate DL1720 DL1740 Lio TT TT TMo Network Interface Communication Interface User s Manual IM701710 17E You can output waveform data to a PC for analysis using the Ethernet interface or perform waveform measurement by controlling the instrument with an external controller This function is available on products with firmware version 1 30 or later GP IB Interface Serial Interface Option and USB Interface lt The Communication Interface User s Manual IM701710 17E gt A GP IB interface and a USB interface come standard w
199. d positions are not displayed on the X Y waveform The resolution is as follows Resolution T div x 10 displayed record length Precautions to be Taken when Displaying X Y Waveforms e The divided windows of the T Y waveform display when using the T Y amp X Y format are displayed in accordance with the Format setting specified with DISPLAY e The zoom function applies only to T Y waveforms In addition Main Z1 or Z2 can be selected for the T Y waveform display e When expanding the X Y waveform change the Variable parameter of each channel The waveform can be expanded or reduced artificially IM 701710 01E 8 9 Zooming the Waveform lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 19 gt Relevant Keys NAP SNAP HELP CLEAR TRACE Gale ACQ START STOP MATH X Y MENU MENU PHASE SETUP DISPLAY IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT 7 O TRIG D 2 ME DIV V DIV ACTION _ DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Selecting the Display Mode 1 Press ZOOM 2 Pressing the Mode soft key displays the display format menu 200M Mode Main 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired display format Main 21 Only 22 Only Main amp Z1 Ma in amp Z2 21 amp 2Z2 ja in amp Z1 amp 2Z2 Selecting the Display Format of Zoomed Waveforms 4 Pressing the Format soft key displays the format menu If you set Mode to Ma
200. d Corrective Actions Corrective Action Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings connection and disk capacity Confirm the network settings connection and disk capacity Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings and connection Corrective Action Set a correct date and time The file name contains characters that are not allowed or the file name is restricted in MS DOS Press START STOP to the waveform acquisition All keys other than START STOP are disabled during GO NO GO determination Set a different label Turn ON the channel display or set Math operation Change the timebase to Internal Select Abort or press START STOP Change the acquisition mode or the trigger mode Setting or set the trigger mode to a different mode Turn OFF the trigger gate Change the acquisition mode or the trigger mode Turn OFF the repetitive sampling mode lower the T div setting or shorten the record length Turn OFF the repetitive sampling mode lower the T div setting or shorten the record length Turn OFF the interleave mode Change
201. d Measurements of Waveform Parameters on Dual Areas 9 25 Adding Subtracting and Multiplying Waveforms ccccccssseeceeeeeeseseceeeeseeeeeeeeeesaeees 9 32 Binary COMPUTATION zessan E AA AEAN beams Maman cce ame eee 9 36 IM 701710 01E 9 7 9 8 9 9 9 10 9 11 9 12 9 13 9 14 Contents Inverting the Waveform Display ccccssseccceeseeeeceeeseececeeeeeeseueeeesseseeesauseeesssageesssaaes 9 39 Differentiating and Integration Waveforms cccccssececccseeeeeeeeeseeeeaaeeeeeseaaeeeeeseneeessaaees 9 42 Displaying the Power SpeCtrUN orres e ra A Sa 9 45 SMON eaae a E A A E EE 9 48 Phase Shifted Display c cssccccccccssseecececceesseceecceceueeeeccseeeuseeeeseeeaseeeecssssaeeeeesssaaages 9 50 GO NO GO Determination Using the Measurement of Waveform Parameters 9 51 GO NO GO Determination USING ZONES ccccceeeeeeececeeeeeecaeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeesaeaaaeseeeeeeeess 9 55 Using the GO NO GO Signal Output Function 2 eee e cece cece eee e seen eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 9 60 Chpater 10 Outputs of Screen Data 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 Loading the Paper Roll into the Built in Printer Option cccccsseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 10 1 Outputting to the Built in Printer Option 2 0 0 ceccccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeessesaeeeeeeeeeeeeess 10 3 Outputting Screen Images to a USB Printer cece eccccccceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeueaeeseseeeeeess 10 6 Storing Screen
202. d Off Time IM 701710 01E 6 7 Generating Triggers on the Power Signal SIMPLE Relevant Keys Ca MARRARA Dj OO MEASURE CURSOR FILE MISC sana maT MENU SETUP PET DISPLAY COPY IMAGE SAVE me aT O SHIFT SEARCH O TRIG D N SIMPLE Jfa ACTION DELAY Spe The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 a V DIV TIME DIV o a Operating Procedure Setting the Trigger Source 1 Press SIMPLE 2 Pressing the Source soft key displays the trigger source menu SIMPLE Source fg Level Slope Coupling HF Reject Pysteresis Hold Off us CH1 0 0 U Ft AC OFF pA T 0 08 3 Press the Line soft key CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1720 k Roia OFF Setting the Hold Off 4 Set the hold off time according to the procedures given in 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time SIMPLE Source gHold Off Cus Line 0 08 Explanation Triggers can be generated on the rising edge of the power signal that is being supplied to the instrument Waveforms can be observed in sync with the commercial power supply frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz Selecting the Trigger Source Select Line Setting the Hold Off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time IM 701710 01E 6 13 Bbunebbi yp gt 6 14 6 8 Setting the A B N Trigger ENHANCED Relevant Keys lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 8 gt
203. d in S s number of samples per second Thus this mode is suitable for observation of a waveform which fluctuates more slowly than the sample rate If the sample rate is higher than the frequency of the input signal high frequency components will be lost In this case a phenomenon in which high frequency components change to lower frequency components occurs due to Nyquist s theorem This phenomenon is called aliasing Aliasing can be avoided by setting the acquisition mode to envelope mode and acquiring the waveform Aliasing Signal Input Signal Sampling Point IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 1 2 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes e Repetitive Sampling Mode To enable this mode you must set the time axis so that the sampling rate is greater than 1 GS s interleave ON 2 GS s Under this mode the oscilloscope produces a single waveform by taking samples over several periods of a repetitive signal so that the sampling rate appears higher than it actually is An apparent sample rate of up to 100 GS s can be used Furthermore even in the real time sampling mode if the sample rate exceeds 1 GS s interleave ON 2 GS s due to the time axis and the displayed record length settings the sampling mode automatically changes to repetitive sampling There are two repetitive sampling methods sequential sampling in which a signal is sampled sequentially at a fixed interval and random sampling in which a signal is sampled at rando
204. d of the search range You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the value to the default value 14 By controlling both Upper and Lower using the jog shuttle you can move the search window up and down without changing the vertical width Select Zone Condition source 15 In asimilar fashion set the horizontal range of the search window 16 Repeat steps 6 to 15 to set Zone1 to Zoned Upper 6 50diyv fs Lower 6 56d iv is Right 2 500d i Setting the Logic 17 Press the Logic soft key to select AND or OR Executing the Search 18 Press the Search Exec soft key to execute the search 7 14 IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 7 8 Searching the Historical Data Using Zone History Search Function Displaying the Waveforms that are Found 19 Press ESC to return to the HISTORY menu 20 Press the Show Map soft key to display a list of the numbers of the acquired waveform data and time at acquisition end History Memory Map N N u H 0002 09 26 32 25 0042 09 26 31 44 0096 09 26 30 33 CH1 10 1 H 0043 09 26 31 42 0097 09 26 30 31 0 500 Udi 0044 09 26 31 39 0098 09 26 30 29 DC Full 0045 09 26 31 37 0099 69 26 30 2 0060 09 26 31 07 0100 09 26 30 25 0061 09 26 31 05 0101 09 26 30 23 0062 09 26 31 03 0102 09 26 30 21 0063 09 26 31 01 0103 09 26 30 19 0064 09 26 30 99 0104 09 26 30 17 0065 09 26 30 97 0
205. d on the rising or falling edge of the clock channel while the status pattern match condition is not satisfied CH1 Input CH1 H CH2 L 4 4 CH2 Input i m CH4 X CH3 Clock CH i Condition True Shs input J J Pattern a Pattern not Pattern Matched Pattern Matched Matched atched Trigger ae Met 1 The DL1720 is not equipped with channels 3 and 4 Setting the Trigger Level Range 8 div within the screen Resolution 0 01 div For example the resolution is 0 02 mV when the V DIV setting is 2 mV div Setting the Hysteresis Sets a width to the trigger level so that the trigger is not activated on small changes A Approximately 0 3 div of hysteresis around the trigger level ZZ Approximately 1 div of hysteresis around the trigger level The value above are estimated values They are not strictly guaranteed 6 22 IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 6 10 Setting the Pattern Trigger ENHANCED Setting the Trigger Coupling Select from the following list of choices AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from the trigger source signal as the trigger signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as the trigger signal Turning the HF Rejection ON OFF Select 15 KHz or 20 MHz when you wish to use a signal source that is obtained by removing the high frequency components frequency components greater than or equal to approximately 15 kHz or 20 MHz from the tr
206. default setting is 0 0 0 0 The default gateway has control functions that handle protocol exchanges when communicating on multiple networks and that smoothly carry out sending and receiving of data Consult your network administrator for the default gateway setting values In some cases this setting may not be necessary The settings are automatically configured in environments using DHCP 13 5 uodo ddej19 U JOUIBUI 3 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP 13 6 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DCHFP is a protocol that allocates necessary setting information to all PCs connected to the network When DHCP is ON the following settings are automatically assigned e IP Address e Subnet Mask e Default Gateway e DNS To use DHCP you must have a DHCP server installed on the network Inquire with your network administrator to find out if you can use DCHP When DHCP is set to ON different settings may be assigned each time the power is turned ON Therefore when using the FTP server function See section 13 8 be sure to check the IP address and other settings of the instrument on the PC or workstation each time you turn ON the instrument DNS Domain Name System The DNS is a system that correlates the host name domain name to the IP address Given AAA BBBBB co jp AAA is the hostname and BBBBB co jp is the domain name The host domain name can be used instead of a numeric IP address when accessing the net
207. displayed record length see appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record length e You can change the zoom rate for Z1 and Z2 zoomed waveforms of two locations Zoom Position Z1 Position and Z2 Position e The zoom position can be set by specifying the center position in the range 5 to 5 div from the center of the waveform display frame The resolution is as follows Zoom position resolution T div x 10 displayed record length e The zoom box enclosed by solid lines is Z1 and the one enclosed by dashed lines is Z2 Since each box is independent you can set the position separately Changing the Range of the Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Fit Meas Rng to Z1 Fit Meas Rng to Z2 Sets the range of the automated measurement of waveform parameters to the zoom range of Z1 or Z2 This is valid even if the automated measurement of waveform parameters is turned OFF 8 17 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 26 gt Relevant Keys shor P HELP Aw LO Ss DS CaS amre D TM 5 u GED DELAY a EZ BA The DL1720 is not Sf J aipa with for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure When Performing a Edge Search 1 Press SHIFT to activate shift mode Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 2 Press ZOOM Selecting the Search Method Type 3 Pressing the Type soft key disp
208. div DC Full Cursor1 Edge CH1 Auto 0 0 Y 3 000MS Explanation Restrictions Cursor measurements cannot be made on the following waveforms e Snapshot waveforms e Accumulated waveforms other than the newest waveform Cursor Types and Measurement Items Type When Not Displaying the X Y Waveform e H Horizontal Cursor Measures the Y axis value at the cursor Y1 The Y axis value at Cursor1 Y2 The Y axis value at Cursor2 DY The difference between the Y axis values at Cursor1 and Cursor2 e V Vertical Cursor Measures the X axis value at the cursor Also choose the order of the data X1 The X axis value at Cursor X2 The X axis value at Cursor2 DX The difference between the Y axis values at Cursor1 and Cursor2 1 DX The inverse or the difference between the Y axis values ata Cursor1 and Cursor2 Y1 The Y axis value at Cursor1 Y2 The Y axis value at Cursor2 DY The difference between the Y axis values at Cursori and Cursor2 9 8 IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using e Marker Cursors Move the cursor on the waveform data and measure the waveform data values M1 Marker 1 to M4 Marker 4 can be set on different waveforms Y1to Y4 The Y axis values of M1 to M4 DY2 The difference between the Y axis values of M1 and M2 DY3 The difference between the Y axis values of M1 and M3 DY4 The difference between the Y axis values of M1 and M4 X1 to Z4 The X axis values of M1
209. dy Appendix 3 App 10 YOKOGAWA ASCII FILE FORMAT Publiclnfo FormatVersion 1 11 Model DL1740 Endian Big DataFormat TRACE GroupNumber 3 Trace TotalNumber 10 DataOffset 0 Group1 TraceNumber 4 BlockNumber 1 TraceName CH1 BlockSize 1002 VResolution 1 5625000E 00 VOffset 0 0000000E 00 VDataType IS2 VUnit V VPlusOverData 32768 VMinusOverData 32769 VillegalData 32769 VMaxData 32767 VMinData 32768 HResolution 5 0000000E 09 HOffset 2 5000000E 06 HUnit S Date 2001 07 25 Time 01 45 00 CH2 1002 1 5625000E 00 0 0000000E 00 IS2 V 32768 32769 32769 32767 32768 5 0000000E 09 2 5000000E 06 S 2001 07 25 01 45 00 ASCII Header File Format CH3 1002 1 5625000E 00 0 0000000E 00 IS2 A 32768 32769 32769 32767 32768 5 0000000E 09 2 5000000E 06 S 2001 07 25 01 45 00 CH4 1002 1 5625000E 00 0 0000000E 00 IS2 V 32768 32769 32769 32767 32768 5 0000000E 09 2 5000000E 06 S 2001 07 25 01 45 00 IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E Group2 TraceNumber BlockNumber TraceName BlockSize VResolution VOffset VDataType VUnit VPlusOverData VMinusOverData VillegalData VMaxData VMinData HResolution HOffset HUnit Date Time Privatelnfo ModelVersion DisplayBlockSize DisplayPointNo PhaseShift Note 2 1 MATH1 1002 6 1035156E 03 7 000000E 01 IS2 DB 32768 32769 32769 32767 32768 2 0000000E 01 0 0000000E 00 Hz
210. e parameters do not need to be specified Turning ON OFF the FTP Passive Mode Turn this function ON when using the DL1720 DL1740 behind a firewall that requires the passive mode The default setting is OFF A firewall is furnished on a system that has security features It prevents intrusion from the outside into the network system Setting the LPR Timeout Time The DL1720 DL1740 closes the connection to the printer if there is no response from the printer for a certain period of time timeout time when it accesses the printer Select the value in the range of 0 to 3600 s The default value is 15 s Setting the SMTP Timeout Time When a mail server is accessed from the DL1720 DL1740 and connection cannot be established after a certain period of time timeout time the DL1720 DL1740 decides that theconnection to the mail server is not possible and closes the connection Select the value in the range of 0 to 3600 s The default value is 15 s 13 25 uodo ddej19 U JOUIBUI 3 Chpater 14 Other Operations 14 1 Setting the Screen Color and Brightness Relevant Keys Cre mse Prono marn PHASE X Y MEN JEN SETUP DISPLAY IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT SEARCH O TRIG D Operating Procedure 1 2 J IM 701710 01E 2 SIMPLE ENHANCED V DIV TIME DIV ACTION DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Press MISC Press the Next 1 2 soft key Pressing the Graphic C
211. e 1 3 gt NAP NAP HELP TIME DIV ACTION DELAY Se The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Press one of the keys from CH1 to CH4 or CH 1 to CH 2 for the DL1720 to select the channel 2 Press the Bandwidth soft key to display the bandwidth menu Display fgPosition J Coupling Probe ffs Offset Bandwidth Beieneen Ea To 3 Press a soft key corresponding to 20 MHz 100 MHz or Full to select the bandwidth Hi o Display Position J Coupling ZOMHZ 100MHz Full OFF DN 0 00div DC1iM2 meee 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 as necessary to set other channels Note Explanation The bandwidth is set for each channel Set the bandwidth on all necessary channels Use this function to remove high frequency components 20 MHz or more or 100 MHz or more from the input signal The bandwidth is set for each channel Bandwidth Two f requency bandwidths 20 MHz and 100 MHz are available The following figure shows how the bandwidth affects the frequency characteristics When Full is selected the bandwidth is Max 500 MHz 50 Q input or Max 400 MHz 1 MQ input 3 dB 5 10 Approx 20 MHz Approx 100 MHz FULL IM 701710 01E 5 8 Setting V div lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 4 gt Relevant Keys NAP SNOT HELP neser X Y MENU MENU PHASE ms i DISPLAY COPY IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT CHORZONTAL v EARCH Cl O TRIG D oO oO SIMPLE ENH
212. e Clock CH Level Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the Level of the channel set as the clock channel Press SELECT then use the jog shuttle to set the level and press SELECT again Use the arrow keys to move between the digits If you press RESET the setting will be restored to 0 V Setting the Hysteresis of the Clock Channel Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the Hysteresis of the channel set as the clock channel Press SELECT use the jog shuttle to set the hysteresis then press SELECT again Use the arrow keys to move between the digits If you press RESET the setting will be restored to 0 3 div Setting the Pattern for Each Channel Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the Pattern of the channel you wish to set Press SELECT key to select H L or X 8 23 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function e Setting the Level for Each Channel 11 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the Level of the channel you wish to set Press SELECT then use the jog shuttle to set the Level and press SELECT again Use the arrow keys to move between the digits If you press RESET the setting will be restored to O V e Setting the Hysteresis for Each Channel 12 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the Hysteresis of the channel you wish to set Press SELECT then use the jog shuttle to set the hysteresis and press SELECT again Use the arrow keys to move between the digits If you press RESET the setting will be
213. e Elements Specifications 6 4 inch color TFT liquid crystal display 130 6 mm width x 97 0 mm height 640 x 480 dots 500 x 384 dots 1 Liquid crystal display may include defects of about 0 02 of all picture elements 16 5 Functions Acquisition Display Item Acquisition Mode Sampling Mode Record Length Zoom Display Format Interpolation Graticule Auxiliary Display Items X Y Display Accumulation Snapshot Trace Clear 16 4 Specifications Select from four modes Normal Averaging Envelope Box Average Select realtime or repetitive sampling Availability depends on time axis settings 1 k words 10 k words 50 k words 100 k words 250 k words 500 k words 1 M words Can zoom up to 2 time axis ranges of displayed waveform s 1 2 3 4 or 6 waveform windows or 1 2 or 3 waveform windows for the DL1720 Display samples using dot display sine interpolation linear interpolation or pulse interpolation Select from three graticule types Select display or nondisplay of scale values waveform labels or trigger mark Display two X Y waveform XY1 or XY2 or one X Y waveform XY1 for the DL1720 Displays multiple iterations of waveform in either persistence mode or color grade mode Freezes the current waveform on screen Saves or loads the snapshot waveforms Removes the currently displayed waveform IM 701710 01E 16 5 Functions Vertical Horizontal Axis Setting Item C
214. e Frequency Frequency 9 49 SISAJEUY WAOJOARM 9 11 Phase Shifted Display lt For a discription of this function refer to page 1 24 gt Relevant Keys NAP SNOr HELP O TRIG D SEARCH cor SIMPLE ENHANCED V DIV TIME DIV ACTION DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Setting the Computation Mode 1 Press SHIFT to activate shift mode Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 2 Press MATH 3 Press the Mode soft key to select ON or OFF These soft keys are not displayed on the DL1720 4 Press the soft key corresponding to the channel whose phase is to be shifted 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the shifted time 2 ie Neva Stopped T 500kS s ZMsAiv ANN VW W v CH1 16 1 0 500 Vrdiy DC Full Edge CH1 A Explanation The phase of CH1 to CH4 waveforms or CH1 to CH2 waveform for the DL1720 is shifted and the result is displayed Computation can also be carried out on phase shifted waveforms Allowable Shift Range The phase can be shifted in the following range Time value between record length 2 to record length 2 resolution 1 sample rate The sample rate varies depending on the record length or T div setting For details see appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Notes when Shifting the Phase If you change the T div setti
215. e Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu Press the Distal Mesial or Proximal soft key 38 Turn the jog shuttle to set the distal mesial or proximal point Setting the High Low Point 39 40 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the Next 2 2 menu Press the High Low soft key to select Auto or MaxMin 9 13 SISAJEUY WIOJ neM o 9 2 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Explanation 9 14 This function allows automated measurement of various parameters of the data stored in the acquisition memory Up to 2400 data points of the result of the automated measurement can also be saved to a file See section 11 9 Saving the Results of the Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Restrictions Automated measurement of waveform parameters cannot be performed on the following waveforms e Snapshot waveforms e Accumulated waveforms other than the newest waveform Auto Measurement Mode ON Measures the specified item Statistic Performs statistical computation on the measured result of the specified item See section 9 3 Statistical Processing Selecting the High Low Method High Low High and Low correspond to the 100 level and the 0 level respectively that are used to measure rise and fall times and other parameters Select one of the two methods used to set the High and Low levels e Auto Based on the frequency of voltage levels of the waveform within the measurement range the h
216. e Z2 window C2 to Z1 Make Cursor2 jump to the Z1 window C2 to Z2 Make Cursor2 jump to the Z2 window Notes when Making Cursor Measurements e The time axis values are measured from the trigger position UKK 1 e The measured value will display if the measurement is not possible IM 701710 01E 9 2 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 22 gt Relevant Keys CLEAR NAP TRACE SNAP HELP eS _ __X Y__ MENU _ MENU pase Aca sranrisror serup pispa Cory mace Save o SHE VERTICAL TRIGGER Y O TRIG D oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY POSITION TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press MEASURE 2 Pressing the Mode soft key displays the automated measurement mode menu MEASURE Mode a a Cycle Mod la T Range1 Item Delay 5 000di Next OFF Setup Setup ON f6T Rangez 1 2 5 600di Press the ON soft key to set the automated measurement mode MEASURE tatistics Cycle History T Rangei tatistics Btatistics 5 000di Next T Rangez 1 2 5 600di Selecting the Measurement Parameter 4 Pressing the Item Setup soft key displays the measurement parameter dialog box and the measurement channel dialog box MEASURE ne r Iten 7 Delay spaniel wooed a ON Setup Setup ON mare hr 1 2 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired measurement c
217. e and repair of this instrument If this instrument is used in a manner not specified in this manual the protection provided by this instrument may be impaired Also Yokogawa Electric Corporation assumes no liability for the customers failure to comply with these requirements The Following Symbols are Used on this Instrument IM 701710 01E To avoid injury death of personnel or damage to the instrument the operator must refer to an explanation in the user s manual or service manual IL gt Function grounding terminal This terminal should not be used as a protective grounding terminal Alternating current ON power OFF power In position of a bistable push control pb hO e Out position of a bistable push control Safety Precautions Make sure to comply with the following safety precautions Not complying might result in injury or death or damage to the instrument Power Supply Ensure the source voltage matches the voltage of the power supply before turning ON the power Power Cord and Plug To prevent an electric shock or fire be sure to use the power cord supplied by YOKOGAWA The main power plug must be plugged in an outlet with a protective grounding terminal Do not invalidate protection by using an extension cord without protective grounding Protective Grounding The protective grounding terminal must be connected to ground to prevent an electric shock before turning ON the power N
218. e as left copy _ Sameasteft IMAGE SAVE __Same as left SNAPSHOT __Same as left Insertmode Increment V Div Same as left Increment T Div Same as left e Scroll Lock Same as left Increment V Div Same as left Increment T Div Same as left Page Up Delete Page Down Num Lock Same as left Same as left Return Enter Select Same as left Sass a M Return Enter Decrement V Div__ Si i Cursor to the right CH1 menu Decrement V Div CH2 menu Jogshuttle down boo w o o ol CH3 menu Decrement T Div a ee CH4 menu Cursor to the left gt 2 jj Cursor to the right Increment V Div 7 Jogshuttleup 8 amp 8 IncrementT Div_ 9 Insert mode eae oe O c e e gt Q gt et F2 F3 F4 Ere Fe Fr Fe Ea Fio Ez F2 Print Sereen Soro Lock Pause Insert Home PageUp Delete End Page Doun Numeric um Look ez Loess Enter za ee ES La 5 6 8 EE E a IM 701710 01E Appendix 5 Assignment of Keys on the USB Keyboard h A D lt O O Q Ga Q O Q D D When Pressed with the Control Key When the Soft Keyboard Is Displayed A D J p Cc gt m gt oO 3 Shift Operation Shift Operation ACQ menu MATH menu COPY DISPLAY menu ENHANCED menu FILE menu GO NOGO menu HISTORY menu IMAGE SAVE menu PRESET menu Same as left Same as left Same a
219. e instrument s screen is displayed on the monitor Note e The RGB VIDEO OUT terminal outputs RGB video signal at all times e The picture on the monitor may flicker if the DL1720 DL1740 or another instrument is brought too close to the monitor e The ends of the screen may be cut off on some monitors 12 6 IM 701710 01E Chpater 13 Ethernet Interface Option 13 1 Connecting the DL1720 DL1740 to a Personal Computer Ethernet Interface Specifications A 100BASE TX port is provided on the rear panel of the DL1720 DL1740 Item Specifications Communication Port Number 1 Electrical Mechanical Specifications IEEE 802 3 standards Transmission Method Ethernet 100BASE TX 10BASE T Transmission Rate Max 100 Mbps Communication Protocol TCP IP Supported Services FTP server FTP client network drive LPR client network printer SMTP client mail transmission DHCP DNS Connector Type RJ 45 connector ETHERNET 100BASE TX Terminal Modular Jack RJ 45 Items Necessary for Connection IM 701710 01E Cable Use only the following cables for connection e UTP unshielded twisted pair cable category 5 e STP shielded twisted pair cable 13 1 uodo ddej19 U JOUIBUI 3 13 1 Connecting the DL1720 DL1740 to a Personal Computer Connection Method When Connecting to a Network PC or Workstation 1 Turn OFF the power to the instrument 2 Connect one side of the UTP or STP cable to the ETHERNET 100BASE TX termin
220. e list dialog box Turn the jog shuttle to select the save destination medium displayed with parentheses File List Path FDO Space 767456 byte File Nane Size Date Attr FDO 1 lt THEVOL 1 gt 2600 16 31 99 25 2606 16 31 17 54 2600 10 31 17 54 2000 16 31 17 53 2000710731 17 53 2600 10 31 17 52 2000 16 31 17 51 2600710731 17 50 2600 10 31 17 50 2006 16 31 17 49 2600 10 31 17 48 2600 10 31 17 46 v aFile Name a Filter Property ave Exec WF pea Binary Press SELECT to confirm the selection 11 11 wnip n Helos 4 woz pue o e eq Hulpeo7 pue Bulnes 2 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data 11 12 Selecting the Destination Directory Use this only when there are directories on the medium 16 Turn the jog shuttle to select the save destination directory displayed in angle brackets lt gt 17 Press SELECT to confirm the selection The Path ____ box on the top left corner of the File List dialog box displays the selected medium directory Selecting lt gt moves to a higher level directory Setting the File Name Comment 18 Pressing the File Name soft key displays the file name setting menu 19 Turn the jog shuttle to select Auto Naming File Name amp Comment Auto Naming OFF DN File ane C Comment a al Trace Range History P P Comp ie nla eed ed ed ed 20 Press SELECT to select ON or OFF 21 Turn the jog shuttle to select File Name
221. e trigger delay function enables display of a waveform which has been acquired after a specified time called the delay time has elapsed following activation of a trigger The range for the trigger delay setting is 0 to 4 seconds T Trigger Position Delay Time z Trigger Point Trigger Position lt Section 6 3 gt IM 701710 01E The trigger position indicates which position of the waveform in the acquisition memory will actually be displayed on the screen The trigger point refers to the point at which a trigger is activated In case the trigger delay to be explained here after is set to Os the trigger point and the trigger position refer to the same location You use this setting to select how much pre trigger area and how much post trigger area to show on the display Display Record Length i Trigger Position 100 o o Pre Trigger Range Post Trigger Range N 7 W 7 M A N 1 N 1 13 suonoun 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions Record Length lt Section 7 1 gt The term record length refers to the number of data points per channel acquired in the acquisition memory Displayed record length refers to the number of these data points that are actually displayed on the screen Note that sampling rate and record length will vary according to the time axis setting see section 1 2 The DL1720 1740 lets you set the record length to any of the following 1 kwords 10 kw
222. each end of the cable and that has a characteristic impedance between 90 and 132 W Connection Procedure 1 Connect the SCSI cable to the SCSI connector on the rear panel of the instrument 2 Turn ON the SCSI device and the instrument in that order If you need to format the medium follow the procedures given in the next section 11 4 Formatting the Recording Medium SCSI Devices that can be Connected Most SCSI devices MO disk drive and hard disk can be connected to the instrument but there are some exceptions For details on which devices can be connected please ask your YOKOGAWA dealer For general handling precautions for the connected SCSI device see the instruction manual that is provided with the device Note ___ sss e When connecting multiple SCSI devices in a chain attach a SCSI terminator to the device at the other end of the chain e Hard disks including the internal hard disk that are formatted with the instrument cannot be read using the NEC PC 9800 Series computers 11 4 IM 701710 01E 11 4 Formatting the Storage Medium A N CAUTION e Never remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or the floppy disk or the Zip disk icon is blinking This can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium e When the instrument cannot read a pre formatted medium reformat the formatting the medium All data will be erased Relevant Keys SEARCH O TRIG D SIMPL
223. earch mode selection menu HISTORY fe select Display patart Reda earch Mod ipo Show Map Dne All 6 End Pec Press the Parameter soft key fe Select Display par Rega zone Paraneter ar Show Map Dne All fe pi Rec Select the Search Criteria Select Param 4 Press the Search Setup soft key to display the Search Criteria Setting menu HISTORY fe select Display came Reda earch Modga ecard Show Map Search Search Dne All 6 End Pec Parameter Setup Exec Press the Select Param soft key to display the search criteria selection menu Select Condition fa Item Param Parami FF IN OUT Search Setting the Condition 7 Press the Condition soft key to select OFF IN or OUT Select Condition Ja Item Paran Parami DFF IN OUT search HISTORY 7 17 Aejdsig pue uonisinboy 7 9 Searching the Historical Data Using Parameters History Search Function 7 18 Setting the Parameter Item Setup 8 Press the Item Setup soft key to display the parameter selection menu 9 Press the soft key corresponding to the channel that you wish to set as the source channel for the parameter search The CH3 CH4 and Math2 soft keys are not displayed on the DL1720 P P 0 Freq AvgFreg 0 Max Period 0 Min 0 Rise 0 Avg co Fall Rms Width AvgPer iod IntiTy Int2TY Intixy 000000 0 Sdey Width 0 High
224. ecessity of Protective Grounding Never cut off the internal or external protective grounding wire or disconnect the wiring of the protective grounding terminal Doing so poses a potential shock hazard Defect of Protective Grounding and Fuse Do not operate the instrument when the protective grounding or fuse might be defective Fuse To prevent a fire make sure to use fuses with the specified standard voltage current type Before replacing the fuses turn off the power and disconnect the power source Do not use a different fuse or short circuit the fuse holder Do Not Operate Near Flammable Materials Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a safety hazard Do Not Remove Any Covers There are some areas inside the instrument with high voltages Do not remove any cover if the power supply is connected The cover should be removed by qualified personnel only External Connection To ground securely connect the protective grounding before connecting to measurement or control unit Also when touching the circuit turn off the power to the circuit and check that there is no voltage being generated To prevent electric shock connect the ground terminal of the probe or input connector to the protective ground of the object under measurement l vi IM 701710 01E Structure of the Manual Structure of
225. ection Item Trigger Mode Trigger Source Trigger Coupling HF Rejection Trigger Hysteresis Trigger Level Setting Range Trigger Level Resolution Trigger Level Precision External Trigger Probe Attenuation Trigger Sensitivity Trigger Position Trigger Delay Setting Range Hold Off Time Range Trigger Slope 16 2 Specifications Auto Auto Level Normal Single Single N CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 EXT LINE CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 DC AC EXT DC 20 kHz or 15 kHz band limit ON OFF for trigger source CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 Select the trigger hysteresis width CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 CH1 to CH4 CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 EXT CH1 to CH4 CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 EXT CH1 to CH4 CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 EXT 1 1 10 1 CH1 to CH4 CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 EXT 4 div from screen center 2 V for the DL1740 1 V for the DL1720 with the 1 V range selected 10 V for the DL1720 with the 10 V range selected 0 01 div 5 mV for the DL1740 5 mV for the DL1720 with the 1 V range selected 50 mV for the DL1720 with the 10 V range selected 1 div 10 of trigger level for the DL1740 50 mV 10 of trigger level for the DL1740 50 mV 10 of trigger level for the DL1720 with the 1 V range selected 500 mV 10 of trigger level for the DL1720 with the 10 V range s
226. ed by Copy to in the Copy setting menu Image Save Saves the screen image data to the output destination FD Zip disk or SCSI when SCSI and serial interface option are installed that you specified in the Image Save menu Send Mail Sends a mail Ethernet Interface option For details see section 13 7 Using the Mail Function Action Mail Function Action Count Sequence Single Conclude after one instance of the Action Continue Repeat the Action the number of times specified as the sampling count in ACQ Count if set to Infinite Action repeats until determination stops Waveform Sampling Count ACQ Count Set the waveform sampling count Infinite Sampling continues until determination stops or until START STOP or Abort soft key is pressed 1 65536 Sampling stops after the specified count has been reached Start Stop GO NO GO Determination Press the Exec soft key to execute the determination Determination will stop automatically when finished or you can press START STOP or Abort soft key to force a stop Save to File Hard Copy Image Save Operation Operates according to the settings in the File menu the Copy menu or the Image Save menu File Name when Action is Set to Save to File or Image Save The file is saved with AutoName under the File menu or the Image Save menu For details see section 10 4 Outputting to Storage Medium or section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Notes about GO
227. edium and Creating a Directory Changing the Directory File Name of the storage medium Number and types of characters that can be used Item Number of Characters Characters that can be Used File name 1 to 8 chars 0 to 9 Ato Z _ parenthesis minus sign Comment 0 to 25 chars All characters including spaces Creating a Directory A new directory can be created on a medium See above for the assignment of the directory name when creating a new directory Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box You can specify the type of files to display e extension Displays only the data file that was selected in the File Item setting menu and the data type menu xk Displays all the files on the medium Properties Lists the file name extension file size the date it was saved the attributes and the comment for the selected file Displaying Compressed Images in the File List Selecting screen image data files from the File List causes a compressed image of the screen data to appear in the upper right portion of the File List Screen image data is the only type of compressed image that is displayed The compressed images of waveform and setting data are not displayed Also file name and color information are not displayed in the compressed image Note e You cannot rename a directory file or create a new directory while the data acquisition is in progress START STOP indicator is ON e Director
228. edure Carry out steps in the order shown The operating procedures are given with the assumption that you are not familiar with the operation Thus it may not be necessary to carry out all the steps when changing settings Explanation Describes settings and restrictions relating to the operation A detailed description of the function is not provided For a detailed description of the function refer to Chapter 1 IM 701710 01E Contents FOLOWOTO siae eee rae se tee ue cy stl a cet asiasd cet O eaae re e Aes as Checking the Contents of the PACK AGG ise cise esistewcsearentancebexadedncncandesdcncsoeieseneassnectesdessesieeeetetdeculepeteds i DaAlely Precautions iene a a a a V SUFUCTUNE OF he Manta ener a r A r vii Chapter 1 Functions 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 Block Diagrama a eee ie eee cea ae eae eee a hac 1 1 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal AXES ccccccssesseeeceeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeeeessessaeesaeeeeeeeees 1 3 re 1 1 61182 fro NA L409 eke eee em ee eer ee ee EE 1 8 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions cccccccceeeceeseeeseeeeeeeeeeesesaaeeseeeees 1 14 Analyzing the Waveform ccccseccccsssseecceeeeeeecceeeeecsaeeeessaueeesseseeecauaueeeesaueeeesseaeesessanss 1 21 AS OMIM Gl ONS 52g nce cet ytd aen AE 1 29 Other LSet Fanon Sairi a ea euieteSa cua sosiecdias e 1 31 Chapter 2 Name and Use of Each Part 2 1 2 2 2 3 Front Panel Rear Pane excise ede ieee Ses oc aise do
229. eeeesessaaeeeeees 6 14 6 9 Setting the A Delay B Trigger ENHANCED ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 17 6 10 Setting the Pattern Trigger ENHANCED ccccccceeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseseaeeeeeess 6 20 6 11 Setting the Width Pulse lt T Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 Time Out Trigger ENHANCED 6 24 612 Seting tne ORTHOGO suiects esate swale a yeaa to ee teat teehee rade iae el 6 29 6 13 Setting the Window Trigger ENHANCED ccceccceseeeeeeeeeesecseeseeeeeeeeseesessaseeeeees 6 32 6 14 Setting the TV Trigger ENHANCED cccccccssssssscsccceeeeessssssceeeeeeeesessssseeeeseneess 6 35 6215 Setting the ACtiOn ONn Mogi eeso a aban AN 6 38 6 16 Setting the Trigger Gate ere a a a a a 6 40 Chpater 7 Acquisition and Display 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 9 7 6 7 1 7 8 7 9 s ting the FHECONC MONG EN se ceased eaerdociengasserncedd ince e E 7 1 PCOUISIMON WO Cs sees cctet sarees here scccaceazescsudvers a a 7 2 Using Sequential Store FUNCTION cc cc cceseeeecceceeeeeeecaeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeseaeeeeaeeeeeeeeesessaaaaaasess 7 5 BOX AVErAgE MOUE iaar e teed 7 6 WSing Iter ave OCS srunsa e a e 7 8 Setting Repetitive Sampling Mode ON OFF cccccecceceeeeeceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeesseeaeeeeeeeeeeeess 7 9 Wsing the History Memory sosna a e ence eee 7 10 Searching the Historical Data Using Zone History Search Function ceeeeeeees 7 13 Searching the Hist
230. eference Waveform Edit Menu Select a reference waveform for creating a zone The basic waveform will be displayed as a trace and you can select from the following types Input signal waveform Math waveform Creating a Determination Zone Redraw New You can set up to six or three for the DL1720 determination zones The following are the setting ranges Up down setting range 8 div from the reference waveform Left right setting range 5 div from the center of the screen You can select input signal waveforms CH1 through CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 and computed waveforms Math1 and Math2 or Math1 only for the DL1720 for the waveforms that are to be determined in the determination zones that are registered in Zone1 through Zone6 or Zone1 through Zones for the DL1720 The screen displays the active zones depending on the settings in Setup Setting Logic AND when all parameter conditions 1 6 are met GO NO GO Action is performed OR when at least one parameter condition from 1 6 are met GO NO GO Action is performed IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 9 13 GO NO GO Determination Using Zones Action to Take when the Condition is Met not Met Action Buzzer Sounds the buzzer Save to File Saves the waveform data to the storage medium FD Zip disk SCSI option and so on specified in the FILE menu Hard Copy Outputs the screen image data to the destination Built in USB Net Print Ethernet interface option spcifi
231. eforms the ground level and vertical position are marked on the left of the waveform display frame 500 mV div Offset 1 V Offset Cancel OFF Position 0 div Ground Level gt Mark Vertical Position gt 4 Mark Note e The data which go out of the waveform display frame from moving the vertical position are handled as overflow data e Ifthe display waveform goes out of the waveform display frame from moving the vertical position during the waveform acquisition is starting a chopped waveform is displayed as shown in the following figure even if the vertical position is returned to its original position after stopping the acquisition JVV e Ifthe vertical position is moved the effective data range also changes For details see section 1 2 5 3 S XY e UOZIIOH pue ed1110 5 3 Selecting Input Coupling Relevant Keys Operating Procedure f 5 4 amp aie tctal at a Glee tae 4 aca sranvaron ca mse SETUP DAT DISPLAY COPY IMAGE SAVE IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT WEATICAL____V SEARCH C maar D Smee ENHANCED lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 2 gt NAP SNAP HELP TIME DIV frone osmon DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Press one of the keys from CH 1 to CH 4 or CH 1 to CH 2 for the DL1720 to select the channel Press the Coupling soft key t
232. ele STs Ves festa tale al ered Mello 1 AZN TNT VN FIV FLY Ey eer aR ares NZ IN 2 eset eal SSI Ne heal S eee ee Te aes ale ME Pes A he eee EE dO A i ZINE IZA VN SSS SEEE VIN YIN VIN NLA NAI H SSS E E Se VIN VIN VIN AEA ATA SSS eRe ie el a ae Input Coupling lt Section 5 3 gt IM 701710 01E When you only want to observe the amplitude of an alternating current signal eliminating the direct current components from the input signal makes observation easier You may also want to check the ground level or observe the input signal waveform with the offset voltage removed In these cases you can change the input coupling setting This will switch the coupling method which determines how the input signal is input to the vertical control circuit voltage axis The input coupling method can be chosen from the following AC 1 MQ The input signal is sent through a capacitor to the attenuator nput emo in the vertical control circuit This method can be used when you just want to observe the amplitude of the alternating current signal eliminating the DC components from the input signal Vertical control circuit 1 MQ DC 1 MQ The input signal is sent directly to the attenuator in the vertical control circuit This method can be used when you want to observe both the 1 MQ DC and AC components of the vertical input signal Vertical control circuit Input
233. elected 1 divp p at DC to 500 MHz 100 mVp p at DC to 100 MHz for the DL1740 100 mVp p at DC to 100 MHz for the DL1720 with the 1 V range selected 1 Vp p at DC to 100 MHz for the DL1720 with the 10 V range selected Can be set in 1 increments of record length Oto4s 80 ns to 10s Rise Fall Rise Fall with edge trigger IM 701710 01E Item Trigger Type Trigger Gate up 16 2 Trigger Section Specifications Edge A gt B N A Delay B Activate the trigger on the edge of a single trigger source Trigger occurs nth time condition B becomes true after condition A becomes true Count 1 to 108 Condition A Enter Exit Condition B Enter Exit Trigger occurs first time condition B becomes true after specified delay following condition A true Delay Snsto5s Condition A Enter Exit Condition B Enter Exit Both OR Trigger occurs on the OR of trigger conditions that are specified on multiple Pattern Pulse Width TV trigger sources The trigger condition can either be edge or window Rise IN Fall OUT or Don t Care can be specified on each channel from CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 Trigger occurs on the edge of the clock channel based on the True False condition of the parallel pattern that is specified on multiple trigger sources lf the clock channel is set to Don t Care then the trigger occurs only on the True False condition Enter E
234. en connected to the network you must disconnect then reconnect for settings to take effect e When you are disconnected by the server when using the FTP client you will be automatically reconnected if you perform a file operation save load etc This is the same if NDO is selected for Save to File when using an action trigger or GO NO GO Explanation You can save data such as waveform and settings data to network drives via Ethernet in the same manner as with floppy disks or Zip disks Entering Settings for a Network Drive e FTP Server Input the IP address of the FTP server the PC or workstation running the FTP server on the network to which waveform and setting data will be saved On networks supporting DNS you can specify the host and domain by name instead of by IP address e Login Name Enter a login name of 15 characters or less The default value is anonymous The available characters consist of all ASCII characters on the keyboard including space e Password Enter a password corresponding to the login name using 15 characters or less The available characters consist of all ASCII characters on the keyboard including space e Time Out When accessing the FTP server from this instrument if can t receive even after a fixed time the timeout time elapses this means that the instrument is unable to send to or receive from the FTP server and the connection will close The available setting range is 0 to 3600 s The default se
235. en the indicator located above this key is lit SHIFT POSITION Key Sections 6 2 6 3 Used to set the trigger position You can set the trigger delay by pressing the POSITION key after pressing the SHIFT key TRG D Indicator Lights up when a trigger is activated 2 3 Hed y283 JO os pue oweyN 2 2 Operation Keys Jog Shuttle Knobs 2 4 Other Menus Gams GE Ls ea MENU _MENU_ PHASE X Y Eee 0 GH la a N GD SSS SNAP ee SHOT HELP a 7 OO N DISPLAY Key Sections 8 1 to 8 8 Displays the screen display menu Press SHIFT DISPLAY to produce the menu for X Y display setup MISC Key Sections 3 6 4 7 6 16 11 5 Chapters 13 14 15 IM701710 17E Displays the menu for selecting GO NO GO judgment communication interface system configuration settings system status check screen saver setting and the self diagnostic function FILE Key Sections 11 4 and 11 6 to 11 12 Displays menu that you use to save to load from or execute file operations on floppy disk Zip disk MO disk or external SCSI device SHIFT COPY Key Sections 10 2 10 3 13 5 Used for printing out hard copy of the screen data If you press SHIFT COPY the screen displays a menu that you can use to print or save the screen image For the save location you can select any of the following internal printer option and USB printer SHIFT IMAGE SAVE Key Sections 10 4 13 4 You can store the screen image to an ext
236. ena E lous 2 5 HICK SOU sasoie r A cee tal 14 4 COMMEN isn dorado boa ia a satire trhch Sei cot he 13 17 Compensating the Probe cccccccccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 3 10 Compressed Images cccccesseeeeeeeeeees 11 29 11 33 11 37 Computer Interface sussurinearcha ea nadanieubuaneateunateetasens 16 9 Connecting a SPIO Cis sennaiyasioes aetascwn e a 3 7 Contents Or ihe Package cernent li GORY ROY tacit aster hastiaht e bese terutd ac satiate Donets an naetlndteca 2 4 CODVING FES aienea dla aens 11 30 OUI esien e e ute hee cetdsannene 5 5 Creating a Drect y ir aeivenueted dass outa vacnenuus 11 34 C rrent Proba ene een RR Od ee ili 3 8 5 9 CUTS OF cesnmea tiene het hater etaneuan bene tet enere cater ear bcrn ela 9 1 UP SOM JUMP e ie E dant STS 9 5 CURSOR Key siren anyin e AN 2 4 Cursor Measurement ccccccseeseeeeceaseeseeeeeseseeseeeeeeeananes 1 21 D Data SearCioT 1 26 DAC cele Seas a a O 3 12 Default Gateway rossins tnie a 13 5 Degree Cursor Measurement cccccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeas 1 21 Degree CURSO ssnsti bar eee e hie ee alee 9 4 Delay Sasi unt saaetacy oe asaes endian saya NA 9 12 9 16 Delay IVIGG CU lt ssssyesssntzstastet seas E AE 1 13 Delay TMG es a a 1 13 6 19 Deleting Files tics ofc aera a Gacessaaanetees 11 26 DESKOW pasanna e E a a a a ae 4 15 DHO P oaeen aa ia 13 6 Index 1 Index Ditlerential Probo sezesioa ee aa ee er a ili 3 8 Different ating tiie
237. ends of the time window down to the 0 level Hence it is effective for continuous signals The frequency resolution of the Hanning window is higher than that of the Flattop window However the level accuracy of the spectrum of the Flattop window is higher than that of the Hanning window When the waveform being analyzed is a continuous type signal select the appropriate window that suits the application FFT computation generates 1000 or 10000 measurement data points but only half points are displayed on the screen Window Integral Power Spectrum Rectangular Window 1 l Tf Hanning Window Sine wove fh L gt oe AN gt gt t Flattop Window ey Rectangular Window W t u t u t T U t Step Function Hanning Window W t 0 5 0 5c0s 2n Hanning Window W t 0 54 0 46 cos 2n sin 2n 1 2t T 2m 1 2t T FFT Function When the complex result of FFT computation is G R jl the power spectrum can be expressed as follows Power Spectrum 10 log Rat R Real Part I Imaginaly Part Reference OdB for Log Magnitude 1Vrms IM 701710 01E 1 25 suonoun 1 5 Analyzing the Waveform Data Search History Search Function lt Sections 7 8 to 7 9 gt This feature can be used to search waveforms that match the specified conditions from the history memory History Memory Search Using Zone Section 7 8 Searches waveforms t
238. epetitive mode turn ON this mode is automatically changed to single mode Note The trigger mode setting applies to both simple and enhanced triggers 6 2 IM 701710 01E 6 2 Setting the Trigger Delay lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 13 gt Relevant Keys NAP SNAP HELP SETUP ay a as ae o Cener SEARCH aS V DIV TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press SHIFT to set the keys in the shifted condition Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 2 Press POSITION 3 Units ms us ns and ps are displayed on the screen Press the soft key corresponding to the desired unit Turn the jog shuttle to set the trigger delay You can move between the digits using the arrow keys Pressing RESET resets delay to 0 s Also for instruments with firmware version 1 30 or later you can set the trigger delay by pressing the Delay soft key and turning the jog shuttle Explanation Although the display usually shows the waveform before and after the trigger point using the delay function it is possible to display the acquired waveform after a fixed time period elapses Setting Range for Trigger Delay 0 to 4 s Resolution is 1 sample rate T Trigger Position Delay Time Trigger Point Points for Attention e When T div is changed the trigger delay remains unchanged However its position in
239. er comes with your DL1720 DL1 740 allow extra space for operation and do not place objects on top of the printer MMM 10 cm or more SS 5 cm or more ARNAN ae S IM 701710 01E N espn Bung suonnes ld 3 2 Installation Ambient Temperature and Humidity Ambient Temperature 5 to 40 C Ambient Humidity 20 to 80 RH when not using the printer 35 to 80 RH when using the printer No condensation should be allowed Note e To ensure high measurement accuracy the instrument should only be used under the following conditions Ambient temperature 23 2 C Ambient humidity 55 10 RH Internal condensation may occur if the instrument is moved to another place where both the ambient temperature and humidity are higher or if the temperature changes rapidly In such cases allow the instrument to acclimatize to its new environment for at least one hour before starting operation Never Install the Instrument in the Following Places In direct sunlight or near heat sources Where an excessive amount of soot steam dust or corrosive gases are present Near magnetic field sources Near high voltage equipment or power lines Where the level of mechanical vibration is high In an unstable place Installation Position Rubber Feet Place the instrument in a horizontal position or tilted using the stand as shown below When you use the stand pull it forwards until it locks To return the stand to its o
240. er limit and press SELECT Set Lower in a similar fashion Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Condition Press SELECT to select IN or OUT Set Param2 to Param4 as necessary IM 701710 01E 9 12 GO NO GO Determination Using the Measurement of Waveform Parameters Setting the Logic 20 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Logic 21 Press SELECT to select AND or OR Setting the Sequence 22 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Sequence 23 Press SELECT to select Single or Continue Setting the ACQ Count 24 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to ACQ Count 25 Pressing SELECT a menu used to set the number of waveform acquisitions 26 Turn the jog shuttle to set the number of waveform acquisitions and press SELECT Selecting the Action to Take when the Condition is not Met 27 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Action 28 Press SELECT to turn the action ON or OFF Setting the Determination Range 29 Press the T Range1 T Rangez2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to T Range1 30 Turn the jog shuttle to set the start point of the determination range 31 In asimilar fashion set the end point of the determination range with T Range2 Executing the GO NO GO Determination 32 Press the Exec soft key to execute the GO NO GO determination GO NO GO Mode a f T Rangei Setup 5 000di Exec Parameter feT Range2 5 600di When the determination terminates the waveform acquisition is automatic
241. er3 645 833nU 437 560mU i 729 167m 979 167m 875 000M f 104 167mU 1 66256 Measurement Value Cursor2 Marker Measurement Value of Cursor of Cursor 1 21 suonoun 1 5 Analyzing the Waveform Automated Measurements lt Sections 9 2 to 9 4 gt Automatic Measurement of Waveform Parameters Section 9 2 This feature automatically measures selected waveform parameters such as rise time and pulse width You can select parameters separately for each channel although you are limited to a total of 12 parameters to display There are 27 parameters available for selection Statistical Processing Section 9 3 Statistical processing is performed on the automated measured values described above The following five statistics are determined on the two measured values of automated measurement parameters e Maximum value Max e Minimum value Min e Average value Avg e Standard deviation Sdv e Number of measured values used in the statistical processing Cnt 2000 10 31 12 03 30 a Normal Stopped 98 T SOOkKS S 2ZMs div Automatic Measurement Value of the Statistical Processing Parameters Statistical Processing Results The following three methods are available in the statistical processing e Normal Statistical Processing While acquiring waveforms statistical processing is performed on all the waveforms acquired up to that point 1 22 IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 1 5 Analyzing
242. erface eee eee 16 7 Keyboard Operation c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 2 IMO DS esasta easa a Meese GE 2 3 L Lmne Mterpolatom isna E 1 18 LREN O osna E R 6 37 LING AF Scaling areis tec iadaast eels 1 21 5 13 ISU Of DEAU S e r a a App 14 Loading Setup Dala aan ote ciietatucesiee 11 17 Loading Snapshot Waveforms seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 22 Loading Waveform Data cccceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 10 POU INNING serae aa a a at 13 10 13 13 OW DEV elann a aaNet 12 4 LPR Client FUNCTION 20 0 0 ccc ecce eee eeee eee eeen eens 1 29 13 14 EPR SORVEl ooie tetera earls ees 13 15 PP WNIGOUI cn ithn tiem Lotie eas aalel ab iolcietih acti ettst seth ta ce 13 25 M MAC AGGIES siist it aan a ARIAN 13 23 Mal Adre SS u nman a aA E E ATEN 13 17 Mail Function sisccfcesceccstdecvoapondiestadd Wes voubdeleaseuetees 13 16 13 19 Mail SCV Gl ee a aie eases eis ee eels 13 17 Mall Settings oi cise sdsiswerd ss cordcsestatrGrehced a 13 17 13 20 Mail TRANSMISSION xzcgsi sce sees ces cease gece aa ai 1 30 MaiIBaSe TIME irrisa nia 13 17 Main Power Switch c ccssccceeesseeseeeeeesueeseeeeeesneeseeeesenaes 3 6 MAPPING orenean ca eaa ie E AE NE 8 2 Marker Cursor 6 icc si deeisiceietncsctie i eareice 1 21 9 3 9 8 Markers Cursor Measurement eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 21 MATH KOV ange cate Seacoast he has eae 2 4 MEASURE KOY irinin e G EEA 2 4 Measurement
243. ernal storage medium Press the SHIFT key followed by the IMAGE SAVE key to display a menu used to save the screen image data to a floppy disk Zip disk an external SCSI device option or a network drive when the Ethernet interface is installed MEASURE Key Sections 9 2 to 9 4 Displays the menu for performing automatic measurement of waveform parameters CURSOR Key Section 9 1 Displays the menu for cursor measurement SHIFT MATH Key Sections 9 5 to 9 11 Displays the menu for waveform computation Pressing the MATH key after pressing the SHIFT key displays a menu used to shift the phase GO NO GO Key Sections 9 12 9 13 Displays a menu related to GO NO GO SETUP Key Sections 4 2 to 4 4 Displays a menu used to initialize the settings to factory defaults perform auto setup which automatically sets the DL1720 DL1740 according to the input signal store or recall setting parameters and so on SHIFT Key Used to make the functions that are marked in purple on the panel operative Pressing this key activates shift mode pressing it again releases shift mode While the indicator above this key is lit shift mode is active IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 2 2 Operation Keys Jog Shuttle Knobs HISTORY Key Sections 7 7 to 7 9 Displays a menu used to recall data using the history memory function ACQ Key Sections 5 10 7 1 7 2 and 7 4 to 7 6 Displays the acquisition method menu START STOP Key Section 4 5 Start
244. ery Back up Accessories 16 10 220 W x 266 H x 306 D mm with printer cover closed projections excluded Approx 5 5 kg Forced air cooling air discharged from rear Horizontally the stand can be used vertically cannot use the Zip drive and no stacking Set up data and internal clock are backed up by a built in lithium battery Battery life Approx 5 years at ambient temperature of 23 C e 1 power cord e 400 MHz passive probes 2 e Electrical fuses 1 A1352EF e 1 roll of printer paper Only on models with B5 suffix e 4 rubber pads for bottom legs B9989EX Front cover 1 B9989FA e Users Manual this manual e Operation Guide e Communication Interface Manual IM 701710 01E 16 11 General Item Specifications Safety Standard Complying Standard EN61010 1 e Overvoltage category Installation category II e Pollution degree 2 Emission Complying Standard EN61326 Class A C Tick AS NZS 2064 apply for 701705 701710 700988 Cable Requirement e Immunity 1 Complying Standard EN61326 Industrial environment apply for 701705 701710 700988 700939 700939 EN61000 3 2 EN61000 3 3 This product is a Class A for industrial environment product Operation of this product ina domestic environment may cause radio interference in which case the user is required to correct the interference External Trigger External Clock Trigger Gate Input Terminal Use a BNC cable Attach a ferrite core
245. es are automatically detected at power up e fan ID number is changed make sure to execute Init SCSI in order to detect the new ID number IM 701710 01E 11 9 wnIp n Helos y Wold pue o e eq Hulpeo7 pue Bulnes 2 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data A N CAUTION Never remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or the floppy disk or the Zip disk icon is blinking This can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Relevant Keys Z SEARCH O TRIG D oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press FILE 2 Pressing the File Item soft key displays the file time setting menu FILE a Save Load Utility File Item Setup 3 Press the soft key corresponding to Waveform FILE Setup Waveforn Snap Measure Image a Utility Saving the Waveform Data Selecting the Data Type 4 Pressing the Data Type soft key displays the data type menu FILE File Iten Data Type re re a Pa Save Load Unload Utility Waveforn Binary 5 Press the one of the soft keys corresponding to Binary ASCII or Float to select the data type FILE File Iten Binary ASCII Float a a Load Unload Utility Waveform Data saved in Binary are only the data that can be loaded as described later in this chapter 11 10 IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 11 6
246. essing the Unload soft key displays a menu used to select the waveform to be cleared FILE File Item a a a Save Load Utility Snap 5 Press the Trace soft key and press the soft key corresponding to the waveform to be cleared Unioad__ FE FILE Trace nioad Exec All Snap Toles dal Unioad__ Bia in Nico ned Ba es es l 6 Pressing the Unload Exec soft key clears the selected waveform _Unioad__ FILE Trace nioad Exec All Snap You can take snap shots of the waveform and save the image to the file You can also load the snapshot waveform Data Size Approx 40 K Bytes File Extension The file extension is SNP The selection of the medium and directory file name comments auto naming function specification of the files to be displayed in the File List dialog box and properties are the same as those for saving loading normal waveform data For explanation and procedures see section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Loading the Snapshot Waveform The snapshot waveform can be load as four waveforms Snap1 to Snap4 Clearing the Waveform The loaded snapshot waveform is cleared when unload initialize or auto setup is performed Note e Ifa key other than the Abort key is pressed during saving or loading an error occurs e This function can not be used in conjunction with FTP server function or LPR client function 11 23 wnIip n Helos y Wold pue o e eq Hulpeo7 p
247. evant Keys NAP SHOT HELP OC LIT LI IT to msc ponoco mara GETUP pisPLa Copy mace savE o SH SEARCH O TRIG D CL C V DIV TIME DIV a ers Bai The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 ACTION DELAY Operating Procedure Displaying the System Configuration Menu 1 Press MISC 2 Press the System Cnfg soft key to display the system configuration menu MISC A A a a a alibrationRemote Cnti SCSI ID Network Bysten Cnfgj Overview Next d 3 Press the Date Time soft key to display the date and time display setting menu System Cnfg Message Click Sounda Offset Date Time Cancel JPN ENG OFF pN ON Turning ON OFF the Date and Time Display 4 Select ON or OFF by pressing SELECT Display Date Year Settings for these items can be input directly using a USB keyboard Month Bysten Cnfg MISC Message lick Sounda Offset Trig Gate Date Time Cancel JPN ENG OFF pN ON OFF Setting the Date and Time 5 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Year Press SELECT to display the Year input box Set the year using the jog shuttle In a similar fashion set the Month Day Hour Minute and Second Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Set and press SELECT to confirm the settings OO a 3 12 IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 3 6 Setting the Date and Time Date YY MM DD The last two d
248. extension on a PC for an example you will not be able to load that file e A maximum of 36 characters can be displayed in Path e File names are not case sensitive Comments are case sensitive In addition the following file names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK e When the setup parameters are loaded from a file the setup parameters of each key are overwritten with the loaded settings and cannot be set back to their previous settings It is recommended that the current setup parameters be saved before loading setup parameters from a file e The date and time communication parameters and SCSI ID numbers are not saved Therefore when setup parameters are loaded from a file these parameters do not change e This function can not be used in conjunction with FTP server function or LPR client function IM 701710 01E 11 8 Saving Loading Snapshot Waveforms A N CAUTION Never remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or the floppy disk or the Zip disk icon is blinking This can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Relevant Keys PHASE SHIFT SEARCH O TRIG D SIMPLE ENHANCED V DIV TIME DIV ACTION DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press FILE 2 Pressing the File Item soft key displays the file item setting menu FILE File Item a a Py Save Load Uti
249. ey changes to Save Exec Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box Viewing the Properties The procedures are the same as steps 30 to 33 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data The results of the automated measurement of waveform parameters can be saved in CSV format CSV file extension to a floppy disk a Zip disk or external SCSI device option A CSV file is a comma separated format file The CSV file is one of the common file formats used to exchange data between spreadsheet and database applications The data that are saved are the measurement results of the parameters that are specified in the automated measurement of waveform parameters Notes when Saving the Results of the Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters The restrictions are as follows e Up to 24000 the number of items that are turned ON data points before the point at which the save operation is executed are saved However the data points that are saved are limited to those that are acquired after fixing T div V div and Measure settings e Output example CH1 P P CH1 Max CH1 Min CH2 P P V V V V 0 199E 00 0 199E 00 0 000E 00 0 02E 06 Oldest data 0 207E 00 0 207E 00 0 000E 00 0 02E 06 0 377E 00 0 152E 00 0 125E 00 0 02E 06 Ap e e e e Newest data For information related to the automated measurement of waveform parameters see section 9 2 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters
250. f patterns can be registered Set the pattern with 64 bits of H L X Don t Care symbols H When the value is greater than or equal to Thr Lower L When the value is less than or equal to Thr Upper X Do not determine Start Point Set the start position of the search The range is from 5 to 5 div IM 701710 01E 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function When CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 is Set as the Clock Channel Level Set the level used to determine the rising or falling edge The range is 8 div within the screen The resolution is 0 01 div Polarity Select the polarity from the following list f Search the status when the waveform changes from below the specified level to above the specified level Search the status when the waveform changes from above the specified level to below the specified level Hys Set the hysteresis The range is 0 3 div to 4 div When None is Set as the Clock Channel Interval Set the interval at which to search the status e When the Type is Parallel Pattern Clock CH Select a clock channel from CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 that will provide the standard timing for searching the status Select NONE to check the sutatus of all the data Start Point Set the starting position for the search The range for this setting is 5 to 5 div Channels Specified as Clock Channels Level Set the level for determining rising and falling The range for the setting is an o
251. for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press FILE 2 Pressing the Utility soft key displays the utility setting menu and the file list dialog box 3 Pressing the Function soft key displays the file function menu Utility_ Function Ja a edia Info Format Format 4 Press the Copy soft key Utility FILE Delete Copy Renane Make Dir Format TO Selecting the Source Medium Directory 5 The procedures are the same as steps 13 to 17 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data 11 30 IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 11 11 Copying Files Selecting the Source File One at a Time 6 Note Turn the jog shuttle to select a file By selecting a screen image data file files with the tif omp or ps extensions in the File List window and pressing SELECT the selected screen image file s compressed image appears in the upper right portion of the file list 2001 07 03 09 51 47 Saat Stopped 31 7 pri lt lt Mainz10k gt gt File List Path ZPO Space 74844160 byte File Name Size Date lt SNAP gt 2601 05 28 17 6 lt WAVEFORM gt 2601 05 17 19 3 lt THEF IN 1 gt 2661 05 15 16 46 R W lt OTHERS gt 2661 04 27 10 47 R W 968 TIF 38574 2001 07 03 09 39 RW P 967 TIF 38574 2001 06 22 13 31 R U 004 TIF 38574 2001 06 22 13 31 R U 006 TIF 38574 2001 06 22 13 29 RW fit 605 TIF 38574 2001 06 22 13 29 R U 963 TIF 38574 20
252. for a waveform extending outside the specified range of the specified parameter OFF Do not search for a waveform Item Setup Assign search parameters to each source channel Choose only one of the automated waveform measurement parameters Condition Range Upper Lower Set the range that defines the specified parameter s condition Logic Search AND Search for waveforms fulfilling all of the search criterion in Param1 Param4 OR Search for waveforms fulfilling at least one of the search criterion in Param1 Param4 7 19 Aejdsig pue uoinisinboy x 7 9 Searching the Historical Data Using Parameters History Search Function Parameter Measuring Range T Range1 T Range2 Set the measuring range of the specified parameter This is the portion of the waveform used to determine the values of the parameter Search Range of the Historical Data The search range extends from the Start Rec to the End Rec Search Method Search in order starting with the newest waveform Show Map Timestamp List Only searched waveforms are displayed in Show map When Search Mode is OFF all waveforms are displayed 7 20 IM 701710 01E Chpater 8 Display 8 1 Changing the Display Format lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 17 gt Relevant Keys IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT SEARCH TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure IM 701710 01E 1 Press
253. for each waveform Units used for Y axis of each waveform no effect on data Data error occurs when binary data for a waveform exceeds this value Data error occurs when binary data for a waveform is below this value Maximum value of binary data for each waveform Minimum value of binary data for each waveform Resolution coefficient of X axis conversion equation for each waveform Offset coefficient of X axis conversion equation for each waveform Units used for X axis for each waveform no effect on data Date when waveform acquisition was completed Time when waveform acquisition was completed For 1 to 7 refer to the next page ModelVersion MathBlockNo FormMath1 FormMath2 DisplayBlockSize DisplayPointNo Phaseshift PhaseShift e Privatelnfo Information Indigenous to Model Version No of the model Block No of block to be computed Waveform for Math1 and its contents Waveform for Math2 and its contents Length of the data displayed on the screen display record length Value which indicates which point of the memory is the left end of the display record length display offset is 1 when record length display record length Phase information lead delay Calculation of the actual display offset of the phase shifted waveform DisplayPointNo IM 701710 01E Appendix 3 ASCII Header File Format Creation of an ASCII Header File When waveform data Waveform is stored on a fl
254. form Data Utility FILE Creating the Directory 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select a medium or a directory 7 Pressing the Dir Name soft key displays a keyboard lt THEVOL 1 gt 2600 16 31 15 69 CHAPT 21 TIF 2600 10 31 18 48 CHAPT 26 TIF 2600 16 31 18 47 2600 16 31 18 45 2600 10 31 18 45 2600 16 31 18 44 2600 16 31 18 43 2600 10 31 18 41 2600 16 31 18 40 2000710731 18 37 2600 16 31 18 36 2600 16 31 18 35 iw FILE Function fa P Filter Dir Name Property Attr Make Dir SET kag 8 Enter the directory file name according to the procedures given in section 4 1 Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box Viewing the Properties The procedures are the same as steps 30 to 33 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Selecting the Medium and Directory The storage medium that can be used to save and load waveform data are displayed in the File List dialog box e Display Example of Storage Medium FDO Floppy disk ZPO Zip disk SC5 SCSI device with an ID number of 5 SC5 1 Partition 1 of the SCSI device with an ID number of 5 NDO Network drive available with the Ethernet interface option Selecting the File Attributes Select the attributes for each file from the following choices e R W Read and write possible e R Read only Cannot write to the file or delete the file IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 11 12 Changing the Directory File Name of the Storage M
255. g the Status and Condition for Conditions A and B 4 oO N Pressing the Set Pattern soft key displays a menu used to set the status and condition for conditions A and B On the DL1720 settings for CH3 and CH4 are not displayed set Pattern ENHANCED Set condition A Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel to which the status of condition A will be set Press SELECT to select H L or X Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the Condition position of condition A Press SELECT to select Enter or Exit In a similar fashion set condition B 6 17 Bbunebbi yp gt 6 9 Setting the A Delay B Trigger ENHANCED Setting the Level Hysteresis Trigger Coupling and HF Rejection 10 Pressing the Level Coupling soft key displays a menu used to set the level coupling hysteresis and HF rejection On the DL1720 settings for CH3 and CH4 are not displayed The setting also applies to A gt B N trigger See section6 8 Level Hys Coupling HF Rej CH1 6 6 Y I F I DC I OFF CH2 0 0 Y I fa I DC I OFF c3 C oov w I 0 CH4 o o Vl p Dc OFF Type a a fade lay us Set Pattern Level A Delay B Coupling 0 003 Setting the Delay Time 11 Ifthe jog shuttle control is not set to Delay press the Delay soft key The Level setting for each channel can be input directly using a USB keyboard a ENHANCED Type a a tale lay tus Hold OFf
256. gain The following TCP IP settings must be entered to use the Ethernet communications functions on the DL1720 DL1 740 e IP Address e Subnet Mask e Default Gateway IP Address Internet Protocol Address Assign an IP address to the instrument The default setting is 0 0 0 0 A unique IP address must be assigned to each PC on an IP network such as the internet or an intranet The address is a 32 bit value normally expressed with four values 0 255 each separated by a period as in 192 168 111 24 Obtain an IP address from your network administrator The settings are automatically configured in environments using DHCP Subnet Mask Specify the mask that is used to determine the network address from the IP address The default setting is 255 255 255 0 Huge TCP IP networks such as the internet are often divided up into smaller networks called subunits The subnet mask is a 32 bit value that specifies whether to use an IP address containing some number of bits that identify the network address The portion other than the network address is the host address that identifies which computer on the network the address belongs to Consult the network administrator for the subnet mask setting value In some cases this setting may not be necessary The settings are automatically configured in environments using DHCP Default Gateway Set the IP address of the gateway default gateway for communicating with machines on different networks The
257. ger using an external signal apply an external signal to this terminal Input Terminal lt DL1740 gt lt DL1720 gt SrA a 1M2 20pF lt 40Vpk ECEN pe On the DL1740 it is located on the rear panel lt 40Vpk 1M2 or on the DL1720 it is located on the front panel Specifications Connector Type BNC Maximum Input Voltage 40 V DC ACpeak or 28 Vrms when the frequency is less than or equal to 10 kHz Frequency Range DC to 50 MHz Input Impedance Approx 1 MQ approx 18 pF 1 MQ and 20 pF for the DL1720 Input Range 2 V for the DL1740 1 V for the DL1720 with the 1 V range selected 10 V for the DL1720 with the 10 V range selected Minimum Input Amplitude 0 1 Vp p for the DL1740 0 1 Vp p for the DL1720 with the 1 V range selected 1 Vp p for the DL1720 with the 10 V range selected Minimum Pulse Width At least 10 ns for both High and Low IM 701710 01E 6 41 Bbunaebbi yp gt Chpater 7 Acquisition and Display 7 1 Setting the Record Length Relevant Keys lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 14 gt 0 oO START STOP SETUP PET a ae ae O SHIFT C wm A SEARCH O TRIG D Bye OO HELP ED Gen o o o2 SIMPLE ENHANCED V DIV TIME DIV o ACTION DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Explanation IM 701710 01E 1 Press ACQ 2 Press the Record Length soft key
258. gger Section 6 5 The edge trigger is the simplest type of trigger and uses a single trigger source to activate a trigger A trigger is activated when the trigger source exceeds rises above or drops falls below the preset trigger level In addition to input signals CH1 to CH4 or CH1 and CH2 for the DL1720 the external trigger input signal the commercial power supply signal that is used by the instrument can be used as a trigger source A trigger is activated refers to the condition in which trigger conditions are satisfied and a waveform is displayed Trigger Level l l l Trigger Source l l l l A trigger is activated at this point if Rise is selected A B N Trigger Enhanced Trigger Section 6 8 This function activates a trigger the Nth time condition B becomes true after condition A has become true CH1 j oA AL Trigger CH1 HL H L H CH2 L H L H L H L H L H L H L B 1 B 2 B 3 Pattern A is True When pattern A CH1 L CH2 L Enter When patternB CH1 H CH2 H Enter N 3 L Low level H High level IM 701710 01E 1 3 Setting a Trigger A Delay B Trigger Enhanced Trigger Section 6 9 This function activates a trigger the first time condition B becomes true after condition A becomes true and the specified time elapses CH1 4 T CH2 Trigger Pattern A is True Pattern B is True When pattern A
259. h Window Upper Lower The range is 4 div The resolution is 0 01 div Upper must always be greater than or equal to Lower The Horizontal Range of the Search Window Left Right The range is 5 div The resolution is 10 div displayed record length Right must always be greater than or equal to left Search Logic Logic AND Searches for waveforms that meet all search conditions from Zone1 to Zone4 OR Searches for waveforms that meet any one of the search conditions from Zone1 to Zone4 7 15 Aejdsig pue uoinisinboy x 7 8 Searching the Historical Data Using Zone History Search Function Search Range of the Historical Data The search range is between the Start Rec and the End Rec Search Order The search is carried out from the newest waveform to the oldest waveform Show Map A List of Time Stamps Only the waveforms that are found are displayed in Show Map If the Search Mode is turned OFF all waveforms are displayed 7 16 IM 701710 01E 7 9 Searching the Historical Data Using Parameters History Search Function Relevant Keys Operating Procedure IM 701710 01E lt For a description of this function refer page 1 26 gt ca kari SETUP ET a IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT O TRIG D SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Select the Search Mode 1 2 Press HISTORY Press the Search Mode soft key to display the s
260. hannel The CH3 CH4 and Math2 soft keys are not displayed on the DL1720 co P P 0 Freg 0 AvgFreg 0 Max 0 Period 0 AvgPer iod Min Rise IntiTy 0 Aug Fall Int2Ty Rns idth Intixy 0 Sdey Width o Int2xY High Duty oc Low 0 Bursti 0 0Shot _ Burst2 a OShot c Pulse All Clear_ Copy To All Trace_ MEASURE Dual Area DFF ON CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Math1 Math2 6 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to turn ON You can turn OFF all parameters at once by selecting All Clear You can copy the current parameter settings to all traces by selecting Copy to All Trace 7 Press SELECT to turn ON the parameter 8 Repeat steps 5 to 7 as necessary IM 701710 01E 9 11 s s jeuy WIOoJ neM o 9 2 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Setting the Delay Delay Setup 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2l 9 12 Pressing the Delay Setup soft key displays the delay setting menu and the measurement channel dialog box Press the soft key corresponding to the desired measurement channel The CH3 CH4 and Math2 soft keys are not displayed on the DL1720 Measure Polarity LH t Edge Count Settings for the following items can be input directly using a USB keyboard i Reference race _Trig_ Be a Eal Trace Polarity Edge Coun
261. hannel ON OFF Input Filter Vertical Position Setting Linear Scaling Roll Mode Analysis Item Search and Zoom Function History Search Function Cursor Measurement Function Automatic Measurement of Waveform Parameters Function Computing Functions Phase Shift GO NO GO Function Specifications Independent ON OFF for each channel CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 Set 20 MHz or 100 MHz band limit ON OFF independently for each channel CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 Waveforms can be moved vertically in the range 4 div from the center of the waveform display frame Set scaling coefficient offset and unit separately for each channel CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 The roll display mode is enabled when the trigger mode is auto auto level or single and the time axis is as follows 50 ms div to 50 s div except 50 ms div to 5 s div for 1 k words Specifications Search for then expand and display a portion of the displayed waveform Choose from the following five search methods Edge Count the rising or falling edges and automatically search either edge Serial Pattern Automatically search a serial pattern up to 64 bits with a synchronized or unsynchronized clock Parallel Pattern Automatically search a parallel pattern from CH1 CH4 MATH1 MATH2 or CH1 CH2 MATH1 for the DL1720 Pulse Width Automatically search for parts where a pulse width meets specified condition
262. hat did or did not pass through the specified area from the history memory Waveform that was Saved Using the History Memory Function Specified Area Detects Waveforms that did or did not Pass through the Specified Area Selected Record No 25 History Memory Search Using Waveform Parameters Section 7 9 Searches waveforms that did or did not satisfy the specified condition from the history memory Waveform that was saved using the history memory function Item Setup P P Condition OUT End Rec Start Rec Selected Record No 0 Detects position T Range2 Selected Record No 28 Data Search Search and Zoom Function lt Section 8 10 gt Edge Search Searches the position where the signal went above rising or below falling the specified level the specified number of times from the search start position Displays the waveform expanded around the detected position in the zoom window Start Point of the Dearch Detected Position i Hysteresis t Specified Level I l l l l l l l l l l The section that is detected is expanded and displayed in the zoom window When the edge is set to rising and the count is set to 2 1 26 IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 1 5 Analyzing the Waveform Serial Pattern Search Searches for a section of the waveform that has the same pattern as the specified waveform pattern specified using High or Low status or Don t Care The status of the wavefor
263. he GO NO GO determination Power Connector Section 3 3 Power Switch Section 3 3 RGB VIDEO OUT Terminal Section 12 3 Power Connectors for the Probes Section 3 4 N Provides power to YOKOGAWA s FET probes or current probes External Trigger Clock Trigger Gate Input Terminal Sections 5 10 6 6 12 1 On the DL1720 it is labeled as EXT and is located on the front panel Trigger Output Terminal Section 12 2 2 1 2 1 Front Panel Rear Panel Top View l L el AAAA OO 7 lt SS IT Handle Use the handle to lift and carry the unit Built In Printer Option 2 2 IM 701710 01E 2 2 Operation Keys Jog Shuttle Knobs VERTICAL Group ease V DIV CH1 to CH4 Keys Sections 5 1 to 5 5 5 7 to 5 9 On the DL1720 the CH3 and CH4 keys are disabled Displays a menu used to turn ON OFF the display on each channel set the vertical position coupling probe attenuation offset voltage bandwidth limit expansion reduction of the vertical axis linear scaling and waveform labels In addition by pressing this key before operating the V DIV knob the channel that is to be controlled by the V DIV knob can be selected PRESET Key Section 5 6 Displays the preset menu that sets the V div input coupling probe attenuation and trigger level to the optimum TTL level ECL level or the current probe 700937 701930 or preset level automatically This preset menu allows you to set all channe
264. he Item Setup soft key to display the measurement item dialog box and the measuring source channel selection menu Mode a a a Item Delay Show Measure History Setup Setup Result Exec tatistics 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the measuring source channel to select it The CH3 CH4 and Math2 soft keys are not displayed on the DL1720 MEASURE fg l Range1 3 000di4 Next ST Rangez 1 2 3 000di 0 Freg 0 AvgFreg 0 Period 0 AvgPer iod Rise IntiTy Fall Int2Ty Width Intixy Width Intexy i High Duty A Low 0 Bursti 0 O0Shot Burst2 a OShot Pulse All Clear_ Copy To All Trace_ MEASURE Dual Area CH1 6 Using the jog shuttle move the cursor to the item you wish to turn ON If you select All Clear you can turn OFF all the items at once If you select Copy to All Trace you can copy the current settings to all of the traces 7 Press SELECT to turn ON the item 8 Repeat steps 5 7 as many times as necessary Press ESC to return to the automatic measurement mode selection menu The other settings are the same as for normal automatic measurement IM 701710 01E 9 21 SISAJEUY WWAOJOARM 9 3 Statistical Processing Explanation 9 22 9 Press the Measure Exec soft key to execute the statistical processing Press the key again to stop the statistical processing Mode History tatistics MEASURE f l Ra
265. he keyboard that appears when SELECT is pressed enter the unit using four characters or less Setting the Start Point 18 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Start Point 19 Pressing SELECT displays a menu used to set the FFT start point 20 Turn the jog shuttle to set the start point and press SELECT Setting the Number of FFT Points 21 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to FFT Points 22 Pressing SELECT displays a menu used to select the number of points on which to take the FFT 23 Turn the jog shuttle to select 1 k or 10 k and press SELECT Operation Source CH1 a Scale putoj Manual Upper 2 0000E 01 Lover 1 4000E 02 Unit Start Point FFT Points Mi Displa DFF ON IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 9 9 Displaying the Power Spectrum Selecting the Time Window 24 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to FFT Window 25 Pressing SELECT displays the time window menu 26 Turn the jog shuttle to select Rect Hanning or Flatlop and press SELECT Operation Source Scale Unit Start Point FFT Points FFT Window Upper 2 0000E 01 Lover 1 4000E 02 Select Mi Displa ON Ps Entering Labels aM1 Setup M1 Label 27 Press the M1 Label soft key to display the keyboard See section 8 5 Setting the Waveform Labels for information about displaying labels 2000 16 31 13 5
266. he keyboard to the DL1720 DL1740 with a USB cable as shown below You can connect the USB cable regardless of the power ON OFF state of the DL1720 DL1740 supports hot plug Connect the type A connector of the USB cable to the DL1720 DL1740 connect the type B connector to the keyboard When the power switch is ON the keyboard is detected and enabled approximately 6 seconds after it is connected DL1720 DL1740 Qo Zoo Q USB Keyboard USB Cable e Connect the keyboard directly without going through a USB hub e Connect only a USB keyboard or printer to the PRN KBD terminals e Do not connect multiple keyboards You can connect a single keyboard and a single printer e Even if you continuously depress a key the character will not be input repeatedly Confirming the Type of Keyboard that is Connected To confirm the type of keyboard that is connected to the DL1720 DL1740 carry out the procedure below 1 Press MISC 2 Press the Next1 2 soft key a alibrationRemote Cnti SCSI ID Network Pystem Cnfg pen 3 Press the USB List soft key to display the USB Device List Check the type of USB keyboard that is connected USB Device List Device Address Product Name Keyboard 2 Mitsumi USB Keyboard Printer 3 USB Printer MISC A A A a LCI raph Colo Setup Self Test USB List Next Info 272 IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings Entering File Names Com
267. hion as in the auto mode If a trigger does not occur within the timeout period the center value of the amplitude of the trigger source is detected the trigger level is automatically changed to the center value and the trigger is generated to update the displayed waveform The auto level mode is valid only if the trigger is a simple trigger and the trigger source is CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 For all other cases the operation is the same as the auto mode If the time axis setting is in the range in which the display mode is set to roll mode the display is set to roll mode Normal Mode The display is updated only when the trigger conditions are met The display will not be updated if no trigger is caused Therefore to check the waveform or ground level when no trigger is detected use auto mode IM 701710 01E 6 1 Bbunebbiy1 o 6 1 Setting the Trigger Mode Single Mode The display is updated once when the trigger conditions are met and the waveform acquisition stops In the time axis setting range in which the display mode is set to roll mode the display is set to roll mode When a trigger occurs the specified record length of data is acquired and the displayed waveform stops Single N Mode The display is updated according to the number of times specified when the trigger conditions are met and the waveform acquisition stops This mode is used when acquiring a waveform using the sequential store function If the r
268. his terminal is labeled as EXT and is located on the front panel When using the current probe 700937 or 701930 the number of probes that can be used is limited by the current generated by the device under measurement Examples of current consumption measurement using an active probe that can be connected to the DL1720 DL1740 are shown below Current Probe 700937 250 E 200 5 150 100 7 Es Positive Current D t T O 5 Negative Current T ig DC a AC f 50 Hz 2 Current Generated A Current Probe 701930 aT Fii Current DEE Es E ee ee on ee ee egative Curren eee ee eee ps a ee AC f 50 Hz 150 100 50 0 50 100 150 Current Generated A Current Consumption mA Calculate the positive and negative current consumption of the FET probe model 700939 or the differential probe model 701920 at a maximum of 125 mA asp Bung suonnes ld 3 5 Compensating the Probe Phase Correction A N CAUTION Never apply an external voltage to the COMP terminal as damage to the instrument may result Operating Procedure 1 Turn ON the power switch 2 Connect the probe to the input terminal to which the signal is to be applied 3 Touch the probe s tip against the probe compensation signal output terminal and connect the grounding wire to the functional earth terminal Perform auto setup using the procedure described in section 4 3 Insert a Sc
269. history memory function cannot be used in repetitive sampling mode If you suspend waveform acquisition before the current record has been fully read the record will not be recorded in the history You cannot use the history function while roll mode is selected History records are not lost when waveform acquisition is stopped and then restarted provided that acquisition conditions remain unchanged If you change the acquisition settings history memory is cleared when you restart acquisition using the new settings If CLEAR TRACE is pressed during waveform acquisition or after the waveform acquisition is stopped data in the history memory are cleared when the data acquisition is restarted Precautions to be Taken when Recalling Data from the History Memory 7 12 Acquisition will stop when the history memory menu is displayed Itis not possible to recall waveform data from the history memory while acquisition in progress Acquisition can be restarted while the history memory menu is displayed However it is not possible to change history memory settings such as Selected Record No while acquisition is in progress Settings are restricted by the following formula End Rec No lt Selected Record No lt Start Rec No If you load a waveform record from floppy disk or external storage device the loaded waveform becomes Record 0 In the case of multiple records sequential store the records will be loaded sequentially with the latest
270. huttle to change the part which is expanded and displayed in Z1 and Z2 8 As you did with the zoomed waveform press the Z1 Pos Z2 Pos soft key then turn the jog shuttle to change the part which is expanded and displayed in Z1 and Z2 Setting the Scroll Speed 9 Press the Speed soft key then use the jog shuttle to set the scroll speed from 1 to f Executing the Scroll 10 Press the Exec soft key to perform the Scroll Press the key again to stop the Scroll IM 701710 01E 8 27 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function Explanation 8 28 When the data acquisition is stopped a section of the waveform can be searched and displayed expanded Search Method Type The following two search methods are available Edge Searches the position where the signal went above rising or below falling the specified level the specified number of times from the search start position Serial Pattern Searches for a section of the waveform that has the same pattern as the specified waveform pattern High or Low status or Don t Care Parallel Pattern Searches by using a status High Low or Don t Care of each channel CH1 through CH4 Math1 and Math2 or CH1 CH2 and Math1 for the DL1720 Pulse Width Searches for a particular section of the current displayed waveform Searches for a section of the waveform of which the pulse width is shorter or longer than the specified time width from the search start position Auto Scrol
271. ical Sensitivity lt Section 5 8 gt The V div vertical sensitivity setting is used to adjust the amplitude of the displayed waveform so that the waveform can be observed easily The V div setting is made by setting the voltage value per division on the screen grid The vertical sensitivity setting operates by switching to a different attenuator attenuation rate The setting changes in steps 1 V div gt 2 V div gt 5 V div In addition by performing computations on the digital data acquired using the voltage sensitivity above the waveform can be displayed at a sensitivity of 0 4 or 0 5 to 10 times the voltage sensitivity that was used to acquire the data Variable When V div is Switched from 1 V div to 0 50 V div fidiv 1V 14 div 0 50 V Note Vertical Sensitivity and Measurement Resolution To get precise readings it is recommended that you set the vertical sensitivity so that the waveform s maximum and minimum amplitudes are close to the top and bottom of the screen Note that the instrument uses 8 bit A D converters Incoming signals are sampled at a resolution of 255 levels LSB or 32 levels per division Effective Data Range The instrument uses 8 bit A D converters Assuming that output values range from 0 to 255 the vertical center line of the display corresponds to a value of 128 Because the A D converter reaches full range at 255 screen level 256
272. ical noise and enter the instrument via the signal lines Do not Damage the LCD Screen Since the LCD screen is very vulnerable and can be easily scratched do not allow any sharp objects near it Also it should not be exposed to vibrations and shocks When the Instrument is not going to be Used for a Long Period Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet espn Bung suonnes ld e 3 1 Precautions During Use Carrying the Instrument Before carring the instrument remove the power cord and other cables Always carry the instrument by the handles or carry it with both hands see below Cleaning When cleaning the case or the operation panel unplug the power cord from the plug first then wipe with a dry soft clean cloth Do not use volatile chemicals such as benzene or thinner for cleaning as this may lead to discoloration or deformation 3 2 IM 701710 01E 3 2 Installation Installation Conditions The instrument must be installed in a place where the following conditions are met Flat Location Set the oscilloscope in the proper direction and in a level and stable place If placed in an unstable place printing quality decreases Well Ventilated Location Vent holes are situated on the bottom In addition vent holes for the cooling fans are also situated in the rear sides To prevent a rise in the internal temperature the vent holes should not be blocked and sufficient clearance should be maintained around them If a print
273. igger signal as the trigger source Setting the Hold Off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Precautions to be Taken when Setting the Pattern Trigger e When the trigger type setting is changed the pattern trigger setting is no longer valid However if the pattern trigger is selected again the previous settings are enabled e Even if the trigger mode is set to auto level mode the operation will be in auto mode e Set the trigger status on all trigger sources If the channel selected is a clock channel select the trigger slope e When activating the trigger in sync with the clock signal specify at least 1 ns for the pattern to setup and at least 1 ns for the hold time 6 23 Bunebb1 1 gt 6 11 Setting the Width Pulse lt T Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 Time Out Trigger ENHANCED lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 9 gt Relevant Keys SEARCH TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Setting the Trigger Type 1 Press ENHANCED 2 Pressing the Type soft key displays the trigger type menu ENHANCED Type a fe Count f Hold OFf Set Patter Boii uS A gt BCN oupling 1 0 08 3 Press the Width soft key NHANCED A gt B N J A Delay BJ Pattern Width OR TV Hold re 0 08 Setting the Width Type 4 Pressing the Width Type soft key displays a menu used to select the width type ENHANCED 5 Press the s
274. igger source exits the window is trigger duration e OR trigger IN Trigger is activated when the trigger source enters the window the area between two preset levels OUT Trigger is activated when the trigger source exits the window IN Trigger is Activated OR Trigger OUT Trigger is Activated OR Trigger Width Window Width Window Center Center Trigger is Activated pall OR Trigger Trigger Duration Width Trigger Trigger Duration Width Trigger IM 701710 01E 6 33 Bbunaebbi yp gt 6 13 Setting the Window Trigger ENHANCED 6 34 Window Setting You define the window by its center level and width Center Setting Range Anywhere within the 8 screen divisions in resolution of 0 01 div Example If the scale is 1 V div resolution is 0 01 V Width Setting Range Up to 4 div from center in resolution of 0 02 div Example If the scale is 1 V div resolution is 0 02 V Note If you set the window so that the top or bottom is off the screen the trigger will occur at the level for the corresponding screen edge the level at 4 divisions from screen center rather than at the missing top or bottom Therefore it is recommended not to exceed 4 div when setting the window Setting the Trigger Coupling Select from the following list of choices AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from the trigger source signal as the trigger signal DC Uses the trigger source s
275. igher amplitude level is set to High and the lower amplitude level is set to Low taking into account the occurrences of ringing and spikes This method is most Suitable for measuring Square waves and pulse waves e MaxMin The maximum and minimum values within the measurement range are set to High and Low respectively This method is most suitable for measuring sine waves and saw waves It is not suited to the measurement of waveforms that have ringing and spikes Setting the Distal Proximal and Mesial Values Distal Prox Select the appropriate method to set the three levels that are to be used as reference for such measurements as rise and fall times e Percentage The distal mesial and proximal values are set in terms of percentages when High of any trace CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2 or CH1 CH2 and Math1 for the DL1720 and Low are taken to be 100 and 0 respectively e Unit Set the distal mesial and proximal values of any trace CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2 or CH1 CH2 and Math1 for the DL1720 to arbitrary voltage values Setting the Measurement Range T Range With the default setting the 5 div of the time axis display frame is the measurement range However this range can be shortened The measurement range is set using two vertical cursors The position of the fine dashed line is the measurement start point and the position of the coarse dashed line is the end point IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 9 2 Automated Measure
276. igits of the year are used to set the year YY Time HH MM SS The 24 hour clock is used Note e The date and time are backed up by the built in lithium battery e Leap years are taken into account 3 13 espn Bung suonnes ld o Chpater 4 Common Operations 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings Entering a Value IM 701710 01E Direct Entry Using the Special Knob The following knobs can be used to directly enter values simply by turning them V DIV and TIME DIV knobs es oe a qi TRIG D swexe enanceo enranceD V DIV TIME DIV JN N ACTION DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Entry Using the Jog Shuttle Before using the jog shuttle to enter a value you must select the desired parameter by pressing the corresponding soft key The jog shuttle ring the outer ring of the jog shuttle allows you to enter values in larger steps than the jog shuttle dial The size of the step depends on the angle by which the shuttle ring is turned For some parameters you can use the arrow keys below the jog shuttle to shift from one digit to the next 2001 05 28 17 06 55 E Norma 1 Stopped 84 300kS S _ ensfdiv CH1 10 1 0 500 U diy DC Full CH2 10 1 6 500 U diy DC Full Edge CH1 F l i POSITION gPosition Set to Set to Set to 50 07 16 56 90 Parameter for Setting with the Jog Shuttle Note lf you make an incorrect change with the
277. ignal as the trigger signal Turning ON OFF the HF Rejection Select 15 KHz or 20 MHz when you wish to use a signal source that is obtained by removing the high frequency components frequency components greater than or equal to approximately 15 kHz or 20 MHz from the trigger signal as the trigger source Setting the Hold Off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Correlation with the OR Trigger or Width Trigger OR and Width are the trigger types on which the window trigger can be used When using the window trigger of a single channel set the window conditions of all other tb bkd channels to or x IM 701710 01E 6 14 Setting the TV Trigger ENHANCED lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 10 gt Relevant Keys ca mse owned SETUP PET a IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT SEARCH D TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Inputting the Video Signal Connect the probe cable used to input the video signal to the CH1 input terminal Selecting the TV Trigger 1 Press ENHANCED 2 Pressing the Type soft key displays the trigger type menu ENHANCED Type a a fe Count gHold OFf et Pattern Levels us A gt B N Coupling 1 0 08 3 Press the TV soft key Selecting the Broadcasting System of the Video Signal to be Monitored 4 Pressing the TV Type soft key displays a menu used to select the broadcasti
278. iguring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP e When connected to the network you must disconnect then reconnect for settings to take effect e When you are disconnected by the server when using the FTP client you will be automatically reconnected if you perform a file operation save load etc This is the same if NDO is selected for Save to File when using an action trigger or GO NO GO You can save a screen image to a network drive via Ethernet just as you would to a floppy disk drive or Zip drive Entering Settings for a Network Drive IM 701710 01E FTP Server Input the IP address of the FTP server the PC or workstation running the FTP server on the network to which screen image data will be saved On networks supporting DNS you can specify the host and domain by name instead of by IP address Login Name Enter a login name of 15 characters or less The default value is anonymous The available characters consist of all ASCII characters on the keyboard including space Password Enter a password corresponding to the login name using 15 characters or less The available characters consist of all ASCII characters on the keyboard including space Time Out When accessing the FTP server from this instrument if can t receive even after a fixed time the timeout time elapses this means that the instrument is unable to send to or receive from the FTP server and the connection will close The available setting range
279. image from the screen e Move the cursor using the jog shuttle Pressing the Attr soft key changes the attribution of the selected file Path FDO Space 1180672 byte File Name a lt THEVOL 1 gt 2606 16 31 15 69 CHAPTO66 TIF 2606 16 31 18 24 CHAPT 5 TIF 2606 16 31 18 23 CHAPTO64 TIF 2606 16 31 18 22 CHAPTO63 TIF 2000 16 31 18 21 CHAPTOOZ TIF 2606 16 31 18 26 CHAPTO61 TIF 2006 16 31 18 19 CHAPTO6 TIF 2606 16 31 18 18 2 2606 16 31 15 69 Utility FILE Delete Exec Function a Filter et Reset All Set Property Attr Delete SET pe Selecting the Files to be Deleted One at a Time 7 8 IM 701710 01E Turn the jog shuttle to select a file Pressing the Set Reset soft key places an asterisk to the left of the selected file The file will be deleted Pressing the Set Reset soft key again removes the asterisk to the left of the selected file The file will not be deleted File List Path FDO Space 1102846 byte File Name ize Date Attr FDO J x lt THEVOL 1 gt 2606 16 31 15 69 CHAPTOOS TIF 2006 16 31 18 30 CHAPTOO TIF 2000 16 31 18 29 CHAPTO66 TIF 2606 16 31 18 24 CHAPTO 5 TIF 2006 16 31 18 23 CHAPTO64 TIF 2606 16 31 18 22 CHAPTOO3 TIF 2006 16 31 18 21 CHAPTOOZ TIF 2600 16 31 18 20 CHAPTOO1 TIF 2606 16 31 18 19 CHAPTOOO TIF 2006 16 31 18 18 2 2606 16 31 15 69 Function a Filter et Reset A11 Set Property Delete SET ek
280. in the Format selection menu is not displayed Z00M Node Format Ja 21 Mag 6 21 Pos llocation x 2 000di4 Fit Meas Fit Meas ain amp Z1azz2 Main 22 Mag E 22 Pos Rng to zif Rng to 22 x 2 000di 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired format Quad and Hexa are not displayed on the DL1720 z00n___ Main Single Dual Triad Quad Hexa it Meas ng to 22 X 2 0 000di IM 701710 01E 8 15 8 9 Zooming the Waveform Selecting the Zoomed Trace 6 Pressing the Allocation soft key displays the zoomed trace setting menu CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1720 Allocation Z00M Node Format 5 ai Fag 5 21 Pos Ni Tacattin A z Meas Fit Meas ain amp Z1azz Main oz hag 6 22 Pos a to 21 Rng to 22 A Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the desired trace Press SELECT to select the trace Selecting All ON selects all traces that are currently displayed Setting the Zoom Rate 9 10 Press the Z1 Mag Z2 Mag soft key Turn the jog shuttle to set the zoom rate of Z1 zoom box If you set Mode to Z1 Z1 Mag is displayed If you select Z2 Z2 Mag is displayed If you select Z1 and Z2 Z1 Mag Z2 Mag is displayed 200M Mode Format ea Mag 5 a Pos ii iadation 0 000di F Meas a Meas a in amp Z1 amp 2Z2 Main oz fag a a aaa ae to Z1 a to 22 In a similar fashion press the Z2 Mag soft key to set the zoom rate of Z2 zoom box Selecting the Zoom Position 1
281. ination e The determination results the number of successes and failures are displayed e All keys other than START STOP and the Abort soft key are disabled during the determination e When GO NO GO determination is executed the trigger mode is automatically changed to Single e Determination is not possible when the acquisition mode is set to Average 9 54 IM 701710 01E 9 13 GO NO GO Determination Using Zones lt For a discription of this function refer to page 1 32 gt Relevant Keys NAP SNAP HELP I LIII Vo FLE msd conocd a Erans A X Y MENU MENG Z PHASE SETUP DISPLAY IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT C mn A SEARCH O TRIG D o 2 SIMPLE ENHANCED V DIV TIME DIV ACTION _ DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Setting the Mode 1 Press GO NO GO 2 Press the Mode soft key to display the GO NO GO determination mode setting menu GO NO GO Mode OFF 3 Press the Zone soft key to set the GO NO GO determination mode GO NO GO OFF zone Paraneter Creating a Determination Zone 4 Press the Edit Menu soft key 5 Press the New soft key to display the zone creation reference waveform selection menu GO NO GO a a New Redraw p Menu 6 Press the soft key corresponding to the reference waveform to display the zone editing menu The CH3 CH4 and Math2 soft keys are not displayed on the DL1720 0 NO GO_
282. ined waveforms 1 The number of retained waveforms triggers depends on the record length as follows Record Length Count 1 kwords 1 to 1024 2048 10 kwords 1 to 128 256 50 kwords 1 to 32 64 100 kwords 1 to 16 32 250 kwords 1 to 8 16 500 kwords 1 to 4 8 1 Mwords 1 to 2 4 For each count of the trigger only the displayed waveform is preserved past waveform data is not preserred The setting range when interleave mode is ON When performing box averaging the available setting range is 250 kwords or less or 500 kwords or less with interleave mode ON Display e Set to One to display the selected record only Select the waveform to be displayed using Select Record from the specified range between Start Rec and End Rec e Set to All to generate overlapped display of all history records from the Start Rec No to the End Rec No The waveform corresponding to the Selected Record No will appear brighter than the other waveforms Aejdsig pue uoinisinboy x 7 7 Using the History Memory Show Map A List of Time Stamps You can list the number of the waveform data stored in the acquisition memory and the time at acquisition end One screen displays 75 data points of information You can scroll through the data by using the jog shuttle Precautions and Restrictions You cannot use the history function while the acquisition mode is set to Average Displayed history records will be meaningless The
283. ing 1 MQ input and 5 Vrms or 10 Vpeak when using 50 Q input Applying a voltage that exceeds these values can damage the input section When the frequency exceeds 1 kHz voltages below these values can also sometimes damage the input section 5 5 S XY e UOZIIOH pue ed1110 5 4 Selecting Probe Attenuation lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 3 gt Relevant Keys NAP SNOr HELP amp aie tctal at a ca mse sone SETUP eon DISPLAY COPY IMAGE SAVE IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT WERTICAL____V SEARCH C maar D Smee ENHANCED TIME DIV frone osmon DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press one of the keys from CH 1 to CH 4 or CH 1 to CH 2 for the DL1720 to select the desired channel 2 Press the Probe soft key to display the menu used to select the attenuation Display Position 1 1 10 1 100 1 1000 1 OFF DN 9 60di 172 Explanation Probe attenuation for each channel can be selected from the following 1 1 10 1 100 1 or 1000 1 Note If an incorrect attenuation has been selected V div will also be incorrect If you set the attenuation to 1 1 when using a 10 1 probe for example the displayed value for automatically measured amplitude will be 1 10 the true value 5 6 IM 701710 01E 5 5 Setting the Offset Voltage Relevant Keys lt For a description of this function refer to page
284. ing list of choices AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from the trigger source signal as the trigger signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as the trigger signal Turning ON OFF the HF Rejection Select 15 KHz or 20 MHz when you wish to use a signal source that is obtained by removing the high frequency components frequency components greater than or equal to approximately 15 kHz or 20 MHz from the trigger signal as the trigger source Setting the Hold Off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Note If you wish to use only one pattern condition to activate the trigger use the pattern trigger If the status for condition A and condition B are set to Xs Don t care the trigger will not be activated IM 701710 01E 6 9 Setting the A Delay B Trigger ENHANCED Relevant Keys Operating Procedure IM 701710 01E lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 9 gt oe ae ao o e2 o m O TRIG D HORIZONTAL 4 SEA x V DIV TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Setting the Trigger Type 1 2 3 Press ENHANCED Pressing the Type soft key to display the trigger type menu ENHANCED Type a Py f6 Count fgHold Off Set Patter Levely uS A gt BN Coupling 1 0 08 Press the A Delay B soft key NHANCED A gt B N A Delay B Pattern Width OR Tu Hold Off us 0 08 Settin
285. ing operation an error code may appear on the screen This section describes the meanings of the error messages and the corrective actions which they require The messages can be displayed either in English or Japanese See section 14 2 If the corrective action requires servicing contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual for repairs In addition to the error messages listed in this section there are also communication related error messages These messages are described in the Communication Interface User s Manual IM701710 17E Status Messages Code AJIOJINJ O 11 13 21 22 23 24 25 26 2 28 29 30 32 36 15 2 Message Aborted hard copy Aborted file operation Completed data store Completed data recall Completed GO NO GO Set to remote mode by communication commands Local lockout by communication commands All settings will be initialized Power up with the RESET key depressed Completed action on trigger Executed unload Release the Preview mode Some of the channels are set to 50 Q DC input To keep the settings press the SELECT key Pressing any other key will change the settings to 1 MQ DC input Aborted the search Executed the search but no record was found that matched the conditions Executed the search but no pattern was found that matched the conditions Pattern contains points that are between Thr Lower and Th
286. ing to the store number that you wish to lock Press SELECT to lock the data Press SELECT again to release the lock Store Detail Date Time Comment Store 1 00 12 01 18 05 40 __ Jl Store 2 00 12 01 18 05 50 C____ Store 3 00 12 01 18 07 07 CL_____ Str Rc11 SETUP A ecall 1 Recall 2 Reca1ll 3 Store 1 tore 2 tore 3 Store 60 12 61 96 12 01 900712701 Detail 4 10 IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 4 3 Storing and Recalling Setting Parameters Items that are Stored Stores all information that you entered using the soft key menu or jog shuttle menu START STOP and the ON OFF conditions of channels Selecting the Storage Destination of the Setting Parameters You can store the setting parameters to three memory locations Store 1 through Store 3 If the setting parameters are already stored to the selected number the previous data is overwritten However an error message is displayed if the data is locked Selecting the Setting Parameters to be Recalled Select the setting parameters that are stored in the three memory locations Recall 1 through Recall 3 You can only select memory locations that have setting parameters stored Note The stored setting parameters are not cleared even if you initialize the settings on the DL1720 DL1 740 4 11 suoljes0dQ uowWwoy gt 4 5 Starting Stopping Waveform Acquisition Relevant Keys NAP SNAP HE
287. ings Outputting the Screen Image Data 7 Press SHIFT to set the keys in the shifted condition Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 8 Press COPY ear a aarrrose Explanation IM 701710 01E 9 10 Note 13 5 Sending Screen Image Data to a Network Printer Press the Copy to soft key to select Net Print COPY Copy to Format Informationja Comment Built in Normal Lone ON COPY uilt in USB Net Print Comment For the remaining procedures please refer to 10 3 Outputting Screen Image to an USB Printer However when NetPrint is selected PS is added to the Format item Copy to Format Color a Comment Net Print ESC P ON Copy to PS LIPS3 PCLS ESC P ESC P2 BJ Net Print Before working with this function enter the TCP IP settings as described in Configuring the Ethernet Interface You can output to any TCP IP compatible printer This function can not be used in conjunction with FTP server function or File operation You can send screen images simultaneously to a network printer via Ethernet and the built in printer optional Entering Settings for a Network Printer LPR Server Specify the IP address of the network printer server On networks supporting DNS you can specify the host and domain by name instead of by IP address Printer Name LPR Name Specify the name of the printer to which screen images will be output Printer Format The following
288. initializing the instrument 15 6 IM 701710 01E 15 3 Self Diagnostic Test Self Test Relevant Keys MEASURE CURSOR FILE MISC MATH Euj Cruel se Pianoed mam ESL x er RESET SETUP FENT SPLA COPY MIAGE SAE me cae O SHIFT CD Gas SEARCH O TRIG D V DIV TIME DIV ACTION DELAY o2 SIMPLE ENHANCED o o The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Displaying the Self Test Menu 1 Press MISC 2 Press the Next 1 2 soft key to display the self test soft key menu MISC A alibrationRemote Cntlj SCSI ID Network Bysten Cnfgj Overview Next 172 3 Press the Self test soft key to display the self test menu Go to step 4 for a memory test step 9 for a key test step 13 for a printer test and step 16 for a floppy disk drive test a SCSI test or a accuracy test A a a LCD raph Colo Setup Self Test USB List Next Info 2 2 Execute the Memory Test 4 Pressing the Test Item soft key displays the test item menu Self Test Test Item St Exec Memory 5 Press the Memory soft key to be tested self Test MISC Key Board Memory FDD SCSI Printer j Accuracy 6 Pressing the Test Exec soft key executes the memory test self Test MISC Test Item st Exec Memory IM 701710 01E 15 7 a uoi 2 dsuj pue soueUDd UIeW HunooysajqnoIL 15 3 Self Diagnostic Test Self Test Executing the Key Test 7 After step
289. instrument directly without using a probe correct measurement cannot be performed due to the load effect espn Bung suonnes ld e 3 4 Connecting a Probe Probe Specifications for the probe 700988 supplied with the instrument after calibration Item Specifications Setting 1 1 Conditions Setting 10 1 Input impedance 10 MQ 2 approx 14 pF 1 MQ 1 0 approx 150 pF When used with Capacitance this instrument Attenuation ratio 10 1 3 When used with this instrument Frequency band DC to 400 MHz DC to 6 MHz When used with this instrument Rise time 900 ps or less 58 ns or less When used with this instrument Maximum 600 V DC AC peak input voltage or 424 Vrms Frequency is 100 kHz or lower Connector type BNC BNC Total length 1 5 m 1 5 m 1 When the probe s attenuation is 1 1 never input voltage exceeding the maximum input voltage of this instrument When Using a Probe other than the One Supplied with the Instrument e To measure a signal which contains harmonics of approximately 500 MHz use a probe with a frequency band of 500 MHz or higher e Correct measured values cannot be displayed if the probe s attenuation ratio is not 1 1 10 1 100 1 or 1000 1 Setting the Probe Attenuation Follow the operating procedure given in section 5 4 Selecting Probe Attenuation so that the probe s attenuation matches the one displayed below Probe in the soft key menu If
290. ion Lists the unit s main specifications Appendix 1 shows the relationships between time axis sampling rate and record length Appendix 2 explains waveform area calculation Appendix 3 gives the format for ASCII file headers Appendix 4 presents a list of default settings Index of contents Vii Structure of the Manual Conventions Used in this Manual viii Units ee Denotes 1000 Example 100 kS s Ke ooren Denotes 1024 Example 720 KB storage capacity of a floppy disk Bolded Items Characters written in bold mainly refer to characters or setting values that are displayed on the screen or panel Symbols The following symbols are used in to this manual A N Affixed to the instrument Indicates danger to personnel or instrument and the operator must refer to the user s manual The symbol is used in the user s manual to indicate the reference WARNING Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent serious of injury or death to the user CAUTION Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent ae minor or moderate injury or damage to the instrument Note Provides information that is important for proper operation of the instrument Terms Used for Descriptions of Operations The following terms are used in chapters 3 to 15 to distinguish certain features in descriptions Relevant Keys Indicates the relevant panel keys which are necessary to carry out the operation Operating Proc
291. ion Access Control The following network components are installed m Client for Microsoft Networks aif 3Com Fast EtherLink sL 10 100Mb T Ethernet NIC 3C905 if Dial Up Adapter YY TCP IP gt 3Com Fast EtherLink 4 TCPYIP gt Dial Up Adapter L1O0 100Mb Ta Ethernet M Remove Properties 4 Set the parameters such as the IP address according to the table on the previous page and click OK TCP IP Properties l Bindings Advanced Nebos DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration F Address An IF address can be automatically assigned to this computer IF your network does not automatically assign IP addresses ask pour network administrator for an address and then type it in the space below Obtain an IP address automatically Specify an IP address IP Address 10 0 232 29 Bindings Advanced NetBIOS DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration IP Address The address order in the list will be the order in which these machines are used New gateway fio o 292 1 Installed gateways m mp gt D 5 T ana 5 D h D O D _ O x A O 3 v TCP IP Properties BEI The first gateway in the Installed Gateway list will be the default IM 701710 01E 13 7 13 3 Saving Waveform and Setting Data to a Network Drive FTP Client Function lt For a description of this function refter to page 1 29 gt Relevant Keys S LIII
292. ion does not start when the power is turned ON or if the normal waveform display screen does not appear check the following points e Check that the power cord is plugged in properly e Check that the main power switch is turned ON e Check that the correct voltage is being supplied from the AC outlet Refer to section 3 3 e Check that the fuse is not blown Refer to section 15 5 If there is still no power even after the above points have been checked contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual For Accurate Measurement Turn the power switches ON and allow the unit to warm up for at least 30 minutes After warm up is complete perform calibration Refer to section 4 7 Response at Power OFF Settings made prior to turning OFF the power are retained even if the power cord is removed This allows display of waveforms using those saved settings the next time the power is turned ON Note _ The settings are backed up by a lithium battery The battery lasts for approximately 5 years if it is used at an ambient temperature of 23 C When the battery voltage drops below the specified level a message will appear on the screen In this case the battery needs to be replaced immediately The battery cannot be replaced by the user so contact the nearest YOKOGAWA representative listed on the back cover of this manual 3 6 IM 701710 01E 3 4 Connecting a Probe Input Terminals A A probe
293. is installed in the PC Here the settings of the NIC for connecting your PC and the DL1720 DL1740 are explained If the IP address and other parameters are to be obtained dynamically using the DHCP server the following settings are not necessary In this case select Obtain an IP address automatically under the IP Address tab of the TCP IP Properties dialog box For example if you are connecting a PC and the DL1720 DL1740 to an independent Ethernet network you can specify parameters as indicated in the next table For details on the parameters consult your system or network administrator IM 701710 01E 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP Parameter Value Note IP Address Example 192 168 21 128 IP address for the PC Subnet Mask Example 255 255 255 0 Set the same value as the subnet mask that was specified for the DL1720 DL1740 Gateway None DNS Disable WINS Disable The following procedure describes the steps for Windows 95 98 If you are using Windows NT 2000 Pro carry out equivalent steps according to your operating system 1 Select Settings gt Control Panel from the Start menu to open the Control Panel folder 2 Double click the Network icon to display the following Network dialog box 3 Click the Configuration to select the TCP IP connection corresponding to the Ethernet NIC that is connected to the PC and click Properties to display the TCP IP properties dialog box Network RAEI Configuration Identificat
294. isition memory over two areas You can also perform computation on the measurement parameter waveform parameter values that are determined in the two areas Waveforms Excluded from Measurements The following waveform measurements are not possible in the automated measurement of waveform parameters e Snapshot waveforms e Accumulated waveforms other than the newest waveform Automated Measurement Mode ON Performs computation between arbitrary items in Areai and Area2 Statistics Performs statistical processing on the computed results between arbitrary items in Areai and Area2 See section 9 3 Statistical Processing Note Statistical processing for each period Cycle Statistics is not possible Selecting the High Low Assignment Method High Low High indicates the 100 level in measurements such as the rise or fall time And Low indicates the 0 level Select the assignment method of High and Low from the following two methods e Auto Sets the higher amplitude level to High and lower level to Low within the measurement range based on the voltage level frequency of the waveform by taking the effects of ringing spikes etc into consideration This method is best suited when measuring rectangular waveforms and pulse waveforms e MaxMin Sets the maximum value to High and lowest value to Low in the measurement range This method is best suited when measuring sine waveforms ramp waveforms etc It is not suited for measurement of
295. ith the DL1720 DL1740 A serial interface and a network interface are also available as an option Through communications functions you can output waveform data to a PC for data analysis or control the DL1720 DL1740 using an external controller to carry out waveform measurements MN DL1720 DL1740 Lo VOTE om Communication Interface Personal IM 701710 01E 1 30 1 7 Other Useful Functions Connecting a USB Keyboard lt Section 4 1 gt You can connect a USB keyboard for entering file names comments and other information In addition the keys on the keyboard are assigned to the keys on the front panel of the DL1720 DL1740 which allows you to operate the DL1720 DL1740 ina similar fashion See appendix 5 suonoun DL1720 DL1740 Ljo T TTT TT Zoo Keyboard and Printer Interface Initialization lt Section 4 2 gt This function resets the key settings to the factory settings default settings and is useful when complex settings have been made and you want to cancel all of them at once However settings related to communications the SCSI ID setting parameters on storing and recalling function are not reset and so on Auto Setup lt Section 4 3 gt This function makes settings automatically such as vertical sensitivity time axis and trigger settings to suit the signal to be measured This is useful when the signal to be measured is unknown However there might be particular signals for
296. jog shuttle to set the right edge of the measuring range Use the arrow keys to move between the digits Press RESET to return to the initial value XXX IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 7 9 Searching the Historical Data Using Parameters History Search Function Executing the Search 21 Press the Searchexaec soft key to execute the search Displaying the Searched Waveform 22 Press ESC to return to the HISTORY menu 23 Press the Show Map soft key to display a list of the numbers of the searched waveform data and time at acquisition end v NN History Memory Map H 0000 11 02 01 36 0025 11 02 00 94 0050 11 02 00 52 H 0001 11 02 01 34 0026 11 02 00 92 0051 11 02 00 50 0002 11 02 01 33 0027 11 02 00 911 0052 11 02 00 49 0003 11 02 01 31 0028 11 02 00 89 0053 11 02 00 47 0004 11 02 01 29 0029 11 02 00 87 0054 11 02 00 45 0005 11 02 01 27 0030 11 02 00 85 0055 11 02 00 43 H 0006 11 02 01 26 0031 11 02 00 84 0056 11 02 00 42 H 0007 11 02 01 24 0032 11 02 00 82 0057 11 02 00 40 0008 11 02 01 22 0033 11 02 00 80 0058 11 02 00 38 H 0009 11 02 01 21 0034 11 02 00 79 0059 11 02 00 37 0010 11 02 01 19 0035 11 02 00 77 0060 11 02 00 35 0011 11 02 01 17 0036 11 02 00 75 0061 11 02 00 33 0012 11 02 01 16 0037 11 02 00 74 0062 11 02 00 32 0013 11 02 01 14 0038 11 02 00 72 0063 11 02 00 30 H 0014 11 02 01 12 0039 11 02 00 70 0064 11 02
297. l The zoom position automatically moves auto scroll in the specified direction You can scroll through the zoomed waveform and stop the scrolling at the desired position Search Condition Setup e When the Type is Edge Source Select the channel to be searched You can also select Mathi and Math2 or Math for the DL1720 Level Set the level used to determine the rising or falling edge The range is 8 div within the screen The resolution is 0 01 div Polarity Select the polarity from the following list f Search by the number of times the waveform passes from below the specified level to above the specified level Search by the number of times the waveform passes from above the specified level to below the specified level Hys Set the hysteresis The range is 0 3 div to 4 div Count Set the number of times f or is to be met The range is 1 to 1000000 Start Point Set the starting position of the search The range is from 5 to 5 div e When the Type is Serial Pattern Clock CH Select the clock channel from CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 that is used as a timing reference in searching the status When None is selected the status is searched at a predetermined interval Source Select the channel to be searched You can also select Math1 and Math2 or Math for the DL1720 Thr Upper Set the level used to determine Low L Thr Lower Set the level used to determine High H Pattern Four different types o
298. l for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Connect the DL1720 DL1740 and a USB printer using a USB cable For details see the explanation page 10 8 Confirming the Type of Printer that is Connected To confirm the type of printer that is connected to the DL1720 DL1740 carry out the procedure below 2 Press MISC 3 Press the Next 1 2 soft key MISC ia a a alibrationRemote Cnti SCSI ID Network Bysten Cnfgj Pvervieu Next d 4 Press the USB List soft key to display the USB Device List Check the printer that is connected USB Device List Device Address Product Name Keyboard 2 Mitsumi USB Keyboard Printer 3 USB Printer iw MISC a A A a LCD raph Colo Setup Self Test USB List Next Info 272 10 6 IM 701710 01E 10 3 Outputting Screen Images to an USB Printer Selecting the Printer 5 Press SHIFT to activate shift mode Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 6 Press COPY 7 Press the Copy to soft key to display the output medium selection menu COPY Copy to Infornmat iona Comment Built in g OFF PN 8 Press the USB soft key to select USB Selecting the Type 9 Press the Format soft key to display the menu used to select the output command type Copy to Format Color a a Comment Select USB ESC P ON 10 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired command type COPY Copy to ESC P ESC P2 LIPS3 PCLS BJ USB Setting the Color
299. l Z Display ja MZ Setup Nz Label OFF PN Diff cc1 Mathi ON C3 C4 Mathz Waveforms to be Differentiated or Integrated CH1 to CH4 and Math1 waveforms or CH1 to CH2 waveform for the DL1720 can be differentiated or integrated Explanation Scaling Set the upper and lower limits on computations Auto The upper and lower limits are set according to the computed result Manual The upper and lower limits can be set arbitrarily The range is 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Unit Unit can be set arbitrarily using up to four characters The specified characters are reflected in the scale values Smoothing See section 9 10 Smoothing 9 44 IM 701710 01E 9 9 Displaying the Power Spectrum lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 25 gt Relevant Keys MENU __MENU X Y i setup pisPLaY Copy IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT SEARCH O TRIG D o 2 SIMPLE ENHANCED V DIV TIME DIV ACTION _ DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Turning ON OFF the Display 1 Press MATH 2 Press the M1 Display soft key and select ON to display Mathi and OFF to not display Math1 Math2 is not available on the DL1720 so these soft keys are not displayed Setting the Operator 3 Press the M1 Setup soft key to display the computation dialog box 4 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Operation Source Operation Source2 Sc
300. layed at the same time axis position e If displayed record length is less than number of screen display points the oscilloscope interpolates the data to generate the display See page section 1 4 Sampling Data Record Length of Acquisition Memory E Display Record Length E SA 7 7 ie E V O Van YTT Voltage Axis Time Axis m 500 Lines 0 500 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Changing the time axis causes corresponding changes in the sampling rate and the acquisition record length For more detailed information refer to Appendix 1 Relationship between Time Axis Setting and Sampling Mode The sampling method sampling mode for an input signal changes according to the time axis setting as described hereafter But note that the time axis range over which this feature is actually available will vary according to the maximum displayable record length as shown in Appendix 1 e Real Time Sampling Mode Changing the time axis causes a Corresponding change in the sampling rate The maximum sampling rate is 1 GS s or 500 MS s if interleave mode is OFF For details of interleave mode refer to section 7 5 The input signal is sampled sequentially and data is stored in the acquisition memory In this mode the waveform can only be displayed correctly at frequencies up to half the sample rate due to Nyquist s theorem Sample rate is expresse
301. lays the search method menu Type a a 21 Mag ff gt Z1 Pos f Searched Setup Pattern Exec Edge x2 6 960di4y No Match 4 Press the Edge soft key to select the search method SEARCH Edge Serial Width Parallel Puto Scroll gt Searched Pattern Pattern Pattern Exec o Match Setting the Search Condition 5 Pressing the Setup soft key displays the search condition setting dialog box Turn the jog shuttle to select the parameter Pressing SELECT displays a menu used to set the item or changes the selected item Setup Source C Hi Legi FB Settings for these items can be input directly Polarity using a USB keyboard Hysteresis 9 3div Count H Start Point 5 660di Type a Z1 Mag ff Z1 Pos J Searched Setup Pattern Exec Edge x2 666di4y No Match 8 18 IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function e Setting the Source 6 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel to be searched and press SELECT CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1720 Polarity Hysteresis Count Start Point Setting the Level 7 Turn the jog shuttle to set the level and press SELECT You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the level to 0 V Setting the Polarity 8 Press SELECT to select f or 4 Setting the Hysteresis 9 Turn the jog shuttle to set the hysteresis and press SELECT
302. lect whether or not the offset voltage is reflected in the results of cursor measurements automatic measurements or math computations e lf you change the probe attenuation the offset changes proportionally to reflect the new attenuation rate e Changing the voltage sensitivity does usually not affect the offset value Only if the change would cause the offset to go out of range the offset moves to the nearest range limit If you then return to the original sensitivity the offset returns to its original setting as well provided that you have not explicitly changed the value in the meantime SOXY e UOZIIOH pue eo1 10 5 6 The Preset Function Relevant Keys TRACE SNAP HELP O X Y MENU MENU setup oispLay Copy macE savE o sHrFr Al HGR SEARC a t o o A cn2 A SIMPLE ENHANCED 7 DIV TIME DIV Oo on3 ACTION DELAY E The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Selecting the Channel 1 Press PRESET 2 Press the Select soft key to display the channel menu PRESET Select Type Probe Exec All TTL 16 1 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired channel Pressing All will select all the channels CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1720 PRESET All CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Exec Selecting the Preset Type 4 Press the Type soft key to display the preset type selection menu PRESET Select Type Probe Exec All TTL 1
303. lecting the File to be Loaded 5 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file Selecting the Snapshot Waveform to be Loaded 6 Press the Destination soft key to display a menu used to select the snapshot waveform Path FDO File Name FDO 1 lt THEVOL 1 gt 2600 16 31 09 25 CHAPTO01 TIF 2000710731 18 13 CHAPTOOO TIF 2600 10 31 18 12 2600 16 31 18 69 9029 TIF 2600 16 31 18 68 628 TIF 2000710731 18 67 2606 16 31 18 64 2600 10 31 18 63 2600 16 31 18 62 2600 16 31 18 62 2600 10 31 18 01 2600 16 31 18 00 i v Destinationa Filter Property oad Exec Snap1 SNP f a Snap 7 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired snapshot waveform to make the selection Load FILE Snap1 Snap2 Snap3 Snap4 oad Exec Snap Loading the File 8 Press the Load Exec soft key to load the file from the directory indicated in Path ___ The name of the Load Exec soft key changes to Abort Load best inationa Filter Property oad Exec Snap1 SNP fe gt Snap lt 2 or 11 8 Saving Loading Snapshot Waveforms Canceling the Loading Operation 9 Press the Abort soft key to cancel the loading operation The name of the Abort soft key changes to Load Exec Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box Viewing the Properties The procedures are the same as steps 30 to 33 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Clearing the Waveform Explanation IM 701710 01E 4 Pr
304. left Insert mode Same as left Increment V Div Same as left E Increment V Div Same as left Cursor to the right Same as left Cursor to the left Same as left Select Soft key6 Same as left Select Soft key6 Same as left S a ee Page Up Increment T Div Same as left Delete Decrement V Div Same as left Decrement T Div Same as left Cursor to the right Same as left Cursor to the left Same as left Jogshuttle down Same as left Jogshuttle up Same as left SETUP menu Same as left Numeric key Num Lock x gt oS N 2 gt l ls e sameasien M START STOP Same as left s Same as left Return Enter Same as left Return Enter Select Same as left Decrement V Div START STOP Same as left CH1 menu Decrement V Div CH2 menu CH3 menu CH4 menu Jogshuttle down Jogshuttle down Decrement T Div Decrement T Div Cursor to the left a Cursor to the right Cursor to the left Cursor to the right Increment V Div 7 Increment V Div Jogshuttle up Jogshuttle up Increment T Div Increment T Div Insert mode DELETE DELETE prev char IM 701710 01E Index Symbols ers KOVO iien Ea O eee earn ence ae eee 2 5 TOVClS MOJE vatnet nerit 9 17 HOA keyboald a a a A E E E de toocesanaeraets 4 4 104 Keyboard US vissri iiei dranie nedar ad App 15 NOD Keyboald siira A ave R 4 4 109 Keyboard Japanese cccccccccessesseeteseeeteeesenes App 17 A A BN TIOE iacciieec veces cr
305. lity Setup 3 Press the Snap soft key FILE Setup Waveforn Snap Measure Image a Utility Saving Snapshot Waveforms Selecting the Destination Medium Directory The procedures are the same as steps 13 to 17 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Setting the File name Comment The procedures are the same as steps 18 to 27 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Saving the File 4 Press the Save Exec soft key to save the file to the directory indicated in Path ___ The name of the Save Exec soft key changes to Abort a File Name File List CHAPT FILE ave Exec Snap IM 701710 01E 11 21 WNIPs Helos y woz pue o e eq Hulpeo7 pue Bulnes 2 11 8 Saving Loading Snapshot Waveforms Canceling the Saving Operation 5 Press the Abort soft key to cancel the saving operation The name of the Abort soft key changes to Save Exec Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box Viewing the Properties The procedures are the same as steps 30 to 33 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Loading Snapshot Waveforms Follow steps 1 3 to select snapshot data waveforms 4 Pressing the Load soft key displays the load setting menu and the file list dialog box FILE File Item a PN a a Save Load Unload Utility Snap Selecting the Source Medium Directory The procedures are the same as steps 13 to 17 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Se
306. ller than the Mesial Value Wd Duty Duty Ratio Width Period x 100 Rise Rise Time s Fall Fall Time s Freq Period Period s Prod Avg Freq Mean Frequency in FR A Avg PR A Period Mean Period in Period lt Width Width Pulse Pulse Count PIsN When Pulse 3 Rise Fall Measuring Range s Mesurement Range Measuring Range Hz shows the corresponding neme at the measurement item setting screen High 100 ee T Seen eee Proximal Line 10 Low 0 Set the measurement range T Range to match the pulse width of the signal being measured Distal Line 90 Mesial Line 50 Proximal Line 10 9 15 SISAJEUY WUAOJOARM 9 2 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Burst1 Burst2 Burst Width Set the measurement range Bst1 Bst2 T Range to match the burst width of the signal being measured Bane eee N oe ameen nana nee oo fee fhe ep Distal Line 90 Bare ferred fn el Pal Peete rie E Car be ENA cr ct SEE ten Cees um ee Ud Oy Fs Eee Mesial Line 50 sera ake iat ae 9 acon cr ne NU ec fe A A ye AZ Proximal Line 10 Width Measurement Range T1 cursor T2 cursor e Other Measurement Parameters Inti TY The area under the positive amplitude Int2TY The area under the positive amplitude the area under the negative amplitude Int1XY The
307. ls or the selected channels at once V DIV Knob Section 5 8 Turning this Knob during acquisition i e while the START indicator is lit sets the voltage axis sensitivity Before turning this knob be sure to select the channel you want to adjust by pressing the corresponding channel key CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 HORIZONTAL Group TIME DIV TRIGGER Group O TRIG D oO Oo SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY IM 701710 01E TIME DIV Knob Section 5 11 Use this knob to set the time scale If you change the scale while acquisition is suspended the new value becomes effective when acquisition resumes SHIFT ZOOM Key Sections 8 9 8 10 Displays a menu related to the waveform zoom display Pressing the ZOOM key after pressing the SHIFT key displays a menu related to data searching Search and Zoom Function SHIFT MODE Key Sections 6 1 6 15 7 3 Displays a menu used to select the trigger mode Pressing the MODE key after pressing the SHIFT key displays a menu related to action on trigger SIMPLE Key Sections 6 4 to 6 7 Displays the menu for the simple trigger mode which provides normal triggers such as the edge trigger Simple trigger mode is selected when the indicator located above this key is lit ENHANCED Key Sections 6 4 6 8 to 6 14 Displays the menu for enhanced trigger mode which provides complex triggers such as the pattern trigger Enhanced trigger mode is selected wh
308. m 64 statuses is detected at the rising or falling edge of the channel that is specified as the clock channel or at a constant time interval The matched pattern is displayed expanded in the zoom window CH2 Status Pattern of CH2 L H L L H Lo eee H L L Specified Status Pattern L LC A L 4a H x L L a S Searches Sections of the Waveform with the Same Status up to 64 Patterns as the Specified Waveform Pattern Conditions Clock Channel CH1 Timing to Check the Status Rising Channel on which to Perform the Search CH2 The Section that is Detected is Expanded and Displayed in the Zoom Window Parallel Pattern Search Detects a section of the waveform where the status specified as High Low or Don t Care of each channel CH1 through CH4 Math1 and Math2 or CH1 CH2 and Math1 for the DL1720 is the same as the specified status The status is detected at the rising or falling edge of the channel that is specified as the clock channel If the clock channel is set to None detection is performed on the status of all waveforms CH1 through CH4 Math1 and Math2 or CH1 CH2 and Math1 for the DL1720 The detected section is displayed expanded in the zoom window e Search Example in which the Clock Channel is Set to None and H1 L CH2 L CH3 H and CH4 L L Low Level H High Level L Detects this Position and Displays the Waveform Expanded in the Zoom Window 1 The DL1720 is not equipped with channels 3 a
309. m Cnf ia Next 1 2 3 Press the LCD soft key to display the backlight ON OFF menu A a a LCD raph Colo Setup Self Test USB List Next Info 2 2 Setting Auto OFF 4 _ Press the Auto OFF soft key to select either ON or OFF Auto OFF Bright LCD OFF Exec PFF ON 5 If Auto OFF is turned ON press the Time soft key Using the jog shuttle set the time at which the backlight will automatically turn OFF LCD OFF Exec Setting the Brightness of the Backlight 6 Press the Brightness soft key Using the jog shuttle adjust the brightness of the backlight Turning ON OFF the Backlight 7 Press the LCD OFF Exec soft key to turn OFF the backlight MISC Auto OFF Bright LCD OFF ness Exec ON 4 Press any key to return to the measurement screen IM 701710 01E 14 5 suoljeiadC 198410 z 14 3 Turning OFF the Backlight and Setting the Brightness of the Backlight Explanation Turning ON OFF the backlight LCD OFF Turns ON OFF the LCD backlight If a key is pressed when the backlight is OFF the screen returns to the measurement screen Automatically Turning OFF the Backlight Auto OFF The backlight automatically turns OFF if there is no key operation for the specified time Brightness of the Backlight Brightness You can also change the brightness of the backlight The lifetime of the backlight can be prolonged by dimming the backlight or turning OFF the backlight when it is not necessary
310. m to produce a waveform This instrument uses a random sampling method which also enables observation of the waveform up to the trigger point Time Axis Setting and Roll Mode Display If the time axis is set within a certain range refer to Appendix 1 then the display will not be updated by trigger anymore update mode but the mode will switch to roll mode when new data is acquired In roll mode the oldest data is deleted and the waveform shifts from right to left on the screen A waveform can be observed in the same way as it is recorded ona pen recorder This mode is useful when you are observing a signal which repeats or which fluctuates slowly This mode is also useful when you want to detect glitches fast spikes on a waveform which occur intermittently Rolling display also operates during single start acquisition although trigger occurrence causes the waveform to stop suonoun 1 3 Setting a Trigger Trigger Type lt Chapter 6 gt There are two principal trigger types which you can use with the instrument Simple trigger Enhanced trigger Simple Trigger Sections 6 5 to 6 7 This is an edge trigger and the one which is used normally Enhanced Trigger Sections 6 8 to 6 14 This is a complex trigger The following seven types of enhanced trigger are available A gt B N trigger A Delay B trigger Pattern trigger Width trigger OR Trigger Window trigger TV trigger Edge Tri
311. mV when using 700939 Test Condition When using 700988 500 MS s envelope mode 20 MHz BWL input coupling 1 MW 20 mV div probe attenuation setting 10 1 terminate the probe at 50 MW When using 700939 500 MS s envelope mode 20 MHz BWL input coupling 50 MW 100 mV div probe attenuation setting 10 1 terminate the probe at 50 MW Attach a ferrite core TDK ZCAT2035 0930A YOKOGAWA A1190MN to each end of the signal cable e Cable Requirement 1 Overvoltage category Installation category the regulation for impulse withstand voltage like distribution board Same requirement as above for emission describes a number which defines a transient overvoltage condition It implies Il applies to electrical equipment which is supplied from the fixed installation 2 Pollution degree describes the degree to which a solid liquid or gas which deteriorates dielectric strength or surface resistivity is adhering 2 applies to normal indoor atmosphere Normally only non conductive pollution occurs 3 The cable length is less than 3 m IM 701710 01E 16 11 3 suoljeoyioeds 16 12 External Dimensions Dimensions mm Rear View qp 2 N D 7 he eee ee OLU EON I f 4 LT Unless othewise spcified tolerance is 3 Tolerance is always 0 3 mm when the dimension is under 10 mm 16 12 IM 701710 01E Appendix Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Se
312. ment of Waveform Parameters Measurement Parameters Items You can select among the 26 types of measurement parameters shown below and delay between channels Up to 24000 combinations of parameters of all traces CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math2 or CH1 CH2 and Math1 for the DL1720 can be saved The parameters that can be displayed are as follows Auto Measurement Mode ON Statistics Displayed Parameters Up to 12 parameters from all traces The parameters of channels having smaller channel numbers have precedence The parameters that appear higher in the parameter setting menu have precedence Up to 2 parameters from all traces Displays statistical data Channels having smaller channel numbers have precedence Voltage Axis Parameters P P Peak to Peak Value MAX MIN V Oshot Undershoot Value Max Maximum Voltage V pei a so ie LOW x 100 aa eee Oshot Overshoot Value Min Minimum Voltage V 4Ovry MAX HIGH HIGH LOW x 100 Rms Root Mean Square Value High High Level Voltage V 11 7 2 xi 2 1 2 v Low Low Level Voltage V Avg Average Voltage 1 n xi V Sdev Standard Deviation SDv 1 n xi2 xi 2 n 1 2 Oshot shows the corresponding name at the measurement item setting screen Oshot High Time Axis Parameters aen Low A Width s Greater than the Mesial Value Wd Frequency Hz 1 PERIOD Width Width s Sma
313. ments etc When the soft keyboard is displayed on the screen you can enter the file name comment and so on using a USB keyboard The character that is entered through each key of the keyboard varies depending on the keyboard type For details see appendix 5 Executing Functions Corresponding to the Keys on the Front Panel of the DL1720 DL1740 The functions corresponding to the keys on the front panel of the DL1720 DL1740 are assigned to the keys on the USB keyboard By pressing the keys on the keyboard you can operate the DL1720 DL1 740 in a similar fashion The assignment of functions varies depending on the keyboard type For details see appendix 5 Entering Numerical Values Using a USB Keyboard This function is available on products with firmware version 1 30 or later Numerical values for menu items preceded by the is or tf symbol can be input directly using a USB keyboard Display Position J Coupling Probe Offset J Bandwidth OFF PN 0 0 div DC1M2 16 1 6 6m Full Press the corresponding soft key enter the values with the USB keyboard then press the Enter key The entered values are displayed in the upper part of the screen e inputting a Units Prefix If unit prefixes are displayed such as m for Offset in the example above you can input the character for the prefix as well as the numerical value using the USB keyboard Prefixes can be entered for units of voltage V and time s Also the prefixes that can be used a
314. menu HISTORY fe Select Display figStart Rega earch Modga Record Cs Show Map Search Search 0 All 6 End Rec Zone Setup Exec 5 Press the Select Zone soft key to display the search condition selection menu Select Zong Condition Source fe Upper fe 6 56div zonei OFF IN OUT CH1 fe Lower 0 50div Search Setting the Search Conditions Condition 7 Press the Condition soft key several times to select OFF IN or OUT Selecting IN or OUT displays a search window in the area displaying the Source channel Search Belect Zong Condition Source Upper 6 50div Zonei OFF IN OUT CH1 B Lower 0 50div IM 701710 01E 7 13 Aejdsig pue uonisinboy 7 8 Searching the Historical Data Using Zone History Search Function Setting the Source Channel Source 8 Pressing the Source soft key displays the source channel selection menu 9 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired channel to select the source channel The CH3 CH4 and Math2 soft keys are not displayed on the DL1720 search HISTORY CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mathi Math2 Search Exec 50div 2 506di Setting the Search Window 10 Press the Upper Lower soft key search P z s0odi 11 Turn the jog shuttle to set the top of the search range You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the value to the default value 12 Press the Upper Lower soft key 13 Turn the jog shuttle to set the en
315. mode Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 2 Press ZOOM Selecting the Search Method Type 3 Pressing the Type soft key displays the search method menu SEARCH Type a 21 Mag e Z1 Pos Searched Setup Pattern Exec Edge xX 2 6 666di4 No Match 4 Press the Serial Pattern soft key to select the search method SEARCH Edge Serial Width Parallel Puto Scroll gt Searched Pattern Pattern Pattern Exec o Match Setting the Search Conditions 5 Pressing the Setup soft key displays the search condition setting dialog box Turn the jog shuttle to select the parameter Pressing SELECT displays a menu used to set the item or changes the selected item SEARCH Type fa Zi Nag 6 Z1 Pos Searched Setup Pattern Exec Serial x2 0 000div No Match Pattern Setup Clock CH Interval Ee Settings for these items can be input directly using a USB keyboard Source CH1 Thr Upper 0 000 U Thr Lower 0 000 V Pattern B C D 9 8 16 24 HXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX 32 40 48 56 63 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX Clear Pattern Start Point 5 000div SEARCH Type Pos fE Searched s Pattern Pattern Exec E e Setting the Clock CH 6 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the clock channel and press SELECT If you selected CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 go to step 7 If you selected None go to step 10 Clock CH Interval So
316. mote Cnti SCSI ID Netuork Pystem Cnf ia Next 1 2 3 When Ether Yse C7 appears for the Option item in the overview screen this indicates that the Ethernet interface is installed The number on the right side is the MAC address in the example MAC 000064 824 052 System Overview Mode 1 701710 Record Length Max1MW S506kW CH Option Printer Yes B5 Fdd Zip Zip J2 RS232 SCSI Yes C Ether Yes C10 MAC 000064_824_052 Default Language JPN Soft Version 1 36 ROM Sum 86B4H Linkage Date 61707716 Mon 14 45 Note e Ether Yes C7 is only displayed if the Ethernet interface option is installed If XXXXXX_XXX_XXX is displayed for your MAC address contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Explanation Check the MAC address and whether the Ethernet interface optional is installed The Presence of the Ethernet Interface Option The presence of the Ethernet interface is displayed under Ethernet in the Information window e If Yes is displayed the Ethernet interface is installed e If No is displayed the Ethernet interface is not installed MAC Address The MAC address is a unique address that has already been set on the instrument and is necessary for transmission between nodes IM 701710 01E 13 23 uodo ddej19 U JOUIBUIA 3 13 10 Setting the FTP Passive Mode and LPR SMTP Timeout Relevant Keys SEARCH O TRIG D SIMPLE ENHANCED V DIV TIME DIV ACTION DELAY The DL1
317. n 20 mV div 2 0 mV to 50 0 mV 0 2 mV 50 mV div 5 0 mV to 100 0 mV 0 5 mV 100 mV div 10 mV to 200 mV 1 mV 200 mV div 20 mV to 500 mV 2 mV 500 mV div 50 mV to 1000 mV 5 mV 1 V div 0 10 V to 2 00 V 0 01 V 2 V div 0 20 V to 5 00 V 0 02 V 5 V div 0 50 V to 10 00 V 0 05 V 10 V div 1 0 V to 20 0 V 0 1 V 20 V div 2 0 V to 50 0 V 0 2 V 50 V div 5 0 V to 100 0 V 0 5 V 100 V div 10 V to 200 V 1V times respectively IM 701710 01E 5 9 Using the Linear Scaling Function Relevant Keys Operating Procedure 1 IM 701710 01E lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 21 gt 0 oO a Mee Jeane ee 200 someon aca stanr sroP E O OO HELP a O TRIG D sme ENHANCED TIME DIV ACTION DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Press one of the keys from CH 1 to CH 4 or CH 1 to CH 2 for the DL1720 to select the channel Press the Next 1 2 soft key Variable inear Sci AX B 50 0 V OFF H Turn the jog shuttle to set the value of A You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits In a similar fashion set the value B If necessary press the Unit soft key to display the keyboard and enter the unit Linear scaling is not available for the following waveforms Snapshot waveforms Accumulated waveforms except for newest waveform You can set linear scaling separately for each channel The A and B values remain in memory after
318. n is installed 16 6 IM 701710 01E 16 6 Built in Printer Option Item Specifications Printing System Thermal line dot method Dot Density 8 dots mm Paper Width 112 mm 16 7 Storage Built in Storage e Floppy Disk Drive Item Specifications No of Drives 1 Drive Size 3 5 inch Capacity 720 KB 1 44 MB e Zip Drive Item Specifications No of Drives 1 Capacity 100 MB 250 MB External Storage Interface e SCSI Option Item Specifications Standard SCSI Small Computer System Interface ANSI X3 131 1986 Connector Half pitch 50 pin Connector Pin Assignments Unbalanced single end 16 8 Keyboard and Printer Interface Item Specification Connector Type Type A connector receptacle Electrical and Mechanical Conforms to USB Rev 1 0 Specifications Supported Keyboards 104 keyboard US and 109 keyboard Japanese that conform to USB HID Class Ver 1 1 Supported Printers ESC P ESC P2 LIPS3 PCL5 and BJ can be used on models that support the BUC 35V native commands that support USB USB Printer Class Ver 1 0 Power Supply 5 V 500 mA per port Number of Ports 2 IM 701710 01E 16 7 3 suol eoyioeds 16 9 Auxiliary Input Output Section External Trigger Input Trigger Gate input Item Specifications Connector Type BNC Input Bandwidth External Trigger Input DC to 100 MHz Trigger Gate input DC to 50 MHz Input Impedance Approx 1 MQ 18 pF or Approx 1 MQ 20 pF for the DL1720 Maximum Input V
319. n Levely us OR Coupling OFF DN 0 08 Setting the Hold Off 9 Set the hold off time according to the procedures given in 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 6 12 Setting the OR Trigger This function activates a trigger on the OR of each channel s edge trigger Setting the Edge Trigger of Each Channel Select from the following f Rising 4 Falling Don tcare Setting the Trigger Level Range 8 div within the screen Resolution 0 01 div For example the resolution is 0 02 mV when the V DIV setting is 2 mV div Setting the Hysteresis Sets a width to the trigger level so that the trigger is not activated on small changes A Approximately 0 3 div of hysteresis around the trigger level ZZ Approximately 1 div of hysteresis around the trigger level The value above are estimated values They are not strictly guaranteed Setting the Trigger Coupling Select from the following list of choices AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from the trigger source signal as the trigger signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as the trigger signal Turning ON OFF the HF Rejection Select 15 KHz or 20 MHz when you wish to use a signal source that is obtained by removing the high frequency components frequency components greater than or equal to approximately 15 kHz or 20 MHz from the trigger signal as the trigger source Setting the Hold
320. n a similar fashion If the jog shuttle control is set to both Cursor1 and Cursor2 both cursors are moved Moving the Reference Cursor 9 Press the Ref1 Ref2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Ref1 10 Turn the jog shuttle to move Ref1 11 Move Ref2 in a similar fashion If the jog shuttle control is set to both Refi and Ref2 both cursors are moved Setting the Reference Angle 12 Press the Ref Value soft key 13 Turn the jog shuttle to set the reference angle 9 4 IM 701710 01E Cursor Jump for V Cursor Marker Cursor and Angle Cursor Only when Not Displaying the X Y Waveform Follow stteps 1 3 to set the Type to Vertical Marker or Degree 4 9 6 IM 701710 01E 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using Pressing the Cursor Jump soft key displays a menu used to select the cursor you wish to jump and the jump destination CURSOR Type Trace i Cursori ursor Jum 4 000 d i ump Exec Vertical CH1 fq Cursorz Ci to Z1 4 000di CURSOR Type Select Trace fg Pos x ursor Jum ump Exec Marker M2 M3 M CH1 3 100di to Z1 CURSOR Type Trace i Cursoriff Refi fRef Valuecursor Jum 4 000diy 2 000di ump Exec Degree CH1 6 Cursor2 Ref2 360 C1 to Z1 4 000di 2 000di Press the soft key corresponding to the desired jump type and select the cursor to jump and the jump destination Type Trace f Cursor1 1 to Z1 C1 to 22 C2 to Zi C2 to 22 4 000di Vertical CH1 f6 Cursor2 4 606di
321. n in 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Note e The status setting of conditions A and B applies to all trigger types e The trigger level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection settings apply to simple trigger and enhanced trigger 6 15 Bbunaebbi yp gt 6 8 Setting the A B N Trigger ENHANCED Explanation 6 16 This function activates a trigger on the nth time condition B becomes true after condition A becomes true Setting Conditions A and B e Channel Status Select the status of the channel from the following three choices H Above the specified trigger level L Below the specified trigger level X Don t care e Condition Select from the following two conditions Enter Trigger is activated when all channels meet the specified status Exit Trigger is activated when at least one channel no longer meets the specified Status The Number of Times Pattern B is to be Met 1 to 108 times Setting the Trigger Level Range 8 div within the screen Resolution 0 01 div For example the resolution is 0 02 mV when the V DIV setting is 2 mV div Setting the Hysteresis Sets a width to the trigger level so that the trigger is not activated on small changes A Approximately 0 3 div of hysteresis around the trigger level ZZ Approximately 1 div of hysteresis around the trigger level The value above are estimated values They are not strictly guaranteed Setting the Trigger Coupling Select from the follow
322. n screen 8 div and the resolution is 0 01 div Pattern Choose from the following f Check the pattern when the waveform changes from above to below the specified level Checks the pattern when the waveform changes from below to above the specified level Hysteresis Set the hysteresis The range for the setting is 0 3 to 4 div Channels Other than Clock Channels Pattern Set using the H L or X Don t Care symbols H When the value is greater than the level L When the value is less than the level X Do not determine Level Set the levels to determine H and L Hysteresis Set the hysteresis The range for this setting is 0 3 div to 4 div IM 701710 01E 8 29 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function e When the Type is Pulse Width Type Select the relationship between the specified time and the measured waveform Pulse lt T Detects a section of the waveform whose pulse width Pulse is shorter than the specified time T Pulse gt T Detects a section of the waveform whose pulse width Pulse is longer than the specified time T T1 lt PLS lt T2 Detects a section of the waveform whose pulse width Pulse is within the specified times T1 to T2 Timeout Detects a section of the waveform whose pulse width Pulse exceeds the specified time T The displayed position in the zoom display differs from the Pulse gt T case Source Select the source channel for the search You can also select Math1 and Ma
323. n the waveform using Main amp Z1 amp Z2 per 10 time axis divisions These areas are referred to as interpolation areas Three settings are available Line Interpolation Interpolates between two dots using a straight line Sine Interpolation Generates interpolation data using the function then interpolates between two dots using resulting sine curve Sine interpolation is suitable for observation of sine waves Pulse Interpolation Interpolates between two dots using a step No Interpolation Displays measurements as discrete dots without interpolation IM 701710 01E 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions X Y Waveform Display lt Section 8 8 gt This feature plots the voltage values of one input waveform on the X axis against the voltage values of the others on the Y axis which have their display turned ON The X Y plot lets you view the relationship between the signal voltages The X Y waveforms and normal waveforms a waveform displayed using voltage and time axes can be displayed simultaneously Use of this X Y waveform display function enables measurement of the phase angle between two sine wave signals For example two X Y sine waveforms are displayed to obtain an X Y waveform called a Lissajous waveform from which the phase angle can be obtained Lissajous Waveform Frequency Ratio Expanded Waveform lt Section 8 9 gt Waveforms can be expanded in the
324. naene verdes ey cereeweincchcares 1 11 6 2 SMOORING vrii E 9 48 SMTP Client Function sesseeesseeerseeccrrreerrrrrerrreesrrreesrrese 1 30 SMIP TIMEOUT eoi n a a neonates 13 25 SNAP SHOFE KOY orase E 2 5 SMADSHNOL sn ennaii 1 32 4 13 11 21 DOU KEV S a a E E 2 5 SPECIFICATIONS sccdevauvesce ieayeviadenataveiee nana eni i Standard ACCESSOM OSes ists cascau nape de ieaie iaer ili START STOP Wey hes erene tas EESK 2 5 Statistical Processing cccccceesesseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeas 1 22 9 18 Statistical Processing for Each Period 1 23 9 23 Statistical Processing of Historical Data 1 23 9 23 Status Messages siscsaxdvensdessvisistaisiavesteaissdevsadexdeeonsnaa 15 2 Storage erana E 16 7 Storage Medium a wcdewacisAsesvsisen sie rnrn nennen nnen 10 10 Storage Medium Saves and Loads cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 33 SIONN eeno 1 31 4 10 STP shielded twisted pair Cable ccccccssesseeeeeeeeees 13 1 SUIS CIMA Ke ia coesic lsat ea a a a E 13 5 SUDAC a e a a 9 32 SUDAC O n a a a 1 24 UF A E EE EEEE AE E E EET ii System Configuration ccecececececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 1 1 System Operation Errors ccccccccccccccceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 15 6 T EE EEA EAAS E S AEAT A AE A ANEA 5 17 TORA P n a A E N 13 3 Threshold LCV Clos rites tide tot cettiobotiet a oboe ees 9 38 12 2 Threshold SCAG is ctetadscenceetetindedtacieel etd eons 5 15 PMID WAL sopis e
325. nd 4 1 27 suopuny 1 5 Analyzing the Waveform e Example in which the clock channel is set to CH1 and CH1 rising CH2 L CH3 H and CH4 L CH1 L Low Level H High Level L Detects this Position andDisplays the WaveformExpanded in the Zom Window 1 The DL1720 is not equipped with channels 3 and 4 Pulse Width Search From the search start position search for a portion of the waveform containing a pulse which is longer or shorter than a previously defined length of time Expand the retrieved portion of the waveform per the zooming factor and display it in the waveform zoom display window PUR PK Ballet PLR iT Pet pa Cari Loi id Paces I a eee es Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 Time Out V Zoom Screen Center Position Y Starting Point for Next Search Pulse The Length of Time a Specified Condition is Fulfilled T A Specified Length of Time Auto Scroll The zoom box scrolls automatically in a designated direction You can stop the zoom box while checking zoomed waveforms 1 28 IM 701710 01E 1 6 Communications Ethernet Interface Option IM 701710 01E lt Chapter 13 and Communication Interface User s Manual IM701710 17E gt Saving to a Network Drive FTP Client Function Sections 13 3 13 4 You can save delete and copy waveform data screen image data and setting information onto the hard drives of devices on the network such as a PC or workstation running the FTP server fun
326. nd Math2 can be computed simultaneously DL1720 Math1 CH1 CH1 or CH2 CH2 CH1 or CH2 Computed Waveform Computed Waveform Scaling Set the upper and lower limits on computations Auto The upper and lower limits are set according to the computed result Manual The upper and lower limits can be set arbitrarily The range is 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 9 5 Adding Subtracting and Multiplying Waveforms Unit Unit can be set arbitrarily using up to four characters The specified characters are reflected in the scale values Smoothing See section 9 10 Smoothing About Linear Scaling When performing computation on a channel that has linear scaling set the computation is performed on the scaled value 9 35 SISAJEUY WAOJOARM 9 6 Binary Computation lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 24 gt Relevant Keys CLEAR SNAP HELP Oo i LNW Crue mse aono d marn AS ACQ START STOP MENU __MENU X Y 2 Cserup pispLav Cory mace savE jo sHrrr SEARCH O TRIG D cn2 SIMPLE ENHANCED o V DIV TIME DIV o ACTION DELAY eo The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Turning the Display ON OFF 1 Press MATH 2 Press the M1 Display soft key and select ON to display Math1 and OF
327. nd select ON to display Math1 and OFF to not display Math1 Math2 is not available on the DL1720 so these soft keys are not displayed Setting the Operator 3 Press the M1 Setup soft key to display the computation dialog box Source1 Operation Source Scale putoj Manua 1 Upper 4 0000E 00_ Lover 4 G00GE 66 Unit EU Smoothing M1 DisplayaM1 Setup M1 Label Source1 Operation Source2 Scale Upper Lower Invert Unit Diff Smoothing Integ PS Pass Thru MATH a2 Setup M2 Label C3 C4 Math2 M1 Displayani Setup M1 Label ON C1 C2 9 48 IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 9 10 Smoothing Note lf an operator other than Through is selected the computation is performed on the smoothed value Smoothing 4 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Smoothing 5 Press SELECT to select ON Operation Source CH1 Scale puto Manual Upper Louer unit gt Smoothing _OFF___DN _ The moving average is determined every five data samples and the waveform is displayed based on the results Since this process is performed on the data stored in the acquisition memory it can be executed even when the waveform acquisition is stopped This smoothing process has the following frequency characteristics with respect to the sample rate The 3dB point is at approximately 13 of the sample rate 0 dB 3dB Attenuation f Sampl
328. ned OFF the conditions same as the A gt B N trigger See section 6 8 Same as the window trigger when the window is ON IN OUT X For details regarding the window trigger see section 6 13 Setting the Window Trigger Pulse Width 1nsto1s Precautions to be Taken when Setting the Width Trigger The trigger may not operate properly if the time between two pulses is less than 2 ns or if the pulse width is less than 2 ns The time accuracy of the pulse width in the standard operating condition after calibration is 0 5 of the setting 1 ns When set to T1 lt PLS lt T2 the value of T2 Correlation with the Window Trigger When the Window is turned ON a trigger is activated based on the time period during which the parallel pattern of the window condition of each channel is met or not met 6 27 Bunebb1 1 gt 6 11 Setting the Width Pulse lt T Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 Time Out Trigger ENHANCED 6 28 Setting the Trigger Level Range 8 div within the screen Resolution 0 01 div For example the resolution is 0 02 mV when the V DIV setting is 2 mV div Setting the Hysteresis Sets a width to the trigger level so that the trigger is not activated on small changes A Approximately 0 3 div of hysteresis around the trigger level ZZ Approximately 1 div of hysteresis around the trigger level The value above are estimated values They are not strictly guaranteed Setting the Trigger Coupling
329. ng system ENHANCED 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired broadcasting system to select NTSC or PAL ENHANCED rane Skip i 2 4 8 Selecting the Polarity 6 Press the Polarity soft key to select the polarity ENHANCED Type TV Type Polarity fi Level Field 6 Line rane Skip TU NTSC Pos O Sdiv fi 2 x 5 248 IM 701710 01E 6 35 Bbunebbi yp gt 6 14 Setting the TV Trigger ENHANCED Explanation 6 36 Setting the Trigger Level 7 Ifthe jog shuttle control is not set to Level press the Level soft key 8 Turn the jog shuttle to set the trigger level You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET sets the trigger level to 0 5 div Selecting the Field Number 9 Press the Field soft key to select the number Selecting the Line Number 10 If the jog shuttle control is not set to Line press the Line soft key ENHANCED Type TV Type Polarity e Level Field ff Line rame Skip TU NTSC Pos O Sdiv Jf 2 x 5 248 11 Turn the jog shuttle to set the line You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET sets the line No to 5 NTSC or 2 PAL Selecting Frame Skip 12 Press the Frame Skip soft key repeatedly to select the frame skip This function lets you set a trigger for video signal input into Channel 1 Settings and functions are as follows Broadcasting Systems with which the TV Trigger can be Used NTSC PAL Selecting the field N
330. ng after shifting the phase the shift on the screen does not change but the specified time value change in accordance with the T div setting 9 50 IM 701710 01E 9 12 GO NO GO Determination Using the Measurement of Waveform Parameters Relevant Keys Operating Procedure IM 701710 01E lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 32 gt O TRIG D SIMPLE ENHANCED TIME DIV ACTION DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Setting the Mode 1 2 3 Press GO NO GO Pressing the Mode soft key displays a menu used to set the GO NO GO determination mode GO NO GO Mode Press the Parameter soft key to set the GO NO GO determination mode GO NO GO OFF zone Paraneter Setting Param1 4 2 Pressing the Setup soft key displays the determination criteria menu GO NO GO Mode a la T Range1 Setup 5 000di Exec Parameter ST Range2 5 600di Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Mode under Param1 Parani Paran2 Paran3 Paran4 Mode DFF __ON__ DFF __ON__ DFF __ON__ DFF __ON Trace CH1 CH1 CH1 CH1 Iten Maxi ns vg upper CR O KT Lover XXX XXX XXX XXX Condition DUN __IN__ pUT __IN__ pUT __IN__ pUT __IN Logic M OR Settings for the following items can Sequence Single _ Continue be input directly using a USB ACQ Count i keyboard i Action o Buzzer 0 Save to File o Hard C
331. ng data from a file Loaded waveforms are cleared only if Unload Initialize or Auto Setup is executed or the data acquisition conditions are changed When the total number of files and directories in one directory exceeds 2400 the file list will no longer be displayed This function can not be used in conjunction with FTP server function or LPR client function Waveform wvf and header hdr files are saved as file pairs If you set the filter of the files displayed in the file list to then process Delete Rename Copy each file individually the files become unloadable Data Format when Storing Multiple Records When multiple records are stored history memory for example the following data format is used ASCII Format CR LF is inserted between records lt Header gt Measured data 1 1 of CH1 Measured data 1 1 of CH2 Measured data 1 1 of CH3 e e CR LF Measured data 1 2 of CH1 Measured data 1 2 of CH2 Measured data 1 2 of CH3 e e e CR LF Record 1 Measured data 1 m of CH1 Measured data 1 m of CH2 Measured data 1 m of CH3 CR LF CR LF Measured data 2 1 of CH1 Measured data 2 1 of CH2 Measured data 2 1 of CH3 ee CR LF Measured data 2 2 of CH1 Measured data 2 2 of CH2 Measured data 2 2 of CH3 CR LF Record 2 Measured data 2 n of CH1 Measured data 2 n of CH1 Measured data 2 n of CH1 e e e CR LF CR LF Float Format Stored in blocks of channels
332. ngel1 3 000di ST Rangez 3 000di Show Result Next 172 Item Setup Delay Measure Setup Exec 10 Press the Show Result soft key to list the automatic measurement results Use the arrow keys to scroll the list horizontally and the jog shuttle to scroll it vertically Press the Max Min Item1 Max Min Item4 soft keys to move the cursor to the maximum and minimum values of each parameter From the left side of the displayed parameter is Item1 Item2 Item3 and Item4 Press SELECT to list the history waveform indicated by the cursor 2000 10 31 12 04 06 1ok Normal S Measure Parameter List 19 1 P P C1 Max C1 Min C1 Avg C1 pe Udiv Full 4 1 68333U 4 41940my 1 08333 4 39857mU 1 08333 4 41246nV 1 08333 4 54091m 1 08333V 4 36733m 1 08333V 4 55132m 4 45065M 4 65200mV 4 28401mV 4 65547my 4 34650my 4 70408nU 4 26318m 4 58257Mm 4 31178m 4 41593m 4 49231m 4 39857mU 4 65547my 2 18750U 2 18750V 2 18750V 2 18750V 2 18750V 2 18750V 2 18750V 2 18750U 2 18750U 2 18750U 2 18750U 2 18756V 1 10417U 1 10417U 1 10417U 1 10417U 1 10417U 1 10417V 1 10417V 1 10417U 1 10417U 1 10417U 1 10417U 1 10417U 1 10417U T 1 08333U 1 10417V 1 10417U 1 10417V 1 10417U 1 10417U 1 08333 1 08333 1 08333 1 08333 1 08333 1 08333 1 08333 1 08333 1 08333 1 08333 1 08333 1 08333 t 1
333. ngth and sample rate settings Setting the Acquisition Count 4 Press the Count soft key This is not available when the trigger mode is Single or Single N ACQ Record Mode fe Count Inter leave Repetitive Time Base Length 10k Norma 1 Inf inite ON ON Ext 5 Turn the jog shuttle to set the acquisition count You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits In addition pressing RESET sets the count to Infinite When the acquisition mode is Average and you have selected Infinite go to step 6 Setting the Attenuation When the Acquisition Mode is Average and the Count is Set to Infinite 6 Press the Weight soft key AC Mode Count Weight interleave Repetitive Time Base Average Infinite ON ON Ext 7 Turn the jog shuttle to set the attenuation 7 2 IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 7 2 Acquisition Mode You can select any of five acquisition modes as follows The default selection is Normal Normal The instrument writes sample data into acquisition memory without performing special processing Envelope The instrument finds the maximum and minimum sampled values per interval of 400 MS s 1 GS s or 800 MS s interleave mode ON It then writes these values into acquisition memory and generates an envelope waveform showing max min levels for each point e Setting Restriction This mode can be selected in normal mode when the time axis is 200 MS s or lower 500
334. nt 38 Press SELECT to display the waveform acquisition count setting menu 39 Use the jog shuttle to set the waveform acquisition count then press SELECT Selecting the Action for Condition not Met 40 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Action 41 Press SELECT to turn action ON or OFF Setting the Determination Range 42 Press the T Range1 T Range2 soft key to highlight the T Range1 jog shuttle icon 43 Use the jog shuttle to set the head of the determination range 44 Inthe same manner set the tail of the range to T Range2 Executing Determination 45 Press the Exec soft key to execute the determination The Exec changes to the Abort soft key When the determination is completed acquisition automatically stops You can force a stop by pressing START STOP or the Abort soft key Create zones using a standard waveform as a base and from those zones let GO NO GO be determined by whether a waveform extends outside or inside of the zone Waveform for GO NO GO Determination Determination criteria Setup You can select a waveform from input signals CH1 CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 and from math waveforms Math1 Math2 or Math1 only for the DL1720 You can use multiple waveforms for GO NO GO determination Select from the following determination standards for each waveform IN When the specified waveform enters the zone OUT When the specified waveform is outside the zone OFF Do not determine Selecting the R
335. o Auto Cal Deskeu Target CH f ToS ia Exec Time OFF pN OFF pN 0 00ns 6 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired channel to select the channel CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1720 Auto Cal al Exec OFF DN Turn the jog shuttle to set the Deskew Time Press the Cal Exec soft key to start calibration alibratio o N se Auto Cal Deskeu Target CH f Sea ia Exec Time OFF pN OFF pN 0 00ns 4 14 IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 4 7 Calibration Calibration The following parameters can be calibrated Perform calibration when highly accurate measurements are required e Ground level offset e A D converter gain e Trigger threshold e Time axis for repetitive sampling mode e The oscillation frequency of the startup oscillator for the pulse width trigger Points for Attention e Always allow the instrument to warm up for at least 30 minutes after the power is turned ON before starting calibration If calibration is performed immediately after the power is turned ON the calibration may be inaccurate due to drift caused by fluctuation in the temperature of the instrument e Calibration must be performed when the temperature of the instrument is stable and is between 5 C and 40 C preferably at 23 C 2 C e When performing calibration remove the input signals Otherwise proper calibration may not result Note e The above calibration is performed automatically when power is tu
336. o Field 1 Detects a field in which the vertical synchronizing pulse and the line start at the same time 2 Detects a field in which the vertical synchronizing pulse starts 1 2H H horizontal scan time after the line starts X Detects both of the above types of field IM 701710 01E 6 14 Setting the TV Trigger ENHANCED Selecting the Line No Line A trigger is activated at the beginning of the selected line e NTSC 5 to 1054 Field 1 starts at line No 5 Field 2 starts at line No 268 Line Nos in cannot be set Bost Mimun tt layle la lalstelztslo lrolitl12l131141 151161471181 19 20 21 22 524525 526 1049 1050 1051 gt 1054 Line No Filed 2 Line No gt 26 esclesslesalessieceiz67i26sie69270027 tle7ale7sle7ale7sie7ele77le78le7slee0 28 112821283284285 nn e PAL 2 to 1251 Field 1 starts at line No 2 Field 2 starts at line No 315 Line Nos in cannot be set Filed 1 IA li 2 3 alte cai Ui eee ee se age Line No 621 622 623 624 625 626 gt 632 1246 gt 1250 1251 Filed 2 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 Line No gt 993 m i a a E a G5 Selecting the Polarity Polarity Pos Polarity Neg Trigger Level y A Trigger Level_ a Trigger Point A Synchronization Pulse Setting the Trigger Level Level Set the difference between the beginning of the syn
337. o display the menu used to select the coupling Display fgPosition J Coupling Probe fq Offset J Bandwidth OFF PN 0 0 div ICMR 16 1 0 0 U Full Press the soft key corresponding to the desired coupling Display ff acing DC1Me DC5e2 Bandwidth ii OFF pN Full K If DC 50 Q is selected a confirmation menu is displayed Press the Set to DC 50 Q or Cancel soft key CH1 pA Cancel IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E Attenuation 5 3 Selecting Input Coupling Input Coupling The following three types of input coupling are available AC 1 MQ Acquires and displays only the AC content of the input signal DC 1M Acquires and displays both the DC and the AC content of the input signal 1 MQ DC 50 Q Acquires and displays both the DC and the AC content of the input signal 50 Q GND Checks the ground level Input Coupling and Frequency Characteristic The frequency characteristic when AC or DC is selected is shown below Note that low frequency signals and low frequency contents are not acquired if AC 1 MQ is selected When AC is selected When DC 50 Q is selected Attenuation 0 dB 0 dB 3 dB 400 MHz 500 MHz 400 MHz Input Frequency Input Frequency Less than 10 Hz when using 1 1 probe DC 1 MQ Less than 1 Hz when using 10 1 probe CAUTION The maximum input voltage when the frequency is less than or equal to 1 kHz is 400 V DC ACpeak when us
338. o move the cursor to the parameter you wish to turn ON You can turn OFF all parameters at once by selecting All Clear You can copy the current parameter settings to all traces by selecting Copy to All Trace Press SELECT to select ON IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 8 9 3 Statistical Processing Repeat steps 5 to 7 as necessary The setting of other parameters is the same as that of normal automated measurements See section 9 2 Statistical Processing by Period 1 2 Press MEASURE Press the Mode soft key to display the automatic measurement mode selection menu MEASURE Mode a a Cycle Mod f T Rangei Item Delay 5 000di Next OFF Setup Setup ON f T Range2 d 5 000di Press the Cycle Statistics soft key to select the statistical processing by period MEASURE tatistics Cycle History T Range1 tatistics Btatistics 5 000di Next T Rangez 1 2 5 600di Press the Item Setup soft key to display the measuring item dialog box and the measurement source channel selection menu MEASURE Mode a ycle Tracga la T Range1 Item Show Measure 5 000di Next Cycle Setup CH1 Result Exec fST Rangez 1 2 tatistics 5 660di Press the soft key corresponding to the desired measurement source channel to select it The CH3 CH4 and Math2 soft keys are not displayed on the DL1720 0 P P 0 Freg 0 AvgFreg 0 Max 0 Period 0 AvgPer iod c Min Rise IntiTy 0 Avg Fall Int2Ty
339. oft key corresponding to the desired type from Pulse gt T Pulse lt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 or Time Out ENHANCED Type Pulse lt T er Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 Time Out Window sHold OFF us Width PH o 0 08 6 24 IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 6 11 Setting the Width Pulse lt T Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 Time Out Trigger ENHANCED Setting the Conditions of Each Channel 6 Press the Set Pattern soft key to display the trigger setting menu On the DL1720 settings for CH3 and CH4 are not displayed Condition Type idth Type Ja a ETimeusS Window Set Pattern Levels Width Pulse lt T Coup 1 ing 6 001 DFF ON 7 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel to be set 8 Press SELECT to select H L X when the Window is ON IN OUT or X 9 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Condition 10 Press SELECT to select True or False ENHANCED ahold OFF Setting the Level Hysteresis Trigger Coupling and HF Rejection 11 Pressing the Level Coupling soft key displays a menu used to set the level coupling hysteresis and HF rejection On the DL1720 settings for CH3 and CH4 are not displayed Level Hys Coupling HF Rej CH1 0 0 vI faa I DC I OFF c2 00v w I __ FF The Level setting for each channel can be input directly using a USB keyboard a The setting also applies to A gt B N trigger See section 6 8 When the Windo
340. ohol or ether otherwise color may develop on the chart e When you are going to store recorded roll charts for a long period of time we suggest you make a copy of the charts since discoloration may occur Usage Precautions e Use only YOKOGAWA s genuine roll charts e Do not touch the roll chart with sweaty hands otherwise it may become stained with your fingerprints and information may be lost e Do not rub the surface of the roll chart strongly with a firm object color development may occur due to frictional heat e Do not allow chemicals or oil to come into contact with the roll chart otherwise color development or loss of information may result 10 1 e eq Ud919NS JO INd1nNO 10 1 Loading the Paper Roll into the Built in Printer Option Operating Procedure PUSH OPEN Button Note 10 2 MAN FEED Printer Cover Rotate the Paper Feed Knob Press the PUSH OPEN button and lift the handle on the right of the printer cover and open the cover Move the release arm located on the right near the front to the MAN FEED position Have the inner side of the roll paper the side that is not glossy showing on top for the following procedure Set the core of the roll paper to the holder on the right Insert the edge of the roll paper evenly in the space between the roller and the black guide then rotate the paper feed knob away from you until about 10 cm of the roll sheet is showing from the top of the roller
341. olor soft key displays a menu used to set the display color and brightness A A A a LCD raph Colo Setup Self Test USB List Next Info 2 2 Pressing the Mode soft key displays a menu used to select the settings MISC Mode 2 Menu Waveform fe Snap f Grid fe Cursor Intensity 19 19 10 10 10 Setting the Color Pressing the RGB soft key displays the display color setting menu raph Color MISC E kri Snap Grid e Cursor 16 16 16 16 a Pressing the Menu soft key displays a dialog box used to set the display color of the menu items raph Color MISC Mode a a a Menu Waveforn Others RGB 14 1 suoljeiadC 198410 z 14 1 Setting the Screen Color and Brightness 7 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the desired item raph Color MISC rN a Menu Waveform Others 8 Pressing SELECT displays the color setting menu 9 Turn the jog shuttle to set the color 10 Pressing SELECT closes the color setting menu 11 Pressing ESC closes the dialog box used to set the display color of the menu items 12 In asimilar fashion set the colors for the Waveform and Others items CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1720 Setting the Brightness 5 Pressing the Intensity soft key displays the brightness setting menu raph Colo MISC ag ae Snap Grid Cursor 16 16 16 16 PC 6 Press the Menu soft key raph Colo MISC Mode Men PWaveforn amp
342. oltage 40 V DC AC peak or 28Vrms 10 kHz or less Trigger Level 2 V 5 mV measurement resolution for the DL1740 1 V 5 mV measurement resolution for the DL1720 with the 1 V range selected 10 V 50 mV measurement resolution for the DL1720 with the 10 V range selected 1 The EXT TRIG IN terminal also operates as an EXT CLOCK IN terminal Specifications for external clock input appear on section 16 3 This terminal is labeled EXT CLOCK IN EXT TRIG IN TRIG GATE IN for the DL1740 or EXT for the DL1720 Trigger Output TRIG OUT Item Specifications Connector Type BNC Output Level TTL Output Logic Negative logic Output Delay Time 50 ns max Output Hold Time 1 us min for low level 100 ns min for high level RGB Video Signal Output RGB VIDEO OUT Item Specifications Connector Type D Sub 15 pin socket Output Type VGA compatible GO NO GO Output NO GO OUT GO OUT Connector Type RJ 12 modular jack Output Level TTL compatible Signal NO GO OUT GO OUT Cable Four wire modular cable Power Connectors for the Probes Option Number of Output 4 or 2 for the DL1720 Output Voltage 12 V Usable Probe FET probe 700939 Current probe 700937 and 701930 Differential probe 701920 16 8 IM 701710 01E 16 10 Computer Interface GP IB Item Electrical and Mechanical Specifications Interface Functions Protocol Code Mode Address Setting Remote Mode Clear Specifications Conforms to IEEE Std 48
343. om Function Search Start Point when Using a Serial Pattern Search The search start point is as follows when Clock CH is set to None On the screen the first rising or falling edge to the right of the specified Start Point becomes the reference The search start point is set to 1 2 the specified interval right of the reference point However if the Start Point and the search start point described above are separated by an interval larger than the specified interval the search start point is set back in units of the specified interval to a point so that the interval between the Start Point and the search start point is within the specified interval The search Start point must be to the right of the start point in this case Within the hysteresis range of Clock CH the rising or falling edge cannot be checked Detection Reference Point Thr Upper Thr Lower B A j A A Interval A Search Start Point B Interval 2 Start Point Detection Reference Point Thr Upper i Thr Lower B A f A f A Interval Pe 2 A A B Interval 2 A C lt Interval A Search Start Point Start Point Originally this position is the search start point However the position is moved because the interval between the Start Point and search start point is greater than Interval Defermination During a Parallel Pattern Search The hysteresis points are normally evaluated as true conforming to the specified status High Level
344. om box for Z1 and 22 8 24 IM 701710 01E 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function When Performing a Pulse Width Search 1 Press SHIFT to activate shift mode The functions printed in purple letters on the front panel become activated 2 Press ZOOM Selecting the Search Method 3 Press the Type soft key to display the search method selection menu SEARCH Type a 21 Mag G Zi Pos ASearched Setup Pattern Exec Edge xX 2 6 660di4 No Match 4 Press the Width soft key to select the search method SEARCH Edge Serial Width Parallel Puto ScrollpSearched Pattern Pattern Pattern Exec o Match Setting the Search Criteria 5 When you press the Setup soft key the search criteria settings dialog box is displayed Turn the jog shuttle to select a setting item Press SELECT to display the setting menu for the selected item or change the current setting Level Settings for these items can be input directly using a USB keyboard a Polarity Hysteresis Tine e Setting the Type 6 Use the jog shuttle to choose either Pulse lt T Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 or Time Out then press SELECT Pulse gt T Polarity T1 lt PLS lt T2 Hysteresis Time Out IM 701710 01E 8 25 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function 8 26 e Setting the Source 7 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the desired source channel then press SELECT CH3 CH4 and Math2 are
345. omatically after acquisition The maximum acquisition count available with the feature varies depending on the record length The range for the DL1720 DL1740 is 2 to 512 times Once the specified number of waveforms have been stored you can display any of the waveforms individually or all of them together so that it is possible to derive a time series of the waveform variation The drawings below illustrate how stored data can be displayed assuming sequential storage of 100 waveforms Display Example in Case Count 100 Times Displaying All Waveforms Displaying Newest Waveform Displaying Oldest Waveform ALL Selected Record No 0 Selected Record No 99 VY a Sampling Mode lt Section 7 6 gt As explained earlier in Relationship between the time axis setting and sampling mode section 1 2 data sampling can be performed either in real time or in repetitive sampling mode depending on the time axis and record length The available time axis range under repetitive mode varies according to the acquisition settings For details refer to Appendix 1 Accumulated Waveform Display lt Section 8 6 gt This mode holds each waveform on the screen for a time that is longer than the update cycle so that multiple waveforms are overlapped The waveform age can be identified by color The following two modes are available e Persist Overlaps the display of waveforms using the display color of each channel e Color Overla
346. on is in progress Cannot find HDR file Cannot load the specified file on this ROM version or this model Save data not found SCSI controller failure Unknown file format P P compression cannot be used to save FFT waveforms Data that have been P P compressed and saved cannot be loaded Illegal printer head position Paper empty Printer overheated Printer overheated Printer is not installed Printer time out The printer has malfunctioned Printer error Turn the power of the printer from OFF to ON 15 2 Messages and Corrective Actions Corrective Action Check the file name and the SCSI ID Check the SCSI device connection the SCSI ID number and the existence of a medium in the drive Check the medium Check the filename and the medium Set the disk s write protect switch to OFF Check the medium Check the file name and the SCSI ID Delete unnecessary files or use another disk The number of bytes necessary is given in the pages indicated on the right Delete all files in the directory before deleting the directory Clear the write disable mark Reformat the medium If the same error occurs this instrument cannot format the medium Check using another medium If the same message still appears servicing is required Check the file Check using another medium If the same message still appears servicing is required Check that the medium is correctly inserted into
347. ong Copy to Informations Comment Built in Normal g DFF ON 6 Press the Information soft key to select ON or OFF Setting Comments 7 Pressing the Comment soft key displays a keyboard 8 Enter comments according to the procedures described in section 4 1 Setting the Magnification Ratio When the Output Format is Set to Long 9 Ifyou selected Long in step 5 set the magnification ratio using the jog shuttle Press the Mag soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Mag 10 Turn the jog shuttle to set the magnification ratio The number of output pages is displayed according to the ratio 10 3 e eq Ud919NS JO INd1nNO 10 2 Outputting to the Built in Printer Option Setting the Output Range When the Output Format is Set to Long 11 If you selected Long in step 5 set the output range Press the T Range1 T Rangez2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to T Range1 12 Turn the jog shuttle to set the start point of the output range 13 In a similar fashion set the end point of the output range in T Range2 Previewing Long Copy 14 Pressing the Preview soft key displays the output image on the screen C0PY Copy to a iy Preview Built in Normal Long t 000d i 15 Turning the jog shuttle changes the displayed page 16 Pressing the Quit soft key returns to the original screen Executing Print Out 17 Pressing COPY outputs a hard copy of the screen Pressing COPY again aborts the output
348. oppy disk or a Zip disk the following files will be created automatically in the DL_WAVE directory e Waveform data file WVF e ASCII header file HDR The waveform data file can be recalled to the instrument using the file menu but the ASCII header file cannot therefore it cannot be viewed on the instrument However it can be used when you analyze the waveform using a personal computer 1 Endian Mode for Storage Big Data for Motorola 68000 series Ltl Data for Intel 86 series 2 Binary File Storage Format Trace Groups into blocks each block for a single waveform Block Groups into blocks each block for a given time interval 3 Binary File Start Position Offset from the beginning of the file 4 Maximum Number of Blocks per Group Maximum number of blocks applies if the number of blocks varies between waveforms 5 Y Axis Conversion Equation for Each Waveform Y axis value VResolution x Raw data VOffset 6 Data Type ISn n byte signed integer lUn n byte unsigned integer FSn n byte signed real number FUn n byte unsigned real number Bm m byte data 7 X Axis Conversion Equation for Each Waveform X axis value HResolution x Data No 1 HOffset IM 701710 01E App 13 Ea xipueddy Appendix 4 Menu Key Soft Key CH1 to 4 or CH1 to 2 for the DL1720 Display Position Cupling Probe Offset Band Width Variable Linear Scale Label Vidiv T div PRESET Select Type Prove ACQ
349. opy 0 Image Save 0 Send Mail Mail Count LGO NO GO faT Rangei 5 000di Exec ST Rangez 5 000di Mode Paraneter 9 51 s s jeuy LUIOJOARM 9 12 GO NO GO Determination Using the Measurement of Waveform Parameters 9 52 6 10 11 12 13 14 19 16 E 18 19 Press SELECT to select ON or OFF If OFF is selected Param1 will be excluded from the determination criteria Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Trace Pressing SELECT displays the channel menu CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1720 Turn the jog shuttle to select the channel and press SELECT Mode Trace Item Upper Lower Condition Logic Sequence ACQ Count Action Buzzer Save to File c Hard Copy 9 Image Save Send Mail Mail Count Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Item Pressing SELECT displays the automated measurement item menu Mode Trace Iten Upper Lower Condition Logic Sequence ACQ Count Action Save to File c Hard Copy Turn the jog shuttle to select the item and press SELECT w Select w Se lect A Burstz AvgFreq Pulse AvgPer iod Delay IntiTy AvgFreq Int2TY Intixy Int2x AvgPer iod Int 1Ty v Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Upper Pressing SELECT displays the upper limit setting menu Turn the jog shuttle to select the upp
350. or an input cable such as a BNC cable must be connected to one of the input terminals CH1 to CH4 or CH1 and CH2 for the DL1720 located on the lower section of the front panel The input impedance is 1 MQ 1 0 and approximately 20 pF or 50 Q 1 0 The number of input terminals varies according to the instrument model CAUTION e The maximum allowable input voltage is 400 V DC AC peak or 282 Vrms when the frequency is 1 kHz or less Never input a voltage exceeding this level as it could damage the input section of the instrument If the frequency exceeds 1 kHz the input section may be damaged even when the voltage is below 400 V e The maximum allowable input voltage is 5 Vrms or 10 Vpeak when using 50 Q input Never input voltage exceeding this level as it could damage the input section of this instrument 1MQ 20pF lt 400Vpk_CATU 500 5Vrms 10Vpk The DL1720 is not equipped with channels 3 and 4 and a multi purpose external trigger external clock trigger gate input terminal is provided in place of channel 4 Points to Note when Connecting a Probe IM 701710 01E e When connecting a probe to the instrument for the first time perform phase correction of the probe as described in the section 3 5 Failure to do so may result in unstable gain across different frequencies thereby preventing correct measurement Calibration must be performed for each channel e Ifthe object to be measured is connected to the
351. ording to the procedures given in 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time The external signal that is input through the EXT TRIG IN terminal or the EXT terminal on the front panel of the DL1720 on the rear panel of this instrument can be used to generate triggers Note For details related to the specifications of the EXT TRIG IN terminal or the EXT terminal for the DL1720 see section 12 1 Selecting the Trigger Source Select Ext Setting the Trigger Level Range 2 V for the DL1740 1 V for the DL1720 with the 1 V range selected 10 V for the DL1720 with the 10 V range selected Resolution 5 mV for the DL1740 5 mV for the DL1720 with the 1 V range selected 50 mV for the DL1720 with the 10 V range selected Setting the Trigger Slope Select the trigger activation method relative to changes in trigger source level from the following three choices f Activated when the trigger source changes from below the trigger level to above the trigger level rising Activated when the trigger source changes from above the trigger level to below the trigger level falling f4 Activated on either a rising edge or falling edge Setting the Probe Attenuation When applying a trigger input signal to the EXT TRIG IN terminal or the EXT terminal on the front panel of the DL1720 via a probe select an attenuation that matches the probe attenuation 1 1 10 1 Setting the Hold Off See section 6 4 Setting the Hol
352. ords 50 kwords 100 kwords 250 kwords 500 kwords 1 Mwords In most cases the displayed record length is identical to the acquisition record length For certain time axis settings however the lengths become different For details refer to Appendix 1 Interleave Mode lt Section 7 5 gt This mode doubles the amount of memory per channel while cutting the number of channels in half If you are using an 8 channel model for example then setting this mode ON will disable use of CH2 and CH4 or CH2 only on the DL1720 while reassigning the memory for those channels to CH1 and CH3 or CH1 only on the DL1720 This mode doubles the maximum settings for history memory sequential store and record length Furthermore because the maximum sample rate can be increased by sampling the input Signal using two A D converters real time sampling at a rate of 1 GS s for the DL1720 DL1740 For the relationship between the interleave mode time axis record length and sample rate see appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record length Acquisition Modes lt Section 7 2 7 4 gt When storing sampled data in the acquisition memory it is possible to perform processing on specified data and display the resultant waveform The following data processing methods are available Normal Mode In this mode sampled data are stored in the acquisition memory without processing Averaging Mode Averaging is a
353. orical Data Using Parameters History Search Function 7 17 Chpater 8 Display 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 9 8 10 Changing the Display FOr Matievesseseceesi ct n a E E cesta EA 8 1 Setting the Interpolation MEO Gisseczces eres facie Soe ne E 8 3 Changing the Graticule 2 25 ss scs c de lt dtadasnsdeahaccadetecudeelasasadadedhandesaodaadeeedanttacesabesjarsaneant 8 5 Turning Display of the Scaling Value ON OFF ccccccecceesesseeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaas 8 6 Setting the Waveform Labels pececscesnaredeccea ndwuidingonceceuetdeetandtiva cu ctadaaseeitateAeeenats aleeteam 8 7 Accumulated Waveform Display ccccccccccssseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeceeeesseeeeeeeeeesaaseeeeesnsaesees 8 9 Turning Translucent Mode ON OFF cccccccessseseseeeceeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeessaaeeseeeeeeeeeeees 8 11 A Y WAVETORNN DIS DAV crror a E a es Aa ees aueeeee tt 8 12 ZOOMING THE VWWAVETO RM e e at Sneecte ati deaeeetdaladat aieinie eae 8 15 Search Data Using Search and ZOOM FUNCTION cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaneeeeeees 8 18 Chpater 9 Waveform Analysis 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 9 6 Measuring Waveforms USING Cursors c scccccecsesesececeeceeseceeeseeeeseceesesaueeeeeeeeesaeseeess 9 1 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters ccccccseccceeeeeeeeseeeseeeeaeeeeaaeees 9 11 Statistical Processing esans a a eS yh teal oa annals 9 18 Performing Automate
354. orm zoom In this case the V cursor value indicates the value of the nearest sampled data to the right of the cursor for interpolated display the sampled data is highlighted However the marker cursor is always displayed over the sampled data 9 3 SISAJEUY WWAOJOARM 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using For Angle Degree Cursors When Not Displaying the X Y Waveform Selecting the Waveform to be Measured Follow steps 1 3 to set the Type to Degree CURSOR OFF orizontal Vertical Marker Degree 4 Pressing the Trace soft key displays the waveform menu CURSOR Type Trace fo cee Ref 1 l Ref ValueCursor Jum 4 000di 2 00 di i E Degree CH1 6 Cursor2 6 Ref2 360 C1 to Z1 4 00 di 2 00 di 5 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired waveform The CH3 CH4 and Math2 soft keys are not displayed on the DL1720 A11 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mathi Math2 4 960di 2 000d i Moving the Cursor 6 Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Cursor1 7 Turn the jog shuttle to move Cursor1 2000710731 11 16 712 J Stopped 168 7 SO60kS S 2ZMS div i i fiok Normal DC Full Edge CH1 F Auto 180 0000deg 450 0000deg 1 H 1 H 1 i 1 H 1 H 1 H 1 i 1 AX 630 0000deg Y 1 12500U CURSOR Type Trace f Cursor1 a Ref 1 feRef VYaluecursor Jum 4 00 di 2 6600di ump Exec Degree CH1 f6 Cursor2 Ref2 360 C1 to 21 3 000di 2 000di 8 Move Cursor2 i
355. ort the following output commands can be used Note e Connect only the printers that are allowed e For USB printers that have been tested for compatibility contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual Format You can select the type of command that is output to the USB printer from the following list of choices e ESC P e PCL5 e LIPS3 e ESC P2 e BJ can be used on models that support the BUC 35V native commands IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 10 3 Outputting Screen Images to an USB Printer Connection Procedure When connecting a USB printer directly connect the keyboard to the DL1720 DL1740 with a USB cable as shown below You can connect the USB cable regardless of the power ON OFF state of the DL1720 DL1740 supports hot plug Connect the type A connector of the USB cable to the DL1720 DL1740 connect the type B connector to the printer When the power switch is ON the printer is detected and enabled approximately 6 seconds after it is connected DL1720 DL1740 Do RT 9O Q amp USB Printer e Connect the printer directly without going through a hub e Connect only a USB keyboard or printer to the PRN KBD terminals e Do not connect multiple printers You can connect a single printer and a single keyboard e Never turn OFF the printer or remove the USB cable while the printer is printing Output Resolution when Printing using the BJ Format When printing the screen image dat
356. ory Changing the directory file name of the recording medium excepting Net Drive 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select directory or file Note eee By selecting a screen image data file files with the tif omp or ps extensions in the File List window and pressing SELECT the selected screen image file s compressed image appears in the upper right portion of the file list 2001 07 03 09 51 47 Saat Stopped 31 7 pri lt lt Mainz10k gt gt File List Path ZPO Space 74844160 byte f File Name Size Date lt SNAP gt 2601 05 28 17 6 lt WAVEFORM gt 2601 05 17 19 3 lt THEF IN 1 gt 2661 05 15 16 46 R W lt OTHERS gt 2661 04 27 10 47 R W 968 TIF 38574 2001 07 03 09 39 RW P 967 TIF 38574 2001 06 22 13 31 R U 004 TIF 38574 2001 06 22 13 31 R U 006 TIF 38574 2001 06 22 13 29 RW fit 605 TIF 38574 2001 06 22 13 29 R U 963 TIF 38574 2001 06 22 13 27 R U 962 TIF 38574 2001 06 20 14 44 RW fi ft Edge CH1 001 TIF 38574 2001 06 20 14 44 R U Auto 000 TIF 2601 06 20 14 43 0 000 Function z et Reset Delete e If compressed image thumbnail data does not exist for the selected file an error message appears Pressing ESC clears the error message e The following procedure clears the compressed image from the screen e Move the cursor using the jog shuttle 8 Pressing the File Name soft key displays a keyboard The name of directory file is displ
357. ory 7 Select the directory according to steps 13 to 17 Selecting the File to be Loaded 8 Turn the jog shuttle to select a file Loading the File 9 Press the Load Exec soft key to load the file from the directory indicated in Path ___ The name of the Load Exec soft key changes to Abort Canceling the Loading Operation 10 Press the Abort soft key to cancel the loading operation The name of the Abort soft key changes to Load Exec Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box Viewing the Properties The procedures are the same as steps 30 and 31 Unloading Waveforms Selecting the File to be Unloaded 6 Continuing from step 5 in Saving the waveform data press the Unload soft key to display the Unload menu FILE File Iten Data Type pa pa z 2 Save Load Unload Utility Waveforn Binary 7 Pressing the Trace soft key displays a menu used to select the channels to be unloaded Fie Trace Fa Exe Exe CE 8 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired channel to select the channel If All is selected all channels are unloaded CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1720 Unloading the File 9 Press the Unload Exec soft key IM 701710 01E 11 13 wnIp n Helos 9y Wold pue o e eq Hulpeo7 pue Bulnes 2 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Explanation 11 14 Selecting the Data Type File Extension Binary e The sampled data in the acquisition memory are saved in bin
358. out time the connection to the network will be automatically closed Note For keyboard soft keyboard operation see section 4 1 Entering Values and Character Strings IM 701710 01E 13 21 uodo ddej19 U JOUIBUIA 3 13 8 Accessing DL1720 DL1740 Drives from a Network Drive FTP Server Function Executing the FTP Client Software 10 Execute the FTP client software from a personal computer or workstation Perform file operations using the username specified in step 6 Displaying the Connection Logging List 11 When you press the Connection Logging List soft key the 25 most recent access times user names and IP addresses are displayed a User Mail Net Drive f Net Print Others Connect Account Setup Setup Setup Log List 2000 11 07 19 37 24 ok Normal Connection Logging List FTP Server Time User IP address Result MISC Connect Log a Note e The DL1720 DL1740 can only support one client e When the DL1720 DL1740 is being accessed from a PC or workstation i e when it s logged on m is displayed in the upper right part of the screen e This function can not be used in conjunction with FTP client function LPR client function or File operation e The floppy disk or the Zip disk is displayed as FDO or ZPO in the root directory Other devices connected via SCSI are displayed as SCn where n is the SCSI ID number e The log is cleared when the power is turned OFF e Before accessing
359. ow This function is available on products with firmware version 1 30 or later 19 Pressing the Thumbnail soft key causes a thumbnail of the screen image data located in the output directory specified in step 10 to be displayed four thumbnails are displayed together Pressing ESC closes the preview window CH2 16 1 0 500 Urdiy DC Full Math1 C1 C2 Edge CH1 A C ma When no files supporting the thumbnail feature are present on the storage medium an error message is displayed Pressing ESC clears the error message SEEE 005 TIF Mono File Name Color Information Format TIFF Scrolling the Thumbnail Window 20 When five or more files supporting the thumbnail feature are present you can scroll the window using the jog shuttle To scroll the window upwards turn the jog shuttle in the minus direction counterclockwise To scroll the window downwards turn the jog shuttle in the plus direction clockwise Note 10 12 Files supporting the thumbnail feature are scrolled two at a time IM 701710 01E 10 4 Storing Screen Image to the External Storage Medium Explanation The screen image can be stored to storage medium a floppy disk a Zip disk an external SCSI device option or Network drive Ethernet interface option For details see Section 13 4 Saving Screen Image Data to a Network Drive Storing Data Format You can store
360. play Aborted when history display mode is set to One 861 Cannot output color in this format Turn OFF the color 10 3 862 Zones cannot be edited in the following cases Display the main window and the target 9 12 e When the main window is not displayed waveform e When the target waveform is not displayed 863 The zone waveform does not exist Create the zone waveform 9 12 864 The zone is being edited Select Quit to exit zone editing 9 12 To perform other operations select Quit to exit zone editing 865 Zones determination is not possible in the Display the main window and the target window 9 12 following cases and create the zone waveform e When the main window is not displayed e When the target waveform is not displayed e When the zone waveform does not exist 868 Processing statistics Abort statistical processing 9 3 To perform other operations abort the statistical processing System Operation Errors 900 to 908 912 to 914 Code Message Corrective Action Reference Section 901 Failed to backup setup data Check the condition of the built in lithium Will initialize battery using the overview screen Servicing is required 906 Fan stopped Turn OFF the power immediately Turn off the power immediately Servicing is required 907 Backup battery is flat Servicing is required to replace the battery 912 Fatal error in the communication driver Servicing is required Note When servicing is required double check by
361. pped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press SHIFT to set the keys in the shifted condition Functions marked in purple on the panel become active 2 Press IMAGE SAVE Selecting the Format 3 Pressing the Format soft key IMAGE a Format Color fa a File Name Thumbnail Comment File List TIFF OFF 4 Press the soft key corresponding to the type of format to be selected IMAGE a TIFF BMP PS a aFile Name Thumbnail File List P A F Setting the Color for TIFF and BMP 5 Press the Color soft key to select ON ON Revers ON Gray or OFF IMAGE a Format OFF ON DN Revers ON Gray File Name Thumbnail TIFF sd Setting Comments 6 Pressing the Comment soft key displays a keyboard 7 Enter comments according to the procedures described in section 4 1 Setting the Compression for BMP Color is ON 8 Press the Compression soft key select ON or OFF When Compression is ON you cannot store to Network Drive a Format Color a Compressiona aFile Name Thumbnai1 Comment File List BMP ON DFF ON ae 10 4 Storing Screen Image to the External Storage Medium Setting the Storing Destination 9 Pressing the File List soft key displays the output destination setting menu 10 Turn the jog shuttle to select the save destination The floppy disk or Zip disk inserted in the built in drive or external SCSI devices is displayed in brackets Directories are displayed in angle
362. process in which waveforms are acquired repeatedly to obtain the average of waveform data of the same timing the same time in relation to the trigger point If this mode is active the instrument takes the linear or exponential average of incoming data and writes the results into acquisition memory The averaged data is then used to generate the display You can set the attenuation constant to a value from 2 to 256 in 2 steps and the averaging count to a value from 2 to 65536 in 2 steps Exponential Averaging Count Infinite Linear Averaging Count 2 to 65536 N x Xn An N 1 An 1 Xn Kyat N N An Value Obtained After nth Averaging Xn nth Measured Value Xn nth Measured Value N Number of Averaging Times N Attenuation Constant Acquisition Count 2 to 256 in steps of 2 in steps of 2 This averaging process is useful when you want to eliminate random noise 1 14 IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions Envelope Mode In normal mode and averaging mode the sample rate the number of times data is acquired per second in the acquisition memory drops if T div is increased refer to Appendix 1 Relationship between the time axis setting sample rate and record length However in the envelope mode the maximum and minimum values are determined at every time interval from the data sampled at 400 MS s for the DL1720 DL1740 interleave mode 800 MS s or 1 G
363. ps the display of waveforms using 8 colors which signify the frequency of occurrence of the data values This function is useful when you want to observe jitters and temporary turbulence in waveforms IM 701710 01E 1 4 Setting the Acquisition and Display Conditions History Memory lt Section 7 7 gt The oscilloscope automatically retains the last N waveforms recorded The value of N varies in the range 2 to 2048 for the DL1720 DL1740 depending on the record length and interleave mode The oscilloscope retains all waveforms for the first N triggers then for each subsequent trigger the oscilloscope overwrites the oldest stored waveform You are free to switch the display from the current newest waveform to any of other N 1 waveforms in the history The illustration below shows how data can be displayed assuming N 1024 Saved Waveform Data of Previous 1024 Triggers Current Waveform Display Select Record 0 Selected Record No 0 Any Former Waveform Display Select Record is Selectable in the Range 0 to 1023 Selected Record No 25 In addition a particular waveform can be found from the past waveforms that are held Display Settings lt Chatpter 8 gt Display Format Section 8 1 e You can display waveforms from different channels in different windows You can choose to use 1 window Single 2 windows Dual 3 windows Triad 4 windows Quad or 6 windows Hexa 4 windows Quad or 6 windows Hexa
364. r Specify the IP address of the network mail server On networks supporting DNS you can specify the host and domain by name instead of by IP address Mail Address Enter the address of the mail recipient using 40 characters or less Comment The comment appears on the first line of mails that are sent Comments are optional Use 30 characters or less for the comment MailBaseTime Specify the time to start transmitting the mail messages Set the time in units of hour minute second in the following range 0 0 0to 23 59 59 Interval The allowable mail transmission intervals are as follows Off 1H 2H 3H 4H 6H 8H 12H 24H When OFF is selected transmission at specified intervals is not possible Sending a Test Mail Sends a test mail to the address specified by Mail Address Data Sent from the DL1720 DL1740 The following four items are sent Acquisition status Start Stop trigger status acquisition counter Error log information Error number and up to 16 lines of the English error message text GO NO GO success fail information Time of GO NO GO determination only see section 9 12 and 9 13 Results of waveform parameter measurement Automatic measurement of waveform parameters see sections 9 2 and 9 4 and the time of GO NO GO determination by waveform parameters only see section 9 12 13 17 uodo ddej19 U JOUIBUI 3 13 6 Using the Mail Function Fixed Interval 13 18 Sample Transmission Comment aa
365. r Upper FFT will be performed on all records Abort the operation by setting the history Display Mode to One Aborted the recalculation of the FFT Aborted statistical measurement processing Key invalid for this model Discription Press SHIFT CLEAR TRACE to change to local mode To allow key operation release the lockout using communication commands Reference Section 10 2 Chapter 11 4 4 4 4 9 12 9 13 4 2 6 15 11 6 11 8 10 2 5 3 7 8 7 9 8 9 7 8 7 9 8 9 8 9 9 3 IM 701710 01E Error in Code 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 to 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 to 620 621 622 to 641 656 to 663 642 646 to 653 654 665 666 667 668 669 671 673 676 677 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 691 692 IM 701710 01E Execution 600 to 799 Message Invalid file name or SCSI ID No SCSI device or no storage media inserted Storage media failure File not found Storage media is protected Storage media failure Invalid file name or SCSI ID Storage media full Cannot delete a directory if there are files in the directory File is protected Physical format error File system failure File is damaged File system failure No storage media exists in SCSI device Storage media failure Storage media failure Cannot load this file format File is now being accessed Wait a moment Cannot be executed while data acquisiti
366. r the remaining procedures please refer to 11 7 Saving Loading Setup Data through section 11 12 Changing the Storage Medium Directory File Name and Creating a Directory IM 701710 01E 13 4 Saving Screen Image Data to a Network Drive Note Explanation e You must run FTP server software on PCs and workstations that will be connected to the network Also please note the following regarding the server software Use UNIX format for list output character strings returned by the dir command Make the home directory and its subdirectories writable You can t change to a higher directory than the home directory The newest file is not necessarily displayed at the top of the file list You cannot access files or directories having names longer than nine or more characters Depending on the server the lt gt notation for the top directory may not be displayed e Inthe following cases the time information in a file list will not be displayed accurately When WindowsNT uses an AM or PM timestamp When using a server that returns kanji or other non ASCII character strings in a list e The following are not possible Turning file protect ON and OFF on saved files Formatting a network drive Copying between network drives Renaming a file on the network e This function can not be used in conjunction with FTP server function e Before saving data to a network drive you must configure TCP IP see 13 2 Conf
367. r types trigger source and trigger level Explains acquisition parameters acquisition mode sampling mode record length history and use of overlapping accumulated waveform display Explains display format interpolation zoom X Y display graticule and other display related parameters Explains cursor based measurements automatic measurements statistical processing mathematical operations and GO NO GO determinations Explains how to print screen data to internal printer or to a printer connected through the USB interface and how to store screen display to the storage medium Explains how to save and reload waveform data and Storage medium settings to floppy disk or external SCSI device option Also explains related disk operations including disk formatting file copying and file deletion Trigger Input Trigger Output Explains external trigger input external clock input RGB Video Signal Output Ethernet Interface Option Other Operations Troubleshooting Maintenance and Inspection Specifications Appendix Index trigger output and RGB video output Explains saving to a network drive getting files from a floppy disk Zip disk or external SCSI device option outputting to a network printer and receiving email transmissions Explains how to set the display colors display language click sound and back light Gives troubleshooting advice explains screen messages and self test operat
368. rd len rate record len S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word 50s tk sook ik f5ook fik 5o0k fik 500 k 20s 2k 400k 2k 400k 2k jsook 2k 400 k 10s fsk s500k_ 5k s00k_ 5k 5ook_ 5k 500 k 10k 500 k 20k 400 k 50 k 500 k 100k 500 k 200 k 400 k 500 k 500 k 20M 400 k 50M 500 k 500 k PR ir a 1 For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active 2 Roll mode display is available in shaded sections App 6 IM 701710 01E Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 1 Mwords When Moed other than Envelope Mode is Active Interleave mode OFF Interleave mode ON Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Envelope mode is Active Interleave mode Interleave mode OFF ON Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word 1M k ex hm ak hm Peen e 1 For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active 2 Roll mode display is available in shaded sections IM 701710 01E This record length a not be used 7 m when interleave is OFF 800 M 800 M 800 M 800 M 800 M 800 M
369. re determined by the allowable input range Input Example e If you type 1 then Enter for the Offset this means 1 V so 1000 mV is displayed on the screen e If you type 1 0 then m this means 10 mV so 10 mV is displayed on the screen If you enter a prefix for the units it is not necessary to press the Enter key The available unit prefixes are as follows Key Prefix Kork 10 m 1073 U oru 10 Norn 10 Porp 107 suoeiado uowwos gt 4 2 Initializing Settings Relevant Keys TRACE SNOT HELP amp Poles ia OO a aca stanrisror a ee Clee Comer 2 D Sime ENHANCED TIME DIV frone osmon DELAY C The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Performing Initialization 1 Press SETUP 2 Press the Initialize soft key to start initialization __SETUP__ poe itialize Auto Store Setup Recall Canceling Initialization 3 Press the Undo soft key This will restore the previous settings that were in effect before initialization Note The Undo operation remains available only while power stays on The setting parameters that existed immediately before initialization are cleared if you execute auto setup after initialization 4 6 IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 4 2 Initializing Settings The initialization function allows you to reset parameter values which have been set using panel keys to the default factory settings This is ve
370. relation to the overall record length changes e If the timebase is provided by an external clock the trigger delay is fixed at Os no delay IM 701710 01E Bbunebbi yp gt 6 3 Setting the Trigger Position Relevant Keys lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 13 gt NAP SNOr HELP ae TT o2 m o SEA V DIV TIME DIV A The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Explanation 1 Press POSITION 2 Turn the jog shuttle to set the trigger position You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits If you wish to select 10 50 or 90 you can press the corresponding soft key POSITION Position Set to Set to Set to 50 07 107 507 907 In addition pressing RESET resets the position to 50 Trigger Positon The trigger position is the waveform position that results when the trigger delay is added to the trigger point If the trigger delay is 0 s therefore the trigger position is equivalent to the trigger point You can select the location of the trigger position on the screen ial Position Delay Time Trigger Point Setting Range for Trigger Position 0 to 100 of record length in 1 steps Position Marker A position marker marker appears above the bar at the top of the screen The marker indicates the trigger position with respect to the total record length You can shift the trigger position
371. restored to 0 3 div e Setting the Start Point 13 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the start point then press SELECT Use the jog shuttle to select the start point then press SELECT again Use the arrow keys to move between the digits If you press RESET the setting will be restored to 5 div 14 Press ESC to close the dialog box Setting the Display Position for the Search Results When Zoom Mode is Z1 amp Z2 or Main amp Z1 amp Z2 15 Press the Results Window soft key to select Z1 or Z2 SEARCH Type a Result 21 Mag G Z1 Pos Searched Setup Window x2 6 060di4y Pattern Exec Parallel 22 22 Mag 6 22 Pos No Match Pattern x2 6 000di Executing the Search 16 Press the Exec soft key to perform the search The results are displayed in the zoom waveform display position selected in step 15 You can perform a search using the same search criteria 1000 times Displaying Previous Search Results 17 Press the Searched Pattern soft key to highlight the jog shuttle icon 18 Turn the jog shuttle to select the number of the search results to be displayed The most recent search has the highest number Changing the Zooming Factor and Position 19 As you did with the zoomed waveform press the Z1 Mag Z2 Mag soft key then turn the jog shuttle to change the zooming factor of Z1 and Z2 20 As you did with the zoomed waveform press the Z1 Pos Z2 Pos soft key then turn the jog shuttle to change the position of the zo
372. rewdriver into the trimmer adjusting hole in the probe and turn the trimmer so that the displayed waveform becomes square PES Phase Adjusting Hole Probe Compensation COMP Signal Output Terminal Functional Earth Terminal 3 10 IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 3 5 Compensating the Probe Phase Correction Reason for Probe Compensation If the probe s input capacitance is outside the specified range the gain will not be constant across different frequencies preventing display of the correct waveforms The input capacitance varies depending on the probe used so the variable capacitor trimmer provided on the probe must be adjusted Probe compensation must be performed when the probe is to be used for the first time Moreover the appropriate input capacitance varies according to which channel is used SO probe compensation is required when the probe is switched from one channel to another Calibration Signal A probe compensation signal square waveform of the following characteristics is output from the CAL terminal on the front panel Frequency approx 1 kHz Amplitude approx 1 V Waveform Differences Correct Waveform Over Compensated Under Compensated Gain is too High at High Gain is too Low at High Frequency Frequency 3 11 espn Bung suonnes ld e 3 6 Setting the Date and Time Rel
373. rightness cccccccsssseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaeeeees 14 1 Changing the Message Language and Click SOUNG cccccecceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaseeeees 14 4 Turning OFF the Backlight and Setting the Brightness of the Backlight c06 14 5 Canceling the Onset Voltage sirean ctl 2 eens E N 14 7 xi Contents Chpater 15 Troubleshooting Maintenance and Inspection 191 SIFOUDISSIIOOUNG bases nts5d tontick acta a ind e Sunnah a E 15 1 15 2 Messages and Corrective ACtiONS cccccccccccccssseseceecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeseessaeaaeeeeeseeeees 15 2 15 3 Self Diagnostic Test Self Test 2ccccscccccccsseseeesssecearehcedacsiaseexaeastaetccesedaveweeeessediac ease aseees 15 7 15 4 Checking the System Condition cccccccccccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaseeeseeeeeeeeeesessaaaeaeeeess 15 10 15 0 Replacing the Power FUSE iscusceiseiucaseacecsn sdieis ra ARTET an AR 15 11 15 6 Recommended Replacement Parts ccccccsssssceceesseeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeesaeas 15 12 Chpater 16 Specifications HOE Input SECON ie S E abana 16 1 162 MEJE SECON a E eee ee a eee 16 2 TGS MIMEA S ra a E eae 16 4 UGA DISPIIV sinaia E E E eemes panei aaa ets aaeesneadeiean teameamaep ras 16 4 1G FUNCIONS seoce eh setae tee a cae aceite ase canoe E celeste A 16 4 16 6 JBuilt i Printer ODON rassrarioni an ae E T 16 7 UO OO a E ee esate Raa ate ae seed ttesie ices 16 7 16 8 Key
374. riginal position push it backwards When installing the DL1720 DL1740 with the rear panel down use the stand on the rear panel CAUTION Do not use the Zip drive when the DL1720 DL1 740 is installed with the rear panel down If the instrument is installed in the tilted positon rubber feet can be attached to prevent slipping Four pieces of rubber feet are included in the package IM 701710 01E 3 3 Connecting the Power Cord Before Connecting the Power Make sure that you observe the following points before connecting the power Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damage to the instrument N WARNING e Connect the power cord after confirming that the voltage of the power supply complies to the rated electric power voltage for the instrument e Connect the power cord after confirming that the instrument power switch is OFF e Always use protective ground to prevent electric shock Connect the instrument power cord to the 3 pin power outlet with grounding terminal e Do not use non grounding extension cords or other measures that defeat the protective grounding e Never use an extension cord that does not have a protective grounding otherwise the protection feature will be invalidated eer Connecting the Power Cord 1 Make sure that main power switch and power switch are OFF 2 Plug the power cord into the power connector socket on the rear panel of the instrument 3 Plug the other end of the power
375. rms when the frequency is 10 kHz or less DC to 100 MHz approx 1 MQ and 18 pF for the DL1740 approx 1 MQ and 20 pF for the DL1720 2 V for the DL1740 1 V for the DL1720 at the 1 V range 10V for the DL1720 at the 10 V range 0 1 Vp p for the DL1740 0 1 Vp p for the DL1720 at the 1 V range 1 Vp p for the DL1720 at the 10 V range 2 V in 5 mv resolution for the DL1 740 1 V in 5 mv resolution for the DL1720 at the 1 V range 10 V in 50 mv resolution for the DL1720 at the 10 V range 12 1 yndyno euis oapiA 994 Andino 136p LAndu 49661 12 1 External Trigger Input External Clock Input External Clock Input Terminal 12 2 Input Terminal lt DL1740 gt lt DL1720 gt EXT CLOCK IN EXT TRIG IN 1MQ 20pF lt 40Vpk TRIG GATE IN lt 40Vpk 1MQ On the DL1740 it is located on the rear panel or on the DL1720 it is located on the front panel The external trigger input terminal can also be used as an external clock input terminal If you wish to drive the instrument with an external clock connect a clock signal to this terminal Specifications Connector Type Maximum Input Voltage Frequency Range Input Impedance Input Range Threshold Level Minimum Input Amplitude Minimum Pulse Width BNC at 40 V DC AC peak or 28 Vrms when the frequency is 10 kHz or less 40 Hz to 20 MHz continuous clock only approx 1 MQ and 18 pF for the DL1740 approx 1 MQ and 20 p
376. rned ON e If the V div knob has been turned perform calibration for all parameters except the time axis for repetitive sampling mode Auto Calibration Auto Cal Calibration is performed automatically after the times shown below elapse after turning ON the power when the T div setting is changed or when waveform acquisition is Started e After 3 minutes e After 10 minutes e After 30 minutes e After one hour and every hour thereafter If the DL1720 DL1740 is auto calibrated while input takes place it is recommended that you disconnect the input and then repeat calibration Deskew Corrects the CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 delays Deskew Time Setting Range The correction time is set within the following range 100 ns to 100 ns 4 15 suoljesodoQ UuOWWO gt 4 8 Using the Help Function Relevant Keys 0 a Gee e ee as Ele aca sranrisr0P SC eonosco SETUP or SPLAV COPY HAGE SAVE IMAGE SAVE O cS SEA Ce D ep Smere ENHANCED V DIV TIME DIV rone rosmon DELAY Qe The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Displaying a Help Window 1 Press HELP 2 Press the function key or soft key for which you want help Clearing the Help Window 3 Press HELP again to close the window Explanation Displaying a Help Window Pressing HELP displays the soft key menu which was in effect before HELP was pressed or displays a help
377. rrererrensrrrrrrrrrrrrerererrnn ne 8 15 Index 5 4 ails
378. ry convenient when you have to cancel the previous settings or when you have to restart measurement from the beginning Initialization Initialization means resetting parameters to their factory setting values For details on factory settings refer to the Appendix Settings which cannot be Initialized Date and time Communication or ethernet interface related settings SCSI ID number Setting parameters on storing and recalling function Setting the message language English or Japanese Canceling Initialization If you have performed initialization by mistake press the Undo soft key This will restore the previous settings used before the initialization was performed Initializing All Settings Turning the power switch ON while holding down RESET will start initialization This also initializes settings relating to the communication or ethernet interface SCSI ID No setting settings stored to the internal memory using the store recall funcitn and so on If settings are initialized using this method you will not be able to restore the previous settings suoeiado UuOwWWwOo gt 4 3 Performing Auto Setup Relevant Keys NAP SNOr HELP amp a j OO a a ee Clee a O TRIG D SIMPLE ENHANCED TIME DIV ACTION DELAY Tre The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Performing Auto Setup 1 Press SETUP 2 Press the Auto Setup soft key to perform auto setup
379. s IM 701710 01E 3 1 9 2 9 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 59 Turning channe ON OFF Se E E ieee cenit 5 1 Setting the Vertical Position of a Waveform cccccccccsessseecceeeeeeeeesaeesseeeeeeeeeesesesaaaaaeeeees 5 2 S leciing MputCOuUpINg eisrean 5 4 Selecting Frob Attenuation seissrssos T E a EA 5 6 Se MING The Offset Voltage iesniegts e ee a a EA e aae eE ATE 5 7 The Preset FuUnNCUON mererei annui a a NS 5 8 SE MING the Banawidt sssaaa a ai 5 10 STON CUE raosi ocaceuedt ca esate so aateat actioned tema se caenteeecenecgun tates 5 11 Using the Linear Scaling FUNCTION ccccceccceecccceeeeeeeeeeeseceeeeeesesesaeeeeaeeeeceeeeeesssaeaaeeees 5 13 Contents 5 10 Selecting the Timebase wack scene aes cee ial iii ec cele el el hs 5 15 Sit SAMT AN gee ene nen ne Cn en ele 5 17 Chpater 6 Triggering 6 1 Setting the Trigger Mode cccccccccceececceeeeeeeeeceeaeeaaeeeaaeeesseeesseeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseneeeees 6 1 6 2 Setting the Tigger Delay rarer N dnadeuceutiegxteds dncegesateconud 6 3 6 3 Setting The Moger POSHNA a e a A 6 4 GA SetMinG tie Hod OM TIME ear a epee dee cnn eee lees 6 6 6 5 Setting the Edge Trigger SIMPLE ciiisean a tere aiaa a 6 8 66 Setting the External Trigger SIMPLE asa A a AETA 6 11 6 7 Generating Triggers on the Power Signal SIMPLE cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 6 13 6 8 Setting the A gt B N Trigger ENHANCED cccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeessesseeeeee
380. s Af Approximately 0 3 div of hysteresis around the trigger level ZZ Approximately 1 div of hysteresis around the trigger level The value above are estimated values They are not strictly guaranteed Setting the Trigger Coupling Select from the following list of choices AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from the trigger source signal as the trigger signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as the trigger signal Turning ON OFF the HF Rejection Select 15 KHz or 20 MHz when you wish to use a signal source that is obtained by removing the high frequency components frequency components greater than or equal to approximately 15 kHz or 20 MHz from the trigger signal as the trigger source Setting the Hold Off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time Note If you wish to use only one pattern condition to activate the trigger use the pattern trigger If the status for condition A and condition B are set to Xs Don t care the trigger will not be activated 6 19 Bbunaebbi yp gt 6 10 Setting the Pattern Trigger ENHANCED lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 9 gt Relevant Keys ca mse eonoso SETUP PENY T E U IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT C HORIZONTAL fv ao o2 e The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 V DIV TIME DIV Operating Procedure Setting the Trigger Type 1 Press ENHANCED 2 Pressing the T
381. s Auto Scroll Automatically scroll the zoom position You can search for and display waveforms from the history memory that satisfy specified conditions Choose from the following two search methods Zone Set an area on the screen then extract and display only those waveforms that pass through the area Pass mode or do not pass through the area By Pass mode Parameter Extract and display only the automatic measurement results of the waveform parameters which meet the specified conditions Allows selection of cursor type from Marker Horiz Vert H amp V and Degree Capable of performing automated measurement of waveform parameters Automated measurement of waveform parameters within one period P P through Int2XY statistical processing of waveform parameters and statistical processing on the waveform parameters of historical data P P Max Min Ave Rms Sdev High Low OShot OShot Int1TY Int2TY Inti XY Int2XY Freq Period Rise Fall Width Width Duty Burst1 Burst2 Pulse AvgFreg AvgPeriod and Delay between channels Statistical processing results Statistics Min Max Avg Cnt and Sdv Waveform parameter computation Operation between waveform parameters and constants Operators are and Measure waveform parameters in different areas on the same channel X binary computation differentiation integration power spectrum inversion However select the range for the power spectr
382. s become true or when all conditions become false Setting the Trigger Source and Trigger Status Set the trigger status of the trigger source from the following three choices H The trigger source level is greater than or equal to the trigger level L The trigger source level is less than or equal to the trigger level X Do not set as a trigger source Selecting the Clock Channel Clock CH e Select None if the trigger is not to be activated in sync with the signal e Select the clock channel from CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 if the trigger is to be activated in sync with the signal e Select the trigger slope from the following f Rising 4 Falling Selecting the Trigger Condition e When Activating the Trigger Only on the Status Pattern Select the trigger condition from the following list of choices Enter Trigger is activated when the specified combination pattern is met Exit Trigger is activated when the specified pattern is no longer met CH1 Input_ CH1 H CH2 L CH3 X CH4 X CH2Input gt __ Condition Enter Pattern not Matched __ Pattern Matched A Trigger Condition Met 1 The DL1720 is not equipped with channels 3 and 4 e When Activating the Trigger in Sync with the Clock Channel Set the trigger condition from the following list of choices True Trigger is activated on the rising or falling edge of the clock channel while the status pattern is being matched False Trigger is activate
383. s left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left POSITION menu CLEAR TRACE RESET SHIFT condition TRIGMODE menu CURSOR menu Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left SIMPLE menu Same as left Same as left CH1 menu CH2 menu CH3 menu CH4 menu o o Select Same as left Return Enter Same as left Same as left Same as left Back Space Back Space Same as left Tab Space Bar Same as left gt D 5 2 x MISC menu HELP Caps Lock x gt Pp koy gt yiv a am eal aa lt X lt rm a O ke D 5 wm cs o O gt 43 ow Caps Lock Same as left IM 701710 01E App 17 Appendix 5 Assignment of Keys on the USB Keyboard Select Soft key1 Same as left Same as left Select Soft key2 Same as left Select Soft key3 Same as left Select Soft key4 Same as left Select Soft key5 Same as left Select Soft key6 Same as left Select Soft key7 Same as left Same as left Select Soft key1 Same as left Select Soft key2 Select Soft key3 Select Soft key4 Select Soft key5 Select Soft key6 F7 Select Soft key7 Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left Same as left u Same as left START STOP Same as left Q Same as left START STOP Same as left COPY IMAGE SAVE SNAPSHOT Same as left Scroll Lock Same as left Same as
384. s manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of improvements in the instrument s performance and functions Display contents illustrated in this manual may differ slightly from what actually appears on your screen e Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative listed on the back cover of this manual e Copying or reproduction of all or any part of the contents of this manual without YOKOGAWA s permission is strictly prohibited e A guarantee card is attached to the instrument The card will not be reissued so please read it carefully and keep it in a safe place e The TCP IP software used in this product and the documentation for that TCP IP software are based in part on BSD Networking Software Release 1 licensed from The Regents of the University of California e Microsoft MS DOS Windows and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries e Adobe Adobe Acrobat and PostScript are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems incorporated e Zip is a registered trademark or trademark of lomega corporation in the Unites States and or other countries e PC 9800 is a registered trademark of the NEC Corporation e UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group
385. s marked in purple on the panel become active 2 Press DISPLAY Selecting the Display Format 3 Press the Mode soft key to display the mode selection menu X Y Mode T Y 4 Prees the T Y X Y or T Y amp X Y soft key to set the mode X Y T Y xX Y T Y amp X Y Continue with steps 5 12 below if you selected X Y or T Y amp X Y Selecting the X Axis Mode DL1740 only 5 Press the X Axis soft key to select Single or Dual Select Display Single Dual KYI x 2 OFF pN Selecting the X Y Waveform DL1740 only 6 Press the Select soft key to select the desired X Y waveform 7 Press the Display soft key to select whether or not to display the X Y waveform that was selected in step 4 8 12 IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 8 8 X Y Waveform Display Setting the X and Y Axes 8 Pressing the X Trace soft key displays the channel menu 9 Press the soft key corresponding to the desired channel that you wish to set to the X axis The CH3 CH4 and Math2 soft keys are not displayed on the DL1720 Mode l CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mathi Math2 xX Y 5 es es E fC 5 000di 10 In asimilar fashion set the Y axis by pressing the Y Trace soft key Mode X AXIS Select Display CH1 CH2 Math1 x Y ingle Dual KYI xyz forF pN E E Setting the Display Range 11 Press the T Range1 T Range2 soft key Turn the jog shuttle to set the display T Range1 12 In asimilar fashion
386. s or stops acquisition according to the selected trigger mode The indicator above this key is lit during acquisition Jog and Shuttle Dials jog shuttle You use these dials to set numerical values move the measurement cursors select items from menus and perform other such selection operations The jog dial changes the value in fixed steps as you rotate it With the shuttle dial the step size increases as you turn the dial further RESET Key Resets values that you have changed using the jog and shuttle dials SELECT Key Activates the menu item that you have highlighted using the jog or shuttle dial Arrow Keys lt gt keys Use these keys to shift the column position of the numerical value to be set by the jog or shuttle dial SNAP SHOT Key Section 4 6 Repeats acquisition while retaining the currently displayed waveform on the screen CLEAR TRACE Key Section 4 6 Deletes the currently displayed waveform HELP Key Section 4 8 Sets help window ON or OFF Soft Keys Selects the menu that is displayed at the bottom of the screen 2 5 Hed 4283 JO 9s pue oweyN 2 3 Screens A 2000 11 17 ae SS Normal B Stopped 248 7 CH2 10 1 0 500 U div I DC Full C D Tihet H OkS S 2ms div CHi 10 1 0 500 U diy DC Full L K Edge CH1 F Auto N 7i DISPLAY Format Interpol J Graticule Scale Trace ccumu late Value Label Next Dual Sine A O GY OFF on O
387. s the Trace soft key to select the desired waveform XY2 is not available on the DL1720 so there is no Trace setting Type Trace i Cursori 3 00div Vertical xY2 fs Cursor2 3 00div Moving the Cursor 5 Press the Cursor1 Cursor2 soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Cursor1 6 Turn the jog shuttle to move Cursor1 7 Move Cursor2 in a similar fashion 2000 12 13 12 55 07 Jo Normal 25 7 1MS s Stopped insfiv CH1 10 1 50 0 U diy DC Full Cursor1 ae ee Cursor2 Edge CH1 F Auto 0 0 V T 3 000MS 6 25000U x Y 6 25000U CURSOR Type Trace Position Marker X 2 3 600di If the jog shuttle control is set to both Cursor and Cursor2 both cursors are moved IM 701710 01E 9 7 SISAJEUY WAOJOARM 9 1 Measuring Waveforms Using For Marker Cursors When Displaying the X Y Waveform Selecting the Marker Refer to steps 1 3 to set the Type to Marker OFF orizontal Vertical Marker nm ee ee 4 Press the Trace soft key to select the desired waveform XY2 is not available on the DL1720 so there is no Trace setting CURSOR CURSOR Type Trace Position Marker XYZ 3 000di Moving the Cursor 5 Press the Position soft key to set the jog shuttle control to Position 6 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor As the cursor is moved the displayed value of Position changes 2000 12 13 12 55 07 Jo Normal Stopped 25 7 1MS 5s 1ms div CH1 10 1 50 0 V
388. se 8 4 IM 701710 01E 8 3 Changing the Graticule lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 17 gt Relevant Keys OCL TTT LINS OO MEASURE arm Fie msc cono co maTH ee ae MENU pond rice Gcal a 400 samsron stanrisror CserunG oisecayy IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT C HORIZONTAL 4 neo SEARCH O TRIG D SIMPLE ENHANCED V DIV TIME DIV ACTION DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press DISPLAY 2 Press the Graticule soft key to select one of the three graticule types Format Interpol Graticule Trace Accumulate Label Dual Sine y EB DFF ON DFF ON OFF The graticule type can be selected from the following 3 types Explanation D D lt 2000 10 25 11 25 11 J ick Normal 2000 10 25 11 25 big i jjiok Normal Stopped 95 AMS s _ Ainsftiv Stopped 4 1MS s 1msiiv r 7 T lt lt Maintiok gt gt i 7 i q 2 lt lt Main 10k gt gt Edge CH1 F Edge CH1 F Auto Auto oou Format Format Single Single 2000 10 25 11 26 14 J ick Normal 95 Stopped y 1MS S_ 1Ms div lt lt Mainf 10k gt gt Edge CH1 F Auto 0 0U DISPLAY Format Interpol Graticule Sca Ha Trace ccumu late Labe1 Next Val Single Sine y E EX BFF ON DFF ON OFF 172 IM 701710 01E 8 4 Turning Display of the Scaling Value ON OFF
389. se soft key to select Int or Ext ACQ Mode 5 i iti Time Base Norma 1 Inf inite ON ON Ext Threshold Setting If EXT Clock 3 Ifyou have selected use of an external clock you must now set the threshold level This setting is identical to the trigger level setting refer to Section 6 5 Setting the Edge Trigger for the procedure Note that you must set the trigger source to EXT before setting the level IM 701710 01E 5 15 SOXY e UOZIIOH pue eo1 10 5 10 Selecting the Timebase Explanation 5 16 Selectable Timebases Timebase can be selected from the following three types INT Internal clock signal EXT IN Clock signal input to the EXT TRIG IN EXT CLOCK IN TRIG GATE IN terminal When EXT IN is Selected Input a clock signal to the EXT CLOCK IN EXT TRIG IN TRIG GATE IN terminal on the rear panel or the terminal labeled EXT on the front panel of the DL1720 The clock signal must conform to the specifications given below Item Specifications Connector Type BNC Maximum Permissible Input Voltage 40 V DC ACpeak or 28 Vrms 10 kHz or less Frequency Range 40 Hz to 20 MHz continuous clock only Minimum Input Level 0 1Vp p Input Impedance Approx 1 MQ and 18 pF 1 MQ and 20 pF for the DL1720 Threshold Level 2 V in 5 mv resolution for the DL1740 1 V in 5 mv resolution for the DL1720 with the 1 V range selected 10 V in 50 mv resolution for the DL1720 with the 10 V range selected Sampling Jitter 1
390. seTuP pisem oer mace sAvE o SHI lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 22 gt NAP SNAP HELP SEARCH O TRIG D oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED V DIV TIME DIV ACTION DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Statistical Processing 1 2 Press MEASURE Pressing the Mod soft key displays the automated measurement mode menu MEASURE Mode a a Cycle Mod le T Range1 Item Delay 5 000di Next OFF Setup Setup ON f6T Range2 1 2 5 000di Press the Statistics soft key to select the statistical processing MEASURE tatistics Cycle History T Range1 tatistics Btatistics 5 000di Next T Rangez 1 2 5 600di Pressing the Item Setup soft key displays the measurement parameter menu and the measurement channel menu MEASURE Mode a a Cycle Mod le T Range1 Item Delay 5 000di Next tatistics Setup Setup ON f T Rangez 1 2 5 000di Press the soft key corresponding to the desired measurement channel The CH3 CH4 and Math2 soft keys are not displayed on the DL1720 0 P P co Freq AvgFreq 0 Max 0 Period AvgPer iod Min Rise IntiTY 0 Avg Fall Int2TY 5 Rms Width Intixy co Sdey Width Int2xy High Duty Low Burst1 co 0Shot Burst2 OShot Pulse All Clear_ Copy To All Trace_ MEASURE Dual Area DFF ON CH1 Turn the jog shuttle t
391. sen from AZ and A If AZ is selected a wide hysteresis level is provided to eliminate fluctuation in the trigger point thereby resulting in a Stable displayed waveform However in this case the trigger points become uncertain Thus select A if you want to activate a trigger to detect small fluctuations in a waveform Trigger Source and Trigger Level lt Sections 6 5 to 6 13 gt Trigger Source Selects the signal for the selected trigger type The external trigger signal or the commercial power supply signal can also be used a trigger source Trigger Level Sets the voltage level used to judge trigger conditions such as trigger slope rise fall of a signal Trigger Hold Off lt Section 6 4 gt The trigger hold off function temporarily stops detection of the next trigger once a trigger has been activated For example when observing a pulse train signal such as a PCM code display of the waveform can be synchronized with repetitive cycles or when using the history memory function you may want to change the repetitive period as shown below Repetitive Period T Trigger Level Input Signal Trigger Ssource Signal Trigger Signal Restricted by Hold Off Time t When Rise is selected as the trigger slope 1 12 IM 701710 01E 1 3 Setting a Trigger Trigger Delay lt Section 6 2 gt Normally the waveform around the trigger point is displayed However th
392. short the fuse holder The power fuse used on this instrument is specified as follows Maximum Rated Voltage 250 V Maximum Rated Current 4 A Type Time lag Standard VDE SEMKO UL CSA SEV certified Part Number A1352EF Replacement Procedures Follow the procedures below to replace the power fuse IM 701710 01E 1 2 3 rR Turn OFF the main power switch rear panel on the right Unplug the power cord from the power outlet Press the dented fuse holder section of the rear panel with a Philips screwdriver and turn it in order to remove the fuse holder Remove the burned out fuse from the tip of the fuse holder Place a new fuse in the fuse holder and place the fuse holder back in its original position A f a fa fpe pfaf afifefefsfalifele f D A D N f ZF r f Q Ke M y AEA O G G O WO 7 VATA 15 11 a uoi 2 dsuj pue soueuUdj UleW HunooysajqnoIL 15 6 Recommended Replacement Parts 15 12 The three year warranty applies only to the main unit of the instrument starting from the day of delivery and does not cover any other items such as expendable items items which wear out Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for replacement parts Parts Name Limited Life Built In Printer Under normal usage 120 rolls of paper part No B9850NX LCD Back Light Approx 25000 hours when used continuously The following parts are wear out parts We recommend you replace them periodicall
393. shuttle to move the cursor to Upper 14 Pressing SELECT displays a menu used to set the upper limit of the waveform display 15 Turn the jog shuttle to set the upper limit and press SELECT 16 Set Lower in a similar fashion Note If you select Auto you cannot set Upper and Lower Setting the Unit 17 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Unit 18 Using the keyboard that appears when SELECT is pressed enter the unit using four characters or less 9 33 SISAJEUY WWAOJOARM 9 5 Adding Subtracting and Multiplying Waveforms Explanation 9 34 Smoothing 19 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Smoothing 20 Press SELECT to select ON or OFF Note For details regarding smoothing see section 9 10 Smoothing Entering Labels 21 Press the M1 Label soft key to display the keyboard then enter a label See section 8 5 Setting the Waveform Labels for information about displaying labels Set Math2 in a similar manner as necessary 22 is eee Stopped 169 OkS S 2Ms div lt lt Maint 10k gt gt CH1 16 1 0 500 Udi DC Full Mathi C1 C2 Edge CH1 F Auto 0 000 V MATH Mi DisplayjaMi Setup M1 Label Z Display ja MZ Setup Nz Label OFF DN C1 C2 Mathi ON C3 C4 Mathz Addition subtraction and multiplication can be performed between the following channels DL1740 Math1 CH1 CH1 to CH4 CH2 CH1 to CH4 Math2 CH3 CH1 to CH4 Math1 CH4 CH1 to CH4 Math1 Math1 a
394. six printer formats are supported ESC P ESC P2 LIPS3 PCL5 PS PostScript 13 15 uodo ddej19 U JOUIBUI 3 13 6 Using the Mail Function Fixed Interval Relevant Keys Operating Procedure lt For a description of this function refter to page 1 30 gt Creff msc Jfonoad mamn PHASE X Y MEN JEN SETUP SPLA COPY MAGE SAE GHT SEARCH O TRIG D o V DIV TIME DIV oO nee ACTION DELAY cn2 SIMPLE ENHANCED The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Mail Settings 1 2 11 12 13 16 Press MISC Press the Network soft key to display the Network menu MISC A A A A A alibrationRemote Cnti SCSI ID Network Pystem Cnfgj Overview Next z Press the Mail Setup soft key to display the mail settings menu A a a a a a TCP IP User Mail Net Drive f Net Print Others Connect Setup Account Setup Setup Setup Log List Move the cursor to Mail Server using the jog shuttle then press SELECT to display the keyboard Mail Server abcd wxyz co jp Mail Address nopqrefgh co jp Comment Interval PFF Settings for the following items can be input directly using a USB keyboard i MailBaseTine Mail Test MISC a a a a User Mail Net Drive f Net Print Others Connect Account Setup Setup Setup Log List Enter the mail server name If you are using a DNS specify it by name Move the cursor to Mail
395. sseseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 29 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters 9 11 Automated Measurements cccceececeeceteeseeeeeseeseeessenes 9 25 Auxiliary Input Output Section 0 eee 16 8 PV AGO Oats eae e E nea usenh taloiagudaneen 7 3 PVCTAGING Mode ercan a cree naveniileareee erent 1 14 B BACKION dieran concedes evgadete ue E 14 5 Bandwala a n dads 0a a a 5 10 Banawa LM su norane 1 4 Biar ZatiOT ss enirar eera e E aredantunvabdes 1 24 IM 701710 01E BINAY aen a E anmeo oe 11 14 Binary COMPULALION seeriasse iar a 9 36 Binay l c erence aero rer rete cre ner a S App 13 Binary FORMAL sssvecSsaviivegazepiceedbtaasvavagsanssce a E ri 11 14 BIOCK Diagram a N 1 1 BOX Averag eein anian 1 15 7 3 7 6 BOX AY ec toishass canna a a a aa 7 6 BIGMIGCSS seo nes isausecvegaactsc set bes eaveeneatessebbieisavemiaiasieteles 14 1 Built in Printer c cee eeceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeens 10 1 10 3 16 7 Built in Storage aisescs ecb reseitehenier sss a carsales 16 7 Buzzer ACTION a eyesore entrees 6 39 9 54 9 59 C Calibra Or aiee e a a EE N 4 14 Canceling the Offset Voltage ccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 7 Changing the Directory File Name ccccceeeeseeeeeeeees 11 34 Changing the File Attributes ccccecececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 26 Checking the System Condition cceeceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 15 10 Clear Trace wisi ie waste a een a n 1 32 4 13 GEE AR TRACE KEY reri e
396. ssuming 1 1 probe attenuation Type Repetitive waveforms that are not complex When the input coupling is set to DC Note The auto setup function may not operate properly in some cases such as when the waveform contains a large DC offset or high frequency components Settings Made by Auto Setup Waveform Acquisition and Display Acquisition Mode Acquisition Count Record Length Interleave Mode Timebase Accumulation Mode Zoomed Waveforms Vertical Axis Settings V div Offset Voltage Coupling Bandwidth Display ON OFF Position Horizontal Axis Settings T div Trigger Settings Trigger Mode Trigger Type Trigger Source Trigger Level and Slope Trigger Coupling HF Rejection Hysteresis Holdoff Time Trigger Position Trigger Delay Trigger Gate Math Setting Scalling Normal Infinite 10k OFF Int OFF Traces set ON for display Set to a value so that the absolute value of the input waveform is between 1 6 div to 4 div approximately O V If Adjust Mode is 0 V Other than DC 50 Q DC 1 MQ DC 50 Q DC 50 Q FULL Turns ON the channels of which the absolute value of the amplitude is at least 20 mV 1 1 0 div Set so that screen displays 1 6 to 4 periods of the auto setup waveform with the shortest period Auto Simple Channel with the longest period and an amplitude of at least 1 div Level is 1 2 the trigger source amplitude Slope is rising The center level of the ma
397. t CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Mode Press SELECT to select ON Source MEASURE Mathi Math2 Measure Polarity Edge Count Degree Reference Trace LH tl Baye Count Polarity source Math Math2 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Polarity under Measure Press SELECT to select whether to measure the rising edge f or the falling edge Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Edge Count under Measure Press SELECT and turn the jog shuttle to select on which rising or falling edge to make measurements Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Reference Press SELECT to select whether the trace or the trigger is to be the reference Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Trace Pressing SELECT displays the reference waveform menu Turn the jog shuttle to select the reference waveform then press SELECT CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1720 Mode Measure Polarity Edge Count Reference Trace Polarity Edge Count CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Source MEASURE Math1 Math2 IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 22 23 24 29 9 2 Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Polarity under Reference Press SELECT to select whether to make the rising 4 or the falling edge the reference Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Edge
398. t PRESET Select Type Probe U7div je Offset lrig Lvi Exec All User 10 1 50 0 V 0 0 U 0 0 V The preset function automatically sets each key setting such as the V div input coupling and trigger level to the optimum value for measurement of TTL or ECL signals or to an arbitrary value Also you can automatically set the appropriate values for use with the current probe 700937 701930 sold separately This function allows you to make settings for a selected channel or for all channels at the same time Settings Made by a Preset TTL ECL User Input Coupling DC 1 MQ DC 1 MQ DC 1 MQ Trigger Coupling DC DC DC Probe 1 1 10 1 100 1o0r 1000 1 is available V div 1 V div 200 mV div Arbitrary 2 Offset Voltage 2 5V 1 3 V Arbitrary 2 Trigger Level 1 4 V 1 3 V Arbitrary 1 2 V div when probe setting is 1000 1 2 For details about the setting ranges see Sections 5 5 5 8 and 6 5 Current 700937 Current 701930 Input Copuling DC1 MQ DC1 MQ Probe 1 1 1 1 Linear Scaling ON ON Linear Scaling Coefficient ValueA 1 0000E 01 ValueA 1 0000E 02 ValueB 0 0000E 00 ValueB 0 0000E 00 Units A A Scale Value Display ON ON 5 9 S XY e UOZIIOH pue ed1110 5 7 Setting the Bandwidth Relevant Keys amp OCT LITT Taree aca stanrisroP SETUP eo a ce ae O SHIFT ONET A SEARCH O TRIG D sme ENHANCED Operating Procedure f lt For a description of this function refer to pag
399. t rE naan 1 8 6 14 A Delay BINGOT eeno aae 1 9 6 17 Accumulate Mode sri a E tare 8 10 Accumulated Waveform Display cccecceeseeeeeeeees 1 16 8 9 ACCUMUIAtION Peri0 ie i e a A 8 10 PCCULACY TSE iier a caneatennaceueedsaued 15 9 BOO Key aiana etna elieee 2 5 ACQUISITION MOG cccccceseeeeeeeceaeeeseeeeseanenseeeenens 1 14 7 2 Action Mall FUNCT OM aoteana nina 13 19 ACUON OR MHOGCF is et enncvers mysenrete ences eintwinietees 1 11 6 38 AOAN ferreneetee erent oun err ee eran correct ey cee erin reer errr me 9 32 AJAO asesino a stan hae i arte be teh sant 1 24 ANGIE CUS OM ities dust uate le ded aa ea es Le 1 21 9 4 POWs CY S cicanie a e 2 5 FAs esta eae ne E AN 11 14 BSG ll FORMA soe ten O e AN 11 14 ASCII Header File Format cccccccsssseseesseceeseeeees App 10 TANG 018 C72 ROSE a nt en Pe SR ea eee Pa 4 15 Auto aliDraton sceeisden ence oes siete a 4 15 Auto Level Mode ccccceceeccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeanes 1 11 6 1 Auto Measurement Mode cccccseeececeeeeeeeeeceeseaeeeeeees 9 14 PUTO MOGO resina cat acetate te eae cil ae 1 11 6 1 Auto Naming Function ccccssesseeeeeeees 10 13 11 15 11 20 AUO SCION rnis a a dndeahinant sala entih tutoan santas 1 28 8 28 Auto Scroll SCare escceesece ws enact eee aes 8 27 AUO SOLD raia 1 31 4 8 Automated Measurement ccccesceceeeeteeseeeeseeseneeseeaes 1 22 Automated Measurement Mode cccccc
400. t soft key displays the format menu Utility FILE Function Ja a edia Info Format Format 7 Press the Format Type soft key to select Norm or Quick Fornat__ Function Ja a ormat Type edia Info Format Exec Format orm Selecting the Format Type for the SCSI Device Option 6 Pressing the Format soft key displays the format menu Utility FILE Function Ja Py edia Info Format Format Selecting the Number of Partitions 7 Turn the jog shuttle to select a value from 1 to 5 Function fa PartitiowFormat Type edia Info Format 2 Quick Selecting the Format Type 8 Press the Format Type soft key to select Norm or Quick Fornat Utility FILE IM 701710 01E Explanation IM 701710 01E 11 4 Formatting the Storage Medium e Executing Canceling the Format Operation OK Cancel 9 Pressing the Exec soft key displays the alert dialog box 10 Turn the jog shuttle to select OK or Cancel Format ka 11 Selecting OK and pressing SELECT starts the format operation Selecting Cancel and pressing SELECT cancels the format operation Function fa Format Please Confirm FDO will be formatted by 2HD 1 44M format Cancel Utility LE Format Viewing the Media Information Follow steps 1 5 to select a media 6 Pressing the Media Info soft key displays information about the medium that was selected in step 5 File Name Media Nane Media Size
401. t the measured voltage results into the for example current or temperature measurement unit of your signal SOUICe Y UNIT AX B Y result of linear scaling Cursor Measurements lt Section 9 1 gt IM 701710 01E For V Cursors You can use the following cursor types to analyze the waveform data e V Cursors Vertical Two vertical broken lines V cursors are displayed The time from the trigger position to each V cursor and the time difference between the V cursors are measured In addition the voltage of the signal at each cursor position and the voltage difference between the cursors are measured e H Cursors Horizontal Two horizontal broken lines H cursors are displayed The values in the vertical direction of each H cursor and the difference between the two are measured e Marker Cursors Markers Use this feature to place one or two markers onto the waveform You can then read the voltage value and time value relative to trigger position at each marker and the voltage difference and time span between the markers e Angle Cursors Degree Set the measurement zero point and the end point and then using the angle corresponding to the width between the two as a reference measure the angle of the two angle cursors Cursor1 For Marker Cursors Marker2 2000 10 31 16 16 16 JEA o Normal 2000710731 11 11 25 JE joxs Normal 5 7 500kS S ZMs div Stopped 21 T Stopped 26 500k57 5S ZMS div Marker4 Mark
402. ted for the selected medium Media Name Name of the medium Media Size Total capacity Used Space Used space Vacant Space Free space Partition Size Number of partitions Note e Formatting a medium containing data erases the data completely e The time it takes to format a floppy disk is approximately one and a half minutes e The time needed to format a 250 MB Zip disk is approximately 15 minutes for Norm approximately 10 s for Quick e A floppy disk cannot be formatted if it is write protected e Never format when the instrument is connected to a PC via a SCSI cable e Floppy disks having a format other than the ones listed in this section cannot be used e fan error message appears after the format operation the floppy disk may be damaged e Disks formatted to MS DOS format on a PC can also be used e The Quick logical format only clears initializes the directory entry and FAT information If you need to check for bad sectors do a physical format Normal e When data are written to an external SCSI device that has bad sectors access error 604 Media failure may occur in which case no more data can be written When you are using a medium for the first time or if the medium can no longer be read do a Norm format If you want to format a disk that you have been using before do a Quick format e This function can not be used in conjunction with FTP server function FTP client function or LPR client function
403. ter buzzer or saved to a floppy disk a Zip disk each time a trigger is activated Also sends a mail Ethernet interface option Trigger Coupling lt Sections 6 5 and 6 8 to 6 13 gt Input coupling can also be switched for trigger sources as it is for input signals Select the type of input coupling which is most suitable for the trigger source signal The following two types of input coupling are available for trigger source signals e DC The trigger source signal is used as the trigger source without any process e AC The trigger source signal is used as the trigger source after DC the content has been removed from it A trigger can always be activated if the trigger level is set to 0 V as long as the signal s amplitude is one division or more IM 701710 01E 1 11 suonoun 4 1 3 Setting a Trigger HF Rejection lt Sections 6 5 and 6 8 to 6 13 gt Set HF rejection to ON when you want to remove high frequencies exceeding 15 kHz or 20 MHz from the trigger source This prevents a trigger from being activated unexpectedly due to high frequency noise Trigger Hysteresis lt Sections 6 5 and 6 8 to 6 13 gt If the trigger level width is not sufficient the trigger point fluctuates each time a trigger is activated if noise is present in the trigger source thereby resulting in unstable displayed waveforms To solve this problem a specified margin hysteresis can be added to the selected trigger level The hysteresis level can be cho
404. terminal Q GND The ground signal not the input signal is connected to the mputiermind attenuator in the vertical control circuit This method enables circuit observation of the ground level on the screen Vertical control circuit Input terminal DC 50 Q This is the same as DC 1 MQ described above except the 50 Q input impedance is 50 Q Please be aware of the maximum input voltage suonoun 1 2 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes 1 4 Probe Attenuation lt Section 5 4 gt A probe is usually used to connect the circuit to be measured to an input terminal Use of a probe provides the following advantages e The voltage and current of the circuit to be measured are not disturbed e A signal can be input without distortion e The measurement voltage range of the oscilloscope can be widened A 400 MHz passive probe is supplied with the instrument The probe attenuates the input signal by 1 10 When a probe is used the probe attenuation must match the instrument s attenuation setting so that the input voltage can be measured directly DL1720 DL1740 s attenuations of 1 1 10 1 100 1 and 1000 1 are provided When you use a probe other than the one supplied with the instrument set the instrument s attenuation so that it matches the probe s attenuation Bandwidth Limit lt Section 5 7 gt High frequency noise of 20 MHz or higher or 100 MHz or higher can be eliminated from the input signal Vert
405. ternal clock function is useful when you are observing a signal whose period varies or when you are observing a waveform by synchronizing it with the clock signal to IM 701710 01E be measured Setting the Time Axis When using the internal clock set the time axis scale as a time duration per division of the grid The setting range is 1 ns div to 50 s div The time range in which waveform is displayed is time axis setting x 10 as the display range along the horizontal axis is 10 divisions Original Waveform Not Inverted Vertical Position Inverted Waveform suonoun 1 2 Setting the Vertical and Horizontal Axes 1 6 Note Display of Time Axis Direction The sampled data is read into the acquisition memory and a waveform is displayed based on this data The number of data stored into the acquisition memory differs depending on settings such as time axis settings trigger mode and acquisition mode The number of display lines in the time axis direction on a 10 div screen is 500 lines Processing therefore varies according to record length as described immediately below for more details on the relation between time axis acquisition mode record length of acquisition memory and displayed record length refer to Appendix 1 e If displayed record length exceeds number of screen display points multiple data points are connected with a line and disp
406. th2 or Math1 for the DL1720 Level Set the level for determining High and Low The setting range is an on screen 8 div and the resolution is 0 01 div Polarity Choose from the following High When the waveform is higher than the specified level Low When the waveform is lower than the specified level Hysteresis Set the hysteresis The range for this setting is 0 3 div to 4 div Time Set the determination time T The range for this setting is 1 sample rate display range Start Point Set the starting position for the search The range for this setting is 5 to 5 div Display Position of the Searched Waveform Result Window When the zoom mode is set to Z1 amp Z2 or Main amp Z1 amp Z2 you can select whether to display the searched waveform in the Z1 or Z2 window Search Count The search can be carried out up to 1000 times When the type is edge the rising or falling edge is counted from the previous search position In addition the past search results can also be displayed Changing the Zoom Rate and Position The search results are displayed in the zoomed waveform display area As in the zoomed waveform the zoom rate and position can be changed 8 30 IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function Precautions to be Taken when Searching e Searching is not possible while the data acquisition is in progress e Searching is not possible on the computed results of the power spectrum
407. the Mail Function Action Mail Function Note _ When the action on trigger is started the specified operation is performed when the trigger is activated in the normal mode regardless of the trigger mode setting Number of Operations ACQ Count 1 to 65536 Repeats the operation the specified number of times Infinite Repeats the operation until the waveform acquisition is stopped Save to File Hard Copy Image Save Operation Operates according to the settings in the FILE COPY or Image Save menu File name of Image Save or Save to File Saved using AUTO Name For details see section 10 4 Storing Screen Image to the Storage Medium or section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Send Mail Operation Sends e mail messages to the address specified through MISC gt Network gt Mail Setup gt Mail Address Precautions to be Taken when Setting the Action On Trigger e Action on trigger cannot be used when the action mode is Average or Box Average e The settings cannot be changed during an action on trigger Trigger Mode The trigger mode is set to Single 6 39 Bbunaebbi yp gt 6 16 Setting the Trigger Gate Relevant Keys NAP SNOr HELP MATH Reser eect ENC case 002 aca stanrisror SETUP rT to WAGE SAVE O SHIFT Cm A HORIZONTAL A SEA O TRIG D cD SIMPLE ENHANCED TIME DIV ACTION DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Oper
408. the Manual This user s manual consists of 16 chapters an Appendix and an Index as described IM 701710 01E below Chapter Title i 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Functions Name and Use of Each Part Precautions During Use Common Operations Vertical and Horizontal Axes Triggering Acquisition and Display Display Waveform Analysis Output of Screen Data Saving and Loading Data to and from the Storage Medium Content Introduces the unit s features functions and operating principles Please read this information to familiarize yourself with the unit s capabilities This chapter does not present operational details Briefly explains the significance and use of the unit s controls connectors and screen displays Includes page references to help you find detailed information quickly Presents safety precautions and explains how to install connect up and switch on the unit Also explains how to connect the probes and how to set the date Explains basic operations including acquisition start stop automatic setup parameter reset snapshots trace clearing and calibration Explains settings related to vertical voltage and horizontal time axes Vertical axis settings include channel on off input coupling probe attenuation and voltage sensitivity Explains how to set up and use triggers to control timing of waveform acquisition Includes description of trigger modes trigge
409. the SCSI device Check the medium Check the floppy disk s format type Files stored on other models DL AG series cannot be loaded Execute after accessing is finished Press START STOP to stop thewaveform acquisition Check the file Upgrade the ROM version upper compatible Check the presence of data to be stored Servicing is required Check whether the data file in a format that is Supported Change the file extension Turn OFF the P P compression Set the release arm to the HOLD position Load a paper roll Turn OFF the power immediately Servicing is required Turn OFF the power immediately Servicing is required Check that the printer is installed Servicing is required Servicing is required Reference Section 11 5 to 11 9 11 12 11 3 11 5 Chapter 11 11 5 to 11 9 11 12 11 10 11 10 11 10 11 4 10 1 10 1 15 3 a uoi 2 dsuj pue sueuazuienN Hunooys jqnolL 15 2 Messages and Corrective Actions Code 693 694 695 696 697 701 703 704 705 706 707 711 712 713 726 1217 728 729 730 731 732 733 735 736 137 738 750 751 752 753 754 755 15 4 Message Printer offline Out of paper Printer is in use Cannot detect printer Turn ON the printer Check connectors No files supporting the thumbnail display window Cannot be executed while data acquisition is in progress There is no data to be undone
410. the Source 11 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel to be searched and press SELECT CH3 CH4 and Math2 are not displayed on the DL1720 Clock CH Interval Source w Se lect CH2 Thr Upper Thr Lower Pattern CH3 CH4 0 8 HXXXXXXX XXX XXXXXXXX XXX Clear Patt Start Point Type Serial Pattern e Set the Thr Upper 12 Turn the jog shuttle to set the level used to determine Low and press SELECT You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the level to 0 V e Set the Thr Lower 13 Turn the jog shuttle to set the level used to determine High and press SELECT You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the level to 0 V 8 21 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function e Set the Pattern 14 Press SELECT to select the pattern number A to D 15 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the desired bit position 16 Press SELECT to select H L or X If you click Clear Pattern all bits are set to X 17 Set other pattern numbers as necessary e Setting the Start Point 18 Turn the jog shuttle to set the start position of the search Press SELECT You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET sets the position to 5 div 19 Press ESC close the search condition setting dialog box Setting the Display Position of the Search Results
411. the acquisition is restarted previously acquired data are cleared e The snapshot function can also be used to retain the waveforms that are currently displayed on the screen The display can be updated without having to stop the waveform acquisition see next section IM 701710 01E 4 6 The Snapshot and Clear Trace Functions Relevant Keys lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 32 gt f X Y MENU __ MENU PHASE setup pispLay Copy mace save o SHIFT VERTICAL CCHORIZONTAT 4p TRIGGER Av SEARCH O TRIG D SIMPLE ENHANCED V DIV TIME DIV ACTION DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Explanation IM 701710 01E Snapshot Press SNAP SHOT The snapshot process will start Clear Trace Press CLEAR TRACE The clear trace process will start Averaging and measurement will also be started from the scratch The count is reset to 0 Snapshot This function retains the waveforms currently displayed on the screen To activate this function just press SNAP SHOT without stopping acquisition The currently displayed waveform will be retained Hence it is very useful when you want to compare waveforms The following operations are not available for snapshot waveforms e Cursor measurements and automatic measurements e Zoom and math operations The snapshot waveforms can be saved or loaded For details see section 11
412. the output data in the following formats The file extensions and file sizes reference value that are automatically assigned are also listed Output Data Format Extension File Size TIFF TIF 38 574 bytes approx 300 Kbytes BMP BMP 38 462 bytes approx 300 Kbytes Post Script PS 79 061 bytes approx 300 Kbytes When the color is turned OFF reference value The file sizes inside the parentheses are the sizes when the color is ON Color for TIFF and BMP Select ON ON Revers or OFF ON Outputs in 256 colors ON Revers Background color is not output ON GRAY Outputs in 16 shade greyscale OFF Outputs in Black amp White Comments You can add a comment string consisting of up to 20 characters on the screen and save the information Data Compression for BMP Files BMP formats can be compressed in RLE formats respectively and output However if color is OFF data in BMP format cannot be compressed e Save Destination A list of available storage media is displayed in the File List dialog box Examples FDO Floppy disk ZPO Zip disk SC5 SCSI device with an ID number of 5 SC5 1 Partition number 1 on SCSI device number 5 NDO Network drive available with the Ethernet interface option Floppy Disk Zip Disk and External SCSI Device Option The floppy disk the Zip disk and external SCSI device option are described in chapter 11 For the procedures related to formatting see chapter 11 Auto
413. the record length Change the record length Reference Section Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Reference Section 3 6 4 1 4 5 9 12 9 13 8 5 5 1 Sections 9 5 to 9 10 5 10 4 5 6 15 6 1 7 2 6 1 6 16 6 1 7 2 ia Pe aa Os 71 7 5 7 1 7 1 15 5 a uoi 2 dsuj pue sueuazuienN Hunooys jqnolL 15 2 Messages and Corrective Actions Code Message Corrective Action Reference Section 852 The operation is not possible when Unload the files 11 6 waveforms are loaded Unload the loaded files from the FILE menu 853 Setting or executing is not possible during Abort the search 7 8 7 9 the search operation 854 Search pattern does not exist Change the search conditions 8 9 Execute the search 855 Settings cannot be changed or executed Abort the search 7 8 7 9 during the history search operation 856 The record cannot be selected Check the record number using Show Map 7 8 7 9 857 History record does not exist History record is not created in the average 7 2 mode repetitive sampling mode or roll mode 858 Setting or executing is not possible during Set the history Display Mode to One 7 7 FFT recalculation Abort the operation by setting the history Display Mode to One 860 Cannot be configured or executed while Set the history Display Mode to One 7 7 updating the history all dis
414. then use the jog shuttle to create the zone 18 Repeat steps 15 17 to edit the zone 19 Press the Store as soft key to open the store as setting menu for the edited zone 20 Press the soft key corresponding to a storage location Zone Zone6 or Zone Zone3 for the DL1720 to select it O NO GO zone1 zonez zone3 zone4 ZoneS zone6 Quit amp TopMenu 5 66di 21 Press the Store Exec soft key to save the zone Edit Upper hole Part Lower 6 T Rangez 5 00div Quit Zone Editing 22 Press the Quit amp TopMenu soft key to return to the menu in step 3 If you press the Quit amp TopMenu soft key before pressing the Store Exec soft key the settings made up to that point will be inactive and you will return to the menu in step 3 Edit wz Upper hole Part Part ic gt Lower IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 9 13 GO NO GO Determination Using Zones Editing Existing Zones Edit zones that have been previously created 23 Instep 5 press the Redraw soft key 24 Repeat steps 6 22 to edit the zones Selecting a Determination Waveform 25 Press the Setup soft key to display the Setup menu 26 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Trace of Zonet Condition zone1 CH1 FAN Pm zonez C m p puT __1N_ Zone3 Zone4 Zone5 C mthi I AN pN zones C a p uy __1N_ Logic LAND __OR__ Sequence Single _ Continue ACQ Count 0 Buzzer co Save to File o Hard Copy
415. they do not match measured values cannot be read correctly When Using the FET Probe 700939 the Current Probe 700937 701930 or the Differential Probe 701920 A When using YOKOGAWA s FET probe 700939 current probe 700937 701930 or differential probe 701920 use the power supply for the probe provided on the rear panel of the instrument CAUTION Use the power connectors for the probes on the rear panel only for powering probes 700939 700937 701930 or 701920 Using the power connectors for any other purpose can damage the DL1720 DL1740 or the device that is connected IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 3 4 Connecting a Probe Precautions to be Taken when Using the FET Probe 700939 the Current Probe 700937 701930 or the Differential Probe 701920 When connecting the FET probe 700939 the current probe 700937 or 701930 or the differential probe 701920 to the probe power supply terminal on the rear panel make sure that the current does not exceed the range shown below Otherwise the DL1720 DL1740 operation may become unstable due to the activation of the excessive current protection circuit When each terminal is assigned names A through D Current Consumption of A Current Consumption B lt 400 mA Current Consumption of C Current Consumption D lt 400 mA Total Current Consumption of A Through D lt 600 mA The DL1720 is not equipped with terminals C and D On the DL1720 t
416. tically after each time out period Auto Level Mode Waveforms are displayed in the same way as in Auto mode if a trigger is activated within the time out period If no trigger is activated the center value of the amplitude of the trigger source section 1 3 is detected and the trigger level is changed automatically to this center value then a edge trigger is activated to update the displayed waveforms Half the Amplitude lt Trigger Level Amplitude Half the Amplitude Normal Mode Displayed waveforms are updated only when a trigger is activated Displayed waveforms will not be updated if no trigger is activated Single Mode When a trigger is activated displayed waveforms are updated only once then acquisition stops This mode is useful when you are observing a single shot signal Single N Mode This mode is useful when using the sequential store function refer to section 7 3 Waveforms are acquired and stored in different memory areas each time a trigger is activated then acquisition stops and the waveforms are displayed Acquisition is performed the specified number of times Acquired waveforms can be displayed together or they can be displayed individually This mode is useful when you want to detect a sudden abnormality in a waveform 2nd Acquisition Nth Acquisition 1st Acquisition Action On Trigger lt Section 6 15 gt The displayed waveform can be output to the optional built in prin
417. til you switch it off with START STOP The default count is Infinite You cannot change the acquisition count during measurement The new value is activated when the measurement is stopped e If Normal Envelope or BoxAverage mode 2 to 65536 in steps of 1 Infinite e f Average mode 2 to 65536 in steps of 2 Infinite 7 2 Acquisition Mode 7 4 Important Information about the Averaging Mode Averaging mode is useful when working with repetitive waveforms Correct averaging is not possible if the waveform has imperfect triggering since synchronization will be poor and the displayed waveform will be distorted When working with this type of signal set the trigger mode to Normal so that the waveform display is updated only when the trigger occurs See section 6 1 Roll mode display is disabled during averaging If you stop waveform acquisition by pressing START STOP the averaging process also stops Averaging restarts from the beginning when acquisition resumes If you are using simple averaging the DL1720 DL1740 terminates acquisition automatically when it completes the specified number of acquisitions as set by the acquisition count During repetitive sampling mode only the exponential averaging is performed IM 701710 01E 7 3 Using Sequential Store Function Relevant Keys lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 16 gt w0 GRACE O SETUP PET a ae ae O SHIFT C wm A SEA O TRIG D
418. to display the settings menu 6 Enter the IP address values from 0 to 255 using the jog shuttle IM 701710 01E 13 3 uodo ddej19 U JOUIBUIA 3 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP 13 4 Setting the Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask if you turned DHCP OFF in step 4 7 Move the cursor to the Net Mask field using the jog shuttle and press SELECT to display the settings menu 8 Enter the subnet mask address values from 0 to 255 using the jog shuttle Setting the Default Gateway Set the default gateway if you turned DHCP OFF in step 4 9 Move the cursor to the Gate Way field with the jog shuttle and press SELECT to display the settings menu 10 Enter the default gateway address values from 0 to 255 using the jog shuttle Setting the DNS 11 Move the cursor to DNS by turning the jog shuttle 12 Press SELECT to display the DNS setting menu TCP IP Setup DHCP IP Address 9 9 ALA Net Mask 253 253 253 9 Gate Way 9 9 9 9 a a a a a User Mail Net Drive f Net Print Others Comect Account Setup Setup Setup Log List 13 Press SELECT to set the DNS to ON OFF or AUTO AUTO available only when DHCP is ON When DNS is set to AUTO the domain name and DNS server name are automatically set by restarting the instrument If DNS is set to ON the domain name DNS server name and domain suffix are displayed If DNS is set to OFF check the network cable connection and restart the DL1720 DL
419. to M4 DX2 The difference between the X axis values of M1 to M2 DX3 The difference between the X axis values of M1 to M3 DX4 The difference between the X axis values of M1 to M4 e Angle Cursor Degree Set the measurement zero point position of reference cursor Ref1 and the end point position of the reference cursor Ref2 on the X axis within the screen and assign an angle corresponding to the width of Ref1 and Ref2 Using this angle as a reference this function measures the angle of the two angle cursors Cursor and Cursor2 DX1 The angle of Cursor from Ref1 DX2 The angle of Cursor2 from Ref1 DDX The angle difference between Cursor1 and Cursor2 DY1 The Y axis value of Cursor1 DY2 The Y axis value of Cursor2 DDY The difference between the Y axis values of Cursor and Cursor2 Range of reference width 1 to 720 Cursor types and Measurement Items Type When Displaying the X Y Waveform e H Horizontal Cursor Measures the Y axis value at the cursor Y1 The Y axis value at Cursor1 Y2 The Y axis value at Cursor2 DY The difference between the Y axis values at Cursor1 and Cursor2 e V Vertical cursor Measures the X axis value at the cursor When measuring the logic waveform with the V Coursor select a binary or 16 base measurement value Also choose the order of the data X1 The X axis value at Cursor1 X2 The X axis value at Cursor2 DX The difference between the Y axis values at Cursor1 and Cursor2 e Marker
420. to the right or left on the screen 0 100 t f mm Trigger Position IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 6 3 Setting the Trigger Position Points for Attention e If you change the trigger position while waveform acquisition is suspended the new setting will not become effective until acquisition is resumed and the waveform is updated e Note that cursor time measurements are with respect to the trigger position Changing the trigger position therefore changes the measurement values except during roll mode display e When you change the T div setting the time axis setting is rescaled with respect to the trigger position Bbunaebbi yp gt 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 12 gt Relevant Keys NAP SNAP HELP ca mse sone SETUP ae a IMAGE SAVE O SHIFT SEARCH r V DIV TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure During Simple Trigger 1 Press SIMPLE 2 Ifthe jog shuttle control is not set to Hold Off press the Hold Off soft key SIMPLE Source f Level Slope Coupling HF Reject Hysteresis qHold Off us CH1 0 0 V Ft AC pd T 6 68 3 Turn the jog shuttle to set the hold off period You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits In addition pressing RESET resets the value to 0 08 us 0 08 us SIMPLE Source e Level Slope Coupling HF Reject Hysteresis g
421. ts Siew edd et cece N eden Reb Whedbee aie 2 1 Operation Keys Jog Shutle KNobS ernia a a A E 2 3 ETDS NS AEA EOE ETEEN E nat een teat tea mst eure ue sacle E EOE ETET EI E AE ER AAS EE 2 6 Chpater 3 Precautions During Use 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 Precautions DUNNO USG cenie Salers Ei a 3 1 HYSTA ATOM ccc tiered a a a E a a deta ewteuts 3 3 Connecting the Power Cord escia a alin ee eee eect 3 5 Connecting a Probe sca a a a a el at 3 7 Compensating the Probe Phase Correction ccccesccccccceeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaseeeees 3 10 SOHNE HIE Dateand TMe sees elec at onl aa ar anemee a mud Memes se 3 12 Chpater 4 Common Operations 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 4 8 Entering Values and Character Strings cccccccccccceeeescaeeseseeceeeeeeseeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesaaaaes 4 1 mitaliin Setting S sekaa e e ee e stelead shes vabnetseeies 4 6 Performing AVTO SSUDA taceancepeast occ ceqanaientaueiaeetacatasd 4 8 Storing and Recalling Setting Parameters ccccccccceeseeeecceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesesesaaaeseeeeees 4 10 Starting Stopping Waveform Acquisition cccccccscssseeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessasaaaaeeeees 4 12 The Snapshot and Clear Trace Functions s cesceegscecsese decssateasauaseeseveed iseacevevecceesdtcaeleeut 4 13 72 1 6 9 erates sete ete ne E Nr cone eto 4 14 Using ihe Felis FUnGton 25 ccsesee sec eica e E awe eine einer eee 4 16 Chpater 5 Vertical and Horizontal Axe
422. tting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 1 kwords Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active When Envelope Mode is Active Interleave mode OFF Interleave mode ON Interleave mode Interleave mode Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON OFF ON Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed Sample Displayed rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word It is not possible to set these T div ss 7 de a i 100 s 2 s 100 100 cS ice 800 M NI ae et aA x 100 N 100 k a 20 50 ok 1M M M N 0 0 r Po oe 2 20 2 5 50 5 T 5 5k 5 1 1 10k 10ms fiok 20 k 50 k 200 k 500 250 100 k 0 0 k k k M M M G 1k t00us im 100ns soom 50 50ns 5oom 250 Changes to normal mode even when envelope mode has been set 1 For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active 2 Roll mode display is available in shaded sections 2 5 10 M 20 M 50 M 100 M 200 M 500 M 1 M 2G 5e M M 0 0 00 00 1k k k 1M M M G G o 5 1 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k 1k
423. tting is 15 s 10 rrr 13 4 Saving Screen Image Data to a Network Drive FTP Client Function Relevant Keys lt For a description of this function refter to page 1 29 gt ae NAP HELP OC LE LLL LN oo Cael msc X Y a SETUP DISPLAY i SEARCH O TRIG D m oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY POSITION TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Entering Settings for a Network Drive 1 Press MISC 2 Press the Network soft key and press the Net Drive Setup soft key to display the settings menu MISC a an a alibrationRemote Cnti SCSI ID Netuork Pystem Cnfgj Overvieu Next 1 2 a a a a TCP IP User Mail Net Drive Net Print Others Comect Setup Account Setup Setup Setup Log List 3 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to FTP Server then press SELECT to display the keyboard Net Drive Setup FIP server C O UU Login Name anonymous Password Time Out sec The numerical values for this item can be input directly using a USB keyboard i8 MISC A a a a a a TCP IP User Mail Net Drive Net Print Others Comect Setup Account Setup Setup Setup Log List 4 Enter the IP address of the FTP server address If you are using DNS you can specify it by name 5 Use the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Login Name then press SELECT to display the keyboard 6 Enter a login name of 15 characters or
424. tting the Trigger Slope Select the trigger activation method relative to changes in trigger source level from the following three choices f Activated when the trigger source changes from below the trigger level to above the trigger level rising Activated when the trigger source changes from above the trigger level to below the trigger level falling f Activated on either a rising edge or falling edge Setting the Trigger Coupling Select from the following list of choices AC Uses a signal that is obtained by removing the DC component from the trigger source signal DC Uses the trigger source signal as the trigger signal Setting the HF Rejection Set 15 kHz or 20 MHz when you wish to use a signal source that is obtained by removing the high frequency components frequency components greater than or equal to approximately 15 kHz or 20 MHz from the trigger signal as the trigger source 6 9 Bbunaebbi yp gt 6 5 Setting the Edge Trigger SIMPLE Setting the Hysteresis Sets a width to the trigger level so that the trigger is not activated by small changes in the trigger signal A Approx 0 3 div of hysteresis around the trigger level ZZ Approx 1 div of hysteresis around the trigger level The value above are estimated values They are not strictly guaranteed Setting the Hold Off See section 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time 6 10 IM 701710 01E 6 6 Setting the External Trigger
425. ttings Excludes date time settings settings related to the communication interface SCSI ID number setting settings stored to the internal memory using the store recall function and setting the message language Auto setup Function Automatically sets key settings to the optimum values for the input signals Store Recall Store and recall up to three arbitrary settings Preset Function Sets V div and trigger level etc to the optimum values for TTL or ECL signal measurement for the user settings and the current probe 700937 or 701930 sold separately Action on Trigger Hard Copy Save to File Buzzer and Send Mail are performed every time a trigger is activated Send Mail Sending mails for DL1720 DL1740 condition via Ethernet interface Calibration Auto calibration and manual calibration are possible Environment Setting Function Allows setting of screen color date time message language click sound ON OFF Probe Compensation Signal Outputs a square calibration waveform signal approx 1 Vp p approx 1 KHz from the Output Function probe compensation signal output terminal on the front panel Overview Function Shows system configuration Self Test Function Allows memory test key test printer test FDD Zip drive test SCSI test or a Accuracy test Help Function Displays help about settings Thumbnail Displays the thumbnail preview window containing screen image files 1 This function can be used when the Ethernet interface optio
426. ue Bulnes 2 11 9 Saving the Results of the Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters A N CAUTION Never remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or the floppy disk or the Zip disk icon is blinking This can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Relevant Keys SEARCH O TRIG D a 2 SIMPLE ENHANCED V DIV TIME DIV ACTION DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press FILE 2 Pressing the File Item soft key displays the file item setting menu FILE File Item a a a Save Load Utility Setup 3 Press the soft key corresponding to Measure FILE Setup Waveform Snap Measure Image pa Utility Doo A 2 Selecting the Destination Medium Directory The procedures are the same as steps 13 to 17 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Setting the File Name Comment The procedures are the same as steps 18 to 27 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Saving the File 4 Press the Save Exec soft key to save the file to the directory indicated in Path ___ The name of the Save Exec soft key changes to Abort ave Exec Measure ma ee Explanation IM 701710 01E 11 9 Saving the Results of the Automated Measurement of Waveform Parameters Canceling the Saving Operation 5 Press the Abort soft key to cancel the saving operation The name of the Abort soft k
427. um 1 k words 10 k words The phase of CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 can be shifted for monitoring Computation is performed using the phase shifted result Judgment is made on the automatically measured value of waveform parameters and the results are output to the printer or to a floppy disk a Zip disk external SCSI device buzzer or send a mail 1 This function can be used when the Ethernet interface option is installed IM 701710 01E 16 5 3 suol eoioeds 16 5 Functions Screen Data Output Item Specifications Built in Printer Option Outputs hard copy of screen External Printer Print the screen image to an external parallel printer via kKeyboard printer interface or Ethernet Supports ESC P ESC P2 LIPS3 PCL5 BJ commands and PostScript Eternet interface option Floppy Disk Zip Disk SCSI Output data formats PostScript TIFF BMP Network Drive 1 This function can be used when the Ethernet interface option is installed Data Storage Item Specifications History Memory Interleave mode ON Retain max 2048 waveforms recorded Interleave mode OFF Retain max 1024 waveforms recorded Floppy Disk Zip Disk SCSI Save and restore waveform data settings other data Network Drive 1 This function can be used when the Ethernet interface option is installed Other Functions Item Specifications Initialization Function Automatically resets key settings to the factory se
428. um rated voltage 240 V maximum rated current 10A Built in Media Drive Floppy disk drive Zip disk drive Built in printer Options P4 SCSl serial interface Ethernet interface Two passive probes Two power output connectors for the probes for the DL1 720 Four power output connectors for the probes for the DL1740 1 You can select a floppy disk drive or a Zip drive for the built in media drive 2 1 printer roll B9850NX included 3 Two passive probes 700988 come standard with the DL1720 DL1740 Example UL CSA standard power cord and full options gt 701710 D B5 C7 C10 E2 P4 NO Instrument Number When contacting the dealer from which you purchased your instrument please quote the instrument number IM 701710 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Standard Accessories The following standard accessories are supplied with the instrument Make sure that all items are present and undamaged Power Cord one of the following power cords Front Panel Protection is supplied according to the instrument s suffix codes Cover Clear B9989FA a ia e Probe Case UL CSA Standard VDE Standard BS Standard SAA Standard B9918EZ A1006WD A1009WD A1054WD A1024WD 400MHz Passive Printer Roll Fuse Rubber Feet User s Manual x1 Probe x2 Chart A1352EF x4 Communication Interface x1 B9850NX B9989EX Operation Guide x1 Z e gt A roll chart will be supplied only when the instrument is
429. umber Specifying the Files to Display in the File list Dialog Box You can specify the type of files to display e WVF CSV or FLD Displays only the files that have the same file format as the file being saved Displays all files on the medium Properties Lists the file name extension file size the date it was saved the attributes and the comment for the selected file 11 15 wnIip n BHe10 1S y wo pue o e eq Hulpeo7 pue Bulnes 2 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data 11 16 Unload If the loaded waveform is being displayed newly acquired waveform is not displayed even if the data acquisition is started In order to display the newly acquired waveforms loaded data must be unloaded from the appropriate channels Note If a key other than the Abort key is pressed during saving or loading an error occurs You cannot save or load while the data acquisition is in progress If you change the file extension on a PC for an example you will not be able to load that file A maximum of 36 characters can be displayed in Path File names are not case sensitive Comments are case sensitive In addition the following file names cannot be used due to limitations of MS DOS AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK The waveform data loaded from a file overwrites the data in the acquisition memory Once the memory is overwritten the old data cannot be recovered It is recommended that the current waveform data be saved before loadi
430. up Data through section 11 12 Changing the Storage Medium Directory File Name and Creating a Directory 13 9 uodo ddej19 U JOUIBUI 3 13 3 Saving Waveform and Setting Data to a Network Drive FTP Client Function Note e You must run FTP server software on PCs and workstations that will be connected to the network Also please note the following regarding the server software Use UNIX format for list output character strings returned by the dir command Make the home directory and its subdirectories writable You can t change to a higher directory than the home directory The newest file is not necessarily displayed at the top of the file list You cannot access files or directories having names longer than nine or more characters Depending on the server the lt gt notation for the top directory may not be displayed e Inthe following cases the time information in a file list will not be displayed accurately When WindowsNT uses an AM or PM timestamp When using a server that returns kanji or other non ASCII character strings in a list e The following are not possible Turning file protect ON and OFF on saved files Formatting a network drive Copying between network drives Renaming a file on the network e This function can not be used in conjunction with FTP server function e Before saving data to a network drive you must configure TCP IP see 13 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface TCP IP e Wh
431. urce Thr Upper Thr Lower Pattern 8 8 16 24 HXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX 32 40 48 56 63 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX Clear Pattern Pos fE Searched Pattern 6 966di4 No Match Start Point 5 000div Type Serial Pattern 8 20 IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function e Setting the Level When Clock CH is Set to CH1 CH4 7 Turn the jog shuttle to set the level and press SELECT You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the level to 0 V Clock CH Level Settings for these items can be input directly using a USB keyboard i8 Polarity Pattern JAJ_B C D 8 8 16 24 HXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX Clear Pattern Type Serial Pattern Setting the Polarity When Clock CH is Set to CH1 CH4 8 Press SELECT to select f or Setting the Hysteresis When Clock CH is Set to CH1 CH4 9 Turn the jog shuttle to set the hysteresis and press SELECT You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the hysteresis to 0 3 div Setting the Interval When Clock CH is Set to None 10 Turn the jog shuttle to set the interval at which to check the pattern and press SELECT You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the interval to the default value e Setting
432. utputting to a Network Printer cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 29 OVENI OW poan ebcenae N 15 10 P P P COMDPrESSION sirrettiin T 11 15 PAL ierre a aed A a Acne Sheth Sis 1 10 6 37 Paralel Pater ieie a a aa 8 28 Parallel Pattern Search snoessenneesnorsonrenernorrenreens 1 27 8 22 PASSWOTO soroetara eier E 13 10 13 13 13 22 Patern Moge Panan N 1 9 6 20 Phase COMCCHON oe iinei airaa a EA LET aA 3 10 PRASC SINGG ties tases r EEE 1 24 Phase Shifted Display cc csscsseeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 9 50 POI AMIN ea a a th Gai asten dee areata cntans 6 37 POSITION ROY raient et E EAE 2 3 Power Connectors for the Probes ccsceceeeeeeeeseeees 16 8 Power Cord aeeminnnn ea a e aa a es ii ili 3 5 POWER FUS E nr E 15 11 Power SOS CUM sice E A ER 9 45 Power Spectrum Display ccseccecececeesesensnesenensenenes 1 25 Power SWINGIN sear senor eat detect aun tate dtd made diy cared 3 6 Precautions During USE ieser ii 3 1 PROS CU aieiaeo a aaa a a e r autale Oops cdetidse 1 32 Index 3 Ea Index PreSet FUNCTION scossa e ie au wot e aaa 5 8 PRESET KOY hasier i 2 3 PTOVIOW siasa a Or E a E 10 5 Printer Formal eiieeii dives E E 13 15 Pnmer Nane seces a a E E NO 13 15 Printer ROWS MAE gical eunnen a daasSerseteciacdexss 10 1 Pomer TeS cies eae a A E A A 15 9 PRN KBD Terminal sserrssr sen 4 3 10 8 PrOD meua a ease 3 8 Probe Attenuation fsesedsesccosdcosescanchaceiveestesssosasennce 1 4 5 6 6 1
433. uttle to set the clock channel Press ESC and turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel that was set as the clock channel Press SELECT to select f or 4 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel to which the status to be set Press SELECT to select H L or X Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Condition Press SELECT to select True or False Setting the Level Hysteresis Trigger Coupling and HF Rejection of the Clock CH 14 Pressing the Level Coupling soft key displays a menu used to set the level coupling hysteresis and HF rejection On the DL1720 settings for CH3 and CH4 are not displayed The setting also applies to the A gt B N trigger See section 6 8 Level Coup ing Level CH1 0 0 vI z I DC I OFF CH2 0 0 vI r I DC I OFF cus o oov w I m OF Hys Coupling HF Rej The Level setting for each channel can be input directly using a USB keyboard a Type Pattern Coupling Setting the Hold Off 15 Note IM 701710 01E Set the hold off time according to the procedures given in 6 4 Setting the Hold Off Time and enhanced trigger 6 21 The trigger level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection settings apply to simple trigger Bbunaebbi yp gt 6 10 Setting the Pattern Trigger ENHANCED Explanation This function activates the trigger when all conditions set to multiple trigger source
434. veform Labels for information about displaying labels Set Math2 in a similar manner as necessary 2000 16 31 13 44 56 Jo Normal Stopped 169 7 500k57 5_ ZMs div CH1 10 1 0 500 Urdiy DC Full Math1 Invert C1 Edge CH1 F nuto 0 000 V MATH Mi DisplayaMi Setup M1 Label Z Display ja MZ Setup M2 Label OFF PN finvertcci Mathi ON C3 C4 Mathz Waveforms that can be Inverted The waveform is inverted by multiplying CH1 to CH4 and Math1 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 by 1 Scaling Set the upper and lower limits on computations Auto The upper and lower limits are set according to the computed result Manual The upper and lower limits can be set arbitrarily The range is 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Unit Unit can be set arbitrarily using up to four characters The specified characters are reflected in the scale values Smoothing See section 9 10 Smoothing 9 41 SISAJEUY WIOoJ neM o 9 8 Differentiating and Integration Waveforms lt For a discription of this function refer to page 1 24 gt Relevant Keys MENU__ MENU X Y 2 Cserup pispLav Cory mace savE jo sHrrr SEARCH O TRIG D oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure Turning ON OFF the Display 1 Press MATH 2 Press the M1 Display soft key and select ON to display Math1 and OFF to not display
435. veform display position selected in step 14 You can search 1000 times using the same conditions Displaying Previous Search Results 16 Press the Searched Pattern soft key to highlight the jog shuttle icon 17 Turn the jog shuttle to select one of the displayed search results numbers The higher the number the more recent the search result IM 701710 01E 8 10 Search Data Using Search and Zoom Function When Performing an Auto Scroll Search 1 Press SHIFT to activate the shift mode 2 Press ZOOM Selecting the Search Method Type 3 Press the Type soft key to display the search method selection menu SEARCH wpe fa 21 Mag 6 Z1 Pos Searched Setup Pattern Exec Edge x2 000di4 No Match E 4 Press the Auto Scroll soft key to select the search method SEARCH Edge Serial Width Parallel uto Scrol ifSearched Pattern Pattern Pattern Exec o Match Selecting the Scroll Direction 5 Press the Direction soft key to set the scrolling direction Type Direction Result Z1 Mag Window Xx 2 5 Auto Scroll lt lt 22 22 Mag x 2 5 Setting the Search Results Display Position When Zoom Mode is Z1 amp Z2 or Main amp Z1 amp Z2 6 Press the Results Window soft key to select Z1 or Z2 Type Direction Result Window x 2 5 Auto Scroll lt lt 22 fw 22 Mag x 2 5 Changing the Zooming Factor and Position 7 As you did with the zoomed waveform press the Z1 Mag Z2 Mag soft key then turn the jog s
436. veforms Using For Marker Cursors When Not Displaying the X Y Waveform Selecting the Marker Refer steps 1 3 to set the Type to Marker 4 CURSOR OFF orizontal Vertical Marker Degree Press the Select soft key to select a marker from M1 to M4 CURSOR Type Select Trace fg Pos x ursor Jun ump Exec Marker Mz M3 M CH1 3 100di to Z1 Selecting the Waveform to be Measured 5 6 Pressing the Trace soft key displays the waveform menu Press the soft key corresponding to the desired waveform The CH3 CH4 and Math2 soft keys are not displayed on the DL1720 Type j CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mathi Math2 Marker p Moving the Cursor 7 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor As the cursor is moved the displayed value of Position changes 2000 16 31 11 11 25 Be o Normal 21 7 Stopped 500k57 S5 ZMS div CH1 10 1 0 500 Vzdi y DC Full 645 833m Edge CH1 437 500MmU Auto 729 167nU 0 000 U 979 167m 104 167m CURSOR Type Select Trace i Pos x ursor Jum ump Exec Marker M2 M3 M CH1 3 100di to Z1 Note IM 701710 01E When the T div is not set to repetitive sampling mode and the averaging mode is not set to averaging mode the sampled data may not appear on the V cursor on the interpolated display area when less than 500 points of data exist within 10 divisions horizontally or when less than 250 points of data exist in the Z1Z2 display area for Main amp Z1 amp Z2 wavef
437. vidually the thumbnail function becomes disabled 11 33 WINIPs Helos y Wold pue o e eq Hulpeo7 pue Bulnes 2 11 12 Changing the Directory File Name of the Storage Medium and Creating a Directory A N CAUTION Never remove the medium disk or turn OFF the power while the access indicator or the floppy disk or the Zip disk icon is blinking This can damage the medium or destroy the data on the medium Relevant Keys PHASE SEARCH O TRIG D a cn2 SIMPLE ENHANCED o V DIV TIME DIV ACTION DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press FILE 2 Pressing the Utility soft key displays the utility setting menu and the file list dialog box FILE File Item a a a Save Load Utility Setup 3 Pressing the Function soft key displays the file function menu Function Ja a edia Info Format Format 4 Press the Rename soft key Utility Utility FILE Delete Copy Renane Make Dir Format Peer Changing the Directory File Name of the Storage Medium Selecting the Medium Directory 5 The procedures are the same as steps 13 to 17 in section 11 6 Saving Loading Waveform Data Changing the File Attributes 6 The procedures are the same as steps 6 and 7 in section 11 10 Changing the File Attributes Deleting Files 4 re 11 12 Changing the Directory File Name of the Storage Medium and Creating a Direct
438. w is ON set the window position width trigger coupling and HF rejection The settings are the same as the window trigger See section 6 13 Setting the Window Trigger Note The trigger level hysteresis trigger coupling and HF rejection settings apply to simple trigger and enhanced trigger 6 25 Bbunebbi yp gt 6 11 Setting the Width Pulse lt T Pulse gt T T1 lt PLS lt T2 Time Out Trigger ENHANCED 6 26 Setting the Pulse Width 12 Ifthe jog shuttle control is not set to Time press the Time soft key ENHANCED If the Width Type is T1 lt PLS lt T2 press the Time1 Time2 soft key ENHANCED Type idth Type fa re eTimei us Window eHold Off et Pattern Level 0 00 us Width T1 lt PLS lt T2 Coupling STimez us ON 0 08 0 00 13 Turn the jog shuttle to set the pulse width You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the pulse width to 0 001 us Time2 is reset to 0 002 us Setting the Window 14 Press the Window soft key to select either ON or OFF When the Window is turned OFF a trigger is activated on the time period over which the parallel pattern of the channel state H L and X is met or not met When the Window is turned ON a trigger is activated on the time period over which the parallel pattern of the window condition of each channel is met or not met ENHANCED Type idth Type fja FS fSTinetuS Window fgHold OFF et Patter Levely uS
439. waveforms with ringing and spikes Setting the Distal Proximal and Mesial Values Distal Prox Select the method of assigning the three levels that are used as references in measurements such as the rise and fall times e Percentage Set the distal value mesial value and proximal value using a percentage with respect to an arbitrary trace CH1 through CH4 Math1 and Math2 or CH1 CH2 and Math1 for the DL1720 with High set to 100 and Low set to 0 e Unit Set the distal value mesial value and proximal value of an arbitrary trace CH1 through CH4 Math1 and Math2 or CH1 CH2 and Math1 for the DL1720 to an arbitrary voltage 9 29 SISAJEUY WIOJ neM o 9 4 Performing Automated Measurements of Waveform Parameters on Dual Areas 9 30 Setting the Measurement Range T Range Set the measurement range of Areal using T Range1 and T Range2 Set the measurement range of Area2 using T Range3 and T Range4 In the initial setting the measurement range is 5 divisions of the display frame on the time axis You can limit this range The measurement range is specified using two vertical cursors for each area In Areal the measurement start point is the position where the fine dotted line is located and the measurement end point is the position where the coarse dotted line is located In Area2 both the measurement start point and measurement end point are where the fine dotted line is located The measurement ranges of Areal and Area2
440. wd FTP Error Cwd FTP Error Rm Corrective Action Press START STOP to stop the waveform acquisition Cannot undo because the data were cleared during initialization or auto setup Press START STOP to stop the waveform acquisition Wait until data output is complete Wait until the hard copy completes Turn OFF the compression setting Servicing is required Unload the files Increase Mag or widen the Time Range interval Pressing Copy again aborts the operation Unload the loaded files from the FILE menu Set at least one search pattern not to X Unload the loaded files from the FILE menu Aborted when Math Display is turned Off Check that there is at least one period of waveform within the measurement range Release the lock through Store Detail Select Waveform Snap or Measure Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings and connection Confirm the network settings and connection Reference Section 10 4 4 5 4 2 4 3 4 5 4 4 Chapter 10 10 2 10 3 10 2 10 2 8 9 11 6 99 9 3 4 4 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 Chapter 13 IM 701710 01E Code 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 785 786 797 Message FTP Error List FTP Error Mkdir FTP Error Rmdir FTP Error Get FTP Error Put FTP Error
441. window which contains information related to jog shuttle menu settings If a key is pressed or the jog shuttle is turned while a help window is displayed the help window relating to the displayed soft key menu or the jog shuttle menu will appear Clearing the Help Window Pressing HELP again while a help window is displayed will clear the help window 4 16 IM 701710 01E Chpater 5 Vertical and Horizontal Axes 5 1 Turning Channels ON OFF Relevant Keys NAP SNOr HELP amp ried ae ia OO SETUP er a Te T O SHIFT CHORZONTAL v e O TRIG D sme ENHANCED TIME DIV ACTION DELAY The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press one of CH 1 to CH 4 or CH 1 to CH 2 for the DL1720 to select the desired channel 2 Press the Display soft key to select ON or OFF CH 1 to CH 4 or CH 1 to CH 2 for the DL1720 can be pressed twice to turn the channels ON or OFF Stopped 674 S0OkS s _2ns tiv DC Full Edge CH1 F Auto 3 00 VY Display Position Coupling Probe Offset Bandwidth OFF PN o e0div ncine 10 1 oou Full The channels CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 can be displayed simultaneously When turned ON the indicators to the left of the channel keys light Explanation Note e The screen can be split into up to six display areas or 1 to 3 areas for the DL1720 Refer to section 8 1 A s
442. word S s gth word S s gth word 50s froo sok fioo sok fioo 50k 50k 10s 50k 50 k sok ik sok 400M_ 50k soom 50k 5k 5 10k 1M M M w D 3 p p 2 5 2 5 ar T ee 1 For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active 2 Roll mode display is available in shaded sections 00 00 00 00 1k 1k k k k k 1M 1M M M M M Kad H m pos te lt a IM 701710 01E App 3 ES x pu ddy Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 100 kwords Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active When Envelope Mode is Active Interleave mode OFF Interleave mode ON Interleave mode Interleave mode Rep OFF Rep ON Rep OFF Rep ON OFF ON Displayed Displayed Displayed Displayed Displayed rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len rate record len S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word S s gth word 50s 1G 100 k ee Seas ee ge etme are 1 For the setting enclosed by the bold line repetitive sampling is active 2 Roll mode display is available in shaded sections App 4 IM 701710 01E Appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axis Setting Sample Rate and Record Length Record length 250 kwords Rep Repetitive sampling mode When Mode other than Envelope Mode is Active When
443. work On the DL1720 DL1740 you can specify the host by name instead of by IP address when using the FTP client function see sections 13 3 and 13 4 or the LPR client function see section 13 5 Set the domain name the DNS server address default is 0 0 0 0 and the domain suffix In networks that support DHCP these settings can be configured automatically Consult your network administrator for details on the settings e DNS Server Up to two DNS servers can be specified primary and secondary If the primary server is down the secondary server is used to search the host name domain name and IP address e Domain Suffix If the IP address corresponding to the domain name described in the previous paragraph is not found on the DNS server then it may be that the system is configured to use another domain name Set this other domain name as a domain suffix Up to two domain suffixes can be specified DomainSuffix1 primary and DomainSuffix2 Secondary Note e To change this menu setting you must restart the DL1720 DL1740 e When the Ethernet cable is not connected if you turn ON the power to the DL1720 DL1740 while DCHP is ON there is a possiblity of malfunction in the communications or file functions Turn DHCP OFF and restart the instrument e Configuring the TCP IP Settings of the PC Communications parameters such as the IP address must be specified also on the PC side Communications parameters are specified for each Ethernet NIC that
444. ximum and minimum values rising OFF 50 Os OFF Auto Automatic setup affects only the settings listed above All other settings remain unchanged 4 9 suoeiado uowWwoy gt 4 4 Storing and Recalling Setting Parameters Relevant Keys 0 ia aca stanrisror a A ee SEA O TRIG D Sime ENHANCED ACTION DELAY TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press SETUP 2 Press the Store Recall soft key SETUP a Initialize Auto Store Undo Setup Recall Recalling 3 After step 2 press the soft key corresponding to the memory number to be retrieved Recall 1 through Recall 3 to execute the recall operation Tur ecall 1 Recall 2 Recall 3 Store 1 tore 2 tore 3 Store Detail Storing 3 After step 2 press the soft key corresponding to the memory number to be stored Store 1 through Store 3 to execute the store operation The execution date of the store operation is also displayed rTP ecall 1 Recall 2 Recall 3 Store 1 tore 2 tore 3 Store Detail 4 Press the Store Detail soft key to display the details of the store operation To enter a comment follow the procedure described in section 4 1 Entering a Character String There is a lock switch that you can use to prevent lock overwriting of the stored data Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the lock button correspond
445. xit of the parallel pattern The parallel pattern is the AND of the channel states of each channel Trigger occurs on the width of the True False condition of the parallel pattern that is specified on multiple trigger sources The parallel pattern is the AND of the channel states of each channel or the AND of the window conditions of each channel Pulse gt T Triggers when the width above is greater than T Pulse lt T Triggers when the width above is less than T T1 lt PLS lt T2 Triggers when the width above is greater than T1 and less than T2 Time out Triggers when the width above exceeds Time Time range Tnsto1ls Time accuracy 0 5 of setting 1 ns Minimum detectable time 2 ns typical value Trigger for video signal in NTSC or PAL format Input channel must be CH1 User can select field no and line no e Conditions A and B are parallel pattern conditions that are set separately to High Low or Don t Care for each channel CH1 to CH4 for the DL1740 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 and for EXT input The trigger is activated only when the trigger conditions are met while the input applied to the trigger gate input terminal TRIG GATE IN is active Select High or Low for the active level 1 As measured immediately after calibration under standard operating conditions see section 16 11 with machine warmed 2 As measured under standard operating conditions see section 16 11 after warmed up
446. y 12 Press SELECT to select ON or OFF 13 Turn the jog shuttle to select File Name 14 Pressing SELECT displays a keyboard 15 Enter the file name according to the procedures given in section 4 1 16 Turn the jog shuttle to select Comment 17 Pressing SELECT displays a keyboard 18 Enter the file comment according to the procedures given in section 4 1 19 Press ESC to close the file name setting dialog box me o 11 7 Saving Loading Setup Data Saving the File 20 Press the Save Exec soft key to save the file to the directory indicated in Path ___ The name of the Save Exec soft key changes to Abort Canceling the Saving Operation 21 Press the Abort soft key to cancel the save operation The name of the Abort soft key changes to Save Exec Specifying the File to be Displayed in the File List Dialog Box and Viewing its Properties 22 In the File List dialog box press the Filter soft key to select SET or 23 In the File List dialog box turn the jog shuttle to select the desired file 24 Pressing the Property soft key displays information regarding the selected file 25 Pressing ESC closes the window displaying the information Loading the Setup Data Explanation IM 701710 01E Display the menu used to save load setup data according to steps 1 to 3 4 Pressing the Load soft key displays the load setting menu and the file list dialog box FILE File Item a a a Save Load Utility Setup Sele
447. y as indicated below Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for replacement parts Parts Name Recommended Replacement Period Cooling Fan 3 years Backup Battery Litium Battery 5 years IM 701710 01E Chpater 16 Specifications 16 1 Input Section Item Number of Input Channels Input Coupling Settings Input Connector Input Impedance Voltage Axis Sensitivity Setting Maximum Input Voltage DC Offset Range Max At 1 1 probe attenuation Vertical Voltage Axis Precision DC Precision Offset Axis Precision Frequency Characteristics 2 3dB point when sine wave of amplitude 4 div is input 3dB Point for AC Coupling Used Interchannel Skew with identical settings Residual Noise Interchannel Isolation Specifications 4 CH1 to CH4 or 2 CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 AC 1 MQ DC 1 MQ DC 50 Q GND BNC 1 MQ 1 0 approx 20 pF 50 Q 1 0 VSWR 1 4 or less DC to 500 MHz 1 MQ input 2 mV div to 10 V div 1 2 5 steps 50 Q input 2 mV div to 1 V div 1 2 5 steps 1 MQ input at 1 KHz or less 400 V DC AC peak 282 Vrms CATII 50 Q input 5 Vrms or less and 10 Vpeak or less 2 mV div to 50 mV div 1V 100 mV div to 500 mV div 10 V 1 V div to 10 V div 100 V 1 5 of 8 div offset voltage precision 1 of set value 0 2 mV 1 of set value 2 mV 1 of set value 20 mV 2 mV div to 50 mV div 100 mV div to 500 mV div 1 V div to 10 V div 50 Q input 1 V div to 10 mV
448. y attributes cannot be changed e Ifa file with the same name exists in the same directory renaming is not allowed e If a directory with the same name exists in the same directory the directory cannot be created e This function can not be used in conjunction with FTP server function or LPR client function e Screen image data and thumbnail display data is saved together as a file pairs If you set the designation filter of the files displayed in the file list to then process Delete Rename Copy each file individually the thumbnail function becomes disabled 11 37 WINIPa Helos 9y Wold pue o e eq Hulpeo7 pue Bulnes 2 Chpater 12 Trigger Input Trigger Output RGB Video Signal Output 12 1 External Trigger Input External Clock Input A CAUTION Never apply signals that do not meet the following specifications as this may damage the instrument due to overvoltage for example External Trigger Input Terminal IM 701710 01E Input Terminal lt DL1740 gt lt DL1720 gt maa 1MQ 20pF lt 40Vpk COEN DN On the DL1740 it is located on the rear panel lt 40Vpk 1MQ or on the DL1720 it is located on the front panel This terminal is used when an external signal is used as a trigger source See section 6 2 Specifications Connector Type Maximum Input Voltage Frequency Range Input Impedance Input Range Trigger Sensitivity Trigger Level BNC at 40 V DC AC peak or 28 V
449. you switch the linear scaling function OFF and are restored if you switch the function back on Mathematical computations operate with respect to the scaling results 5 13 SOXY e UOZIIOH pue ed1110 5 9 Using the Linear Scaling Function Explanation This function lets you apply linear scaling to the measurement values If you set this feature ON the screen displays the scaled results rather than the original measurements The scaling relationship is Y AX B where X is the measurement value and Y is the scaled value Note that you can select the dimensional unit for the scaled display Scaling Coefficient A and Offset B Range for A B 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Default A 1 0000E 00 B 0 0000E 00 Dimensional Unit Unit identifier alphanumeric string of up to four characters Displaying the Scale Value The linearly scaled values of the upper and lower limits of the vertical axis of each channel can be displayed See section 8 4 Turning ON OFF the Scale Value Display IM 701710 01E 5 10 Selecting the Timebase lt For a description of this function refer to page 1 5 gt Relevant Keys SNAP HELP RESET SELECT MENU __ Mi X Y ENU Corr mince sAvE o SH C wna Y C HORIZONTAL fv Ay EARCH O TRIG D oO oO SIMPLE ENHANCED ACTION DELAY TIME DIV The DL1720 is not equipped with an input terminal for CH3 or CH4 Operating Procedure 1 Press ACQ 2 Press the Time Ba
450. ype soft key displays the trigger type menu ENHANCED Type a a 6 Count f Hold OFf et Pattern Levely us A gt BCN Coup 1 ing 1 0 08 3 Press the Pattern soft key NHANCED A gt B N J A Delay Bf Pattern Width OR TV Hold Off uS 0 08 Setting the Status and Condition 4 Pressing the Set Pattern soft key displays a menu used to set the status and condition On the DL1720 settings for CH3 and CH4 are not displayed Clock CH ci OFJ c2 COXI c3 OKJ c4 COX Condition ENHANCED Type Pattern 6 20 IM 701710 01E 6 10 Setting the Pattern Trigger ENHANCED When Activating the Trigger Only on the Status Pattern 9 10 11 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Clock CH Pressing SELECT displays the clock channel setting menu Turn the jog shuttle to select None CH3 and CH4 are not displayed on the DL1720 Condition None Type a Set Pattern Level Pattern Coupling Press ESC and turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel on which the status is to be set Press SELECT to select H L X Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Condition Press SELECT to select Enter or Exit Go to step 14 ENHANCED When Activating the Trigger in Sync with the Clock Channel Sao 9 10 11 12 13 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Clock CH Pressing SELECT displays the clock channel setting menu Turn the jog sh
451. ys a dialog box used to set the center level window width trigger coupling and HF rejection On the DL1720 settings for CH3 and CH4 are not displayed Center Width Coupling HF Rej chi 0 0 UL 50 0 Ul_ic__ _orF_ CH2 CH3 0 0 vI 50 0 VJ DC I OFF 6 6 VL 50 0 U DC The Center and Width settings for each channel can be input directly using a USB keyboard a Window Coupling 6 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel on which to set the window center level Center 7 Press SELECT to display the center level menu 8 Turn the jog shuttle to set the center level You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET sets the window center level to 0 V 9 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to the channel on which to set the window width 10 Press SELECT to display the window width menu 11 Turn the jog shuttle to set the window width You can use the arrow keys to move between the digits Pressing RESET resets the value to the initial value Setting the Trigger Coupling and HF Rejection 12 The coupling and HF rejection settings also apply to the A gt B N trigger See section 6 8 Explanation This function sets up a window trigger for the CH1 to CH4 or CH1 to CH2 for the DL1720 input signal Trigger Condition e Width trigger IN The time during the trigger source enters the window is trigger duration OUT The time during the tr
452. ys are not displayed Selecting the Channel on which to Perform Computation 3 Press the M1 Setup soft key to display the computation dialog box 4 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Source1 Source1 Operation Source2 Scale upper C 4 0000E 00_ Unit a Smoothing _DFF __ON__ Mam Mi Displaya Mi Setup Mi Label Z Display a MZ Setup M2 Label ON C1 C2 Math ON C3 C4 Mathz 5 Pressing SELECT displays the channel menu 9 32 IM 701710 01E IM 701710 01E 9 5 Adding Subtracting and Multiplying Waveforms 6 Turn the jog shuttle to select the channel on which to perform the computation and press SELECT Operation Sourcez Scale Upper Louer Unit Smoothing _DFF __ON__ Setting the Operator 7 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Operation 8 Pressing SELECT displays the operator setting menu 9 Turn the jog shuttle to select or and press SELECT Sourcei Operation Source2 Scale Upper Lower Invert Unit Diff Smoothing Integ 4M1 Setup M1 Label Mi Displa DFF ON Selecting the Channel on which to Perform Computation 10 Similar to steps 4 to 6 set Source2 Scaling 11 Turn the jog shuttle to move the cursor to Scale 12 Press SELECT to select Auto or Manual If you select Auto go to step 17 13 Ifyou selected Manual turn the jog

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Compaq AA-RH8RD-TE User's Manual  TAFCO WINDOWS NU2-285V-W Installation Guide  J DIAGRAMMES DE CABLAGE ELECTRIOUE 8W      STR-DA1000ES / STR  Morsø 5660  Guide d`utilisation - Certibru-publli  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file